EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT - 15-0039-UT A i A R,
URKATI A.NDHEAff1VAJi BAYIORLACA
CERTIFICA"IT OF suBs,rANTIAL COMPLETION
Project- East Waler Reclamtio
a
�!_fl'Dn EARKMIDAL!EtLs eltaiail tat oaa Contract Number: LS-0039-UT
Location. fast MA,memitilen �
= _Boot!1 Rd
Contract Date, 9/1/2016 Notice to Proceed Date: 9J'26/2016
Substantial Completion Date: 4/20/2017 Warranty Expiration Date- 412012018
Consultant._Awgiagince_
�
The work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner,
Contractor, and Consultant, and the Project or specified part of the Project, as indicated above) is hereby
declared to be substantially completed on the above date.
DEiON OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
SllhslanliOl cOmPleliOn is the stage in construction when a project or deli gfated portion 1hereof is
sufficiently complete in accordance with contract documents so that ih ,Ouner cyan tac tine work or
-
portion Portion
thereoffor its intended use, items that q9ect operational integrity andfunction of the work must
be capable of continuous use.
KWP_Eagineering 7
Consultant Authorized Representative" "-Date
The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and
correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated.
Poole&,&Mt By- 7
* -
Contractor A
The Owner accepts the specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full
possession of the specified area of the Project or,April 20,2017 The responsibility for utilities, security,
and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth it,t nt ct0 cuments,
Jeff Walker
B
City of Clearwater
Auth � resentative Date '
, �R
,
PROJECT PUNCH LIST
This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it doe's not alter the responsibility of
the Contractors to Complete all the or in accordance with the Contract Documents.
No punch list- all items completed,
PROJECT ONE YEAR WARRANTY
Conftcf Section 114
f3.5 WARRANTYICORR'EC7701V PERIOD
lfwithin one year aper the date of=Substantial Completion or such !anger period of time as may be prescribed
by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
D o cum en is or by any specifs c p ro Ws ion of the Contract D o cum e n is, any Work is found to be defective,
Contractor shall promptly; without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written
instructions; (i)correct such defective Work, or,if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site
and replace it with Work that is not defective and(U)satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any dan2age
to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom...
Where defective Work(and damage to other Work resulting therefrom)has been corrected; removed or
replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for
an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily
completed.
Substantial Completion Date:--412-0/2017 Warranty Expiration Date: ---,-L/2L/2018
.........................
A copy of this signed and executed document should be provided to the following parties:
Project Owner
Project Contractor
Project Co-nsultant(if applicable)
City Engineering Construction Contracts Specialist
Project File
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
EAST WRF CLARIFIER
REHABILITATION PROJECT
(PROJECT No. 15-0039-UT)
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared for
CLEARWATER
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUI, • BAY TO BEACH
CONFORMED DOCUMENTS
JULY 2016
City of Clearwater, Florida
EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PROJECT (PROJECT No. 15- 0039 -UT)
SECTION I
SECTION II
SECTION III
SECTION IIIa
SECTION IV
SECTION IVa
APPENDIX
SECTION V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
COVER Page II Updated 2/11/2016
1
1
1
1
1 ADDENDUM NO. 1
2 for
3 EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
4 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
5 Project Number 15- 0039 -UT
6
7 DATE: August 9, 2016
8
9 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1
10
11 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned
12
13
14 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made
15 part of the above -named Bid Documents, dated July, 2016.
16
17 The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items
18 shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in
19 the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the
20 additions and revisions listed herein.
21
22 IN THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (SECTION IV)
23
24 1. 101. SCOPE, Restrictions for this project:
25
26 Reference the last sentence of the first paragraph
27 DELETE the word "EAST" and add the words NORTHEAST 5 -8
28
29 2. 101. SCOPE, 1 East Plant:
30
31 Reference the first sentence of the second to last bullet.
32 ADD the words "and inspect" after the word Clean
33
34 3. 101. SCOPE, 1 East Plant:
35
36 Reference the last bullet
37 ADD the words "the column foundation and" after the word Repair
38
39
40 IN THE SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (SECTION
41 IVA)
42
43 4. TABLE OF CONTENTS, page ii, DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
44
45 ADD SECTION 02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
46
47 5. TABLE OF CONTENTS, page ii, DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
48
Page 1 of 7
1 ADD SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
2 ADD SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3
4
5 6. SECTION 01015, CONTROL OF WORK
6
7 Add the following Section on page 01015 -6, line 14:
8
9 1.18 MAINTAIN ACCESS FOR PLANT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE
10 ACTIVITIES
11
12 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations.
13 Therefore, the Contractor will conduct the work such that access to on -line
14 equipment, equipment controls, processes, and process controls is
15 maintained at all times. Operations and maintenance activities occur or
16 can occur continuously on each clarifier, the RAS pumping station, the
17 RAS valve vault, the filter feed pumping station, and the filter feed
18 pumping station valve vault. The Contractor shall maintain access to these
19 areas that are on -line at all times. All temporary measures including
20 walkways, stairs, and bridges and materials required to meet this condition
21 during construction shall be provided, installed, maintained and removed
22 by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort shall be borne by
23 the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this operating
24 condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, shall be borne by the
25 Contractor.
26
27 7. AFTER SECTION 02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISITNG STRUCTURES,
28 PIPING, AND EQUIPEMENT PAGE 02064 -4 AND BEFORE SECTION 02221
29 EXCAVATION, GRADING, AND BACKFILL FOR PIPES PAGE 02221 -1
30
31 INSERT (1) new specification listed below:
32
33 SECTION 02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
34
35 8. AFTER SECTION 02740 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP) PAGE 02740 -8 AND
36 BEFORE SECTION 03600 GROUT PAGE 03600 -1
37
38 INSERT (2) two new specifications listed below:
39
40 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
41 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
42
43 9. SECTION 11225, CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
44
45 Add the following (3) three new paragraphs to Section 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK on page
46 11225 -2, line 14:
47
48 G. The Clarifier equipment is being procured by the City under a separate contract.
49 Delivery dates established in that contract for the equipment are as noted:
Page 2 of 7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
2 East Clarifier: Ship from Thomasville GA on Friday December 2, 2016 —
3 Expected Delivery on Monday December 5, 2016
4
5 West Clarifier: Ship on Friday January 13, 2017
6
7 The Contractor shall provide for off - loading the clarifier equipment as it arrives
8 on -site and shall immediately begin installation of the equipment. The
9 Contractor's construction schedule shall reflect these dates as critical path items.
10
11 H. The Contractor may not take the east clarifier out of service before October 28,
12 2016 or earlier if approved by the Owner. All materials and services required to
13 repair the bottom and the piping of the East clarifier, to the extent known, shall be
14 secured and onsite.
15
16 I. The scope of supply and other details of the City's procurement contract with the
17 clarifier equipment vendor are included in the Appendix and are hereby
18 incorporated into this rehabilitation contract as applicable.
19
20 10. SECTION 13630, LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21
22 Add the following to Section 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS on page 13630 -2, line 29:
23
24 C. The Systems Integrator shall hold current "Certified Programmer" status with
25 Citect. In addition the Systems Integrator shall hold current "Programmer" status
26 with Allen Bradley.
27
28 IN THE DRAWINGS
29
30 11. SHEET G -2, INDEX OF PLANS
31
32 Under the Section titled Existing Record Drawings — For Information Only
33
34 CHANGE the name of Sheet 12 to PROPOSED SITE PAVING, GRADING, &
35 DRAINAGE
36
37 12. SHEET M 1.00 EAST CLARIFIER PIPE REPAIR PLAN
38
39 CHANGE the heading for the notes section to read "NOTES FOR EAST CLARIFIER
40 AND EXISITNG GROUNDWATER REMOVAL SYSTEM
41
42 ADD "INCLUDING THE UNDERDRAIN MANHOLE" to the end of Note 3
43
44 ADD callouts with the text "NOTE 3" pointing to all components of the existing
45 groundwater collection and underdrain system
46
47 13. SHEET M 1.01 CLARIFIER MECHANICAL PLAN
48
Page 3 of 7
1 ADD the words "TYPICAL EAST AND WEST CLARIFIERS" at the end of the callout
2 note pointing at the pressure relief valves in the bottom of the east clarifier
3
4 DELETE Note 2
5
6 14. SHEET M1.02 CLARIFIER MECHANICAL SECTION AND STAIRWAY
7 DETAILS
8
9 DELETE Note 2
10
11 RE- NUMBER notes 3 and 4 to be notes 2 and 3
12
13 15. SHEET M1.05 EXISITNG EAST CLARIFIER FLOOR ELEVATIONS
14
15 ENLARGED PLAN
16 REVISE the SCALE to be 1" = 2' -0"
17
18 16. SHEET M2.02 EXISTING SCUM PUMP DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS
19
20 ADD a note and callout to the bottom picture on the left with the words "FURNISH,
21 INSTALL, OPERATE, AND MAINTAIN A TEMPORARY SCUM PUMPING AND
22 PIPING SYSTEM AS REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE EXISTING
23 SCUM PUMPING RATE IS REPORTED TO BE + 50 GPM. CONTRACTOR TO
24 VERIFY THAT PUMPING RATE"
25
26 ADD a note and callout to the DEMO PLAN with the words `BACKFILL AND
27 COMPACT THE VOID LEFT AFTER THE VALVE VAULT IS REMOVED"
28
29
30 17. SHEET I1.01 SCUM PUMP STATION CONTROLS AND BLANKET
31 DETECTOR RELOCATION PLAN
32
33 DELETE Note 9
34
35
36 18. SHEET E4.0, PARTIAL POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM
37
38 New Scum Pump Power One -Line Diagram:
39
40 • DELETE 7.5 and ADD 10 inside the scum pump motor symbol
41 • DELETE 25A and ADD 35A at the circuit breaker symbol in MCC Bucket 4E
42 • DELETE 30 and ADD 60 in Note 10 for the disconnect amp rating
43
44
45 REVISE the LOAD SUMMARY table as follows:
46 Motor (Removed) (9.08)
47 Motor (Added) 12.74
48 Total (Added) 7.65
Page 4 of 7
1
1
1
2
3
4 19. SHEET E1.0, ELEC. SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL NOTES
5
6 Under the section GENERAL NOTES ADD a new note as follows:
7
8 6. "THE ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND ALL MATERAILS AND COMPONENTS
9 SHALL MEET F.B.C. 2014 (5TH EDITION), DESIGN WIND SPEED 150 MPH,
10 EXP. D, NEC 2011"
11
12 20. SHEET S -1, GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS AND PLAN
13
14 Under the Section Titled: SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION & DEFINITION OF
15 MODIFICATIONS AT EAST CLARIFIER
16
17 Note 5, first sentence DELETE the word "PROFESSIONSL" and ADD the words
18 "REGISTERED ENGINEERING PROFESSIONAL"
19
20 21. Sheet S -1, GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS AND PLAN
21
22 In the upper right hand corner by the Sheet Name S -1 ADD the words "THIS SHEET
23 APPLIES TO THE EAST CLARIFIER AND NOT TO THE WEST CLARIFIER"
24
25 22. Sheet S -1, GENERAL NOTES, ABBREAVIATEIONS AND PLAN
26
27 Under the Section Titled MICROPILES ADD the following new note:
28
29 6. ARTESIAN CONDITIONS MAY BE ENCOUNTERED WHEN INSTALLING
30 THE MICROPILES. THE BOTTOM OF THE CLARIFIER IS AT
31 ELEVATION -6 FT AND THE POTENTIOMETRIC SURFACE IN THE
32 LIMESTONE IS ESTIMATED AT +2 FT SO THERE MAY BE UPWARD
33 FLOW POTENTIAL AS THE MICROPILES ARE INSTALLED. THE TOP OF
34 LIMESTONE IS ESTIMATED TO BE 3 TO 6 FEET BELOW THE BOTTOM
35 OF THE CLARIFIER AT THE EAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY.
36 THE MICROPILES MAY EXTEND INTO THE LIMESTONE, AND THERE
37 MAY BE POTENTIAL FOR UPWARD FLOW OF WATER. THE RATE AT
38 WHICH WATER WOULD FLOW UPWARD IS DEPENDENT ON THE
39 PERMEABILITY OF THE LIMESTONE, WHICH IS UNKNOWN AT THIS
40 SITE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING ALL
41 GROUNDWATER THAT MAY BE ENCOUNTERED AND INTERFERES
42 WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE MICROPILES.
43
44
45 23. Sheet S -2, SECTION AND DETAILS
46
47 DETAIL B Title: ADD the words "THIS DETAIL APPLIES TO BOTH CLARIFIERS"
48
49 24. Sheet S -2, SECTION AND DETAILS
Page 5 of 7
1
2 DETAIL A and DETAIL C Title: ADD the words "THIS DETAIL APPLIES TO THE
3 EAST CLARIFIER AND NOT TO THE WEST CLARIFIER"
4
5 25. Sheet S -2, SECTION AND DETAILS
6
7 SECTION 1 Title: ADD the words "THIS SECTION APPLIES TO THE EAST
8 CLARIFIER AND NOT TO THE WEST CLARIFIER"
9
10 26. Sheet S -2, SECTION AND DETAILS
11
12 DETAIL C upper right hand call out: DELETE the words "DO NOT OVERRUN" and
13 ADD the words "CORE 4 -INCH HOLES AT THE CORNERS TO AVOID
14 OVERRUN ".
15
16
17 27. SHEET L1.00, PROPOSED WELL POINT SYSTEM PLAN
18
19 ADD (3) three new notes to the TEMPORARY DEWATERING list of notes as follows:
20
21 5. GROUNDWATER DISCHARGE FROM DEWATERING OPERATIONS IS
22 NOT TO BE DIRECTED TO THE DRAINAGE SWALE THAT SURROUNDS
23 THE EAST AND NORTH QUADRANTS OF THE EAST CLARIFIER.
24
25 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEMONSTRATE THAT OPERATION OF
26 SOME COMBINATION OF THE PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY
27 DEWATERING SYSTEMS HAS THE ABILITY TO CONTROL THE
28 GROUNDWATER LEVEL. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE
29 GROUNDWATER ELEVATION MONITORING SYSTEMS THAT SHOW
30 THE CONTINUOUS GROUNDWATER LEVEL IN RESPONSE TO
31 OPERATION OF THE DEWATERING SYSTEM(S). THE GROUNDWATER
32 ELEVATION MONITORING SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EACH
33 MONITORING WELL AND SHALL BE COMPLETE WITH ELECTRONIC
34 DATA LOGGING AND REAL TIME SECURE INTERNET ACCESS FOR
35 CURRENT AND HISTORIC GROUNDWATER LEVELS. NO CLARIFIER
36 SHALL BE DRAINED UNTIL IT IS DEMONSTRATED THAT THE
37 CONTINUOUS ON -LINE MONITORING SYSTEM IS FULLY
38 OPERATIONAL AND THAT THE GROUNDWATER LEVEL CAN BE
39 CONTROLLED.
40
41 6. IT IS INTENDED THAT THE TWO DEWATERING SYSTEMS BE FULLY
42 REDUNDANT TO EACH OTHER, AND BE OPERATED CONCURRENTLY
43 BY THE CONTRACTOR, IF NECESSARY, TO CONTROL
44 GROUNDWATER. EACH SYSTEM SHALL HAVE 2 PUMPS, A DUTY
45 PUMP AND A STANDBY PUMP. EACH PUMP SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT
46 CAPACITY TO MEET THE PEAK DEMAND OF THE RESPECTIVE
47 SYSTEM.
48
49
Page 6 of 7
t
1
2 28. SHEET L2.00, PROPOSED WELL POINT SYSTEM SECTION
3
4 REVISE the callouts and text associated with PVC pipe to indicate all above ground
5 PVC pipe shall be schedule 80 and the risers shall be held tight to the clarifier wall.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 END OF ADDENDUM #1
20
21
22 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER
23 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
24 By: /s/William B. Horne, II
25 City Manager
Page 7 of 7
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
EAST WRF CLARII+'IER REHABILITATION PROJECT
CONTRACT #15- 0039 -UT
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or
purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address:
www .myClearwater.com/cityprojects, on Tuesday, July 19, 2016, until no later than close of
business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as
indicated on the Plan Room website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of the rehabilitation of two existing circular
clarifiers (east and west) at the East Water Reclamation Facility, including miscellaneous
improvements to the scum pumping system and the groundwater dewatering system.
MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held Tuesday, July 26,
2016, at 2:00 P.M., at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 1St Floor, Conference
Room 130 Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer
will be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at
the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until
1:00 P.M. on Thursday, August 11, 2016. The bids will be publicly opened in Purchasing
Conference Room 342 and read at that hour and place for EAST WRF CLARIFIER
REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT #15- 0039 -UT.
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits
and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers,
vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those
Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction category of
Wastewater/Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $1,500,000.
Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays
prior to the bid opening date. Pre - Qualification instructions may be found here:
http: / /www.myclearwater.com /gov/ depts /pwa/engin/Construction /prequal.asp It is the Contractor's
responsibility to confirm pre - qualification status prior to submitting a bid.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Alyce Benge, CPPO, Purchasing Manager
alyce.benge @myclearwater.com
SECTION I
Page 1 of 1
Updated 2/11/2016
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
1
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents
SECTION II
111 i
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3
6. CONTRACT TIME 3
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3
9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3
' 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5
13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5
15. OPENING OF BIDS 5
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7
19. BID PROTEST 7
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II i Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater
website at address: www .myclearwater.com /cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and
Plans, as indicated on the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non - refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans,
specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form and Addendums.
1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others.
2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application
package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater,
Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing
address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address) or by
phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirement information is also available on the
City of Clearwater Website at address:
www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa/ engin/Construction/prequal.asp.
Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so
two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by
the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm
pre - qualification status before a Bid Opening.
3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract
Documents.
3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the
site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents,
but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the
completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and
subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site
and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents,
may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings
but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction.
3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
SECTION II Page 1 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in
writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the
Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy
Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having
received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the
pre -bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only
information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other
interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued
by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions.
5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid Opening.
5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida.
6. CONTRACT TIME
6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V.
8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9. SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10. BID /PROPOSAL FORM
10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink
or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall
be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the
Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the
price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders
are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or
item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or
item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or
amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or
should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for
each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid
for the listed individual items.
10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice -
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name
and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed
in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to
the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office
indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will
not be accepted.
11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and
corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one
SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
to three), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business
Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form.
12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13. REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15. OPENING OF BIDS
15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City
and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement
the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work
Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General
Conditions.
17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace
and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's
policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling,
rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be
imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition
of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the
employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any
conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or
of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation .
occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse
assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community,
by any employee who is so convicted.
SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through
not (select only one) fully comply with the above
(6) Make a good faith effort to
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does /does
requirements.
18. AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies
in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit
prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct
sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be
requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience
of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor
for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to
assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and
financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and
organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best
interest of the City.
18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in
the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be
awarded to only one Contractor.
18.5. The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida
Statutes (2014), specifically to:
(a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required
by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service;
(b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions
that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not
exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law;
(c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and
(d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the
City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon
termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt
or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records
stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is
compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater.
19. BID PROTEST
19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST:
SECTION II Page 7 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract
may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not
satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this
section.
19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person
could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to
such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates
for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request
document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder,
whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon
telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific
portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been
violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should
be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she
may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response
his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest
letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3. PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of
5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City' s additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee
paid.
19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST:
In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the
solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or
until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without
delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City.
SECTION II Page 8 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders
20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit
and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater
management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices
during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface
waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment
control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment
control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction- related Best
Management Practices.
SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
1. DEFINITIONS 1
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT 5
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6
3.1. INTENT 6
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE /ERRORS OR OMISSIONS
INSURANCE 10
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT /INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE 10
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11
6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14
SECTION III i Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16
6.8. PERMITS 16
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17
6.10. EMERGENCIES 17
6.11. DRAWINGS 18
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24
7. OTHER WORK 25
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25
7.2. COORDINATION 25
8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 26
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION26
9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31
12.. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33
SECTION III ii Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33
13.5. WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 34
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 38
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41
17. MISCELLANEOUS 41
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41
17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 42
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 42
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42
19. MATERIAL USED 42
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 44
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44
22.1. GENERAL 44
SECTION 111 iii Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
22.2. EXAMPLE 46
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 46
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 46
23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46
23.3. FIXED SIGN 47
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 47
23.5. SIGN COLORING 47
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 47
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 47
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 48
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE48
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 49
SECTION III iv Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
1. DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
SECTION III Page 1 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
Day
A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
SECTION III Page 2 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D.O. T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service ".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
SECTION III Page 3 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre - construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
SECTION III Page 4 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF
INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by
this contract.
2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section
255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides
City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court.
SECTION III Page 55of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color
Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including
submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the
preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The
Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make
sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a
completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of
Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training.
2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period.
3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1. INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
SECTION III
Page 6 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well -
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the 'Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such
other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any
encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so
furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by
the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
SECTION III Page 7 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer
shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per
State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State
One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency
for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available
in local telephone directory.
4.4. REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect
and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without
the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer
whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary
changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or
relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor
is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision
of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive
stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have
been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per
SECTION III Page 8 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -
hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour.
5. BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida
Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and
payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in
effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of
time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also
furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in
the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such
sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as
Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in
Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S.
Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of
such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of
Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond
and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner
reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is
declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state
where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and
surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub-
contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City,
sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be
obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the
right to review the Contractor's deductible or self - insured retention and to require that it be
reduced or eliminated.
Specifically the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance
on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis,
then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail
following the termination or expiration of this Agreement:
The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and
umbrella/excess liability policies.
5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises
operations, products /completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising
injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one
million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate.
SECTION III Page 9 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE
Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non - owned, hired or
borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars)
combined single limit.
5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
INSURANCE
Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of
Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred
thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each
employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with
benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary
Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where
applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and
volunteers, if any.
5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY /MALPRACTICE /ERRORS OR
OMISSIONS INSURANCE
Professional Liability/Malpractice /Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the
type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million
dollars) per occurrence. If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of
coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless prior policy
was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year
either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and
with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy
provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims made coverage.
5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT /INLAND MARINE /PROPERTY
INSURANCE
If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations
under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment — Inland Marine Insurance and /or Property
Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in
the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's
(or any sub - contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property.
5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of
loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely
manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the
carrier as the project proceeds.
5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS
Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary
date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect,
the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD
SECTION III
Page 10 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the
coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when
requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all
applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or
delivered is as follows:
City of Clearwater
Engineering Department
Attn: Construction Office Specialist
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, FL 33758 -4748
1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and
Project Number.
2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non - renewal,
termination, material change or reduction in coverage.
3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non - contributory coverage for
Contractor's negligence.
4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense,
for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this
Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City
shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor
providing its defense as contemplated herein.
The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential
liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be
construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub - contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation
to provide the insurance coverage specified.
5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
SECTION III Page 11 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall
be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written
consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall
conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on
weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be
$80.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
SECTION III Page 12 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours.
Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3 -1508 regarding noise
restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without
Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or
materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per
Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at: no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include
advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute
SECTION III Page 13 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction
conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed
by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with
this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and
organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's
Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other
persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against, whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5. USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
SECTION III
Page 14 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.5.1. STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of
construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and
restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed.
6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
• Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
• Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities
shall be repaired or replaced "in- kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the
loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought.
• Sod must be restored "in- kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a
successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations,
replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be
watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust
control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restoration may be considered.
SECTION III
Page 15 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02
shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment
eligibility.
6.8. PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be
waived.
SECTION III Page 16 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other
person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any
of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10. EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
SECTION III
Page 17 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or
Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11. DRAWINGS
6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL
REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the
shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific
written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of
submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that
the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in
addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted
to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall
receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each
submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a
request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated
copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14)
consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds
for a delay claim from the Contractor.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
SECTION III Page 18 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a
number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals, per the
approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge
Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the
number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with
subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be
backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such
costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a
substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval
of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is
beyond the control of Contractor.
6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not
conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
SECTION III Page 19 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1. General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and /or
vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also
known as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As -Built Survey.
6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest
downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations,
manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the
plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of
all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also
on the profile if one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring
The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
SECTION III Page 20 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
' 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
' 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement
shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
1 6.11.2.6. Standards
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7. Other
The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1. Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes
DI
prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP
prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX
prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR
prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU
prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX
suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2. Layer Naming Definitions:
GAS
gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC
power lines and appurtenances
PHONE
telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE
cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC
curbs
WALK
sidewalk
SECTION III
Page 21 of 50
Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
WATER
water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM
storm lines and appurtenances
TREES
trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY
sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE
all fences
BLDG
buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE
driveways
EOP
edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC
signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK
top of bank
TOESLOPE
toe of slope
TOPBERM
top of berm
TOEBERM
toe of berm
SEAWALL
seawall
CONCSLAB
concrete slabs
WALL
walls, except seawall
SHORE
shoreline, water elevation
CL
centerline of road
CLD
centerline of ditch
CLS
centerline of swale
CORNER
property corners, monumentation
BENCH
benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2. Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3. Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5 °, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
SECTION III Page 22 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
6.11.4. DELIVERABLES
The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 " =20' unless
approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all
drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e -mail
address Thomas .Mahony(a,myClearwater.com.
6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND
GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14. INDEMNIFICATION
To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City,
its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands,
claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys',
witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of,
SECTION III Page 23 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii)
any negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii)
Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established
by this Agreement.
Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any
issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this
indemnification.
The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor
or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor - provided
supplies or services.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall
not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any
limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not
intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may
have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties.
6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS
The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014),
specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public
agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or
copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in
Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise
provided by law.
c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the
duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor
does not transfer the records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public
records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by
the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to
the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public
records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure
requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of
the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public
records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon
request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is
compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency.
SECTION III Page 24 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for
services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not
possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor
of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow
the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time.
f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply
with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract
provisions in accordance with the contract.
g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a
reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records
relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award
against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney
fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with
the public records request within a reasonable time; and
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written
notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not
complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of
public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with
the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or
certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery,
which may be in an electronic format.
j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the
notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
7. OTHER WORK
7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and
perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
7.2. COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
SECTION III Page 25 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION 111 — General Conditions
8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The
duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
SECTION III Page 26 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractor.
SECTION III Page 27 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
10. CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
SECTION III Page 28 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
• changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of
acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or
correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or
(iii) agreed to by the parties;
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
• changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any
written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions
on Disputes;
• provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from
any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and
applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on
the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing
the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
SECTION III - Page 29 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full- unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment
and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand -by.
4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE
ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
SECTION III
Page 30 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
SECTION III
Page 31 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL
OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work,
SECTION III Page 32 of 50 ` Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be- defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
SECTION 111 Page 33 of 50 " Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5. WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by
Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner' s
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
SECTION III Page 34 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described
herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required
by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the
Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in
the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed
including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount
of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector
overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of
the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be
acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site
marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
SECTION III
Page 35 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires
review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment
will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment
is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the
reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in
writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper.
In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any
payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because:
(i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's
SECTION III Page 36 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated
in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay
in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative
or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such
part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
access thereto.
14.5. FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which
this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will
produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and
assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list.
SECTION III Page 37 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the
contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract.
Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or
remedy such deficiencies.
14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As- built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and
(ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the
Contract Documents.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for
such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative
will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as
SECTION III Page 38 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay
contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to
the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
SECTION III Page 39 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the
Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not
intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract
SECTION III Page 40 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17. MISCELLANEOUS
17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2. GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any
error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
SECTION III
Page 41 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
17.6. RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers
and /or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike
Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email:
Michael.Pryor@myClearwater.com.
18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
19. MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical
Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an
inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by
addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in
accordance with the Engineer /Architect's interpretation.
21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP)
21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS
The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the
Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner
is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other
applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's
Work. Owner - purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be
administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the
actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales
SECTION III Page 42 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the
Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any
other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract
amount shall be used.
Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value
and /or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner
an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration
as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix).
21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK
Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer
Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP
materials or equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner,
and a copy sent to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's
possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or
equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or
delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor.
21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or
equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities,
verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and
obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and
acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and
Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements
normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The
Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or
equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all
claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the
action of the Contractor.
As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect
all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The
Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by
documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This
documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and /or an invoice from the supplier conforming to
the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to
the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials.
Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor.
The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and
determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are
patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or
equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers
defective or non - conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the
SECTION III Page 43 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the
Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming
condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue
delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and
otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP
materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by
performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner,
resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project,
including liquidated damages.
21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION
The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into
Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The
Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered
into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which
have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for
all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair,
maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the
appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor.
The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and
penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that
purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to
sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is
no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters
that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit,
assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and
relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to
closing out the contract/Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed
the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in
excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor.
22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF
CONSTRUCTION
22.1. GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and /or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and /or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
SECTION III Page 44 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to
maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
SECTION III Page 45 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
22.2. EXAMPLE
CITY LOGO
of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and /or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right -of -way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, SCOPE OF WORK.
23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
SECTION III Page 46 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3. FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 -
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic
barricade.
23.5. SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager /City Representative
shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor.
23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SECTION III Page 47 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
1
SECTION III — General Conditions
23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
6'
<PROJECT NAME>
< CONTRACT NUMBER>
<DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT
N CONTRACTOR:
a
COMPLETION DATE.
FUNDING.
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.
i
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL •SAY TO BEACH
24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to
commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the
work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per
calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued
on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to
perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that
in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay
SECTION III Page 48 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each
eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS
OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION
FORM
Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum
Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and
may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of
Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million
($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or
response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or
response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for
purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or
Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling,
possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce.
The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with
all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response.
Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City
of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed
either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed
on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been
placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business
operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then
the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission
of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the
previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of
Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist:
A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must
occur):
1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011.
2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July
1, 2011.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
contract with the company or entity.
SECTION III Page 49 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION III — General Conditions
4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal
plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any
new scrutinized business operations.
B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria:
1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012.
2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
contract with the company or entity.
4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal
plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new
business operations in Cuba or Syria.
Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a
contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than
one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the
above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the
contract is offered.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies
as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form.
See Section V of the Contract for Certification Form to be executed and submitted with the
Bid/Proposal Form.
SECTION III Page 50 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION IIIA
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
These Supplemental General Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All
provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms
used in these Supplemental General Conditions have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions.
1. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, delete the definition for Contract Time in its entirety and
insert the following in its place:
Contract Time - The number of days or the dates stated in the Contract to: (i) achieve Milestones,
if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) achieve Final Completion.
2. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, add the following new paragraph:
Final Completion — The time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the Work, including all "punch list" items, is fully and finally completed in a good
and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Contract Documents; is free of all defects and
deficiencies; all required final governmental inspections and approvals have been obtained; and
all final paperwork, including that necessary to prepare a Final Change Order (if required), has
been submitted and approved.
3. Delete Paragraph 2.3 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE
PROJECT
The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. The
Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No
Work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. A Notice
to Proceed may be issued at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. A
Notice to Proceed will not be issued prior to the Contractor providing the City a certified copy of
the recorded payment and performance bond, pursuant to §255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes.
4. In Paragraph 6.1, delete the last sentence in the 4th paragraph and insert the following in
its place:
The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be the City's actual cost per hour, not to exceed
$120 per hour. When inspection is being provided by the Engineer or a consultant to the City, the
cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be 3.0 times the Engineer's or consultant's direct
technical labor cost.
Section IIIA.docx Page 1 of 4 6/16/2014
5. In Paragraph 6.11.1, delete the first full sentence of the first paragraph and insert the
following in its place:
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples as called for in the Technical Specifications,
and all other items specified to be submitted in the Division 1 specifications, to Engineer for review
as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. Items required to be
submitted in accordance with Division 1 shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements
for Shop Drawings as specified in the General Requirements.
6. Delete the last paragraph in Paragraph 6.11.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its
place:
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy. Owner
reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times
a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any first time submittals that account for a number greater than
fifty (50), not to exceed $400 each. Contractor may combine or group similar items into a single
submittal, such as valves or valve O &M manuals, or may group submittals pertaining to a single
item into a single submittal, such as a valve shop drawing and the corresponding O &M manual.
Contractor shall not combine unrelated items into a single submittal, such as valves and concrete
mix. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical
labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any re- submittals, or submittals requiring
confirmation, that account for a number greater than ten (10), not to exceed a cost of $300 each.
In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's
costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless
the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. Said costs shall be Engineer's
actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier, not to exceed $400 each.
7. Delete Paragraph 24 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
24 CONTRACT TIMES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
24.1 Time is of the Essence
24.1.1 It is mutually agreed between the parties that time is of the essence. All Contract Time(s)
for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, Final Completion and readiness for final payment
as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
24.2 Substantial Completion
24.2.1 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within 153 days from the date
on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed.
24.2.2 The term Substantial Completion means the time at which the Work has progressed to the
point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work is otherwise sufficiently complete in accordance
with the Contract Documents, so that the . Work can be utilized for the purposes for which it is
Section IIIA.docx Page 2 of 4 6/16/2014
1
1
1
1
1
intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or
part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
24.3 Final Completion
24.3.1 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the Work within 183 days from the date on
which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed.
24.4 Liquidated Damages
24.4.1 Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Contract and that Owner
will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified herein, plus any
extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties
also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration
proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly,
instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for
delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay as follows:
24.4.2 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the time
specified above, Contractor shall be required to pay Owner the sum as specified in the Contract
per day for each and every calendar day elapsing after the time specified above, until the Contractor
has achieved Substantial Completion.
24.4.3 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Final Completion of the Work within the time
specified above, the Owner shall also have the right to:
A. Terminate the Contractor without further notice;
B. Complete any of the remaining items and backcharge Contractor for all costs incurred,
and exercise all other rights and remedies available at law or in equity.
Section IIIA.docx Page 3 of 4 6/16/2014
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Section IIIA.docx Page 4 of 4 6/16/2014
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Content:
100 SERIES: GENERAL 1
101. SCOPE OF WORK 1
102. FIELD ENGINEERING 3
102 -1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 3
102 -2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 3
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 3
103 -1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 4
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 4
105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 4
105 -1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING 4
105 -2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 4
105 -3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 4
105 -4. EQUIPMENT 5
105 -5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 5
105 -6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 5
105 -7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 5
105 -8. LIGHTING 5
105 -9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 6
105 -10. VIDEO LOG /INDEX 6
105 -11. AREA OF COVERAGE 6
105 -12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 6
106. STREET SIGNS 6
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 6
107 -1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 6
107 -2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7
107 -3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 7
107 -4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 8
107 -5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 9
107 -6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 9
107 -7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 9
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 9
108 -1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 9
108 -2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 10
109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 10
109 -1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 10
109 -2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 10
109 -3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 11
SECTION IV i Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
109 -4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 11
109 -5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 11
109 -6. POSTING 11
109 -7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 11
200 SERIES: SITEWORK 12
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 12
202. OBSTRUCTIONS 13
203. DEWATERING 13
203 -1. GENERAL 13
203 -2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 13
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 14
204 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 14
204 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 14
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 14
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 15
206 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 15
206 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 15
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 15
207 -1. GENERAL 15
207 -2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 15
207 -3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 16
207 -4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 16
207 -5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 16
207 -6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 16
207 -7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 16
207 -8. MAINTENANCE 16
207 -9. COMPLIANCE 17
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH
EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 17
208 -1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 17
208 -2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 17
208 -3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 17
208 -4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 17
208 -5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 18
208 -6. RIP -RAP 18
208 -7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 18
300 SERIES: MATERIALS 19
301. CONCRETE 19
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 19
302 -1. EXCAVATION 19
302 -2. FORMS 19
303. REINFORCEMENT 19
SECTION IV ii Updated 2/11/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
303 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 20
304. BACKFILL 20
304 -1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 20
304 -2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 20
305. RIPRAP 21
305 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 21
305 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 22
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 23
401. SANITARY MANHOLES 23
401 -1. BUILT UP TYPE 23
401 -2. PRECAST TYPE 23
401 -3. DROP MANHOLES 24
401 -4. FRAMES AND COVERS 24
401 -5. MANHOLE COATINGS 24
401 -6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 24
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 24
402 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 24
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 25
403 -1. MATERIALS 25
403 -2. INSTALLATION 25
403 -3. TESTING 26
403 -4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 27
404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 27
404 -1. INTENT 27
404 -2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 27
404 -3. MATERIALS 27
404 -4. CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 28
404 -5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 29
404 -6. LINER INSTALLATION 30
404 -7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 30
404 -8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 30
404 -9. PAYMENT 30
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 31
405 -1. SCOPE AND INTENT 31
405 -2. PAYMENT 31
405 -3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 31
405 -4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 32
405 -5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 33
405 -6. GROUTING MIX 33
405 -7. LINER MIX 33
405 -8. WATER 34
405 -9. OTHER MATERIALS 34
405 -10. EQUIPMENT 34
405 -11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 35
SECTION IV iii Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
405 -12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 36
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE
LINES AND APPURTENANCES 42
501. SCOPE 42
502. MATERIALS 42
502 -1. GENERAL 42
502 -2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 42
502 -3. GATE VALVES 44
502 -4. VALVE BOXES 45
502 -5. HYDRANTS 45
502 -6. SERVICE SADDLES 46
502 -7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 46
502 -8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 47
502 -9. TAPPING SLEEVES 47
502 -10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 47
503. CONSTRUCTION 47
503 -1. MATERIAL HANDLING 47
503 -2. PIPE LAYING 48
503 -3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 49
503 -4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 50
504. TESTS 50
504 -1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 50
504 -2. NOTICE OF TEST 51
505. STERILIZATION 51
505 -1. STERILIZING AGENT 51
505 -2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 51
505 -3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 51
505 -4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 51
505 -5. BACTERIAL TESTS 51
506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 52
506 -1. GENERAL 52
506 -2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 52
506 -3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 53
506 -4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS 53
506 -5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 53
600 SERIES: STORMWATER 54
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 54
601 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 54
602. UNDERDRAINS 54
602 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 54
602 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 55
SECTION IV iv Updated 2/11/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
603. STORM SEWERS 55
603 -1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 55
603 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 56
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES 56
604 -1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 56
604 -2. PRECAST TYPE 57
604 -3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 57
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 57
605 -1. MATERIAL 57
605 -2. PERFORMANCE 58
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 60
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS,
SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 60
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 60
702 -1. BASE 60
702 -2. SUBGRADE 62
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 63
703 -1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 63
703 -2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE 63
703 -3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 64
703 -4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 64
703 -5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 64
703 -6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 64
703 -7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 65
703 -8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 65
703 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66
703 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 66
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 67
705 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67
705 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67
706. CONCRETE CURBS 67
706 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67
706 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 68
707 -1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 68
707 -2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 68
707 -3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 68
707 -4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 68
707 -5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 68
708. MILLING OPERATIONS 69
SECTION IV v Updated 2/11/2016
SECTION IV - Technical Specifications
708 -1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 69
708 -2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 69
708 -3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 70
708 -4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 70
708 -5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 70
708 -6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 70
708 -7. TYPES OF MILLING 70
708 -8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 70
708 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 71
708 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 71
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 72
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 72
801 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72
802. SIGNING AND MARKING 72
802 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 73
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 73
803 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 73
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 74
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 74
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 74
902 -1. IRRIGATION 74
902 -2. LANDSCAPE 84
903. SODDING 98
904. SEEDING 99
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 99
905 -1. SCOPE 99
905 -2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 100
905 -3. WORK METHODS 100
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 102
907. COMPLETION OF WORK 102
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 102
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 103
910. TREE PROTECTION 103
910 -1. TREE BARRICADES 103
910 -2. ROOT PRUNING 104
910 -3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 105
SECTION IV vi Updated 2/11/2016
1
1
1
1
1
t
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
100 SERIES: GENERAL
101. SCOPE OF WORK
Project Name: EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT
Project Number: 15- 0039 -UT
Scope of Work:
The work consists of rehabilitating two existing circular clarifiers (east and west) and associated
equipment and work at the City's East Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) as described herein.
Restrictions for this Project:
All work associated with this project is to be performed at the City of Clearwater's East WRF as
part of an overall program to rehabilitate the clarifiers in all of the City's WRFs. The work for this
project involves the East WRF Clarifiers east and west, scum pumping equipment, relocating
existing sludge blanket level detector instrumentation for each clarifier, and new telescopic valves
in the RAS structure. The Contractor shall disregard any and all references to the Northeast WRF
Clarifiers 1 -4, the Marshall Street WRF, and the Northeast 5 -8 Plant WRF.
The Owner is purchasing the Clarifier Equipment identified in Section 11225, under a separate
contract. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery of the equipment, startup, testing, and training
for the new clarifier mechanisms between the City and the equipment supplier. The contractor
shall install the new equipment in the appropriate tanks.
The East clarifier is to be rehabilitated first. Prior to the East clarifier rehabilitation, the bottom
slab of that tank shall be repaired. The bottom slab repair procedure is described in the structural
drawings.
The Contractor shall perform and coordinate shop drawing submittal, review, and approval,
ordering and scheduling, installation and startup for all other equipment and work as specified,
and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals necessary for the
proper completion of the work included in the particular specification section.
1. East Plant
• Replace the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports,
the skimmer arms, the drives, and the weirs on both clarifiers.
• Replace all rotating, mechanical, and structural equipment in both clarifiers including the
weirs weir anchors, scum baffles, scum baffle supports and scum baffle support anchors.
• Replace the walkway bridge center access platform, and handrail on the each clarifier.
• Replace and relocate the scum pump and scum pump piping. Modify the existing scum
wet well. Remove the existing scum pump discharge valve box and abandon the west scum
force main. Remove and replace the existing east scum force main. Furnish, install,
operate, and maintain a temporary scum pumping and piping system as required.
SECTION IV
Page 1 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• Furnish and install new clarifier influent, effluent, and gravity drain valves on each clarifier.
Abandon the existing influent, effluent, and drain valves in the open position. Take
precautions to prevent damage to the plant perimeter wall and the clarifier tank located
near this valve. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages by excavating and
repairing the drain valves.
• Replace both RAS telescoping valves.
• Replace ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier.
• Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to the new bridge for scum control.
• Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform.
• Retrofit the existing scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls for each clarifier
to the rehabilitated clarifiers.
• Relocate two existing ultrasonic sludge blanket level detectors to the new clarifier bridges.
• Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a temporary and a permanent groundwater
dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while
empty and during all excavations. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages
caused by buoyant tanks.
• Clean and inspect the existing groundwater dewatering piping and manholes. Clean and
check the pipes under the east clarifier for leaks and repair the pipes by CIPP if found to
be leaking.
• Repair the column foundation and the bottom slab of the east clarifier.
2. Project Sign
The Contractor shall provide 1 fixed project sign(s) as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE
23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the
beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval.
Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's
schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall provide one (1) fixed project sign as described in SECTION III,
ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined
at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for
approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to
the Contractor's schedule of work.
3. Project Contract Period
The Contract Period /Contract Times shall be as specified in Section IIIA.
SECTION IV Page 2 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
t
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
102. FIELD ENGINEERING
102 -1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service
required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to
locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the
construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required
to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed
professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3)
complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in
Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
102 -1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall
preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent
property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of
construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land
Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida.
102 -1.2. LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
102 -2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be
responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes
used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer,
will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is
$100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer
prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2
of these Contract Documents.
103. DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article
1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply.
SECTION IV
Page 3 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the
estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of
calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any
responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities
nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of
quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining
thereto.
103 -1. REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local
or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted
and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is
referenced for the same task.
Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not
covered by City's Standards and Specifications.
104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged
in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway
or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used,
and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the
Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
105 -1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO
RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements,
rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of
pre - construction conditions.
105 -2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
105 -3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio /video
recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre- construction color audio /video recording documentation.
SECTION IV Page 4 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
105-4. EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio /video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate
colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio
portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper
volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio /video
coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage
shall be obtained by walking.
105 -5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording,
exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer
orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description
of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall
also be free from any conversations.
105 -6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date
and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed
periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number,
direction of travel and the. viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme
upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be
sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In
addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video
level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted
to maximize picture quality.
105 -7. VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly
visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the
proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances
for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not
exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during
the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
105 -8. LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
SECTION IV Page 5 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016,
CONFORMED
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those
subjects.
105 -9. SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to
the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence.
The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not
exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute.
105 -10. VIDEO LOG /INDEX
All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and
project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various
segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of
easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers,
engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date.
105 -11. AREA OF COVERAGE
Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes,
landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the
area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or
defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at
any one time.
105 -12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
106. STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty -four (24)
hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
107 -1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE
TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic
control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard
SECTION IV
Page 6 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
107 -2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits
issued by Pinellas County and /or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project,
incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic
Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management
Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department
of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most
recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel
regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans.
107 -2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the
driver proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision:
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic
control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours
shall be provided by appropriate signs."
Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision
FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102 -5 Traffic Control, 102 -5.1 Standards, are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans.
107 -3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local
SECTION IV Page 7 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer.
107 -3.1. ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
107 - 3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
107 -3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL
COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
107 - 3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and
potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
107 -3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
107 - 3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C -View Release
107 -3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS
107 - 3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days.
107 -4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
(727) 562 -4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control
plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
SECTION IV Page 8 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
107 -5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control
devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make
known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
107 -6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction
costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise.
107 -7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety
Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation.
This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these
Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor
will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty -four (24) hour per day basis and
shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic
control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed
to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor
shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty -four (24) hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or
to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be
grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated
Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary
suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to
be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
108 -1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the
following options:
Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded.
SECTION IV Page 9 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages
up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the
following table.
IRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
VOLTAGE
(nominal, kV, alternating current)
MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
(feet)
Up to 50
10
Over 50 to 200
15
Over 200 to 350
20
Over 350 to 500
25
Over 500 to 750
35
Over 750 to 1,000
45
Over 1,000
(as established by the utility owner /operator
or registered professional engineer who is a
qualified person with respect to electric
power transmission and distribution)
Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200
means up to and including 200kV.
109. PROJECT WEB PAGES
109 -1. WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current
City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information
as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall
consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project
Web Pages.
109 -2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508
guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
SECTION IV
Page 10 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
http: / /www.section508. gov/
In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images,
CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
109 -3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel
and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here,
with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space.
The logo is approved for use by City departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without
the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office.
Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public Communications.
109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should
be posted to the Project Web Pages.
109 -5. INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent
back to the City regarding the Project.
109 -6. POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
109 -7. WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster for posting.
SECTION IV
Page 11 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
200 SERIES: SITEWORK
201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining
the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The
Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of
all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these
plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency
safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other
similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the
OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these
OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation
if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not
conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide
the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's
work at the Contractor's expense.
The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor
is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety
requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to
complete the project.
Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified.
For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6 ") wider on each side
than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be
laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow
the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
SECTION IV
Page 12 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
202. OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any
survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before
removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a
registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed
to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved
means.
203. DEWATERING
203 -1. GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry ".
The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work,
using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation
and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and
reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the
pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow
in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be
required to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer.
Where possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering
plan must be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case
of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
203 -2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
203 -2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE
The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit
for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance
with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62- 621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced
groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It
shall include site - specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and
disposal methods. The City will field- inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction.
SECTION IV
Page 13 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016,
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes,
structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the
Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off -site at their expense. The limits and depths of
the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
204 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by
either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of
Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the
removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material.
204 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools,
labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of
the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross
diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service
connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED
Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW
Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE
Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE
Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water
SAFETY GREEN
Sewer Systems
LAVENDER
Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines
SECTION IV
Page 14 of 106
Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
WHITE
Proposed Excavation
PINK
Temporary Survey Markings
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be six inch (6 ") x three inch (3 ") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road
and vertical curb shall be four inch (4 ") x two inch (2 ") and be placed on the curb face.
206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take
ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State
and Federal Requirements.
206 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
206 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
207 -1. GENERAL
Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor
shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion
and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E &SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater
Standard Indices.
207 -2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida
Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel
working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor
shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of training and
SECTION IV
Page 15 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre - Construction
Meeting.
207 -3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches
such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within
sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion
of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original
site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL
STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no
case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
207 -5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and
Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E &SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater
Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation.
207 -6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
207 -7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with
the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and,
wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the
uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream,
channel, road ditch or waterway.
207 -8. MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and /or repaired as required.
SECTION IV
Page 16 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
207 -9. COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and /or more stringent
enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ".
208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND
OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES.
Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of
the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion
control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are
necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part
of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed
and maintained in a safe condition at all times.
208 -1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS
Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with
a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high
water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a
vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and
maintains the established shoreline.
208 -2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION
The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed
4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing -from the
adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required
to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet
N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and
replaced to their current height.
208 -3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD
OF THE CCL
Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by
regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal
construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department
of environmental protection.
208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL
The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the
following conditions:
(a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design.
(b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the
original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location.
SECTION IV
Page 17 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
(c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb.
(d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the
seawall behind the new seawall is removed.
(e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed.
(f) The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line.
(g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the
property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive,
and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier
construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the
original seawall slab.
208 -5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post -
construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not
alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement.
208 -6. RIP -RAP
On all natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired
seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave
energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide
habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls
and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than
50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel.
208 -7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL
A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities,
including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all
portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line.
SECTION IV
Page 18 of 106 - Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
300 SERIES: MATERIALS
301. CONCRETE
The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty -four (24)
hours in advance of all concrete placement.
Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to:
All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and
Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete
Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have
fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at twenty -eight
(28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate
shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump
for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3 ") to five inches (5 "), except when admixtures
or special placement considerations are required.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion.
Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards
(5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28
days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to
provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need
for removal, and compensation or denial thereof.
302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
302 -1. EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point
six inches (6 ") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed.
302 -2. FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal
only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission
from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions
required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength
when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing.
303. REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements ofAASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements ofAASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall
SECTION IV Page 19 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016.
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77
requirements.
303 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
304. BACKFILL
304 -1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL
Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the
excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall
be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard
fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar
material.
Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A -1 soil meeting AASHTO M145.
Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8 ") in thickness and shall
be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro- hammer
shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the
sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12 ") above the
pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable
fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications.
Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be
effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's
specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to
make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D
filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or
ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends.
Where new cast -in -place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified
twenty -eight (28) days compressive strength occurs.
Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and
compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet
(4') above the top of the pipe or culvert.
The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra
dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or
lump sum price for the item of the work specified.
304 -2. TESTING AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved
by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by
SECTION IV • Page 20 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The
Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re- inspection services.
Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be
compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or
ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation.
Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of
95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D -698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be
performed up to the proposed finished grade.
Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by
performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch
(8 ") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density
testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using
nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight- volume methods. If the weight - volume
method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556)
or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction
effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the
location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all
equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing.
Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill
or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe /culvert connecting two (2) successive structures
whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's
Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four
(4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8 ") lift.
Testing.which indicates that unacceptable material has`been incorporated into the backfill, or that
insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the
limits of the unacceptable backfill.
Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable
backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to
determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's
Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional
locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional
testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate
limits of unacceptable backfill.
305. RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans.
The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
305 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons.
SECTION IV Page 21 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
305 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand - cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing
and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No
payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap.
SECTION IV Page 22 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER
401. SANITARY MANHOLES
401 -1. BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings.
Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of
adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a
radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly.
Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete
manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer
pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches (24 ").
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches
(24 ").
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2 ") of
mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher
course.
401 -2. PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five
inches (5 "). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall
be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being
sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system
shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
SECTION IV Page 23 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches
(5 ") thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
401 -2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703 -7, Asphaltic Concrete —
Adjustment of Manholes.
401 -3. DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with
or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301.
401 -5. MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal.
The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams
Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or
PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm).
401 -6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor -N -Seal® or approved water stop coupling.
402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER
STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by
the Engineer.
402 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
SECTION IV Page 24 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
403 -1. MATERIALS
403 -1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35.
Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length
of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20').
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings
for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main
except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall
be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical
Specifications Article 501. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property
line.
403 -1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for
water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation
shall be rejected.
403 -2. INSTALLATION
403 -2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended
practices contained in ASTM D 2321.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8 ") to twelve inches (12 ") on each side) allowing
working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable
sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfi ll and compaction will not disturb
compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation
of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water.
SECTION IV Page 25 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or
misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2 ") diameter
aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
403 -2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
403 -3. TESTING
403 -3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may
be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above
groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head
of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water
table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall
the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or
exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the
Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by
uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by
the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found
to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains
to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance.
Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5 %) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be
cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or
all sections of the line.
403 -3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described
in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
SECTION IV -Page 26 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT
403 -4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment
shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the
property line.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill
and grading.
403 -4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these
Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
404 -1. INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8 ") to
twelve inch (12 ") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless,
continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
404 -2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER
ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor
prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and
form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer.
404 -3. MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from
the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have
SECTION IV Page 27 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property
values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material
Property
ASTM Method
Value
HDPE
HDPE
Tensile Strength
D 638
3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus
E= 113,000 psi
Impact Strength
D 256 A
3.0 ft -lb /in
Flexure Modulus
E= 136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff.
c =0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance
with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous
throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults.
The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from
the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may
at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above
requirements.
Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior
to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or liner system approval must be
received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids.
404 -4. CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer
from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control
the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's
treatment plants.
SECTION IV Page 28 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
404 -5. TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed,
all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as
specified below.
404 -5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION
This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum
requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently
using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV
Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor -
provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct
synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database.
404 -5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND
REQUIREMENTS
The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats
to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and /or external hard
drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers.
404 -5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS
Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4
format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data
linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to
the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video
record in real -time.
The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES
standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program
(Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo-
database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer
Nodes.
The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or
storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related
attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing
data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single
database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data
gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore,
all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects.
404 -5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION
The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The
synch process should have built -in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to
SECTION IV Page 29 of,106. Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into
a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation.
404 -6. LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
404 -7. LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users
when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers
with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
404 -8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup
occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property
damage costs and claims.
404 -9. PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of
manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
SECTION IV Page 30 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
405 -1. SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these
specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids
and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will
submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be
met.
405 -2. PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed
liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment
will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal;
Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill;
Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe
extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and
grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work
as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay
item, per linear foot of liner.
405 -3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
405 -3.1. MATERIALS
405 - 3.1.1. LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements ofASTM D 3753.
405 - 3.1.2. MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3)
parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
405- 3.1.3. GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
SECTION IV
Page 31 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405 -3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal
of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside
of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible.
Pour six inches (6 ") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure
an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal
the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout.
Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick ,to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway
Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces ".
405 -4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the
Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious
liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2 ") thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
SECTION IV Page 32 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two
(2) coat application.
405 -4.1. MATERIALS
405 - 4.1.1. PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and
shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C -952)
4. Cement
5. Density, when applied
28 days, 150 psi
Sulfate resistant
105 +/- 5 pcf
405 -5. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
405 -6. GROUTING MIX
Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
twenty -eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi.
405 -7. LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces
and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty -eight (28) days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight
shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic
foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one-
SECTION IV Page 33 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
half inch (1/2 ") to five - eighths inch (5/8 ") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products
shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to
the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds
per cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to
108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one -half inch (1/2 ") in
length nor greater than five- eighths inch (5/8 ") in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any
heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat
rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be
spray applied to assure a minimum of one -half inch (1/2 ") thickness after troweling or brush
finishing to a relatively smooth finish.
405 -8. WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
405 -9. OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
405 -10. EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the
hydraulic system and air compressor.
SECTION IV Page 34 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
405 -11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405 -11.1. PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and
to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and /or scraper. Fill any large
voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
405 -11.2. MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the
Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all
materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare
another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without
interruption until each application is complete.
405 -11.3. SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks,
crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The
light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the
first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be
fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application
made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one -half inch (1/2 "). The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks.
Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty -four (24) hours
have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the
edge of the invert being no less than one -half inch (1/2 "). The wall bench intersection shall be
rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall
have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
SECTION IV Page 35 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405 -11.4. PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2 ") cubes may be prepared each
day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the
Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C
109.
405 -11.5. CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
405 -11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10 ") of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum
to drop to nine inches (9 "). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds
for forty -eight inch (48 ") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60 "), and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy -two inch (72 ") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
405 -12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER
PRODUCT SYSTEM
405 -12.1. SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration.
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and /or
b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one -half inch (1/2 ")
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils
SECTION IV Page 36 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405 -12.2. MATERIALS
405 - 12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have
the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
1 -3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
405 - 12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and
voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86
Bonding Strength 250 -300 psi
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of
manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412
Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042
Toxicity Non Toxic
405 - 12.2.3. WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
SECTION IV
Page 37. of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties
are as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.1x10 ^ -10 cm /sec to
7.6x10 " -11 cm /sec
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
405 - 12.2.4. CEMENT LINING
A self - bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement
12 Hrs
24 Hrs
7 Days
28 Days
Astm C 495
Compressive Strength, Psi
7000
11000
12000
13000
Astm C 293
Flexural Strength, Psi
1000
1500
1800
2000
Astm C 596
Shrinkage At 90% Humidity
--
<0.04
<0.06
<0.08
Astm C 666
Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle
No Damage
Astm C 990
Pull - Out Strength
200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457
Air Void Content (7 Days)
3%
Astm C 497
Porosity /Adsorption Test
4 - 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty -four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees
Fahrenheit.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2 "), but no greater than two inches (2 ").
It will have a dark grey color.
405 - 12.2.5. EPDXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils.
This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface,
including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids,
can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes.
Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
SECTION IV Page 38 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Pot Life, hrs 1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20
Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
405 - 12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet
Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %),
Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil,
Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others.
405 -12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
405 - 12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and /or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required
by client.)
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and /or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step
7) to cement lining.
405 - 12.3.2. PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs
shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any
loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines
and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens.
SECTION IV Page 39 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405 - 12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks
and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization.
405 - 12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill five- eighths inch (5/8 ") holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zed fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
405 - 12.3.5. WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
405 - 12.3.6. CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2 ") (and no more than two
inches (2 ")) has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a twenty -four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
405 - 12.3.7. EPDXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six
(6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
SECTION IV Page 40 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
405 - 12.3.8. CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
405 - 12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10 ") of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum
to drop to nine inches (9 "). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds
for a forty eight inch (48 ") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety
(90) seconds for seventy -two inch (72 ") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test,
necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests
shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
405 - 12.3.10. WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
SECTION IV Page 41 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER
MAINS, FIRE LINES AND
APPURTENANCES
501. SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfflling and clean up.
502. MATERIALS
502 -1. GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
502 -2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
502 -2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size
Class
Thickness
(In.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
4"
51
0.26
350
6"
50
0.25
350
8"
50
0.27
350
12"
50
0.31
350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 104/A21.4 80 or latest revision.
SECTION IV
Page 42 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the
main to the backflow preventer.
502 -2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4 ") through eight inch (8 ") shall be in accordance with
ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible
for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size
Dimension Ratio
(OD /Thick.)
Rated Water Working Pressure
(PSI)
Laying Length
(Ft)
4
18
150
20
6
18
150
20
8
18
150
20
Pipe larger than eight inch (8 ") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require
the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4 ") through eight inch (8 ") when needed due to laying
conditions or usage.
The bell of four inch (4 ") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid
cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A. W.G.
solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18 ")
between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2 ") PVC
pipe to twelve inches (12 ") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2 ") PVC
pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2 ") PVC pipe shall be
plugged with a two inch (2 ") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous
with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is
to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
1 502 -2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS
1
1
1
Fitting from four inch (4 ") through sixteen inch (16 ") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in
accordance with ANSUAWWA C 153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets
shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI /AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure
rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with
requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSIAWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA
SECTION IV Page A3 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA)
manufacture will be acceptable.
502 -2.4. RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical
restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be
restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants
shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors.
502 -2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by
the Engineer.
502 -3. GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4 ") and larger, buried in earth
shall be equipped with two inch (2 ") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall
be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening
for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than
150 psi cold water, non - shock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so
supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch (2 ") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three Inch (3 ") diameter are not allowed.
Gate Valves, four inch (4 ") to sixteen inch (16 ") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate
valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard
Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential
pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main,
corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0-ring bonnet seal with epoxy
coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.
Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16 ") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA.
These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening
unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped
SECTION IV Page 44 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016 -
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers
and valved by -pass.
502-4. VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron.
No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three -piece
valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided
where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be
included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for
potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed
water valve boxes and pad detail.
502 -5. HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B -84 -B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections
with the break flange located approximately two inches (2 ") above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts are not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1 -1/2 ") pentagon nut.
SECTION IV Page 45 of 106 • Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0 -ring seals or
threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0-
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6 ") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5 -1/4 ") valve opening, and shall be a left
hand operation to open.
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2 -1/2 ") hose nozzles and one (1) four
and one half inch (4 -1/2 ") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National
Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications.
18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the
hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement
of the hydrant.
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be
shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
502 -6. SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4 ") P.V.C. water main. The largest
service connection allowable on four inch (4 ") main shall be one and one half inch (1- 1/2 ").
Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2 ") service connections to six inch (6 ") and larger
mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron
with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps.
502 -7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and
no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory
material shall be used.
SECTION IV Page 46 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
502 -8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed
within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed
by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service
connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently
acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end
of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum
of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
502 -9. TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three - quarter inch (3/4 ") bronze test plug.
502 -10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
503. CONSTRUCTION
503 -1. MATERIAL HANDLING
1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with
hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such
materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe
already on the ground.
SECTION IV Page 47 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or
near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
503 -2. PIPE LAYING
503 -2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30 ") and a maximum
of forty -two inches (42 ") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid
conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during
the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required,
the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and
grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction
of the obstructions.
503 -2.2. INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by
the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and
hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or
other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective
coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall
be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or
fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or
rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe,
and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and
dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being
placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without
getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench,
a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the
SECTION IV Page 48 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing
or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight
plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end
at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10 %) or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
503 -3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
503 -3.1- GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
503 -3.2. VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless
shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed
eighteen inches (18 ") from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement
or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5
for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for
reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
503 -3.3. HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten
feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall
SECTION IV Page 49 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV —Technical Specifications
be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6 ") ductile iron branch controlled by
an independent six inch (6 ") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the
main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant
assembly cost.
503 -3.4. ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on
the plans.
503 -4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and
the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made
in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual
conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before
connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the
supervision of the City of Clearwater.
504. TESTS
504 -1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All
mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all
necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at
their expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
SECTION IV Page 50 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
504 -2. NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty-eight (48) hours
advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
505. STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AWWA C651.
505 -1. STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal
Specification O- S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron ".
505 -2. FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not
available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
505 -3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more
than twenty -four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be
in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
505 -5. BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
SECTION IV Page 51 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples
shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The
City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of
Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation.
506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
506 -1. GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment
for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for
the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all
labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made
for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of
work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and /or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
• Grading
• Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joint materials
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
506 -2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
506 -2.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
506 -2.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation.
SECTION IV Page 52 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
506 -3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
506 -3.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings
satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the
body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the
tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C 110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight
will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
' 506 -3.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE
WITH BOXES AND COVERS
' 506 -4.1. MEASUREMENT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
506 -4.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
506 -5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
506 -5.1. MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed.
The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in
Article 501 -2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions.
506 -5.2. PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust
anchorage, six inch (6 ") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on
the hydrant lead.
SECTION IV Page 53 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
600 SERIES: STORMWATER
601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES
Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by
the Engineer.
601 -1. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
602. UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and
detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be
embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface
covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of
#6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8 ") in diameter,
polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth
Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in
conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in
FDOT Section 948 -1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting
and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly - chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to
ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be
the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal)
per the construction detail drawings.
Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section
901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and
screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel.
602 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8 ") Sub -drain in place and accepted.
SECTION IV Page 54 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
602 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall
include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically
underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and
sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
603. STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless
otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT
Standard Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before
laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to
be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply
wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts
coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
603 -1. TESTING AND INSPECTION
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions.
The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage
pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed
stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the
pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video
shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded
as audio on the DVD. The data should include:
1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths.
2) The drainage structure number and pipe size.
3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S -1 to S -2).
4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and
infiltration.
The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously.
All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in
accordance with Section 430 -4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe
discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair
or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration.
SECTION IV
Page 55 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of
concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color).
All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by
the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage
structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re -laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe
that are repaired, re -laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction
video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall
be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved.
603 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured
along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes
or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required
to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for
stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.).
604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR
OTHER STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until
acceptance of the work.
604 -1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on
Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made
gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2 ") of
mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pjpe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
SECTION IV Page 56 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
604 -2. PRECAST TYPE
Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a
pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5 ") thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will
not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in
accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside,
the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure
be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole
ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be
provided.
604 -3. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
605 -1. MATERIAL
605 -1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
605 - 1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS
Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non - raveling construction
and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns
developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of
0.106 inches.
605 - 1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less
than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious
effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material
difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from
acids and resistant to abrasion.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated
wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches
by 4 '/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating)
shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core,
0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core
plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength
(75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and
having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of
alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener
SECTION IV Page 57 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining
in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to
6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge
wires.
605 - 1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started.
Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier
for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of
2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The
individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material.
605 - 1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985.
605 -2. PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the
sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets
of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit
construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of
these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and
flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the
gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided
by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary
diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this
juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to
resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand
in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced
edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions
shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
SECTION IV - Page 58 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and
one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two
third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12 ") into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut
the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement.
Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled
so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations
or five days, whichever is less.
In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to
placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses.
SECTION IV
Page 59 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced
with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as
determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All
replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8 ") compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus two inches (2 "), if over six inches (6 "), and compacted to 98% of maximum
density per AASHTO T -180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square
yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall
include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on
a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall
be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary
restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4 ") or six inches (6 ") thick
- per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6 ") thick and be
reinforced with 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor
shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of all driveway,
curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
702 -1. BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be eight inches (8 ") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on
the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12 ") compacted
minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted
on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing
laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an
independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is
SECTION IV - Page 60 of 106 -- Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the
City's Technical Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base
that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's
satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until
the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in
the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance
of all base and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown
on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be
included in the bid item price for base.
2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and
911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness
as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost
of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with
Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT
approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests oil gradation to confirm
that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR
shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the
Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless
requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat
shall be included in the bid item price for base.
4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall
be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope
and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or
base.
5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be
constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall
have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283,
RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non - limited access paved shoulders,
shared use paths, or other non - traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation,
placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included
in the bid item price for asphalt or base.
SECTION IV
Page 61 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
702 -1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED
BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
702 -1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
702 -2. SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a
minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade,
Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will
apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted
construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing
any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of
this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from
an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed
for the stabilized subgrade.
702 -2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and
accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be
per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per
Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values
shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in
writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such
deficient areas that are left in place.
702 -2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction,
finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals
necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item
for base.
SECTION IV Page 62 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on
roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
703 -1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
703 -1.1. AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703 -1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703 -2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials
shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless
otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform
to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at
the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests
and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to
determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed.
The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is
discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet
the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and
investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work
shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least twenty -five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or
when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition,
for excesses of one - quarter inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess
area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can
remain with payment to be made based on the thicknes'specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance
of the placement of all asphalt.
SECTION IV
Page 63 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
703 -1 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall
conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt
mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation.
Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic
concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER
THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Type SP /Spec 334 -1
Type FC /Spec 337 -8
Type B /Spec 234 -8
ATPB /287 -8
703 -5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be
in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
703 -6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
703 -6.1. CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the
following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703 -6.2. POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
SECTION IV Page 64 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
703 -7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser
shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section
shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting,
prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the
manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly
cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable.
The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic
concrete. surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall
occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways,
the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and
final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will
be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the
asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and
coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving.
703 -8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid
item for asphalt.
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all
construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or
mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped
SECTION IV
Page 65 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall
sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the
job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall
also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling
and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted
in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the
project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one - quarter inch
(1/4 ") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101.
703 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
703 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or
prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of
cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary
to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications.
704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than ten percent (10 %) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall
be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site.
The address is: http: / /www. dot. state.fl.us /construction/fuel &bit /fuel &bit.shtm. For
additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414 -4252.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used
for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will
be used for payment calculation.
SECTION IV Page 66 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for
any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six inches (6 "). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for
access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as
specified for the street paving.
When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material.
Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways.
705 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted.
705 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which
price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
706. CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In
addition, all the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor
shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of the placement
of all concrete curbs.
706 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted.
706 -2. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
SECTION IV Page 67 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
707 -1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified,
all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have
a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness
of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for
all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to
upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not
properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet,
and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted
subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical
Specifications shall also apply.
707 -2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches
(6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303
ofthese Technical Specifications shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance
of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
707 -3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS
The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans
and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb
ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and
Specifications.
707 -4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4 ") concrete sidewalk,
six inch (6 ") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6 ") concrete driveways in place and accepted.
707 -5. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be
full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required,
labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
SECTION IV Page 68 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
708. MILLING OPERATIONS
708 -1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed
in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify
the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty -four (24) hours in advance of
all milling.
708 -2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled,
unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the
vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must
be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the
Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the
roadways before leaving the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and /or median curbs after' the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the
prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's
expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired
base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
SECTION IV Page 69 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
708 -3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall
remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be
performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to
schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work.
708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all
regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
708 -5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND
UTILITIES
All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by
their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the
Owner /City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow
utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute).
All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
708 -6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703 -7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
708 -7. TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement
to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain
unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
708 -8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and /or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the
existing swale.
SECTION IV Page 70 of 106 _ Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
708 -9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
708 -10. BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius
returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion,
removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
SECTION IV
Page 71 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016,
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND
MARKINGS
801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603
through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal
and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service
assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian
detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing
traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast
Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in
the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be
signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors
shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the
City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's
Traffic Engineering Division.
All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781.
801 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete
the work per the plans.
802. SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment
will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be
corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
SECTION IV Page 72 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT
indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with
thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified.
802 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
803. ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
803 -1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
SECTION IV
Page 73 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING /RESTORATION
901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within
a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a
delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents
or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation
Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at
the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
902 -1. IRRIGATION
902 -1.1. DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground
irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment,
services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground
sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work
noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf /landscape areas except at road /paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the
Engineer.
902 - 1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable
building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply.
SECTION IV Page 74 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material
or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be
removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty -
four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with
name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier
where replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
902 - 1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation of twenty -four inch (24 ") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior
to installation of main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final
acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or
missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer
prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the
FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public.
902 - 1.1.3. WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of
Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater.
SECTION IV Page 75 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902 -1.2. PRODUCTS
902 - 1.2.1. GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
902 - 1.2.2. PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
902 - 1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
902 - 1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended
by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
902 - 1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
902 - 1.2.6. GATE VALVES
902 - 1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2 ") AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem
5. Safe -T -Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
SECTION IV Page 76 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902 - 1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (2'/2 ") AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA -C -509
2. 200 lb. O.W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with two inch (2 ") square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key"
shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2 ") square operating nut.
902 - 1.2.7. SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
902 - 1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm
shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1 ") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1 ") slip
by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
902 - 1.2.9. VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete
value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10 ") circular valve box with
#181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
SECTION IV
Page 77 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover
comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
902 - 1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION
902 - 1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2") low- density linear polyethylene
tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers
at a specified spacing (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and
conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57
inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the
tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of
plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer
diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
902- 1.2.10.2.OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline
pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system
pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be
seven inch (7 ").
B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6 ") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall
be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every
change of direction.
902 - 1.2.10.3. LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
902- 1.2.10.4.AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
902 - 1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy
shall be within +/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact
SECTION IV Page 78 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless
steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water
passage.
902 - 1.2.10.6. FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
902 - 1.2.10.7. FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
902- 1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter
device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field
Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may
be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if
submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if
submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure
waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws
allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year
regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations
either sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each,
station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute
increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching
solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field
Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall
be capable of manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
902 - 1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery.
SECTION IV Page 79 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A
beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
902 - 1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
902 -1.3. EXECUTION
902 - 1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details
of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Specifications.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler
equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities.
Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this
information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the
installation.
SECTION IV Page 80 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior
to roadway base.
902 - 1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
902 - 1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain six inch (6 ") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and
between all lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain six inch (6 ") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of
45 degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
902 - 1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18 ") of fill placed over the
pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger
than one half inch (' /2 ").
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum
density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers.
When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six
inches (6 ") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face
area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent
damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
902 - 1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
SECTION IV Page 81 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site
and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
902 - 1.3.3. INSTALLATION
902 - 1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to
the Owner.
902 - 1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Specifications.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male
threads only.
902 - 1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and /or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
902 - 1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup /curing time before moving or
handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
SECTION IV Page 82 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty -
four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement.
All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished
at no additional cost.
902 - 1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior
to installation.
902 - 1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6 "), nor less than four inches
(4 ") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty -four inch (24 ") minimum maintenance
clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks,
buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of
pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
902 - 1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
SECTION IV Page 83 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902 -2. LANDSCAPE
902 -2.1. GENERAL
902 - 2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor,
unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
902 - 2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental
to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and
as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and /or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
902 - 2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under
the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be
made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of
work on the project.
B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's
convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If
conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be
considered the controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons
in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health
SECTION IV Page 84 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be
held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or
non - compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Article.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call " / "Sunshine 811" at 8 -1 -1; "Sunshine 811" administrative
offices may be reached at (800) 638 -4097.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
902 - 2.1.4. SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be
established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
902 - 2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
902 - 2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied
state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
SECTION IV
Page 85 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.: Straight trunk.
MIN.: Minimum.
GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers.
DIA.: Diameter.
LVS.: Leaves.
D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4 -1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B &B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP: Plants per pot.
FG: Field grown.
STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of
quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape
Contractor.
Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who
produces the landscape Plans and Specifications.
902 - 2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
902 - 2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior
to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break
branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant
delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been
cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled
by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
SECTION IV - - Page 86 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B ") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not
less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1 ") caliper of trunk; root ball
depth shall not be less than two- thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which
cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning
to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the
site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve
inches (12 ") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms,
only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and
handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots
shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within
twenty -four (24) hours of delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping.
Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded
area.
902 - 2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS
902 - 2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions
and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
. SECTION IV Page 87 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or
seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting
operations.
902 - 2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner's Representative and /or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor
shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and /or to maintain the progress
schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request
from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of
material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the
Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs
which may result from work stoppage.
902 - 2.1.8.3. UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
902 -2.2. PRODUCTS
902 - 2.2.1. MATERIALS
902 - 2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule.
Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture,
L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on
Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the
nursery trade.
902 - 2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species
and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases,
defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and
shall have healthy, well - developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
SECTION IV Page 88 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida
Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the
place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for
name, variety, size, quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the
Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment
to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement
shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning
for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the
plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with
the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price.
Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant
and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls
and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures.
J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves
the substitution.
K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition
exists.
902 - 2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty -
four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it
will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
SECTION IV Page 89 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016,
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity,
germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
902 - 2.2.1.4. MULCH
A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3 ") before compaction, as shown in the
PLANTING DETAILS in the plans.
902 - 2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming
to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all
plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 ib.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet
(1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one -fourth
(1/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e.
manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
902 - 2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2 ")
caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2 ") caliper
and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree
shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a
minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x
4" by 16" wood connected with two — three - quarter inch (3/4 ") steel bands shall be used
around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
902 - 2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL
SECTION IV Page 90 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable
for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape
Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of one -third (1/3) peat and two - thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1 ").
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There
must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or
carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and
toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance
to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil,
such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three
inches (3 ") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full
length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6 ") to eight inches (8 ")
into native soil.
902 - 2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
902 - 2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade
shall l,)e placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area
surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the
tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade.
902 - 2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and /or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
902 - 2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
902 - 2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
SECTION IV Page 91 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902 -2.3. EXECUTION
902 - 2.3.1. PREPARATION
902 - 2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
902 - 2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed /turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or
"Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the
same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor
at no cost to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage
without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches
(1' /2 ") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the
excavated material off the site.
902 - 2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches
(3 ") of one -third (1/3) Florida peat and two- thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic
soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic
layer six inches (6 ") to eight inches (8 ") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by
"crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates.
Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
902 - 2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
SECTION IV Page 92 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub -
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4 ").
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush
to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard
drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound
(1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial
grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release
form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4 ") of soil.
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition.
902 - 2.3.2. INSTALLATION
1 902 - 2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well -
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
902 - 2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally
accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an eighteen inch (18 ") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer
leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all
plant sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the Plans.
SECTION IV Page 93 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
902 - 2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of
the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface
will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball
about one inch (1 ") higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle
and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4 ") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire,
and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom
of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade.
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of
the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball.
Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight
or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a
minimum of eighteen inches (18 ") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the
plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
SECTION IV Page 94 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
902 - 2.3.2.4. SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil
adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to
all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen
per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is
laid in place.
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas.
Cut down soil level to one inch (1 ") to one and one half inches (1 -1/2 ") below top of walks
prior to laying sod.
D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient
water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches
(2 ") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep
sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per
manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with
suitable wooden pins or by other approved method.
902 - 2.3.2.5. SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
902 - 2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall
be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by
approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4')
height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30 ") of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall
be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2
SECTION IV Page 95 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three - quarter inch (3/4 ") steel bands.
Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after
the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
902 - 2.3.2.7. MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch.
Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run -off.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3 ") layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings.
Maintain a minimum three inch (3 ") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum
six inch (6 ") clearance for the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6 ") of non - mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
902 - 2.3.2.8. PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and
branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
902 - 2.3.2.9. CLEAN -UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
902 - 2.3.2.10. PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
SECTION IV Page 96 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV— Technical Specifications
C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as
specified.
902 - 2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees
to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done
by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor
who is responsible for the damage.
902 - 2.3.3. MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the
Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University
of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1 ")
of water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
902 - 2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
902 - 2.3.4.1. INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications,
the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and /or Landscape Contractor.
902 - 2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in the Plans and Specifications.
SECTION IV Page 97 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the
Landscape Architect that the correction has been made.
902 - 2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all
other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed
specifications.
902 - 2.3.5. WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period
of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead
or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the
Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the
warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or
workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no
additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be
given the equal amount of warranty.
903. SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable
depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed
with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller
immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit
SECTION IV Page 98 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy -
two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be
thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as
needed and /or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions,
to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable
to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation.
Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis
of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor
provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
904. SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and /or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no
wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia.
No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per
acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said
seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including
water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and
accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as
stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
905 -1. SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant
beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental
pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated
areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting
irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified
landscaped street areas including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
SECTION IV Page 99 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
• Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
• Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
905 -2. SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between
the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The
City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be
completed before leaving the job site.
905 -3. WORK METHODS
905 -3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any
variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
905 -3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
905 - 3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS
Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the
Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes,
vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report
such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from
the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon
completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by
the Contractor.
905 - 3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty -four
(24) hours after providing the service.
905 - 3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size
of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a
neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
SECTION IV
Page 100 of 106 Updated 2 /11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, consistent with the following specification:
905 - 3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE,
ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads
that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation,
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on
palms.
905 - 3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
905 - 3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users
are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian
use areas.
905 - 3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts
will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
905 - 3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor
at their expense.
905 - 3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually three inches (3 ").
905 - 3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating
schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system
running time.
SECTION IV Page 101 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016.
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
905 - 3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
905 - 3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
905 - 3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility.
Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants,
securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will
furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor
one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After
uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility.
Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the
City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in
place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at
any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be
compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man-
hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the
covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and
Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should
freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed
by the City.
906. LEVEL OF SERVICE
The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven
(7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no
further than ten (10) calendar days apart.
907. COMPLETION OF WORK
Within twenty -four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said
completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message.
908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
SECTION IV
Page 102 of 106 4 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
given forty -eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has
been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12)
month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation
operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape
materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as they
feel appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade
practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused
by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the
specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the
Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular
payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
910. TREE PROTECTION
910 -1. TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging
and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two- thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2 ") lumber for upright
posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1')
anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8')
apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1") by four -inch (4 ")
lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
SECTION IV
Page 103, of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment,
chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective
barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
910 -2. ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and /or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging
a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree
pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited.
Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be
pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18 ") below existing grade or to the depth of
the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18 ") from existing grade. The City's
Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior
Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562 -4747, or through the construction
inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected
and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible,
but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree
protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and /or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
SECTION IV Page 104 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10 ") per one inch (1 ") of the trunk
diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior
to said root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18 ") from existing grade, or to the depth of the
disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18 ").
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this
purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative,
prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require
a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned
trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning
requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as
opposed to open trenching.
910 -3. PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and /or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other
Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community
Development Code.
C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30 %) of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion - tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances
and Community Development Code.
SECTION IV Page 105 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
SECTION IV — Technical Specifications
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of
Ordinances and Community Development Code.
SECTION IV
Page 106 of 106 Updated 2/11/2016
CONFORMED
1
1
Index for Professional Registrations
Sign and Seal Sheet
for
1
(PROJECT No. 15-0039-UT
EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SPECIFICATIONS
Paul Carastro, P.E.
DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL
16010, 16110, 16120, 16135, 16142, 16143, 16170, 16190, 16195, 16452, 16470, 16481, 16483
\\\\\i111111!/� .
\\\ S- CAS / /�i
=....."%41"( No. 45830
STATE O
�� • W°
(V;
'4://;;;;01- � OR\Op C��
NAL�?
Page of i
71.3 /t6
07/13/16
Sign and Seal Sheet
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION IVA
EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONFORMED DOCUMENTS
PREPARED FOR:
BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE
CLEARWATER, FL 33756
PREPARED BY:
Kin
ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC.
4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY
ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300
TAMPA, FL 33634
JULY 2016
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01014 SUMMARY OF WORK
01015 CONTROL OF WORK
01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01040 COORDINATION
01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS
01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01300 SUBMITTALS
01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS
AND SAMPLES
01385 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01505 MOBILIZATION
01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
- i -
8/9/16
CONFORMED
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01625 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01640 QUALITY CONTROL
01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01710 CLEANING
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01820 TRAINING
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND
EQUIPMENT
02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02740 CURED IN PLACE PIPE LINING
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03600 GROUT
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 METALS
05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06600 FIBERFGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09900 PAINTING
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11225 CLARIFIERS REHABILITATION
11317 SCUM PUMP
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13615 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
13640 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
' -iii- 8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
15080 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16110 RACEWAYS
16120 WIRE AND CABLES
16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, RACEWAYS
16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
16143 WIRING DEVICES
16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16452 GROUNDING
16470 PANELBOARDS
16481 MOTORS
16483 MOTOR STARTERS
- iv -
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01005
2
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Description
10
11 The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and
12 equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. At all
13 times during the project the Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) shall remain in
14 service. Throughout the project, the Contractor shall cooperate fully with plant
15 operations staff to minimize disruption to facility operations. No facility or
16 structure shall be taken out of service, except those specifically scheduled to be
17 taken out of service, without the prior written approval of the Owner or Engineer.
18 Plant operations and regulatory compliance take priority over and may impact
19 the construction schedule.
20
21 B. Work Included
22
23 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant, power,
24 Tight, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other means
25 of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the Work.
26 He shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to
27 promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the
28 satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract
29 Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and
30 after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs
31 incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may
32 be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work.
33
34 The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for which
35 there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the general
36 cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract
37 Items. No additional payment will be made therefore.
38
39 The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and
40 equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a
41 satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. Only
42 equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The
43 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship,
44 materials and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding.
45
46
47 C. Public Utility Installation and Structures
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -1 06/24/2014
1
2 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles,
3 tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, manholes and
4 all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or
5 controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately owned by
6 individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation,
7 traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water or other
8 public or private property which may be affected by the work shall be deemed
9 included hereunder.
10
11 The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from
12 damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation, or
13 structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by the
14 Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any
15 damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall
16 be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities
17 damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been located
18 in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense, as
19 directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made for such
20 protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures.
21
22 Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other
23 governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed, relocated,
24 replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of the general
25 cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various
26 contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore.
27
28 Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner
29 or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the Work, and
30 are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion
31 of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is necessary to
32 complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be accomplished by the
33 utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in writing by the
34 Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the
35 utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously and the Contractor
36 shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal,
37 relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished
38 by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and Supplemental
39 General Conditions.
40
41 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental utility
42 departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of his proposed
43 construction operations, at least forty -eight hours in advance of breaking ground
44 in any area or on any unit of the work.
45
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -2 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility
2 installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein
3 provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer.
4
5 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
6
7 A. Drawings
8
9 When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used
10 in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to
11 small scale drawings.
12
13 B. Copies Furnished to Contractor
14
15 The Engineer may incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings
16 and specifications, and may provide one electronic copy of each to the
17 Contractor. The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede the
18 Contract Documents provided to the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of
19 the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and specifications properly
20 include all revisions /addenda to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
21 furnish each of the subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of
22 the Contract Documents as may be required for their work. Additional copies of
23 the Drawings and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the
24 Contractor at cost of reproduction.
25
26 C. Supplementary Drawings
27
28 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more
29 fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any changes
30 which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with
31 Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer and copies
32 thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner.
33
34 D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data
35
36 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the
37 Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data
38 received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions,
39 conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the
40 Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing all
41 conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall promptly provide a response to all
42 RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to take
43 advantage of any conflicts and discrepancies, as full instructions will be
44 furnished by the Engineer, should such conflicts and discrepancies be
45 discovered.
46
47 E. Specifications
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -3 06/24/2014
1
2 The Technical Specifications generally consist of three parts: General,
3 Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements
4 that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by
5 detailed requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there
6 appears to be a conflict.
7
8 F. Intent
9
10 All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not
11 shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect
12 as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or
13 in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete
14 and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be performed by the
15 Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described.
16
17 The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent
18 omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done
19 and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best
20 general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best
21 quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be made
22 upon that basis.
23
24 The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in the
25 General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the Contractor,
26 and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related Specification Sections.
27
28 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
29
30 A. Manufacturer
31
32 The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to furnish
33 materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be submitted to
34 the Engineer for approval. Such approval must be obtained before shop
35 drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for any materials
36 to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good reputation and
37 have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of the Engineer, be
38 required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a similar product to the
39 one specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a
40 sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance. All
41 transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the
42 Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the Engineer, that
43 the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such
44 transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full
45 responsibility under this Contract.
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -4 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or
2 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by
3 the same manufacturer.
4
5 B. Delivery
6
7 The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most
8 speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work within
9 the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to
10 avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related
11 Contractor.
12
13 C. Tools and Accessories
14
15 The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
16 furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably
17 marked high grade special tools and appliances that are needed to adjust,
18 operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be
19 furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with
20 good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
21
22 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified to
23 be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the manufacturer",
24 the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally or commonly
25 recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the manufacturer's readily
26 available literature.
27
28 Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
29 securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name,
30 year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data.
31
32 D. Installation of Equipment
33
34 The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery
35 of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally
36 encountered in work of this character.
37
38 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
39 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless
40 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be
41 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be
42 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily
43 between the various units.
44
45 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and
46 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the
47 devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as approved
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -5 06/24/2014
1 by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the purpose intended.
2 Substantial templates and working drawings for installation shall be furnished.
3
4 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, and
5 shall properly bed in non - shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its supporting
6 base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill the space
7 between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces coming in
8 contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy equal to
9 Kop -Coat 300M.
10
11 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative
12
13 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and
14 experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer
15 and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place
16 in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents.
17
18 Prior to placing the equipment in operation for testing purposes, the
19 manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate
20 of Proper Installation stating that the equipment has been installed in strict
21 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
22
23 After the equipment is placed in operation for testing by the Contractor, such
24 engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the
25 Engineer to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory operating
26 condition, and shall instruct/train such personnel as may be designated by the
27 Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment.
28
29 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
30
31 A. General
32
33 For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall
34 make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in
35 such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract
36 Documents. One original, signed copy and one electronic copy of the reports
37 shall be submitted and the authorities' certification thereof must be furnished to
38 the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment.
39
40 If in the making of any test of any material or equipment it is ascertained by the
41 Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, the
42 Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to refrain from
43 delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or
44 from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the Owner.
45
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -6 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be
2 conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the
3 IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
4
5 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment
6 during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim
7 for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner
8 formally takes over the operation thereof.
9
10 A City issued Trench Permit is required for work deeper than 4 -feet.
11
12 B. Costs
13
14 All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be
15 performed by the Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or inspection
16 bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified.
17
18 The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests
19 specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the
20 Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price.
21
22 Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those
23 specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications.
24 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in
25 making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non -
26 compliance.
27
28 C. Inspection of Materials
29
30 The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in
31 advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of
32 materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the
33 permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, the
34 date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the manufacture
35 or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the Engineer will
36 arrange to have a representative present at such times during the manufacture
37 as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify the Contractor that
38 the inspection will be made at a point other than the point of manufacture, or he
39 will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived. The Contractor must
40 comply with these provisions before shipping any material. Such inspection
41 shall not release the Contractor from its responsibility for furnishing materials
42 meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.
43
44 D. Certificate of Manufacture
45
46 When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor
47 shall furnish authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -7 06/24/2014
1 that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested in
2 conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be notarized
3 and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses,
4 where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar
5 products of the manufacturer.
6
7 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment
8
9 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency,
10 performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in
11 the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively prove that its
12 characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
13 No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the
14 Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable.
15
16 One hard copy original and one electronic copy of the manufacturer's actual test
17 data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity
18 sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company, shall be
19 forwarded to the Engineer for approval.
20
21 The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop
22 test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
23
24 F. Preliminary Field Tests
25
26 As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
27 and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the
28 preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract that
29 does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
30 Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments
31 and replacement required. The Contractor shall assist in the preliminary field
32 tests as applicable.
33
34 G. Final Field Tests
35
36 Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and
37 systems installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests as
38 specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents.
39
40 The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials,
41 equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional
42 cost to the Owner. The equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall assist in
43 the final field tests, as applicable.
44
45 H. Failure of Tests
46
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -8 06/24/2014
1 Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests,
2 guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly
3 corrected by the Contractor by replacement or otherwise as directed by the
4 Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor has
5 fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the
6 Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and
7 equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified
8 requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work, materials
9 and equipment, may reject the work, materials and equipment and may order
10 the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense.
11
12 I. Final Inspection
13
14 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In
15 no case will the final change order be prepared until the Contractor has complied
16 with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final inspection of
17 the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly and satisfactorily
18 constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
19
20 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
21
22 A. Temporary Fences
23
24 If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence
25 or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the
26 Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until
27 the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for
28 the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the type
29 of temporary fence to be used.
30
31 B. Temporary Driveways
32
33 At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove all
34 temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the work
35 and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to allow
36 construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully cooperate
37 with the Owner in providing this access.
38
39 C. Temporary Structures and Facilities
40
41 The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required in
42 order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during
43 construction.
44
45 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES
46
47 A. First Aid
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -9 06/24/2014
1
2 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in
3 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access
4 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work.
5
6 1.07 LINE AND GRADE
7
8 A. Line and Grade
9
10 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines
11 and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full
12 responsibility for maintaining alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor.
13
14 The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established
15 bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place
16 excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the
17 reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him
18 contrary to this provision.
19
20 B. Surveys
21
22 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and other
23 such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, as
24 required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof.
25
26 All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050.
27
28 C. Safeguarding Marks
29
30 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments and
31 bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re- establishing
32 them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly
33 installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without
34 authorization such established points, stakes and marks.
35
36 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners,
37 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required,
38 shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed or destroyed.
39
40 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING
41
42 A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or
43 injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private
44 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the
45 progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original
46 locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent
47 public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -10 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract
2 Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public
3 and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not
4 shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the
5 work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General Conditions.
6
7 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures,
8 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of
9 his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional
10 inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project which
11 may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be performed by
12 and be the responsibility of the Contractor.
13
14 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the interior
15 and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and record by
16 noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be aggravated
17 by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of all conditions
18 disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of the Owner and
19 to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude conforming to the
20 requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of surveys, photographs,
21 reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer.
22
23 Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the Contractor shall advise the
24 Engineer of all buildings or structures on which he intends to perform work or
25 which performance of the project work will affect.
26
27 B. Protection of Trees
28
29 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes
30 or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of
31 trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such trees
32 or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the
33 Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar
34 size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the
35 Contractor.
36
37 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines may
38 be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, except as
39 otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully supported and
40 protected from damage.
41
42 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the Owner,
43 to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so ordered, the
44 Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of trees.
45
46 C. Lawn Areas
47
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -11 06/24/2014
1 Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work.
2 Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced,
3 or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod.
4
5 D. Restoration of Fences
6
7 Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of the
8 work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as good
9 or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in which
10 the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work shall be
11 subject to the approval of the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for
12 the replacement or repair of any fence.
13
14 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC
15
16 A. Barriers and Lights
17
18 During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at
19 all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The
20 Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or
21 "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes
22 obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the public.
23
24 B. Smoke Prevention
25
26 The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment
27 generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the production
28 of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be permitted.
29
30 C. Noise
31
32 The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all
33 times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the exhaust
34 of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with mufflers.
35 In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to avoid noise
36 or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local regulations
37 and ordinances covering noise control.
38
39 If the proper and efficient prosecution of the work requires operations during the
40 night, the written permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting
41 such items of the work.
42
43 D. Access to Public Services
44
45 Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the
46 construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire
47 hydrants, valves or manholes.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -12 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 E. Dust Prevention
3
4 The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic
5 by keeping the roads and /or construction areas sprinkled with water at all times
6 or when directed by the Owner and /or Engineer.
7
8 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
9
10 A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work
11 that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a
12 manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and
13 Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in
14 the trade required by the restoration.
15
16 1.11 CLEANING
17
18 A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site
19 of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as
20 is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the
21 opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance
22 or is objectionable.
23
24 The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and
25 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops.
26
27 B. Final Cleaning
28
29 At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and
30 materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and he shall
31 remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign
32 substances.
33
34 The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by
35 him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright,
36 clean, polished and new operating condition.
37
38 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS
39
40 A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion
41
42 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and
43 bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water
44 courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern.
45
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -13 06/24/2014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits
and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that results
from his construction operations.
3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from the
encroachment of any environmentally protected areas.
B. Protection of Wetland Areas
The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in
accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued
for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of
in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental
Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of
Engineers, etc.
C. Existing Facilities
The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation insofar
as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for maintaining
existing facilities in service during construction shall be as described in these
Specifications.
D. Use of Chemicals
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,
whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other
classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such
chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with
manufacturers' instructions.
E. Tree Removal
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty -
eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No clearing
shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after
the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the
tree barricades and other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to
remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the
in -kind replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of
storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to
the approved Drawings. No roadway base or paving shall be constructed until
the Contractor has performed tamping of these lines to his and the Engineer's
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -14 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary sewer invert grades are verified
2 in the field by the Owner. The lamping of lines and verification of elevations in
3 no way absolves the Contractor from any of contractual obligations.
4
5 G. Related Permits
6
7 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have
8 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the
9 Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the Contractor
10 shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner.
11
12 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to
13 be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their
14 conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are the
15 minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that
16 additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls
17 shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction process
18 by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer.
19
20 It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any
21 information, data, etc. that is required as a condition of a permit. Required
22 information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by the
23 Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor will
24 be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation of
25 permit conditions.
26 -
27 1.13 DISPOSAL
28
29 A. The Contractor shall directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of
30 construction demolition debris. The Contractor shall include in its bid all costs
31 associated with disposal of construction debris including collection, storage,
32 hauling and tipping fees.
33
34 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY
35
36 A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing
37 structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas,
38 fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not specifically
39 named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the Contractor unless
40 otherwise specified.
41
42 B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at least
43 temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following construction
44 efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting the affected
45 area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches remain open
46 overnight within a street right -of -way unless the governing Traffic Control
47 Division grants specific approval.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -15 06/24/2014
1
2 C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or
3 replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of
4 construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs
5 shall be accomplished in a professional workmanship -like manner in
6 accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if
7 addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30 -day time limit above only
8 by specific written agreement with the Engineer.
9
10 D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the permanent
11 repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with its own
12 resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or
13 replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work
14 will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies owed
15 the Contractor.
16
17 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
18
19 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
20
21
22 END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 -16 06/24/2014
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01014
2
3 SUMMARY OF WORK
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK
8
9 A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights -of -way, easements, or on property
10 owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida.
11
12 1.02 WORK TO BE DONE
13
14 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services and
15 incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown
16 on the Drawings.
17
18 B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for
19 continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up,
20 replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused during
21 this construction.
22
23 C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and properly
24 inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a substantial
25 manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these
26 Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor
27 without additional compensation, whether specifically indicated in the Contract
28 Documents or not.
29
30 D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and other
31 codes applicable to the proposed construction work.
32
33 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED
34
35 A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the following
36 facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
37
38 1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds.
39
40 2. Rehabilitation of existing facilities as described in Section IV.
41
42 3. Temporary pumping of scum to the existing RAS well while scum system
43 is being rehabilitated.
44
45 1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
46
47 A. General
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014 -1 06/24/14
1
2 1. Upon successful construction completion of each new component, and
3 pre - operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as required by
4 the Contract Documents.
5
6 2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start-up of any component, all
7 handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety - related facilities are
8 in place.
9
10 3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14- calendar days
11 advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the
12 existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing facilities,
13 and shall obtain the Engineer's written approval before scheduling this
14 work.
15
16 B. Restrictions
17
18 1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following
19 requirements.
20
21 a. As noted elsewhere in these Specifications and on the Drawings,
22 the Contractor will be limited in the number of clarifiers that can be
23 taken out of service and the need to maintain electrical service
24 while removing and replacing electrical equipment.
25
26 b. ,The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of service
27 without obtaining the Engineer's prior written approval.
28
29 c. All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with Specification
30 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner that the new
31 facility and associated equipment properly operates prior to taking
32 any other existing facilities or equipment out of service.
33
34 d. All manipulation of valves shall be performed by the Owner's
35 personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate any
36 valves except in emergencies. If there is an emergency, the Owner
37 shall be notified immediately.
38
39 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
40
41 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
01014 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01015
2
3 CONTROL OF WORK
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORK PROGRESS
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate
10 and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress
11 that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract Time(s). If, at
12 any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, inappropriate,
13 insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of work required or for producing
14 the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to increase the
15 facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of
16 the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
17 obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of progress required to
18 meet the Contract Time(s).
19
20 1.02 PRIVATE LAND
21
22 A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements,
23 except by permission of the Owner.
24
25 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS
26
27 A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the
28 Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be
29 found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other
30 reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the
31 Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing
32 different or additional items where required.
33
34 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS
35
36 A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary
37 barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to
38 persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense,
39 provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel
40 by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for access
41 to private property during construction shall be removed when no longer
42 required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular
43 surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the
44 excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic, construction
45 procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking
46 excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain
47 open overnight.
CONTROL OF WORK 8/9/16
01015 -1 CONFORMED
1
2 B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open
3 trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other obstacles,
4 which could be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at night.
5
6 1.05 TEST PITS
7
8 A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot -hole) for locating underground
9 pipelines or structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can be
10 constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the
11 Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled
12 immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored and
13 maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
14
15 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
16
17 A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper
18 authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and pedestrian
19 traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's operations cause traffic
20 hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide temporary ways, erect wheel
21 guards or fences, or take other measures for safety satisfactory to the Engineer.
22
23 B. Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and
24 the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all
25 necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While
26 traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and
27 those periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the
28 Owner.
29
30 C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open
31 trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, or
32 police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The Contractor
33 shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not police protection
34 has been provided.
35
36 1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
37
38 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private
39 property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto.
40 If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on
41 account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work
42 on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor,
43 at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage
44 was done, or he shall make good the damage in other manner acceptable to
45 the Engineer.
46
CONTROL OF WORK 8/9/16
01015 -2 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be restored
2 to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable materials. All
3 curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original construction and in
4 accordance with the best modern practice.
5
6 C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and
7 other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly
8 workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor
9 shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as conditions
10 permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have been
11 damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions.
12
13 D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury.
14 The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because
15 of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior
16 notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs,
17 and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in
18 accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials.
19
20 E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be
21 part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall
22 be included in the unit and /or lump sum prices established.
23
24 1.08 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
25
26 A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for -the protection of all buildings,
27 structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, services to
28 buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, sewers, drains,
29 and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are shown on the
30 Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all such structures
31 and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting from the Contractor's
32 operations shall be repaired by him at his expense.
33
34 B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of
35 underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain
36 lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges
37 resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor.
38
39 C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the
40 Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to perform
41 the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the Proposal,
42 if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General Conditions. If
43 relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will notify the Utility
44 to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The Contractor shall fully
45 cooperate with the Owner and Utility, and shall have no claim for delay due to
46 such relocation.
47
CONTROL OF WORK 8/9/16
01015 -3 CONFORMED
1 D. Underground and above ground utilities /facilities are identified on the Drawings
2 based on best information available at the time for the preparation of the plans.
3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to any
4 excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to existing
5 underground utilities and facilities, and shall coordinate the protection of these
6 utilities with the Owner.
7
8 1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES
9
10 A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other
11 related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little
12 as possible, and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance of any
13 requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that
14 necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency.
15
16 B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the
17 Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines.
18 Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing
19 conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in
20 scheduling work.
21
22 1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT
23
24 A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage in
25 every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy Toads shall be allowed
26 and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at
27 his own expense.
28
29 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
30
31 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water
32 required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections
33 and other provisions, including backflow prevention and metering provisions,
34 necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's potable and /or reclaimed
35 water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay the appropriate party for
36 all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices shall include the costs
37 incurred for water usage.
38
39 1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW
40
41 A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains, and
42 water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall immediately
43 remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining existing flows
44 shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of the interruption of any flow.
45
CONTROL OF WORK 8/9/16
01015 -4 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT
2
3 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall
4 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and
5 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or
6 required.
7
8 B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by
9 the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated herein
10 or directed by the Engineer.
11
12 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT
13
14 A. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
15 Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such,
16 the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and
17 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work. This
18 coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
19
20 B. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the
21 Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on -site on a
22 regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and
23 facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility.
24 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
25
26 1.15 CLEAN -UP
27
28 A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his
29 operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and
30 properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber,
31 excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the
32 construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner and /or
33 Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, remove, transport and properly dispose
34 of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the construction
35 operation, and leave the entire site of his work in a neat and orderly condition.
36
37 B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed from
38 the site.
39
40 1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY
41
42 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company if
43 electrical service is to be supplied to the site.
44
CONTROL OF WORK 8/9/16
01015 -5 CONFORMED
1 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE
2
3 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations.
4 Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner that
5 assures that the facility maintains service throughout the duration of the project.
6 Prior to taking any service or operation off-line, Contractor shall prepare a work
7 sequence plan and coordinate all shut downs with the Owner and /or Engineer.
8 All temporary measures and materials required to meet this condition during
9 construction shall be provided, installed, maintained and removed by the
10 Contractor. All costs associated with this effort shall be borne by the Contractor.
11 All fines imposed by failure to meet this operating condition, due to the
12 Contractor's Work Sequence, shall be borne by the Contractor.
13
14 1.18 MAINTAIN ACCESS FOR PLANT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES
15
16 A. The owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations.
17 Therefore, the Contractor will conduct the work such that access to on -line
18 equipment, equipment controls, processes, and process controls is maintained
19 at all times. Operations and maintenance activities occur or can occur
20 continuously on each clarifier, the RAS pumping station, the RAS valve vault,
21 the filter feed pumping station, and the filter feed pumping station valve vault.
22 The Contractor shall maintain access to these areas that are on -line at all times.
23 All temporary measures including walkways, stairs, and bridges and materials
24 required to meet this condition during construction shall be provided, installed,
25 maintained and removed by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort
26 shall be borne by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this
27 operating condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, shall be borne by
28 the Contractor.
29
30
31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
34
35
36 END OF SECTION
37
CONTROL OF WORK 8/9/16
01015 -6 CONFORMED
1
1
1 SECTION 01030
2
3 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8
9 A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be
10 understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes those
11
12 products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate products equal
to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the
13 General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the
14 Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all
15 respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein.
16
17 B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles for
18 incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products of
19 recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise.
20
21 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS
22
23 A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare
24 for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings. All
25 connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and /or
26 Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems
27 shall be attended by the Owner and /or Owner's Representative. The costs for
28 this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be included
29 in the various prices bid and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner.
30
31 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
32
33 A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation, the
34 possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter water, gas, telephone,
35 electrical, process, and /or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The
36 Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate
37 and flag these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to
38 an existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the
39 Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out
40 in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be
41 borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
42
43 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles,
44 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation,
45 are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the
46 pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance
47 notice of any such excavation by the Contractor.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -1 06/24/14
1
2 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied
3 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or
4 that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered.
5 Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on the
6 Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner.
7
8 D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be
9 rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test
10 pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts. Before
11 any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the Contractor
12 shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline or utility and
13 shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed.
14
15 E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing piping
16 and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work shall be
17 carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any way
18 by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his expense,
19 as directed by the Engineer.
20
21 F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone,
22 electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within
23 recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the
24 obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in the
25 opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may direct
26 the use ' of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify utility
27 crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer.
28
29 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN
30
31 A. The manufacturer of the clarifier equipment has included the services of a field
32 service technician in their scope. Refer to the Clarifier Procurement Contract
33 documents for specific details of that scope. The Contractor shall coordinate
34 with the clarifier equipment manufacture for installation, testing, and startup
35 services.
36
37 B. Bid prices for all other equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent
38 field service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to assist in the
39 installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the Owner's
40 operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved
41 manufacturer's operation and maintenance data shall be delivered to the
42 Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be
43 divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program or
44 as directed by the Engineer.
45
46 C. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is
47 presumably ready for operational testing, but before it is operated by others, the
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the
2 equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where
3 applicable:
4
5 1. Soundness (without damaged parts).
6
7 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required.
8
9 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various
10 parts.
11
12 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants.
13
14 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls.
15
16 6. Energize equipment.
17
18 7. Deficiency correction.
19
20 8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification.
21
22 D. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the
23 equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the
24 conditions specified prior to start-up testing.
25
26 E. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall
27 submit to the Engineer, a complete, signed report of the results of his inspection,
28 operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions
29 of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results
30 obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to
31 ensure proper maintenance.
32
33 F. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction and training to the
34 Owner's operating personnel in accordance with Section 01820. Training shall
35 not be performed until the requirements of Paragraphs B, C and D above have
36 been fully satisfied and shall be completed before any specified start-up testing
37 is completed as specified in Section 01625. Training shall be provided for the
38 number of days specified in each equipment section of these specifications.
39 Training shall be provided on an 8 -hour per day basis. Partial days of Tess than
40 eight (8) full working hours shall not be credited toward the specified duration.
41 Training shall not be concurrent with on -going testing, debugging or installation
42 activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to the
43 instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
44 manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment
45 manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations personnel
46 shall perform training. Training shall provide an overview of operations and
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -3 06/24/14
1 maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum, but not be limited
2 to:
3
4 1. Description of unit and component parts.
5
6 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria.
7
8 3. Operating procedures.
9
10 4. Maintenance procedures.
11
12 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules.
13
14 6. Troubleshooting.
15
16 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface.
17
18 G. A written "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer
19 stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment
20 has been satisfactorily tested and ready for operational start -up, and that the
21 operating personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of
22 the equipment shall be submitted before start -up by the Owner. The Certificate
23 shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating
24 personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on a certification
25 form approved by the Engineer.
26`
27 H. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the
28 services of the manufacturer's field service technician.
29
30 I. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall
31 furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the manufacturer
32 only when some evident malfunction or over - heating makes such services
33 necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
34
35 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
36
37 A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall
38 be delivered directly to the Engineer for approval within 60 days of shop drawing
39 approval. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or stored on -site
40 until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and completeness of operating
41 and maintenance data. Final approved copies of operating and maintenance
42 data shall have been delivered to the Engineer prior to scheduling the instruction
43 period with the Owner.
44
45
46
47
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST
2
3 A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and motor
4 data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing shall be
5 submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance Data
6 Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets.
7
8 1.07 SPARE PARTS
9
10 A. Spare parts for certain equipment to be provided are specified in the pertinent
11 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare
12 parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor
13 shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment
14 they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the
15 delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be
16 furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor
17 shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to start-up
18 testing.
19
20 B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible
21 markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged storage.
22
23 C. No start-up activities shall take place until the specified spare parts have been
24 furnished.
25
26 1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
27
28 A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with
29 particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric drives.
30 The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights
31 after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts.
32 The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims.
33 After the foundation alignments have been approved by the manufacturer, the
34 bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The
35 alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the
36 foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the sole plates shall be
37 finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact
38 alignment of equipment with associated piping and, under no circumstances,
39 will "pipe springing" be allowed.
40
41 B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary to
42 properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the
43 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so.
44 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be
45 done at the expense of the Contractor.
46
47
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES,.,
01030 -5 06/24/14
1 1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES
2
3 A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall
4 provide a list including the equipment name; address and telephone number of
5 the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and /or
6 spare parts can be readily obtained.
7
8 1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS
9
10 A. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or
11 products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required
12 Shop Drawings.
13
14 B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where
15 identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period
16 of at least one (1) year.
17
18 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
19
20 A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install
21 anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to
22 complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by
23 subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and
24 patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the following
25 paragraph.
26
27 B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves,
28 inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the
29 execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective
30 cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc.
31 In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the
32 written approval of the Engineer.
33
34 1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION
35
36 A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run -off
37 of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride,
38 or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the
39 supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be adequate
40 to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased more than 10
41 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by the state or
42 other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish unless limits
43 have been established for the particular water. In surface water used for other
44 purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless otherwise permitted.
45 Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to
46 prevent operations that promote erosion.
47
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -6 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA -NPDES generic
2 permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution prevention plan
3 developed for the project.
4
5 1.13 VALVE INDICES
6
7 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required on
8 the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above
9 ground valves shall be non - corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19-
10 gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base
11 as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2)
12 samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart
13 and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped on them the information shown on
14 the Drawings and the data described herein. The Contractor shall submit to the
15 Engineer for review, not less than 120 days before start-up, a valve schedule
16 containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall contain for each
17 valve, the location, type, a number, words to identify the valve's function, and
18 the normal operating position. The information contained in the valve schedules
19 shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the Owner. Above ground
20 valve tags shall be furnished with non - corrosive metal wire for attachment
21 thereof.
22
23 1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN
24
25 A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to
26 the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should
27 outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no
28 additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning.
29
30 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the
31 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or
32 injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or
33 material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the
34 Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials
35 shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
36
37 1.15 WARRANTIES
38
39 A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment
40 supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year unless
41 otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that the Work
42 is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete.
43
44 B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship,
45 design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the
46 warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to
47 the Owner.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -7 06/24/14
1
1
1
2 C. If, within the warranty period, repairs or changes are required in connection with
3 work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the result of
4 the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, defective, or not
5 in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly upon
6 receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the Owner:
7
8 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and
I
9 correct all defects herein.
10
11 2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or
12 contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of the
13 use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior, defective,
14 or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract.
15
16 3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in fulfilling
17 any such guarantee.
18
19 D. If within ten (10) days after receiving notice, the Contractor fails to proceed to
20 comply with the terms of the warranty, the Owner may have the defects
I21 corrected, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses
22 incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion
23 of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without
24 notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost
1
25 thereof.
26
27 E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as
I
28 may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of
29 this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special guarantees
30 and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the Contractor and
III
31 delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof, before the
32 acceptance of the Work.
33
34 F. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's
35 warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed.
36 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties from
37 each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the equipment
38 specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract Documents, or
39 shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner.
40
41 G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one -year warranty
42 commencing at the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall obtain
43 from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time that the
44 manufacturer certified proper installation as specified elsewhere herein. This
45 three -year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year warranty
I46 commencing upon Substantial Completion.
47
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -8 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 H. The Contractor's one -year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the
2 project's Performance Bond.
3
4
5 1.16 WATERTIGHTNESS
6
7 A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce concrete
8 cracking. All water - retaining structures (those that are intended to hold a liquid)
9 shall be filled and tested for leaks by the Contractor, with water acceptable to
10 the Engineer, prior to surface coating or painting. Procedure and manner in
11 which any leaks are repaired must meet the approval of the Engineer. All costs
12 associated with the testing and repair of leaks shall be at the expense of the
13 Contractor.
14
15 1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
16
17 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the
18 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever
19 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these
20 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply.
21
22 1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE
23
24 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to,
25 encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive noise.
26
27 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7
28 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at
29 the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip -
30 ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at any
31 time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have the
32 work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive noise
33 shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance with the
34 Contract Time(s), at no additional cost to the Owner.
35
36 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting from
37 the creation of a public nuisance.
38
39 1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
40
41 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety
42 requirements.
43
44 1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER
45
46 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior
47 by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -9 06/24/14
1 the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue
2 such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During
3 suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and
4 protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if the
5 Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed.
6
7 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather
8 conditions.
9
10 1.21 RELOCATIONS
11
12 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including
13 but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and
14 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the Drawings.
15 The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional
16 cost to the Owner.
17
18 1.22 SALVAGE
19
20 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes,
21 fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of construction
22 under this project may be designated by the Owner to be salvaged. Any existing
23 equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain onsite and the Contractor
24 shall be responsible for delivering the salvage equipment/materials to the exact
25 location onsite as directed by the Engineer.
26
27 1.23 PERMITS
28
29 A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable
30 permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate
31 governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all applicable
32 permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. The costs
33 for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor.
34
35 1.24 PUMPING
36
37 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to
38 prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. All
39 water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in
40 accordance with these specifications and /or regulatory requirements, whichever
41 is more stringent.
42
43 B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may seep or
44 leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during pumping
45 operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these specifications
46 and /or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent. Below grade
47 galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. The extent of
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -10 06/24/14
1
1
1 pumping required in tanks, channels and other non - operating areas will be
I 2 determined by the Owner /Engineer.
3
4 1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES
I 5
6 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the
7 Contractor shall notify the Owner /Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar days
I 8 in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work.
9
10 1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES
I 11
12 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of
13 the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual facility,
14 including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the
I 15 individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion
16 for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership and begin
17 operation of the individual facility on that date and the one -year guaranty period
I 18 shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of not accepting any
19 individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a whole when it is
20 completed and tested.
I 21
22
23 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
I 24
25 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
26
I 27
28 END OF SECTION
29
1
1
1
1
1
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -11 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01030 -12 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01040
2
3 COORDINATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION
8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all construction
10 efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the
11 following:
12
13 1. The work of subcontractors.
14
15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers.
16
17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during testing and start -up.
18
19 4. The interrelated work with public and private utility companies.
20
21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie -ins to existing facilities
22 are required.
23
24 6. The effort of independent testing agencies.
25
26 7. The work to be provided under allowances.
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
29
30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
34
COORDINATION
01040 -1 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COORDINATION
01040 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1 SECTION 01050
I 2
3 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
4
I5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
I 8
9 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey
10 services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing
I 11 and /or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries and
12 easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines and
13 levels and all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also
I 14 included are such engineering services as are specified or required to execute
15 the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be
16 licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida.
17
I18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the
19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the
20 responsibility of the Contractor.
I21
22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and
23 marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the
I 24 Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has
25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for
26 the prosecution of the work.
1 27
28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
29
I 30 A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those
31 designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control
32 points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference
I 33
34 points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or
reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
35 such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due
I36 to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced
' 37 and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor.
38
39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
I 40
41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land Surveyor
I 42 to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully construct
43 the work in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 of the Florida Administrative Code.
44
45 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and
I46 roadway right -of -way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50'
47 intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place lath
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050 -1 11/02/15
1
1
1 and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be
2 permitted.
3
4 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right -of -way maps,
5 plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with
6 existing monumentation to establish the existing right -of -way lines and
7 utility easement boundaries.
8
9 C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system
10 in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the
11 Contractor for his use.
12
13 D. The Contractor shall provide a topographical survey of the floor of the eastern
14 clarifier as described on the drawings.
15
16 E. The Contractor shall provide an as -built survey of all pipes and structures
17 constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
18 Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As -Built Survey shall
19 include:
20 1. Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins and
21 structures,
22 2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures,
23 3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines, and top of pipe elevations for pressure
24 pipelines for all yard piping, and northings and eastings of all changes in
25 pipe direction.
26 4. Northings and eastings and top of valve elevations for all valves.
27
28 1.04 RECORDS
29
30 A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work
31 as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and
32 measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in
33 notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings.
34
35 1.05 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer.
38
39 B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field
40 engineering work.
41
42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
43
44 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
45
46
47 END OF SECTION
FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING
01050 -2 11/02/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01065
2
3 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the project
10 adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations, and to
11 all permits and easements acquired for the project.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights -of -way with the agency
14 having jurisdiction, including all road /lane closures, road /lane narrowing and
15 detours.
16
17 C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements
18 that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders
19 at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website
20 address: www .myclearwater.com /cityproiects. The Contractor shall conduct all
21 operations in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and
22 License Agreements.
23
24 D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements require
25 that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a representative of
26 the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all coordination and
27 notification required to assure full compliance with the permit conditions.
28
29 E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds, Easement
30 Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of the project. A
31 listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements
32 that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed below. The Contractor shall
33 be responsible for obtaining all other Permits, Easement Agreements, or
34 License Agreements necessary for the proper execution of the Work not
35 specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner.
36
37 F. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and
38 requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the
39 Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action
40 by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in
41 the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees or
42 consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be otherwise
43 collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally.
44
45 G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the
46 expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work.
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065 -1 06/24/14
1
2
3
4
5 1.02 PERMITS
6
7
8
H. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil
tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of Transportation
design standards.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
A. Permits obtained by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows: None.
Permit Title
Agency
Permit/File Number
B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions that
relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying these
permit conditions in developing a bid for the project.
C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain
the following permits, comply with their respective conditions, and submit copies
of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner:
1. City of Clearwater building permits)
2. City of Clearwater Trench Permit
3. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater.
4. Storm Water NPDES
D. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those
necessary for clearing, grubbing, tree removal, and trenching. No clearing shall
occur and no earth - moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after the
permits have been issued. A City issued trench permit is required for all work
deeper than 4 -feet.
E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state
permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use permitting,
if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water Management
District.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all
required permits relating to discharges from dewatering and shall obtain a State
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 of Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the
2 Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non - Contaminated Site
3 Activity in accordance with 62- 621.300(2) FAC.
4
5 G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of a
6 Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction
7 Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62- 621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall
8 submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of Environmental
9 Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention
10 Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall:
11
12 1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or its
13 website, DEP Documents 62- 621.300(4)(a) and 62- 621.300(4)(b),
14 respectively.
15
16 2. Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting
17 rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following:
18
19 a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized
20 by storm water.
21 b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff.
22 c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls
23 including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion,
24 sedimentation, and storm water pollution.
25 d. A maintenance and inspection schedule.
26 e. Plan and procedures for record keeping.
27 f. A map depicting storm water exit areas.
28
29 3. Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to
30 the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee.
31
32 4. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along
33
34
35 1.03 EASEMENTS
with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer.
36
37
38
39
40
A.
The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for the
following parcels:
Easement Number
Owner
County Parcel ID
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01065 -3
06/24/14
1
1
1
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3 (NOT USED)
4
5 PART 3 - EXECUTION
6 (NOT USED)
7
8
9 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 1
01065 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 SECTION 01090
3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify
10 reference standards.
11
12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes
17
18 establish stricter standards.
19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract
20 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
21
22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS
23
24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed for
25 proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents.
26
27 AA Aluminum Association
28 900 19th Street NW
29 Washington, DC 20006
30
31 AASHTO American Association of State Highway
32 and Transportation Officials
33 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249
34 Washington, DC 20001
35
36 ACI American Concrete Institute
37 38800 Country Club Drive
38 Farmington Hills, MI 48331
39
40 Al Asphalt Institute
41 2696 Research Park Drive
42 Lexington KY 40511
43
44 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
45 One East Wacker Drive
46 Suite 3100
47 Chicago, IL 60601 -2001
48 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 -1 06/24/14
1 1140 Connecticut Avenue
2 Suite 705
3 Washington DC 20036
4
5 ANSI American National Standards Institute
6 1819 L Street, NW
7 Washington, DC 20036
8
9 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
10 Three Park Avenue
11 New York, NY 10016 -5990
12
13 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
14 100 Barr Harbor Drive
15 West Conshohocken, PA, 19428
16
17 AWWA American Water Works Association
18 6666 W. Quincy Avenue
19 Denver, CO 80235
20
21 AWS American Welding Society
22 550 N.W. LeJeune Road
23 Miami, FL 33126
24
25 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
26 933 N. Plum Grove Road
27 Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4758
28
29 FS Federal Specification General Services
30 Administration Specifications and Consumer
31 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS)
32 470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100
33 Washington, DC 20407
34
35 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
36 1300 North 17th Street
37 Suite 1847
38 Rosslyn, VA 22209
39
40 PCA Portland Cement Association
41 5420 Old Orchard Road
42 Skokie, IL 60077
43
44 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
45 209 W. Jackson Blvd.
46 Chicago, IL 60606
47
48 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 -2
06/24/14
1 40 24th Street,. 6th floor
2 Pittsburgh, PA 15222
3
4 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
5 333 Pfingston Road
6 Northbrook, IL 60062
7
8 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
9
10 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
11
12
13 END OF SECTION
14
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 -3 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01150
2
3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid / Proposal
10 section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the
11 specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item
12 number.
13
14 B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall be full
15 compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and
16 incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and /or
17 as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on
18 a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the
19 manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed in
20 the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall constitute full compensation for all work
21 shown and /or specified to be performed under the Contract.
22
23 C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices
24 shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that bid
25 item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited to, paving,
26 stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head walls, yard
27 culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, sidewalks,
28 driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation systems, buildings, structures and
29 equipment that are altered, removed or damaged during construction shall be
30 restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to construction at no
31 additional cost to the Owner. Cleanup is an integral part of restoration process.
32
33 D. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities
34 during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures, equipment,
35 and private property, including, but not limited to paving, stabilized roads,
36 drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard culverts, lawns,
37 fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters
38 and irrigations systems that are altered, removed or damaged during
39 construction and are not included in the proposed alterations of the new work
40 shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to
41 construction.
42
43 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements
44 necessitated by the construction /installation of those specific bid items requiring
45 traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the specific unit
46 price submitted for that particular bid item.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -1 7/7/16
1
2 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
3
4 PART 3 — EXECUTION
5
6 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7
8 A. East WRF Clarifiers Rehabilitation (Bid Item 1).
9
10 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
11 Item 1 East WRF Clarifiers Rehabilitation shall not be made and all items
12 shall be included in the lump sum price bid.
13
14 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1 shall be made in accordance with the
15 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of
16 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to perform
17 the work as shown on the Drawings and Specifications as indicated
18 herein including, but not limited to, cleaning and televising the existing
19 groundwater removal piping system; design, installation, startup,
20 operation, and maintenance of the temporary and permanent
21 groundwater removal systems; disassembly, removal and disposal
22 (unless otherwise indicated) of all existing clarifier components including
23 center columns, drives, scum beaches and supports, walkway bridges
24 and handrails, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water piping to the
25 limits shown on the Drawings, flush water piping for the scum troughs,
26 weirs, scum baffles, scum baffle supports, and the anchor bolts for those
27 items, and other equipment and materials required to be removed; leak
28 testing the east clarifier influent MLSS pipe, RAS pipe, and gravity drain
29 pipe; removal and disposal of all grout topping from the east clarifier
30 bottom slab; survey of the bottom of the east clarifier after the grout
31 topping has been removed; providing the services of a registered
32 engineering professional to map the base slab of the east clarifier by slab
33 impulse technology, summarizing the base slab mapping effort and
34 describing the results in a report with a drawing to be submitted to the
35 EOR; furnishing and installation and testing of micropiles and concrete
36 caps as shown on the structural drawings; installation of new clarifier
37 equipment furnished by the Owner; furnishing and installation of new weir
38 plates, scum baffles, scum baffle supports, and new anchors for
39 mounting those items; reclaimed water piping on the walkway bridges;
40 scum beach flush water systems; modifications to the clarifier RAS
41 piping, clarifier influent piping, the clarifier concrete floor as required to
42 accommodate the new clarifier equipment and to maintain the existing
43 gravity drains in service; removal of existing and furnishing and
44 installation of new pressure relief valves in the bottom slab of each
45 clarifier, demolition of the existing scum pump, modification of the
46 existing scum wet well, construction of a new scum pump concrete slab
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -2 7/7/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 and equipment pad, furnishing and installation of a new scum pump,
2 abandonment of the western existing scum force main, removal of the
3 existing scum pump valves box, excavation and removal of the existing
4 eastern scum force main, furnishing and installation of a new scum force
5 main, furnishing, installing, and operating, and maintaining a temporary
6 scum pumping and piping system as required; excavation and removal
7 of existing clarifier influent, effluent and drain valves, furnishing and
8 installing new clarifier influent, effluent, and drain valves; removal of
9 existing concrete stairs to each clarifier; furnishing and installation of new
10 aluminum stairs to each clarifier; removal of existing and furnishing and
11 installation of new RAS telescoping valves; relocation of two existing
12 sludge blanket level detector probes and mounting brackets from the
13 existing clarifier bridges to the new clarifier bridges; the relocation of one
14 existing sludge blanket detector controller; furnishing and installing new
15 control panels, input/output modules, power supplies and SCADA
16 communication cables for the clarifier equipment, scum pump, scum
17 pump wet well, and sludge blanket level detectors; modifying existing
18 control panels; installing new conduit and wire as required; furnishing and
19 installing two new exterior light poles and fixtures; providing the services
20 of a Systems Integrator; SCADA system start-up, testing, and training; all
21 pertinent Division 1 requirements; and, all other equipment, materials
22 and services necessary for the complete Rehabilitation of the East and
23 West Clarifiers at the East WRF as detailed in the Contract Documents.
24
25 B. West Clarifier Grouting (Bid Item 2)
26
27 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 2 shall be the
28 actual number of cubic yards of grout as measured in place in the West
29 Clarifier. No payment will be made for grout placed beyond the limits set
30 forth by the Engineer. Material lost in hauling, handling or storage shall
31 not be measured for or included in payment, nor will material required to
32 restore grout outside of the approved limits or other unauthorized areas.
33
34 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per cubic yard under Item 2 for
35 West Clarifier Grouting shall be full compensation for all labor materials,
36 equipment and other work necessary to complete the Work shown on the
37 Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals, samples, disposal of
38 waste materials and construction debris; removal and disposal of
39 delaminated grout, cleaning of existing concrete surface, application of
40 bonding agent and installation of grout necessary for the proper
41 completion of the Work included in the Contract Documents.
42
43 C. East Clarifier Grout Removal (Bid Item 3)
44
45 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 3 shall be the
46 actual number of tons of grout removed from bottom slab of the east
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -3 7/7/16
1
1
1 clarifier. No payment will be made to the Contractor for grout removal
I
2 beyond the limits set forth by the Engineer. Material lost in hauling,
3 handling or storage shall not be measured for or included in payment,
4 nor will grout removed outside of the approved limits or other
I
5 unauthorized areas.
6
7 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per ton under Item 3 for East
I
8 Clarifier Grout Removal shall be full compensation for all labor materials,
9 equipment, hauling, truck weighing and other work necessary to
10 complete the Work shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, I
11 submittal of weigh tickets from a State of Florida Certified truck scale,
12 removal and disposal of grout as noted on the Contract Documents.
13 I 14 D. East Clarifier Bottom Slab Pilot Hole Coring and Repair (Bid Item 4)
15
16 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 4 shall be the
I17 actual number of pilot holes identified by the Engineer and drilled in the
18 bottom slab of the east clarifier and repaired. No payment will be made
19 to the Contractor for pilot holes drilled beyond the limits set forth by the
20 Engineer. Material lost in hauling, handling or storage shall not be
21 measured for or included in payment, nor will pilot holes drilled outside
22 of the approved limits or other unauthorized areas.
23 I 24 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per pilot hole under Item 4 for
25 East Clarifier Bottom Slab Pilot Hole Coring shall be full compensation
26 for all labor materials, equipment and other work necessary to complete
I
27 the Work shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals,
28 samples, disposal of waste materials and construction debris; removal
29 and disposal of concrete, cleaning and preparation of existing concrete I
30 surfaces, drilling all holes identified by the Engineer, groundwater
31 dewatering, and hole repair as necessary for the proper completion of
32 the Work included in the Contract Documents. I
33
34 E. East Clarifier Bottom Slab Crack Repair (Bid Item 5)
35 I 36 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 5 shall be the
37 actual number of linear feet of cracks identified and repaired in the bottom
38 slab of the east clarifier. No payment will be made to the Contractor for I
39 crack repair placed beyond the limits set forth by the Engineer. Material
40 lost in hauling, handling or storage shall not be measured for or included
41 in payment, nor will material required to repair cracks outside of the '
42 approved limits or other unauthorized areas.
43
44 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per linear foot under Item 5 for
I45 East Clarifier Crack Repair shall be full compensation for all labor
46 materials, equipment and other work necessary to complete the Work
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I
01150 -4 7/7/16
1
1
I 1 shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals, samples,
2 disposal of waste materials and construction debris; removal and
3 disposal of cracked concrete, cleaning and preparation of existing
I 4
5 concrete surfaces, furnish and installing all repair materials identified on
the drawings for the proper completion of the Work included in the
6 Contract Documents.
I 7
8 F East Clarifier Bottom Slab Section Repair (Bid Item 6)
9
I 10
11 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 6 shall be the
actual number of square feet of bottom slab identified and repaired in the
12 east clarifier. No payment will be made to the Contractor for slab repair
I 13
14 placed beyond the limits set forth by the Engineer. Material lost in
hauling, handling or storage shall not be measured for or included in
15 payment, nor will material required to repair slab sections outside of the
' 16 approved limits or other unauthorized areas.
17
18 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per square feet under Item 6 for
19 East Clarifier Bottom Section Repair shall be full compensation for all
I20 labor materials, equipment and other work necessary to complete the
21 Work shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals,
22 samples, disposal of waste materials and construction debris; removal
1 23 and disposal of cracked concrete, cleaning and preparation of existing
24 concrete surfaces, furnish and installing all repair materials identified on
25 the drawings for the proper completion of the Work included in the
I 26 Contract Documents.
27
28 G. East Clarifier Bottom Slab Void Grouting (Bid Item 7)
I 29
30 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 7 shall be the
31 actual number of cubic yards of grout used to fill voids found under the
I 32
33 bottom slab of the east clarifier. No payment will be made to the
Contractor for grout placed beyond the limits set forth by the Engineer.
34 Material lost in hauling, handling or storage shall not be measured for or
I 35
36 included in payment, nor will material required to repair slab sections
outside of the approved limits or other unauthorized areas.
37
I 38
39 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per cubic year under Item 7 for
East Clarifier Bottom Slab Void Grouting shall be full compensation for
40 all labor materials, equipment and other work necessary to complete the
I 41
42 Work shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals,
samples, disposal of waste materials and construction debris; furnishing
43 and installing all grout materials identified on the drawings for the proper
44 completion of the Work included in the Contract Documents.
I45
46 H. East Clarifier Bottom Slab New Grout Topping (Bid Item 8)
I MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -5 7/7/16
1
1
2 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 8 shall be the
3 actual number of cubic yards of grout topping installed in the east clarifier.
4 No payment will be made to the Contractor for grout installed beyond the
5 limits set forth by the Engineer. Material lost in hauling, handling or
6 storage shall not be measured for or included in payment, nor will
7 material outside of the approved limits or other unauthorized areas.
8
9 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per square feet under Item 8 for
10 East Clarifier Bottom Slab New Grout Topping shall be full compensation
11 for all labor materials, equipment and other work necessary to complete
12 the Work shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals,
13 samples, disposal of waste materials and construction debris; removal
14 and disposal of cracked concrete, cleaning and preparation of existing
15 concrete surfaces, furnish and installing all repair materials identified on
16 the drawings for the proper completion of the Work included in the
17 Contract Documents.
18
19 I. East Clarifier 24 -inch CIPP Pipe Repair (Bid Item 9)
20
21 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing
22 CIPP in existing nominal 24 -inch diameter pipes shall be the actual
23 number of lineal feet of CI PP furnished and installed in place, complete.
24
25 2 Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Item 9 shall be full
26 compensation for the furnishing of all materials and for the proper
27 installation of the CIPP in strict accordance with the appropriate
28 specification including, but not limited to, submittals, pre- construction
29 videotaping and inspection, excavation, cleaning, removal of debris,
30 grout repairs, installation and curing of the CIPP liner, trimming the edges
31 of the cut, re- establishing service, clean up, post- construction
32 videotaping and inspection; and the furnishing of all tools, equipment,
33 labor, superintendence, and materials necessary to construct the CIPP
34 as shown, specified or required for the proper completion of the Work
35 included in the Contract Documents.
36
37 J. East Clarifier 12 -inch CIPP Pipe Repair (Bid Item 10)
38
39 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing
40 CIPP in existing nominal 12 -inch diameter sewers shall shall be the
41 actual number of lineal feet of CIPP furnished and installed in place,
42 complete.
43
44 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Item 10 shall be full
45 compensation for the furnishing of all materials and for the proper
46 installation of the CIPP in strict accordance with the appropriate
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -6 7/7/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 specification including, but not limited to, submittals, pre- construction
2 videotaping and inspection, excavation, cleaning, removal of debris,
3 grout repairs, bypass pumping, installation and curing of the CIPP liner,
4 trimming the edges of the cut, re- establishing service, clean up, post -
5 construction videotaping and inspection; and the furnishing of all tools,
6 equipment, labor, superintendence, and materials necessary to construct
7 the CIPP as shown, specified or required for the proper completion of the
8 Work included in the Contract Documents.
9
10 K. East Clarifier 10 -inch CIPP Pipe Repair (Bid Item 11)
11
12 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing
13 CIPP in existing nominal 10 -inch diameter sewers shall shall be the
14 actual number of lineal feet of CIPP furnished and installed in place,
15 complete.
16
17 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Item 11 shall be full
18 compensation for the furnishing of all materials and for the proper
19 installation of the CIPP in strict accordance with the appropriate
20 specification including, but not limited to, submittals, pre- construction
21 videotaping and inspection, excavation, cleaning, removal of debris,
22 grout repairs, bypass pumping, installation and curing of the CIPP liner,
23 trimming the edges of the cut, re- establishing service, clean up, post -
24 construction videotaping and inspection; and the furnishing of all tools,
25 equipment, labor, superintendence, and materials necessary to construct
26 the CIPP as shown, specified or required for the proper completion of the
27 Work included in the Contract Documents.
28
29 L. SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance (Bid Item 12)
30
31 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated for
32 Bid Item 12 shall be made in accordance with the appropriate written
33 Authorization by the Owner. The allowance is for the Owner's Systems
34 Integrator to perform the PLC programming, HMI programming, and
35 other related work as described in Section 13630.
36
37 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 12 shall be made in accordance with the
38 terms of the Authorization.
39
40 M. Mobilization (Bid Item 13)
41
42 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for
43 Mobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed
44 four percent (4 %) of the proposed Grand Total of Items 1 -15.
45
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -7 7/7/16
1
1
1 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 13 shall be full compensation for all costs
I
2 associated with initiating the project as limited by other sections of the
3 agreement including the Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds.
4 Payment for these performances shall be based on the terms of Section
I
5 01505 and in accordance with the Schedule of Values.
6
7 N. Indemnification (Bid Item 14) I
8
9 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated under
10 Bid Item 14 Indemnification shall not be made and all items shall be I
11 included in the lump sum.
12
13 2. Payment: Payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for Bid Item 14 I
14 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the Owner and the
15 Owner's Engineer as specified in the General Conditions, and shall be
16 included in the first payment request. I
17
18 O. Contingency Allowance (Bid Item 15)
19
I20 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by
21 the Owner and Contractor.
22
I23 2. Payment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the
24 Contingency Request and, if applicable, in accordance with the Schedule
25 of Values.
26
I
27
28 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01150 -8 7/7/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01152
2
3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the
10 approved payment schedule and in the format established by the Owner.
11
12 B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application for
13 Payment electronic form, prior to the first payment request.
14
15 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
16
17 A. Submit applications in electronic format using Microsoft Excel
18
19 B. Provide itemized data in the same spreadsheet as the Pay Application Form
20 using different TAB(s).
21
22 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of
23 Values accepted by the Engineer.
24
25 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
26
27 A. Application Form:
28
29 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed
30 prior to date of submittal of application.
31
32 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated
33 on continuation sheets.
34
35 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the
36 Contractor.
37
38 B. Continuation Sheets:
39
40 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item
41 number and scheduled dollar value for each item.
42
43 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work
44 has been performed or products stored.
45 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the end
46 of the continuation sheets.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152 -1 06/24/14
1 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original
2 component item of work.
3
4 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site,
5 submit electronic copies of the original invoices with the Application for
6 Payment. The application for payment must also include an electronic
7 table summarizing the amount of each invoice and the schedule of values
8 line item to which the stored materials apply.
9
10 1.04 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
11
12 A. Provide substantiating data, in electronic format, containing suitable information
13 for review of costs requested with a cover letter identifying:
14
15 1. Project.
16
17 2. Application number and date.
18
19 3. Detailed list of enclosures.
20
21 4. For stored products:
22
23 a. Item number and identification as shown on application.
24
25 b. Description of specific material.
26
27 c. Supplier invoices.
28
29 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount
30 installed, and schedule of values item, which the material applies.
31
32 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
33
34 C. The Contractor shall maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record
35 drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor
36 shall exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the
37 Engineer.
38
39 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance with
40 these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
41 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the applications
42 for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the required updated
43 schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may withhold approval of
44 progress payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor submits the
45 required updated schedule.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. Contractor shall maintain an updated set of As -Built Drawings in accordance
2 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments,
3 Contractor shall exhibit for the Engineer's review the updated As -Built Drawings
4 with the applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to exhibit the
5 updated As -Built Drawings for the Engineer's review, the Engineer may withhold
6 approval of progress payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor
7 submits same.
8
9 1.05 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
10
11 A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.
12
13 B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as
14 specified in the Specification.
15
16 C. All appropriate information must be entered on the application form.
17
18 1. The line title, "Application Period ", must indicate the dates between which
19 all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must be
20 consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and they
21 must not overlap.
22
23 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project
24 Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any
25 Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section must
26 include that information.
27
28 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny.
29
30 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized
31 representative of the Contractor.
32
33 1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
34
35 A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the Contractor
36 shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and /or Engineer to review and
37 verify all installed quantities and /or stored materials. Only when the
38 Owner /Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and percentages,
39 should the Application for Payment be submitted.
40
41 B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times
42 stipulated in the General Conditions.
43
44 C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will
45 transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
46
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152 -3 06/24/14
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
2
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
4
5
6 END OF SECTION
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01152 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01153
2
3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures.
10
11 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.
12
13 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material /force
14 account basis.
15
16 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.
17
18 B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:
19
20 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work.
21
22 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the
23 authorization of changes in the work.
24
25 1.02 DEFINITIONS
26
27 A. Change Order: See General Conditions.
28
29 B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner and
30 Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described, authorizes
31 Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum or the
32 Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order.
33
34 C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or
35 interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not
36 involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
37
38 D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the
39 Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order
40 minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be
41 accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and /or
42 claims for other costs.
43
44
45
46
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153 -1 06/24/14
1 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
2
3 A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive
4 Change to the Contractor. Request will include:
5
6 1. Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change
7 in the Project.
8
9 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
10
11 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement
12 as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized.
13
14 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be
15 considered valid.
16
17 B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer,
18 containing:
19
20 1. Description of the proposed changes.
21
22 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.
23
24 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
25
26 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors.
27
28 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract
29 Time, as appropriate.
30
31 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
32
33 A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and
34 deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of
35 the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the
36 Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
37
38 B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as
39 authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes.
40
41 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
42
43 A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price, which
44 has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow
45 the Engineer to evaluate the quotation.
46
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1 1 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations:
2
3 1. Labor required.
I 4
5 2. Equipment required.
6
U 7
8 3. Products required.
9 a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.
I 10
11 b. Quantities required.
12
I 13 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
14
15 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.
I 16
17 6. Overhead and profit.
18
I 19 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
20
21 C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and-
22 material /force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum
I 23 proposal, plus additional information:
24
25 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date
I 26
27 of the order.
28 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.
I 29
30 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
31
I 32 4. Receipts and invoices for:
33
34 a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use.
I 35
36 b. Products used, listing of quantities.
37
I 38
39 c. Subcontracts.
40 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS
I 41
42 A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order.
43
I 44 B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions,
45 with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change.
46
1
1
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153 -3 06/24/14
1 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum
2 and in the Contract Time.
3
4 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract Documents,
5 order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade -off agreements.
6
7 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum,
8 Contract Time, and /or claims for other costs.
9
10 1.07 LUMP SUM /FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
11
12 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and
13 attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or
14 requests from Owner, or both.
15
16 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to
17 Contractor for approval. After approval by Contractor, all copies should be sent
18 to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies.
19
20 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
21
22 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
23
24 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes.
25
26 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer.
27
28 3. Survey of complete work.
29
30 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be:
31
32 1. Those stated in the Agreement.
33
34 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
35
36 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be
37 determined prior to start of the work:
38
39 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as
40 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes.
41
42 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work:
43
44 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the
45 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and
46 the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of
2 such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor shall
3 submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and
4 any claims for a change in Contract Time.
5
6 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
7 Contract Sum and in Contract Time.
8
9 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their
10 agreement with the terms therein.
11
12 5. Owner will then sign the change order.
13
14 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL /FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER /CONSTRUCTION
15 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
16
17 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor to
18 proceed with the changes.
19
20 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized accounting
21 and supporting data.
22
23 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in General
24 Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
25
26 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in
27 Contract Surn and in Contract Time.
28
29 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement therewith.
30
31 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order.
32
33 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
34
35 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for
36 Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to record
37 the adjusted Contract Amount.
38
39 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each change
40 in Contract Time. Revise sub - schedules to show changes for other items of
41 work affected by the Change Order.
42
43 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in
44 Record Documents.
45
46 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
47
48 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
01153 -5 06/24/14
1
1
1 1 2
3 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES II 01153 -6 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01200
2
3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
8
9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of
10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time and
11 place.
12
13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel and
14 establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be
15 discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda
16 shall include as a minimum:
17
18 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule
19
20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings
21
22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for
23 Payment
24
25 4. Maintaining As -Built Drawings
26
27 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions
28
29 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders
30
31 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security
32
33 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries
34
35 9. Safety Meetings and Program
36
37 10. Traffic Control Plan
38
39 11. Pre - construction Video
40
41 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference, and shall arrange for preparation
42 and distribution of the minutes.
43
44 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
45
46 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200 -1 06/24/14
1 monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work.
2 The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The
3 Contractor and /or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of
4 material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s).
5
6 B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping the
7 minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of the
8 meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the Work,
9 maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling and
10 resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future scheduling.
11
12 PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
13
14 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
o
MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES
01200 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01300
2
3 SUBMITTALS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
8
9 A. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be transmitted in the format provided
10 to the Contractor by the Engineer, certified and signed by the Contractor
11 indicating the submittal to be correct and in accordance with the Contract
12 Documents, and noting any special instructions regarding the submittal. Each
13 submittal shall identify the submittal number in the format required by the
14 Engineer, with the name and number of this contract, the Contractor's name,
15 and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings.
16 Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When
17 catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The
18 current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and
19 descriptive data.
20
21 B. Contractor shall stamp each submittal and said stamp shall be Contractor's
22 representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts full responsibility
23 for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction
24 criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has reviewed
25 or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work and the
26 Contract Documents.
27
28 C. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each submittal
29 and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such submittals shall
30 indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all changes proposed
31 by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of
32 the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams.
33
34 D. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each
35 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions
36 previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that
37 more than one resubmission is required because of the Contractor's failure to
38 account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for
39 the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions.
40
41 E. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter
42 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days
43 the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated
44 time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that
45 time.
46
SUBMITTALS
01300 -1
12/31/15
1 F. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining
2 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the
3 Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the
4 work authorized by a Change Order.
5
6 G. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal, the
7 date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of submission
8 and return of any previous resubmittals.
9
10 H. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover only
11 general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external connections,
12 and dimensions that affect the layout. Engineer's review does not indicate a
13 thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material,
14 equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals shall not
15 relieve Contractor from the responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations, or
16 responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
17
18 I. It is intended that submittals be handled electronically whenever possible,
19 however, when necessary to employ paper copies, five copies of each drawing
20 and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor wants
21 returned, shall be submitted to Engineer.
22
23 J. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals
24 shall be consecutively numbered as directed by Engineer or in direct sequence
25 of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. Resubmittals shall
26 bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.), to indicate
27 the sequence of the resubmittal. If applicable, the Engineer will provide the
28 Contractor with an electronic file of the submittal format to be followed.
29
30 K. When submittals are returned marked CONFIRM or REJECTED - RESUBMIT,
31 the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by Engineer
32 and corrected copies shall resubmitted.
33
34 L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct
35 specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made
36 other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions.
37
38 M. When the submittals are returned marked APPROVED, NO EXCEPTIONS
39 TAKEN or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED resubmittal is not required.
40
41 1.02 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
42
43 A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a Schedule of Submittals
44 identifying the date of the initial submission, the beginning of manufacture as
45 applicable, and the delivery to the site. This Schedule shall be submitted as a
46 separate submittal and be approved as a prerequisite to the submission of any
SUBMITTALS
01300 -2 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 other submittal. No other submittal or shop drawing will be reviewed until the
2 Schedule of Submittals is approved.
3
4 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall include all submittals specified to be submitted
5 including shop drawings, schedules, permits, warranties, certifications, reports,
6 and other items specified to be submitted.
7
8 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each submittal and shop
9 drawing sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other
10 applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections
11 of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing
12 times, including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other
13 submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced
14 activities.
15
16 D. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical to the
17 progress schedule. The Schedule shall show other, non - critical shop drawing
18 submittals spread out over the contract time as required to minimize the number
19 of concurrent reviews being performed, or as directed by the Engineer. All
20 equipment testing certifications, certifications of proper installation, warranties,
21 O &M manuals, spare parts and Owner training materials specified to be
22 provided shall be submitted in accordance with this specification, and shall
23 either be submitted with the shop drawing submittal for the equipment, or
24 submitted separately.
25
26 E. The Contractor shall so develop the Schedule of Submittals such that the total
27 number of submittals shall not exceed forty six (48). In developing the
28 Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor shall identify separate submittals for:
29
30 1. Each item of equipment specified in Divisions 11 through 14 and major items
31 of equipment listed in Division 16.
32 2. Each pipe material of construction (ductile iron, steel, PVC, HDPE, etc.)
33 3. Construction and start-up schedules.
34 4. Field testing and equipment start-up reports specified to be performed and
35 prepared by equipment suppliers.
36
37 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify a single
38 submittal for a given Division, such as Division 5 Miscellaneous Metals, or a
39 given Section, such as 15100 Valves, incorporating all items into a single
40 submittal. However, no submittal shall include items from two (or more) different
41 Divisions.
42
43 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify
44 equipment - related submittals for warranties, spare parts, O &M manuals, and
45 training plans separately, or with the specific equipment submittal, or in groups
46 of common items (i.e., O &M manuals, warranties, etc.).
SUBMITTALS
01300 -3 12/31/15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
As specified elsewhere, the Contractor will be required to submit certificates of
proper installation, sign -in sheets for equipment/systems training sessions, and
proof of delivery receipts for O &M manuals and spare parts, however, such
submittals will not count against the total number of submittals specified above.
Similarly, monthly schedule and narrative updates that are submitted with
Applications for Payment will not count against the total number of submittals
specified above.
F. In accordance with Section IIIA, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for
Engineer's cost to review excess submittals and re- submittals and /or
confirmations that exceed a total ten (10) beyond the 48 specified above (total
of 58 submittals, re- submittals and confirmations).
G. Following is an example listing of the anticipated submittals for this project.
1. Schedule of Submittals
2. Surveyor Information
3. Schedule of Values
4. Construction Schedule
5. Schedule of Payments
6. Hurricane Preparedness Plan
7. Project Sign
8. Video Subcontractor and Pre Construction Video
9. NPDES Stormwater Permit
10. FDEP Groundwater Discharge Permit
11. Building Department Permits
12. Dewatering Plan
13. Equipment Training Plan
14. Concrete
15. Concrete Reinforcement
16. Concrete Waterstop
17. Micropiles
18. Grout, Bonding Agents
19. Clarifier Pressure Relief Valves
20. Stone and Geofabric for Groundwater PRVs
21.Aluminum Stairs, Miscellaneous Metals
22. Weir Plates and Baffles
23. Paint and Coatings
24. Scum Pump Equipment
25. Scum Wet Well Modifications
26. Scum Pump O &M Manual & Training Manual
27. DI Pipe, Fittings, Couplings & Accessories
28. C900, C905, PVC Pipe, Accessories, Fittings
29. Pipe Supports
30. Small Diameter Metal Pipe, Fittings & Accessories for Seal Water
SUBMITTALS
01300 -4
12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 31. Gate Valves, all sizes, including O &M Manual
2 32. Telescopic Valves, including O &M Manual
3 33. Check Valves, all sizes, including O &M Manual
4 34. Plug Valves, all sizes, including O &M Manual
5 35. Solenoid Valves
6 36. New Scum Spray Control Panel
7 37. New Scum Pump Control Panel
8 38. Electrical Wiring, Raceways, Cables, Boxes
9 and Fittings
10 39. Electrical Wiring Devices and Supporting Devices
11 40. Electrical Identification and Grounding
12 41. Electrical Motors, Starters, Disconnects
13 42. Surge Protection Devices
14 43. SCADA Drawings and Devices
15 44. Hose Rack
16 45. Startup Schedule and Training Plan
17 46. Final Shop Drawings and O &M Manuals in Electronic Format
18 47. Contract Closeout Submittals
19 48. CIPP
20
21 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
22
23 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values
24 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first
25 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each
26 kind of work in sufficient detail as requested by the Engineer, shall be
27 acceptable to Engineer before any application for payment is prepared or
28 approved.
29
30 B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract
31 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be
32 listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be
33 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. The
34 Schedule of Values shall contain at minimum a complete listing of the various
35 project milestones that are "critical path" items according to the approved
36 construction schedule.
37
38 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, the O &M manuals, as -built
39 drawings, start -up, training, and any other individualized component that the
40 Contractor or Engineer wants separately itemized for payment shall also be
41 included on the Schedule of Values.
42
43 D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor on
44 items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The Schedule
45 of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Engineer. Final
46 acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the Schedule of Values
SUBMITTALS
01300 -5 12/31/15
1 as a basis for preparation of applications for progress payments and shall not
2 constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item.
3
4 E. The minimum items to be included in the schedule of values are listed below:
5 a. Mobilization and Demobilization
6 b. Performance and Payment Bonds and Insurance
7 c. Schedule Submittal
8 d. Schedule of Values Submittal
9 e. Schedule of Shop Drawings Submittal
10 f. Schedule of Pay Applications Submittal
11 g. Dewatering Plan and Laydown Area
12 h. Scum Pump Shop Drawing O &M and Training Submittals
13 i. Pipe and Valve Submittals
14 j. PRV Submittals
15 k. Paint Submittals
16 I. Sludge Blanket Detector Relocation
17 m. East Clarifier Demo
18 n. East Clarifier Floor Repair and PRV Replacement
19 o. East Clarifier Rotating and Ancillary Equipment Installation
20 p. East Clarifier Torque Testing and Startup
21 q. West Clarifier Demo
22 r. West Clarifier Floor Repair and PRV Replacement
23 s. West Clarifier Rotating and Ancillary Equipment Installation
24 t. West Clarifier Torque Testing and Startup
25 u. Scum Pump Wet Well and Valve Box Modification
26 v. Scum Pump Force Main Installation
27 w. Scum Pump Replacement
28 x. Scum Pump Startup
29 y. Replace Telescopic Valves
30 z. Replace Clarifier Drain Valves, Clarifier Influent Valves, and Clarifier
31 Effluent Valves
32 aa. Perform SCADA Integration Work
33 bb. Paint Structures and Piping
34 cc. Pavement, Sidewalk, and Sodded Area Restoration
35 dd. Record Drawings and Contract Closeout Documents
36
37 1.04 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS
38
39 A. Within thirty (30) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to
40 the Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall
41 be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more
42 than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule.
43
44 1.05 SURVEY DATA
45
46 A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing
SUBMITTALS
01300 -6 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for
2 examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be
3 submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final
4 acceptance of the Work.
5
6 1.06 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, WORKING DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING
7 DATA
8
9 A. Shop drawings, working drawings, and engineering data shall be included in the
10 Schedule of Submittals identifying the dates for the initial submission of shop
11 and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and installation of
12 materials, supplies and equipment.
13
14 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing
15 sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable
16 activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections of the
17 Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times
18 including re- review and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other
19 submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced
20 activities.
21
22 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are on the
23 project's critical path schedule, and shall show other submittals spread out over
24 the contract time as required to minimize the number of concurrent reviews as
25 directed by the Engineer.
26
27 D. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will
28 become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for
29 review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in
30 sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of
31 component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and
32 supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for
33 installation and correlation with other materials and equipment.
34
35 1.07 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION
36
37 A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color selection.
38 No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of all other
39 items.
40
41 1. Paint for piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc.
42
43 2. Paint for equipment.
44
SUBMITTALS
01300 -7
12/31/15
1 PART 2 - PRODUCT (NOT USED)
2
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
4
5
6 END OF SECTION
7
SUBMITTALS
01300 -8
12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01310
2
3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
4
5
6 PART 1 — GENERAL
7
8 1.01 GENERAL
9
10 A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction
11 is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The Contractor
12 will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow orderly and
13 timely completion of all the work.
14
15 B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type, and
16 shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA, or equal.
17
18 C. The Contractor is advised that the construction schedule must reflect that no major
19 pieces of equipment or systems may be shut down or started up within one week
20 prior to the toxicity screening and compliance testing events.
21
22 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS
23
24 A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the Contractor
25 shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction progress
26 schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such that no
27 single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract Price. Partial
28 payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress schedule
29 has been approved by the Engineer.
30
31 B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the approved baseline schedule
32 and the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment will be
33 approved until the updated schedule is submitted and approved by the Engineer.
34
35 C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with
36 the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be
37 revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate
38 equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at
39 night.
40
41 D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be
42 responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress
43 and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct
44 project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling
45 the commitments of the Contractor's schedule.
46
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -1 12/31/15
1 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK
2
3 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent any
4 delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at such
5 times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials and
6 equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the
7 Contract.
8
9 B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to
10 carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice
11 to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to be
12 made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the
13 Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The Contractor
14 shall light the different parts of the project as required to comply with all applicable
15 Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements of the
16 municipality in which the work is being done.
17
18 PART 2 — PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
19
20 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
21
22 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical
23 path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into
24 considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the
25 Contract Documents.
26
27 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed
28 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and
29 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning, scheduling,
30 management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities of the
31 Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the Engineer to review Contractor's
32 planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to assist Engineer
33 in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to allow other
34 contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of the
35 Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction schedule"
36 and "cumulative outlay schedule."
37
38 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from the
39 responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor
40 has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of
41 submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific deviations,
42 nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from responsibility for
43 errors and omissions in the submittals.
44
45 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or
46 the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -2 12/31/15
1 and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable
2 time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total
3 float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence
4 diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice to proceed with a
5 change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or (c) detection of a
6 subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) occurrence of cause for
7 an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the schedule, or the allocation of
8 float time to activities by means of special logic restraints or imposed dates, shall
9 be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and his subcontractors
10 and suppliers in proportion of their scope of responsibilities. Excessive use of float
11 time to the detriment of succeeding activities may be cause for denying an
12 extension of time if it can be demonstrated that the float along the network paths
13 affected at the instant of the delaying condition would have been larger than the
14 delay had it not been for the excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation
15 of the sharing concept required by this Specification.
16
17 E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with
18 the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the
19 means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to
20 safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the
21 schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval signed
22 off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule submittals shall
23 constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor, has either
24 determined or verified all data on the submittal, or assumes full responsibility for
25 • doing so, and that Contractor and his subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed
26 and coordinated the sequences shown in the submittal with the requirements of
27 the work under the Contract Documents.
28
29 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
30
31 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time - scaled precedence network format.
32 The graphic network diagram shall include the following format:
33
34 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the scope
35 of work described.
36
37 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to
38 achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion,
39 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of
40 regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication
41 and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as set
42 forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to
43 support pre - operational and start-up testing; time required for the relocation
44 of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with the work
45 of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner.
46
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -3 12/31/15
1
1 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be
2 considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve
3 Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, within the
4 Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the concurred
5 detailed schedule shall give rise only to non - prejudicial delays. Attempts
6 to impose after - the -fact logic constraints where none existed previously to
7 justify time extensions will not be permitted.
8
9 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days.
10
11 5. Graphic diagrams shall be time - scaled and sequenced by work areas. The
12 Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and be
13 shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible and
14 submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a medium
15 suitable for reproduction.
16
17 B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint:
18
19 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity
20 man -days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish
21 date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and
22 total float and free float.
23
24 2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and
25 restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows:
26
27 a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers.
28 b. Activity, sort by department.
29 c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values.
30 d. Successor /predecessor report.
31
32 PART 3 — EXECUTION
33
34 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
35
36 A. Submittal shall include a time - scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract
37 activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial
38 Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the
39 Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date ". Upon
40 receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and discuss
41 an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary revisions
42 resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed schedule
43 resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re- submittal, if agreed
44 to by the Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the concurrence of or at
45 the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by the Contractor for
46 planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If Contractor fails to
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -4 12/31/15
1
1
I 1 provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be deemed not to have
2 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will further
3 constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment.
I 4
5 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A) above.
6 The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major areas of work.
I 7 The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim
8 dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the graphics diagram.
9
I 10 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout reports
11 and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling
12 requirements.
I 13
14 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's
15 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints plugged
I 16
17 into the schedule, and provide a "what -if' analysis pertaining to potential problems
and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require additional data, this
18 information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten calendar days.
19
I20 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS
21
22 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall submit
1 23 to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status Report (based
24 on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the pay period. The
25 monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the currently accepted
I 26 graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report
27 will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall address the Engineer's
28 comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to provide
I 29 acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have provided a
30 basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to
31 recommend progress payments.
I 32
33 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram,
34 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and
I 35
36 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the
currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual dates
37 will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised diagram by the
I 38
39 Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the time frames,
duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the corresponding data
40 as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order shall govem.
1 41
42 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a
43 narrative form:
44
I45 1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule)
46 including:
1
1
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -5 12/31/15
1
1
1 1 2 a. Activities completed this reporting period;
3 b. Activities in progress this reporting period;
4 c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period. '
5
6 2. Description of problem areas
7
8 3. Current and anticipated delays
9
10 a. Cause of the delay;
I
11 b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay;
12 c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on
13 completion dates. I
14
15 4. Changes in construction sequence
16 1 17 5. Pending items and status thereof
18
19 a. Permits
I20 b. Change Orders
21 c. Time extensions
22 d. Other
23
1
24 6. Contract completion date status
25
26 a. Ahead of schedule and number of days
I
27 b. Behind schedule and number of days
28
29 3.03 REVISIONS
II
30
31 A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as
32 the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons for I
33 such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The revision
34 shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as -built conditions.
35 Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly meetings. Changes
I
36 to activities having adequate float shall be considered a minor change.
37
38 B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when required I
39 by Engineer, for one of the following reasons:
40
41 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in the
42 Agreement or alters the length of a critical path.
43
44 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a
I45 critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents.
46
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -6 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer
2 requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned progress,
3 Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with change
4 effect(s) incorporated as directed. Approved interim revisions to the documents
5 will be incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status Report.
6
7 3.04 START -UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
8
9 A. At least 60 calendar days prior to the date when the first two clarifiers are
10 scheduled to be placed in service, and at least 60 calendar days prior to the date
11 of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall submit time - scaled (days after notice
12 to proceed) graphic diagrams detailing the work to take place in the time period
13 between 30 calendar days prior to when the first two clarifiers are scheduled to be
14 placed in service, and 30 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial
15 Completion, together with a supporting narrative in the same format as the
16 approved project schedule. Engineer shall respond within 10 calendar days after
17 receipt of the submittal. Upon receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall
18 make the necessary revisions and submit the revised schedule within ten calendar
19 days. If Contractor fails to provide acceptable Start -up Schedule Submittals, he
20 will be deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be
21 evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to recommend payment.
22
23 B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The
24 Start-up Schedule shall show much greater detail than the Detailed Schedule for
25 start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not limited to, the
26 tinning of vendor representatives, pre -op testing, individual equipment start-ups,
27 Owner's training, and performance certification testing.
28
29 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for those
30 activities completed ahead of the last 30 calendar days prior to when the first two
31 cllarifiers are scheduled to be placed in service, and 30 calendar days prior to the
32 date of Substantial Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining period
33 within the time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule.
34
35 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as
36 outlined above. In preparing these reports, Contractor must assure that the
37 Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in the Start -up Schedule.
38
39 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start -up
40 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start -up narrative. This revised diagram
41 shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, and
42 remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the
43 accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that
44 contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of
45 these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with
46 the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
01310 -7 12/31/15
1
1
1 1
2 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
3
4 A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation and
I
5 updated schedule data that any milestone and /or Contract completion date will not
6 be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work back on
7 schedule. Actions could include: I
8
9 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to
10 substantially eliminate the backlog of work; I
11
12 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work
13 days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any I
14 combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the
15 backlog of work; and
16 1 17 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment.
18
19 B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours or
I20 any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed Schedule
21 shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered justification for a
22 Change Order or treated as an acceleration order.
23
I
24 END SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES I
01310 -8 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01340
2
3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings,
10 shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter
11 in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section
12 called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but not
13 limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for
14 materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the
15 Contract Drawings.
16
17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in other
18 sections of these Specifications, including the requirement to submit and have
19 approved a Schedule of Shop Drawing Submittals prior to the submittal of any
20 other shop drawing, as described in Section 01300.
21
22 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
23
24 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be
25 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will
26 become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and
27 detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting
28 drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of
29 material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including
30 performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work.
31
32 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the
33 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure
34 and /or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field
35 measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the shop
36 drawings before being submitted for review.
37
38 1.03 PRODUCT DATA
39
40 A. F'roduct data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily
41 limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes
42 referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product specification
43 and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, manufacturer's
44 printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing -in diagrams and
45 templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -1 06/24/14
1
1
1 performance curves and operational -range diagrams, production or quality
I
2 control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product
3 operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare -parts listing
4 storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as applicable to the work.
I
5
6 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS
7
8 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be
9 considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such as
10 temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities,
I
11 ground water control systems, forming and falsework for underpinning; and for
12 such other work such as bypass and dewatering plans as may be required for
13 construction but does not become an integral part of the Project. I
14
15 B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional
16 Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be I
17 accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely
18 explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner of
19 use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been
I20 reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for
21 general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his
22 responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks
23 of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall have
I
24 no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work.
25
26 1.05 SAMPLES
I
27
28 A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by
29 the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be
I
30 delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes as
31 specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted unless
32 otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on
I
33 samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be
34 used in work until reviewed by the Engineer.
35 I 36 B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily limited
37 to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or
38 fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of I
39 repetitively -used products, color /texture /pattern swatches and range sets,
40 specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work
41 to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, as I
42 applicable to the Work.
43
44 C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample,
I45 shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES I
01340 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the characteris-
2 tics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to change or modify
3 any Contract requirements.
4
5 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
6
7 A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable promptness
8 and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract Work or in the
9 Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop drawings, product data,
10 working drawings and samples required by the Contract Documents.
11
12 B. It is intended that all shop drawing be submitted electronically using email,
13 however, when electronic submittals cannot be made, the Contractor shall
14 submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the shop drawing, plus the number of
15 copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and
16 electronically return to the Contractor appropriate review comments and /or
17 marked -up copies of the shop drawings if applicable.
18
19 C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be
20 transmitted using a form provided by the Engineer and furnished with the
21 following information:
22
23 1. Number and title of the drawing.
24
25 2. Date of drawing or revision.
26
27 3. Name of project building, facility or system.
28
29 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting
30 drawing.
31
32 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet
33 numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings.
34
35 6. Contractor Certification Statement.
36
37 7. Submittal Identification Number.
38
39 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference.
40
41 9. Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents.
42
43 D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's standard
44 product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or equal"
45 basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements because of
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -3 06/24/14
1 standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall describe such
2 variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings along with
3 notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, proper
4 adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If the
5 Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the
6 responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even
7 though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not
8 described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the Contractor
9 will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless specifically
10 noted and then approved as such in writing by the Engineer.
11
12 E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists
13 giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or
14 manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all other
15 pertinent data.
16
17 F. For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a
18 single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone
19 number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that
20 service and /or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance
21 and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as
22 specified in Section 01730.
23
24 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the
25 Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals.
26
27 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
28
29 A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all
30 trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him before
31 submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every drawing or data
32 sheet 11 "x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp showing that they have
33 been so checked and approved. Drawings or data sheets 11 "x17" and smaller
34 shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the Contractor's stamp
35 on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and
36 include a list of all sheet numbers within the package. Shop drawings submitted
37 to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor,
38 without review at the Engineer's option.
39
40 B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to
41 submission to determine and verify the following:
42
43 1. Field measurements.
44
45 2. Field construction criteria.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data.
3
4 4. Conformance with Specifications.
5
6 C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the
7 requirements of the Contract Documents.
8
9 D. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to
10 transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.
11
12 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned,
13 "Confirm" or "Rejected- Resubmit ". Before starting this work, all revisions must
14 be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be reviewed and
15 returned by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make
16 Corrections Noted ", the Contractor may begin this work. Any corrections made
17 to these shop drawings shall be followed without exception.
18
19 F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data
20 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide not less than
21 twenty -one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the Engineer
22 receives them.
23
24 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost that may result from
25 the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior to
26 review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings.
27
28 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by
29 subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking.
30 The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the
31 approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials
32 and project completion. •
33
34 I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data,
35 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members,
36 materials, and details to satisfy him that they are in conformance to the Contract
37 Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error shall
38 be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission to the
39 Engineer.
40
41 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING
42 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
43
44 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and
45 contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -5 06/24/14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications
or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and
accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades,
for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for
performing work in a safe manner.
B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review
shall not be construed as:
1. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
2. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details,
dimensions, and materials;
3. Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as
otherwise provided herein.
C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and
show a departure from the Contract Documents, which Engineer finds to be in
the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in
Contract Price or Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without
noting an exception.
D. Shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following:
"NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or
comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may
release the equipment and /or material for manufacture.
"MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments
have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as compared
with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not necessary
prior to release for manufacturing.
"EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" or "CONFIRM" is assigned when a confirmation of
the notations and comments is required from the Contractor. The Contractor
may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations
and comments must be incorporated into the final product addressing the
omissions and /or nonconforming items that were noted. Only the items to be
"confirmed" need to be resubmitted.
"REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal is in noncompliance
with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and the entire package
resubmitted. This code generally means that the equipment or material cannot
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -6 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 be released for manufacture unless the Contractor takes full responsibility for
2 providing the submitted items in accordance with Contract Documents.
3 "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides
4 information of a general nature that may or may not require a response.
5
6 E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On
7 resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the
8 transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or
9 other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the
10 Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that are not clearly
11 identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make
12 corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in
13 accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the Engineer.
14
15 F. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to
16 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give written
17 notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to release
18 for manufacture.
19
20 G. The number of shop drawings the Engineer will review is limited as described
21 in Section IIIA. The Contractor will be back charged for costs incurred by the
22 Engineer from excessive shop drawing submittals or resubmittals as described
23 in Section IIIA
24
25 H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the
26 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance
27 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written
28 instruction from the Engineer.
29
30 I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge as
31 to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to
32 the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or mark the
33 submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete.
34
35 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
36
37 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS
38
39 A. Final approved shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format, organized
40 by submittal number, on CD.
41
42 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
46
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -7 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
01340 -8 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01385
2
3 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. Scope
10
11 The Contractor shall prepare color audio /video DVDs of all work areas within 20
12 days of the Notice to Proceed. These specifications shall supplement the
13 Owner's color audio -video construction records requirements, if any, and the
14 more stringent shall apply.
15
16 B. Requirements Included
17
18 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color
19 audio /video DVD recording taken of the entire Project, including access to the
20 sate of the work. Streets, easements, rights -of way, lots or construction sites
21 within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre- construction
22 conditions. One copy of the DVD recordings and video log shall be submitted
23 to the Owner. The Engineer will designate those areas, if any, to be omitted
24 from or added to the audio - visual coverage. All DVDs and written records shall
25 become the property of the Owner.
26
27 C. Scheduling
28
29 No construction shall begin prior to review of the DVDs covering the Project
30 construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owner will have the authority to reject
31 all or any portion of video DVD not conforming to specifications and order that
32 it be redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall reschedule
33 unacceptable coverage within seven days after being notified.
34
35 D. Videographer Qualifications
36
37 The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer known
38 to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction color
39 audio -video DVD documentation. The videographer, through the Contractor,
40 shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment to be used for the audio -video
41 recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model number, specifications and other
42 pertinent information.
43
44 Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and
45 addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color audio -
46 video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12 months.
COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385 -1 06/24/14
1 Engineer's approval of the selected videographer is required prior to taking first
2 audio -video DVD.
3
4 E. Equipment
5
6 The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to
7 perform this service. The total audio -video system shall reproduce bright,
8 sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion,
9 tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the
10 recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper
11 volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances,
12 audio -video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional
13 wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. The color video
14 camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and shall have EIA
15 Standard NTSC type color - 1.0V 75 OHMS. Video output from camera shall
16 be capable of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and utilize a minimum
17 of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick -up element for optimum color
18 imagery plus minimum lag through of one foot candle. The recording shall be
19 made with Industrial Grade recorder. The recordings shall be high resolution,
20 extended still frame capable, in color. The recorded video DVDs shall be
21 compatible for playback with any American TV Standard DVD player.
22
23 F. Recorded Information, Audio
24
25 Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by
26 the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying
27 the video recording of each video DVD shall be a corresponding and
28 simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively
29 containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer
30 orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or
31 objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the
32 recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations.
33
34 G. Recorded Information, Video
35
36 All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to
37 include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the
38 month, day and year. The time information shall contain the actual hour,
39 minutes and seconds of the day. Additional information shall be displayed
40 periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
41 contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent
42 information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen.
43 Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall be sufficiently controlled
44 such that recorded objects are clearly viewed during video DVD playback. In
45 addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus
46 and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus
COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The
2 construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode.
3
4 H. Viewer Orientation
5
6 The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation.
7 To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business
8 addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location
9 will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer, highly visible yellow flags
10 shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the
11 proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are
12 used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between
13 the camera Tens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be
14 firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process
15 will not cause an unsteady picture.
16
17 I. Lighting
18
19 All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall be
20 done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when
21 sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and
22 to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects.
23
24 J. Speed of Travel
25
26 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be
27 directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within
28 that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general
29 direction of travel of any vehicle used during recording of a linear project site
30 shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
31
32 K. Video Log /Index
33
34 All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by
35 video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of that
36 video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage
37 contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets or location of
38 easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit
39 counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably
40 available) and the date.
41
42 L. Area of Coverage
43
44 DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of
45 influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such
46 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks,
COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385 -3 06/24/14
1 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts,
2 fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the
3 area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any
4 faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited to one side of the
5 site, street, easement or right -of -way at any one time.
6
7 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
8 (NOT USED)
9
10 PART 3 — EXECUTION
11
12 3.01 GENERAL
13
14 A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the pre -
15 construction video with the Owner /Engineer and identify any work needed to
16 restore the site to pre- construction conditions.
17
18
19 END OF SECTION
COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
01385 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01410
2
3 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing
10 Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction)
11 specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the
12 Specifications or at any other time Contractor elects to have materials and
13 equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.
14
15 1. Contractor shall coordinate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution
16 of its required services.
17
18 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's
19 obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.
20
21 B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.)
22 required in the specifications.
23
24 1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
25
26 A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
27
28 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract
29 Documents.
30 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
31
32 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
33
34 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
35
36 A. Coordinate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to
37 Manufacturer's operations.
38
39 B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational
40 samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
41
42 C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for
43 concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing
44 laboratory.
45
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410 -1 07/15/14
1 D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract
2 are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication.
3 Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the
4 Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide
5 statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the
6 materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in
7 full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship
8 indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing
9 statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor,
10 and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing
11 and certification.
12
13 E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
14
15 1. To provide access to work to be tested.
16
17 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the
18 product to be tested.
19
20 3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
21
22 4. For storage and curing of test samples.
23
24 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in
25 advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment
26 of personnel and scheduling of tests.
27
28 G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified
29 independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and
30 testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as reviewed by the
31 Engineer.
32
33 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
34
35 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410 -2 07/15/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01500
2
3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as provided
10 herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others performing work or
11 furnishing services on the Project.
12
13 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained
14 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the
15 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at
16 least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. The Contractor shall
17 enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.
18
19 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
20
21 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public
22 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
23 obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private,
24 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or
25 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private travel,
26 and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before interfering
27 with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be maintained at all
28 times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required when Contractor has
29 obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private property, or from the
30 authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at
31 the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall perform the Work in
32 accordance with the permits and easement agreements.
33
34 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design
35 Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic Regulations
36 shall be followed.
37
38 C. In making open -cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than
39 one -half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the
40 shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing shall
41 be provided as necessary on shoulders.
42
43 1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
44
45 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to
46 traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500 -1 06/24/14
1 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest
2 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
3
4 B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs,
5 and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as
6 material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and
7 lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction
8 area.
9
10 C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from
11 sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside
12 public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and
13 inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other
14 protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with
15 applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights -
16 of -way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof.
17
18 D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends and
19 holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme weather
20 conditions.
21
22 1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
23
24 A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground
25 pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or
26 otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing,
27 driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other
28 surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod and
29 shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original condition,
30 whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with
31 new materials.
32
33 1.05 PARKING
34
35 A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all
36 construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in
37 connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal
38 vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or
39 construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the
40 Engineer.
41
42 1.06 DUST CONTROL
43
44 A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth
45 surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a
46 chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500 -2 06/24/14
1
1
I 1
2 covered when practicable to prevent blowing.
3 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be
I 4 adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument
5 panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper
6 ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
I 7
8 1.07 SWEEPING
9
I 10
11 A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of each
workday.
12
I 13 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL
14
15 A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary
I 16 wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction
17 activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse
18 other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other substance will be
19 permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures will be taken to
I20 prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse.
21
22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
I 23
24 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
25
I 26
27 END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500 -3 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01505
2
3 MOBILIZATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE
8
9 A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds;
10 moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants,
11 temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the
12 proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, but
13 not be limited to, the following principal items:
14
15 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's
16 operations.
17
18 2.. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
19
20 3.. Establish fire protection plan and safety program.
21
22 4.. Secure construction water supply.
23
24 5.. Provide on -site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities.
25
26 6.. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and
27 employees' parking facilities.
28
29 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
30
31 8. Obtain all required permits.
32
33 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor,
34 and all other required notices.
35
36 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time.
37
38 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer.
39
40 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s).
41
42 13. Submit a finalized schedule of values and schedule of payments
43 acceptable to the Owner.
44
45 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals.
46
MOBILIZATION
01505 -1 06/24/14
1 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads.
2
3 16. Provide a continuous color audio - videotape recording of existing
4 conditions.
5
6 PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used)
7
8 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
MOBILIZATION
01505 -2
06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01510
2
3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction,
10 remove on completion of Work.
11
12 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
13
14 A. Comply with National Electric Code.
15
16 B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility
17 company requirements.
18
19 C. Comply with Local City and County Health Department Regulations.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
22
23 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
24
25 A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required
26 usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of
27 applicable codes and standards.
28
29 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
30
31 A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power
32 and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the construction,
33 testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner.
34 All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent power shall be at
35 Contractor expense.
36
37 B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not
38 adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public.
39
40 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
41
42 A. Arrange with local telephone service- company to provide direct line telephone
43 service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees.
44
45 B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges.
46
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510 -1 06/24/14
1 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site
2 superintendent(s) and for all foremen when the site superintendent is not on-
3 site
4
5 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER
6
7 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply system
8 a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements.
9
10 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the backflow
11 preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during
12 construction.
13
14 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
15
16 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
17
18 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
19
20 PART 3 — EXECUTION
21
22 3.01 GENERAL
23
24 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
25
26 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
27
28 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities.
29
30 3.02 REMOVAL
31
32 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
33 longer required as determined by the Engineer.
34
35 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
36 facilities.
37
38
39 END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01510 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01600
2
3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall:
10
11 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
12
13 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically
14 approved in writing by the Engineer.
15
16 B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
17
18 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and
19 shop practices.
20
21 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges,
22 to be interchangeable.
23
24 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same
25 manufacturer.
26
27 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
28
29 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be
30 adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
31
32 C. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is
33 designed or is specified.
34
35 1.02 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
36
37 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the
38 inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the
39 work without prior review of the Engineer.
40
41 B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment
42 shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to
43 beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit
44 samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demonstrate
45 that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be furnished, stored,
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 -1 09/21/15
1 packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's expense. Except as
2 otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for and pay for the tests.
3
4 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit
5 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in the
6 work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples or
7 data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or the
8 Engineer.
9
10 D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the
11 approved samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for review.
12
13 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION
14
15 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
16 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such
17 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the
18 Engineer.
19
20 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation
21 and until completion.
22
23 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord
24 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
25
26 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with
27 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions.
28
29 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
30
31 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any
32 preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or
33 exempted by Contract Documents.
34
35 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
36
37 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules,
38 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
39
40 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original
41 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
42
43 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with
44 requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that
45 Products are properly protected and undamaged.
46
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 -2 09/21/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent
2 soiling or damage to Products or packaging.
3
4 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
5
6 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather - protected storage structure
7 providing a clean, dry, non - corrosive environment for all mechanical equipment,
8 valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and
9 special equipment to be incorporated into this project. Storage of equipment
10 shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each
11 equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing
12 of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of
13 the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer prior to storage of all
14 equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or deteriorated equipment and
15 parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and
16 materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate.
17
18 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
19 intact and legible.
20
21 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight
22 enclosures.
23
24 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by
25 manufacturer's instructions.
26
27 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent
28 soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with
29 impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid
30 condensation.
31
32 4. Store loose granular materials in a well- drained area on solid surfaces to
33 prevent mixing with foreign matter.
34
35 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and
36 stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to
37 prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury,
38 theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.
39
40 D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall
41 be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and reinforcing steel
42 shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or
43 grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to
44 minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be handled and stored in a
45 manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 -3 09/21/15
1 cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored
2 in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum.
3
4 E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as
5 to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the
6 site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the
7 damaged material or its removal.
8
9 F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make
10 periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained
11 under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.
12
13 G. Protection After Installation:
14
15 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products
16 from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations.
17 Remove covering when no longer needed.
18
19 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies
20 sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the
21 work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material,
22 equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final
23 inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional
24 cost to the Owner.
25
26 I. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of
27 equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to
28 do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies
29 noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated
30 with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be
31 comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical,
32 engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary
33 corrections.
34
35 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
36
37 A. Contractor's Options:
38
39 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product
40 meeting that standard.
41
42 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers,
43 submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which
44 complies with the specifications.
45
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 -4 09/21/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers
2 and "or equal ", Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions for
3 any product or manufacturer not specifically named.
4
5 B. Substitutions:
6
7 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider
8 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.
9
10 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete
11 data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
12
13 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that
14 specified.
15
16 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the
17 substitution.
18
19 c. Effect on the construction schedule.
20
21 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product
22 specified.
23
24 e. Any required license fees or royalties.
25
26 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement
27 materials.
28
29 3. The Engineer shall solely determine the acceptability of the proposed
30 substitution.
31
32 C. Contractor's Representation:
33
34 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor:
35
36 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is
37 equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
38
39 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as
40 for the product specified.
41
42 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the
43 Work, and make such other changes as may be required to make
44 the Work complete in all respects.
45
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 -5 09/21/15
1 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility,
2 which may subsequently become apparent.
3 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS
4
5 A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools
6 (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal
7 adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their
8 use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and
9 instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract.
10
11 1.08 WARRANTY
12
13 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
14 manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty
15 period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's warranty.
16
17 1.09 SPARE PARTS
18
19 A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent sections
20 of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts so
21 required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor
22 shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment
23 they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the
24 delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be
25 furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost.
26
27 1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL
28
29 A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with
30 the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of
31 required lubricants including grease and oil of the type recommended by the
32 manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied.
33
34 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and
35 intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break -in of the
36 equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of operation.
37
38 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
39
40 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
41
42 END OF SECTION
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
01600 -6 09/21/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01625
2
3 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Prior to requesting a Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall
10 perform start -up testing services as specified herein.
11
12 B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all
13 structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing systems.
14 All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were ready for
15 use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall provide a
16 written startup plan, for review by the Engineer, for individual facilities and
17 systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance with the
18 construction phasing plan described in Section 01310 Construction Schedules.
19
20 C. The Engineer will attend the start-up of up to three (3) systems. It is anticipated
21 that the Engineer will attend one start-up related to the East clarifier (max. 4
22 hrs.), one start-up related to the West clarifier (max. 4 hrs.) and one start-up for
23 the new scum pump. The Contractor may schedule the various systems start-
24 up differently, but shall limit the total number of systems start-ups to the
25 maximum number indicated above. Systems start-up must be completed for all
26 equipment and systems for which the Contractor may request substantial
27 completion.
28
29 D. All equipment will be tested, approved, and accepted by the Engineer prior to
30 placement of the new facilities into operation.
31
32 E. All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and tests
33 shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
34
35 F In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of
36 equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory
37 certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these
38 Specifications. Such representatives shall instruct the operating personnel of
39 the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the equipment, conduct tests,
40 and make recommendations for producing the most efficient results. These
41 services shall be made during the initial operation of the completed facilities and
42 be in addition to services necessary during erection or to correct defective
43 materials or workmanship during the guarantee period. These representatives
44 shall be specially trained and qualified to provide installation services,
45 adjustment, start-up, and testing work and shall not be sales representatives
46 only. The cost of such representation, including subsistence and travel, shall
47 be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
48
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -1 12/31/15
1 G. Equipment or systems start-up shall not be permitted until all applicable O &M
2 Manuals have been submitted and approved, all applicable spare parts have
3 been turned over to the City, all applicable training requirements have been
4 fulfilled, and all manufacturers' certifications of proper installation have been
5 received as described elsewhere in these Specifications. The Contractor shall
6 submit electronic copies of all relevant transmittals as proof of documentation
7 for these items.
8
9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
10
11 PART 3 — EXECUTION
12
13 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
14
15 A. General Requirements:
16
17 1. Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate
18 satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and
19 performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the
20 Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion.
21
22 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least thirty
23 (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details of all
24 test procedures to the Engineer for review, comment, and approval. Test
25 procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with
26 Specification Sections 01310 and 01340. This notification shall be
27 shown on the Progress Schedule.
28
29 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten (10)
30 working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests and
31 inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday
32 through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the Engineer.
33
34 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of
35 equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor
36 make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time
37 when the Owner takes over the operation thereof.
38
39 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all
40 necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to
41 facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start-
42 up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner.
43
44 B. Preparation for Systems Start-Up:
45
46 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that
47 each component is in good working order and properly installed and
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -2 12/31/15
1 connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks,
2 basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically checked
3 shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water
4 testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and flushed shall
5 be drained clean.
6
7 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full
8 operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for proper
9 operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made and
10 confirmed by the specific factory authorized service representative.
11
12 3. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to
13 complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and
14 preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and /or system
15 operation.
16
17 4. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
18 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in
19 good working order.
20
21 5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has
22 verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved
23 equipment Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished as
24 specified.
25
26 6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified
27 technician for that particular component has confirmed that all lubricants,
28 electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems have been
29 provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
30 recommendations.
31
32 7. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Contractor has
33 submitted and the Engineer has approved the manufacturer's Certificate
34 of Proper Installation.
35
36 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS
37
38 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract
39 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All
40 tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the
41 presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent.
42
43 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the
44 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for
45 Installation of Cast Iron /Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C -600, Concrete
46 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -3 12/31/15
1 (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C -605, except as
2 herein modified.
3
4 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for
5 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall
6 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after
7 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise
8 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the
9 Contractor.
10
11 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and
12 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will
13 be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall
14 be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be
15 tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor shall
16 coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in order
17 that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are valves
18 on the water supply system to be operated without the prior authorization of the
19 Engineer.
20
21 E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5 times
22 the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The duration of
23 each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours.
24
25 F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges,
26 compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required
27 for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional
28 cost to the Owner.
29
30 G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow -offs and joints shall be
31 carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage shall
32 be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall
33 be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor with new components
34 at no additional cost to the Owner.
35
36 H. The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall open
37 up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks.
38
39 I. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by
40 the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to
41 meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test
42 requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at
43 the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
44
45 J. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than the
46 allowable leakage as determined by the formula below:
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -4 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 L = SD(P)(25
3 133,200
4
5 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length
6 of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" is
7 the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch,
8 gauge.
9 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized
10 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for
11 performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants,
12 fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes
13 shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work.
14
15 L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance
16 notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests.
17
18 3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES
19
20 A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and
21 cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed
22 and approved. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable
23 requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter.
24
25 B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this
26 Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA
27 Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written
28 authorization from the Engineer.
29
30 1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas -water mixture shall be applied by means
31 of a solution -feed chlorination device. The device must provide a means
32 to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.
33
34 2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent
35 calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be
36 prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line.
37
38 C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of the
39 pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the
40 newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine- bearing water
41 into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the valve
42 controlling the flow into the pipeline extension.
43
44 D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be
45 controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -5 12/31/15
1 application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in
2 the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water.
3
4 E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after which
5 the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg /I. Should the initial
6 procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination procedure
7 shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the Contractor's
8 expense.
9
10 F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and
11 provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated
12 location as directed by the Engineer.
13
14 G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the line,
15 at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon testing,
16 is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution system.
17
18 H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping
19 systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines.
20 At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the
21 presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer.
22
23 I. After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall
24 be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to
25 the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If
26 repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the
27 disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of
28 contamination. Final approval of the bacterial samples shall be received prior
29 to placing the system into operation.
30
31 J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water
32 pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the
33 work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance.
34
35 3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES
36
37 A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of the
38 work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference with
39 the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 72
40 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer shall witness
41 such tests.
42
43 B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing, and
44 tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the observation of
45 the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring devices shall be
46 new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all other
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -6 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel, meters and
2 gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for making leakage
3 tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing, and removing
4 testing equipment and placing in service.
5
6 C. Air Leakage Test
7
8 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter and
9 smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on pre- wetted
10 pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with clear water
11 and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe walls are pre -
12 wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24 hours after filling
13 the sewer section to be tested.
14
15 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air
16 pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this
17 pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system
18 reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an
19 approved rotometer.
20
21 3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of interior
22 pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm when
23 the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When the
24 groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level
25 adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss shall be reduced 6
26 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert.
27
28 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving,
29 gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air
30 testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to
31 prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig.
32
33 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage
34 or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have
35 been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's
36 authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the installed
37 materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test in
38 accordance with ASTM C1244 -93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage, it
39 shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the
40 Owner.
41
42 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount,
43 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located
44 and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot
45 be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the
46 original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results.
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -7 12/31/15
1
2 3.05 SYSTEM START -UP
3
4 A. Contractor Responsibilities
5
6 1. The Contractor shall provide notice in writing to the Engineer ten (10)
7 days in advance of his intent to perform systems start-up.
8
9 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment,
10 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer.
11
12 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test
13 equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc.,
14 as directed by the Engineer.
15
16 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the
17 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any temporary
18 utilities or construction aids required.
19
20 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other
21 separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that
22 any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in
23 proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
24
25 B. Start-Up Tests
26
27 1. Start-Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the
28 following:
29
30 a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing,
31 manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in
32 accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested.
33
34 b. The Contractor shall fill all pipes and /or tanks with water, in an
35 approved manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air
36 from all high points.
37
38 c. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate
39 the operation of all equipment and facilities including all
40 instrumentation and controls and all manual and automatic control
41 systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for calibrating and
42 verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. The Contractor shall
43 demonstrate the proper operation of all auto - shutdown features
44 and standby power systems or devices.
45
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -8 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects
2 of the Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and
3 all hardware and software furnished. If applicable, the Contractor
4 shall also demonstrate the full integration of the SCADA System
5 with the Owner's existing network. The Contractor shall make
6 modifications to the existing HMI screens as required or as
7 directed by the Engineer for a fully functional system.
8
9 e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the Contractor
10 shall demonstrate automatic controlled operation of the
11 equipment and facilities over a period of not Tess than 72 hours of
12 continuous successful operation.
13
14 f. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests
15 outside of those previously described as may be required by the
16 manufacturers for all equipment, pumps and control valves.
17
18 g. Data records shall be kept by the Contractor. This information
19 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the test
20 period.
21
22 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on
23 the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary altera-
24 tions, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is again
25 ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall be
26 started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the
27 facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Engineer, for
28 the specified test duration.
29
30
31 END OF SECTION
32
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -9 12/31/15
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING
01625 -10 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01640
2
3 QUALITY CONTROL
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
8
9 A. Quality assurance and control of installation.
10
11 B. References.
12
13 C. Field samples.
14
15 D. Mock -up.
16
17 E. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
18
19 F. Manufacturers' field services and reports.
20
21 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
22
23 A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
24
25 B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and
26 Certificates.
27
28 C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services.
29
30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE /CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
31
32 A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
33 conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
34
35 B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
36
37 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
38 clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
39
40 D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when
41 more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher
42 standards or more precise workmanship.
43
44 E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
45
46 F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized
QUALITY CONTROL
01640 -1 04/24/14
1 to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
2
3 1.04 REFERENCES
4
5 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids.
6
7 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
8 clarification for Engineer before proceeding.
9
10 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered
11 from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any
12 reference document.
13
14 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
15
16 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections
17 for review.
18
19 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
20
21 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
22 after field sample has been accepted by Engineer.
23
24 1.06 MOCK -UP
25
26 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.
27
28 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage
29 devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
30
31 C. Where mock -up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
32 after mock -up has been accepted by Engineer.
33
34 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
35
36 A. Contractor shall employ, and pay for the services of an independent firm to
37 perform inspection and testing.
38
39 B. The independent firm shall perform inspections, tests, and other services
40 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer.
41
42 C. Reports shall be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in duplicate,
43 indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or
44 non - compliance with Contract Documents.
45
46 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
QUALITY CONTROL
01640 -2 04/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
2
3 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for
4 operations requiring services.
5
6 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional
7 samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
8
9 E. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall
10 be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Engineer.
11
12 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
13
14 A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required
15 observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of Engineer and Owner.
16
17 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product
18 suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
19 conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,
20 start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and
21 to initiate instructions when necessary.
22
23 C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
24 applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'
25 written instructions.
26
27 D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review.
28
29 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
30
31 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
35
QUALITY CONTROL
01640 -3 04/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
QUALITY CONTROL
01640 -4 04/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01670
2
3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. General:
10
11 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
12 and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission,
13 processing and handling of requests for substitution and product options.
14 See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any substitution
15 or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract Documents, and
16 completely coordinated with work of other trades.
17
18 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all
19 supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
20 incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
21
22 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General
23 Conditions for additional information.
24
25 B. Procedure:
26
27 1. For equipment and materials that are listed in the proposal, observe
28 procedures outlined in Section V.
29
30 2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or
31 specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe
32 procedures outlined in these specifications.
33
34 C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and
35 samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and
36 transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or
37 Engineer.
38
39 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL:
40
41 A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
42
43 B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications
44 by means of trade names and catalog numbers and /or manufacturer's names.
45 Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from consideration such types
46 of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog numbers
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670 -1
06/24/14
1 and /or manufacturer's names, capable of accomplishing purpose of types of
2 equipment or kinds of material specifically indicated.
3
4 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner
5 and Engineer.
6
7 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not
8 specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed
9 upon by Owner.
10
11 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted.
12
13 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION:
14
15 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will
16 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other
17 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after
18 the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as
19 specified below.
20
21 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items
22 unless specifically approved otherwise.
23
24 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
25
26 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed
27 by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for
28 substitution is initiated.
29
30 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
31 Contract Documents.
32
33 3. For Products:
34
35 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including
36 manufacturer's name.
37
38 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type,
39 size, and options to be considered:
40
41 1) Product Description
42 2) Performance and test data
43 3) Reference standards
44 4) Difference in power demand
45 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit
46
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right
2 to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for
3 comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of
4 samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible
5 for loss of or damage to samples.
6
7 d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used,
8 date of installation, and field performance data on installation.
9
10 4. For construction methods:
11
12 a. Detailed description of proposed method.
13
14 b. Drawings illustrating methods.
15
16 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method
17 specified.
18
19 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
20
21 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product
22 or method specified.
23
24 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in
25 contract time or amount.
26
27 D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item,
28 Supplier /Manufacturer represents:
29
30 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has
31 determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, and
32 that it will perform function for which it is intended.
33
34 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or
35 method specified.
36
37 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include
38 but not be limited to the following:
39
40 a. Building and structure modifications as necessary;
41
42 b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change;
43
44 c. Piping, vaiving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation
45 changes, and
46
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670 -3 06/24/14
1 d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects
2 to permit incorporation of substitution into project.
3
4 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which
5 subsequently become apparent.
6
7 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative consideration
8 will be given within two weeks after request is received.
9
10 F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract price
11 or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order will be
12 issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an alternate does
13 not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order shall be issued.
14
15 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons:
16
17 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or
18 building spaces.
19
20 2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or
21 will not adequately perform function for which intended.
22
23 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this
24 specification section.
25
26 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY
27
28 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy,
29 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are
30 reasons for substitution after Contract award.
31
32 B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes
33 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution
34 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays.
35
36 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above.
37
38 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
39
40 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
01670 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01700
2
3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications
10 for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.
11
12 B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O &M Manuals
13
14 1. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and
15 Operations and Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf' format for all
16 equipment furnished under all Specification Sections in Divisions 11, 12,
17 13, 14, 15 and 16.
18
19 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and
20 Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section
21 number, and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CDROM).
22
23 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
24
25 A. When Contractor considers the Work, or portion thereof, to be substantially
26 complete, he shall submit to the Engineer:
27
28 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is
29 substantially complete.
30
31 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected.
32
33 B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make an
34 inspection to determine the status of completion.
35
36 C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete:
37
38 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the
39 reasons therefore.
40
41 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second
42 written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer.
43
44 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work.
45
46 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will:
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 -1 06/24/14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
1
1
1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial
Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
before final payment.
2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in 1
General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work
substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the
Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised
tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION 1
A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit written
certification that:
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
1
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's
representative and are operational. 1
5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
B. The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with
reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification.
C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1
1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the
incomplete or defective work.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies,
and send a second written certification to the Engineer that the Work is
complete.
3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. ,
D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract
Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.04 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE ,
2
3 A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the
4 warranty period for equipment, the Owner may accept portions of process
5 systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be allowed for a complete
6 process system only, or combination of process systems working together, and
7 the Owner shall only consider for partial Substantial Completion those systems
8 as specified herein.
9
10 B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner
11 accepting partial Substantial Completion of a system. Owner shall accept
12 stand -alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial
13 acceptance.
14
15 1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial
16 start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up
17 and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11.
18
19 2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the operation
20 of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications outlined in
21 Division 11 and Section 01820.
22
23 3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner
24 as required by Section 01730.
25
26 4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety
27 interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must
28 be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16.
29
30 5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the
31 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined
32 in Divisions 13 and 16.
33
34 6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each
35 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in
36 compliance with Division 01.
37
38 7 Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare
39 parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests.
40
41 C. Partial substantial completion will be considered only for each of the two
42 clarifiers as they are tested and placed in service.
43
44
45
46
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 -3 06/24/14
1 1.05 RE- INSPECTION FEES
2
3 A. Should the Engineer perform re- inspections, due to failure of the Work, to
4 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor:
5
6 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services.
7
8 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final
9 payment to the Contractor.
10
11 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER
12
13 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
14
15 B. Project Record Documents.
16
17 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel.
18
19 D. Warranties and Bonds.
20
21 E. Keys and Keying Schedule.
22
23 F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
24
25 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens.
26
27 H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
28
29 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit.
30
31 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers.
32
33 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company.
34
35 L. Contractor's Guarantee.
36
37 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
38
39 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
40
41 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:
42
43 1. The original Contract Sum.
44
45 2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
46
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 a. Previous Change Orders.
2
3 b. Unit Prices.
4
5 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
6
7 d. Penalties and Bonuses.
8
9 e. Deductions for liquidated damages.
10
11 f. Deductions for re- inspection payments.
12
13 g. Other adjustments.
14
15 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
16
17 4. Payments.
18
19 5. Sum remaining due.
20
21 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to
22 the Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders.
23
24 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
25
26 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with
27 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions.
28
29 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
30
31 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
35
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 -5 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 -6 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01710
2
3 CLEANING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of Work and at
10 completion of the Work as required by the General Conditions.
11
12 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
13
14 A. The Contractor shall conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with
15 all applicable Laws and Regulations.
16
17 B. Disposal of waste materials shall be in accordance with the Section III, 17.7 and
18 local Ordinances.
19
20 PART 2 — MATERIALS
21
22 2.01 MATERIALS
23
24 A. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials which do not create
25 hazards to health or property and which do not damage surfaces.
26
27 B. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials and methods
28 recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned.
29
30 C. The Contractor shall use cleaning materials only on surfaces so recommended
31 by cleaning material Manufacturer.
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION
34
35 3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
36
37 A. The Contractor shall execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and
38 adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, water, eroded
39 material, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations.
40
41 B. The Contractor shall provide suitable on -site containers for the daily collection
42 of all waste materials, debris and rubbish.
43
44 C. The Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site
45 containers periodically and dispose of in accordance with Section 1.02.
46
CLEANING
01710 -1
06/24/14
1 D. The Contractor shall schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants
2 resulting from the cleaning process do not fall on wet or newly- coated surfaces.
3
4 E. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary
5 structures when no further need therefore develops and as approved by
6 the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all spillage and
7 shall incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related to
8 repair and maintenance resulting from any such damage.
9
10 3.02 FINAL CLEANING
11
12 A. The Contractor shall employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.
13
14 B. The Contractor shall remove all grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains,
15 fingerprints, labels and all other foreign materials from sight- exposed interior
16 and exterior surfaces.
17
18 C. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight -
19 exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the
20 entire Work and the entire construction area of the Work are clean.
21
22
23 END OF SECTION
CLEANING
01710 -2
06/24/14
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01720
2
3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:
10
11 1. Drawings
12
13 2. Specifications
14
15 3. Addenda
16
17 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
18
19 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions
20
21 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples
22
23 7. Field Test Records
24
25 8. Construction Photographs, if provided
26
27 9. Detailed progress schedule
28
29 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
30
31 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents
32 used for construction.
33
34 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
35
36 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples.
37
38 B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format.
39
40 C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not
41 use record documents for construction purposes.
42
43 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the
44 Engineer.
45
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720 -1 06/24/14
1 E. As a pre- requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor shall exhibit
2 the updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner.
3
4 1.03 MARKING DEVICES
5
6 A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code
7 designated by the Engineer.
8
9 1.04 RECORDING
10
11 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
12
13 B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
14
15 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
16
17 C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
18
19 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor
20 datum.
21
22 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes to
23 piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities
24 and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface improvements.
25 Actual installed pipe material, class, etc.
26
27 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
28 construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
29 structure.
30
31 4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
32
33 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
34
35 6. Details not on original Contract Documents.
36
37 7. Equipment and piping relocations.
38
39 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors,
40 windows, etc.
41
42 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and
43 shop drawings.
44
45 D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record:
46
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6 E.
7
8
9
10
11 1.05 SUBMITTAL
12
13 A.
14
15 B.
16
17 1.
18
19 2.
20
21 3.
22
23 4.
24
25 5.
26
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
29
30
31 PART 3 — EXECUTION
32
33
34
35
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product
and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
Shop Drawings (after final review and approval):
1. Two (2) CDs of shop drawings for each piece of process equipment,
piping, electrical and instrumentation system.
At contract close -out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the Owner.
Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
Date,
Project title and number,
Contractor's name and address,
Title and number of each Record Document, and
Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
(NOT USED)
(NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720 -3 06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01720 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01730
2
3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
10 maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and or
11 installed by the Contractor.
12
13 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and
14 as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications.
15
16 2. The information in the O &M Manual shall be specific and targeted for the
17 equipment and processes supplied for this project.
18
19 3. Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the Owner, if
20 previously defined in the scope of work.
21
22 B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply
23 and deliver to the Engineer, O &M Manuals for the work, mechanical equipment,
24 instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control equipment,
25 and software on -a facility wide, system by system, and individual equipment
26 basis as pertinent to the project.
27
28 C. One (1) electronic copy or five (5) hard copy draft O &M Manuals for each piece
29 of equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment.
30 The draft O &M Manuals shall include the manufacturer's test results and
31 specification and may be used as a training aid (but not in lieu of the training
32 manual).
33
34 D. Furnish the Owner five (5) approved complete hardcopy sets of operation and
35 maintenance data bound in sleeved three ring binders and two (2) approved
36 complete set of operation and maintenance data in electronic "pdf format on a
37 CD as specified herein for the project.
38
39 1. Any modifications required after final O &M submission shall be made to
40 the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or additional
41 information included and clearly identified.
42
43 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44
45 A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
46
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -1 06/24/14
1 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
2 products.
3
4 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
5
6 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate
7 essential data.
8
9 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings.
10
11 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
12
13 A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
14
15 B. Format:
16
17 1. Size: 8 -1/2 inches x 11- inches.
18
19 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages.
20
21 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
22
23 4. Drawings:
24
25 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text.
26 b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11- inches x 17- inches and fold to size
27 of text pages and printed only on one side.
28
29 5. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of
30 operating equipment.
31
32 a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major
33 component part of equipment.
34 b. Provide indexed tabs.
35
36 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
37 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List:
38
39 a. Title of Project
40 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
41 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
42
43 C. Binders:
44
45 1. Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable plastic
46 covers.
47
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -2 06/24/14
1
1
II 2. Maximum post width: 2- inches. Each binder filled to not more than 75%
2 capacity.
3
I 4
5 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent
groupings.
6
I 7
8 D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements.
9 1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL
I 10
11 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic
12 order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each volume
I 13 shall be included with all volumes.
14
15 B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and the
I 16 responsible principal shall be included.
17
18 C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume.
19
I20 D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of:
21
22 a. Manufacturer
I23 b. Subcontractor or installer.
24 c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
25 d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
I 26
27 E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth
28 in Contract Documents.
I 29
30 F Product Data:
31
I 32 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
33
34 2. Annotate each sheet to:
I 35
36 a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
37 b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
I 38 c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
39
40 G. Drawings:
I 41
42 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
43
I 44 a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
45 b. Control and flow diagrams.
46 c. Owner Tag Numbers.
47 d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified.
IOPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -3 06/24/14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for
installation:
Documents to
the particular
1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure.
3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate.
Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following
information:
a.
b.
Proper procedures in event of failure.
Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties or
bonds.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE -
PROTECTED, WEATHER- EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
1. Catalog number, size, and composition.
2. Applicable Standards
3. Chemical Composition
4. Details of Installation or Application
5. Color and texture designations.
6. Information required for re- ordering special- manufactured products.
7. Storage instructions and shelf life information.
B. Instructions for care and maintenance.
1.
Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning
methods.
agents and
2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to
product.
3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -4
06/24/14
1
1
1
2 4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
3 1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
' 4
5 A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication
6 system, as appropriate:
7
8 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or
9 instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of
10 the control or instrument.
11
12 2. A description of the system and its component parts.
13
14 3. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for the
15 system, the sub - system, and the component parts.
16
17 4. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
18
19 5. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts.
20
21 6. Assembly drawings.
22
23 7. The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
24 diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and maintenance.
25
26 8. Manufacturer's model and serial number.
27
28 9. List of all special tools required to service equipment and /or systems
29 including where the tools are stored.
30
31 10. Circuit directories of panel boards.
32
33 a. Electrical service.
34 b. Controls.
35 c. Communications.
36
37 11. As- installed color -coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
38
39 12. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or
40 instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes.
41
42 13. An electrical schematic for each item.
43
44 14. A chart listing the controls /instruments in a loop identifying the
45 equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design
46 criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and
47 serial number.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1
1
01730 -5 06/24/14
15. Operating procedures.
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
d. Start -up, break -in, routine, and normal operating instructions.
e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency
instructions.
f. Special operating instructions.
g. Control settings and ranges.
16. Maintenance procedures.
a. Routine maintenance.
b. Guide to "trouble- shooting."
c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly.
d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking.
e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required
for each piece of equipment.
f. List of lubricants required.
g. Period between lubrications.
h. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
17. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
18. Abnormal and emergency operations.
a. Potential overloads.
b. Procedures for equipment breakdown.
c. Action to be taken in a power outage.
d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct.
e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards.
19. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of
standard programming.
20. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's
current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage, and
predicted life of parts subject to wear.
22. The final approved manual shall include the startup report for each piece
of equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated personnel
attended a formal training session as applicable for each piece of
equipment.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -6 06/24/14
1
1
2 23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location,
3 function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator type
I 4 identified.
5
6 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
I 7
8 A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel.
9
I 10 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used)
11
12 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used)
I 13
14
15 END OF SECTION
I16
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -7 06/24/14
1
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01730 -8 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01740
2
3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
8
9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions.
10
11 B. Co- execute submittals when so specified.
12
13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
14
15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner.
16
17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
18
19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed
20 by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
21
22 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each.
23
24 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete
25 information for each item.
26
27 1. Product or work item.
28
29 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
30
31 3. Scope.
32
33 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
34
35 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
36
37 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
38
39 a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
40
41 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
42
43 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone
44 number.
45
46
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740 -1 11/02/15
1 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
2
3 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment
4 manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with the
5 Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at the
6 time of substantial completion and /or final acceptance by the Owner, whichever
7 is later.
8
9 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment
10 warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price of
11 more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties for
12 equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant equipment
13 not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one -year warranty period even
14 though certificates of warranty may not be required.
15
16 C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide
17 a one -year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the
18 Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty
19 commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two -year
20 warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year
21 warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment.
22
23 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE
24
25 A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial
26 Completion"
27
28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
29
30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
31
32
33 END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740 -2 11/02/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 01820
2
3 TRAINING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and /or coordinating the following work
10 relating to training the Owners designated personnel for this project:
11
12 A. Formalized training shall be provided on the following components and
13 equipment:
14
15 1. Clarifiers
16 2. Scum Pump
17
18 B. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
19 the equipment and systems supplied and /or installed under this Contract as
20 listed in 1.01 A.
21
22 C. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished by
23 the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment
24 manuals, and start -up, engineering, and training assistance.
25
26 D. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced
27 in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and
28 systems.
29
30 E. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field,
31 classroom, and hands -on training.
32
33 F. Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The
34 training manual shall be a separate document from the O &M Manual.
35
36 G. Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training
37 manuals in addition to O &M manuals; conducting classroom instructions;
38 performing field, factory, and hands -on training; and coordinating and
39 incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities
40 required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as
41 determined by the Owner.
42
43 1.02 SUBMITTALS
44
45 A. TRAINING MANUAL AND TRAINING PLAN
46
TRAINING
01820 -1
06/24/14
1 In conjunction with submittal of draft O &M Manuals, and at least 30 days before
2 equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
3 proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific information as
4 identified in PART 2 of this specification.
5
6 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
7
8 A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be
9 performed by personnel:
10
11 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment
12 and systems installed under this Contract.
13
14 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner.
15
16 B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to
17 be used in the training program.
18
19 C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of the
20 resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, request
21 additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If
22 a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the resume and
23 references of another candidate within a reasonable time.
24
25 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
26
27 2.01 TRAINING PLAN
28
29 A. A detailed training plan specific to the project or equipment shall be prepared
30 with specific information as follows:
31
32 1. Title and objectives.
33 2. Training schedule.
34 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees.
35 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers,
36 operators, maintenance staff).
37 5. Course description and outline of course content.
38 6. Duration.
39 7. Location (e.g., training center or site).
40 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self- study, demonstration, hands -on).
41 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements.
42 10. Training manual.
43
44 B. The factory training program shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's
45 system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment.
46
TRAINING
01820 -2
06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 C. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the approved
2 schedule.
3
4 D. In conjunction with start-up of, the Contractor shall provide a competent and
5 experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for one 8 -hour day to
6 instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation, maintenance, and
7 control of the equipment or systems.
8
9 E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the Engineer
10 30 days before the first training event.
11
12 2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL
13
14 A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to
15 approval of the Owner.
16
17 B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format bound in sleeved three
18 ring binders with title, the Owner's name, and date on a label.
19
20 C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs.
21
22 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
26
TRAINING
01820 -3
06/24/14
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TRAINING
01820 -4
06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02062
2
3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to
10 remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, electrical,
11 instrumentation and controls, and all appurtenances as noted on the Contract
12 Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required in order to perform the work
13 as described in the Contract Documents.
14
15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
16
17 PART 3 — EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 GENERAL
20
21 A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment without the
22 specific approval of the Engineer. Any facilities removed without proper
23 authorization shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
24 Contractor's expense.
25
26 B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
27 supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over to
28 the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon
29 removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such
30 material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused.
31
32 C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and
33 supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified,
34 cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site.
35
36 D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 Ibs or more shall be provided with suitable
37 skids before storing.
38
39 E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that are
40 to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or
41 anchored in an approved manner.
42
43 F The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the
44 material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair
45 any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the satisfaction
46 of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored shall be given
47 to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed itemized list shall be
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062 -1 06/24/14
1 furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of construction. The list
2 shall include items, method of packaging, and place of storage.
3
4 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED
5
6 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless
7 designated otherwise by the Owner.
8
9 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall
10 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant site
11 at the Contractor's expense.
12
13 C. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service for
14 the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize that
15 service at no additional cost to the Owner.
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT
02062 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02064
2
3 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, alter
10 and /or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required for the
11 installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. Existing
12 piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary for the
13 performance of structural alterations in accordance with the requirements herein
14 specified.
15
16 1.02 DEWATERING FOR STRUCTURES
17
18 A. The specific attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that each clarifier
19 is equipped with ground water pressure relief valves installed in the bottom of
20 the clarifiers. The operability, capacity and functionality of these valves are
21 unknown. The Contractor shall take any and all precautions necessary to
22 assure that the clarifiers, or any other structure do not become buoyant and are
23 not damaged in any way when draining the clarifier or structure.
24
25 B. The East Plant has a permanent underdrain type groundwater dewatering
26 system installed in the vicinity of the clarifiers that must be used at all times
27 while any clarifier is empty. The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and
28 maintain the pump and a backup pump for this system while it is in operation.
29
30 C. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a temporary
31 dewatering system, in accordance with Section 02140, as required to lower and
32 control the groundwater level, such that there is no danger of any structure
33 becoming buoyant. In no event shall ground water rise to such a level to cause
34 unbalanced pressure on structures. Flotation shall be prevented by maintaining
35 a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor
36 shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages to existing structures, piping
37 or equipment that may result from failure of the groundwater dewatering system.
38
39 D. Dewatering System
40
41 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to lower the groundwater
42 levels to required levels. The dewatering system must maintain the
43 lowered water table at all times until no longer needed.
44
45 2. The Contractor shall provide and have ready on -site for immediate use
46 at all times standby pumping and /or power systems to serve the
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064 -1 05/31/13
1 dewatering system in case of failure of the primary pumping /power
2 systems.
3
4 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a
5 dewatering plan and a groundwater disposal plan. The plans shall be
6 submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be approved prior to
7 initiating any dewatering activities. The Contractor shall also comply with
8 the requirements of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection
9 (FDEP) Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from
10 any Non - Contaminated Site Activity (rule 62- 621.300) for all discharges
11 to surface waters or systems that flow into surface waters.
12
13 4. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the
14 dewatering system is no longer required.
15
16 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
17
18 PART 3 — EXECUTION
19
20 3.01 GENERAL
21
22 A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise
23 remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the
24 Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the
25 work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from
26 the above work in an approved manner. The work shall include all necessary
27 cutting and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal
28 work found embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to be
29 removed shall be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and supports,
30 unless as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
31
32 B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and
33 other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for
34 or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of making
35 connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel removed
36 shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. Surface shall be finished
37 as specified in Specification 03740.
38
39 C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional new
40 piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed.
41
42 D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut,
43 removed, or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the
44 extent approved by the Engineer.
45
46 E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
47 openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the
2 structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to damage the
3 structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted,
4 line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
5
6 F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and
7 additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not
8 salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the
9 property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own
10 place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, lubricated,
11 and greased for protection during prolonged storage.
12
13 G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such
14 manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible
15 before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall
16 be assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay.
17
18 H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall
19 conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as such
20 specifications are applicable.
21
22 I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to
23 new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the respective
24 section of these Specifications covering the work. When not covered, the work
25 shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed by the Engineer.
26
27 J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly
28 as possible the adjacent surfaces.
29
30 K. Non - shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling pump
31 bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as shown.
32
33 L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the
34 Contractor shall cut existing pipelines /couplings in a manner to provide an
35 approved joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or
36 provide Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required.
37
38 M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to
39 divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the flow
40 of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the work under
41 this Contract.
42
43 N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care
44 shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or
45 outside structures.
46
47
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064 -3 05/31/13
1 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2
3 A. The Contractor shall verify the exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc., of
4 existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out in the
5 Drawings. These verifications shall be performed with adequate time to correct
6 any alignment issues prior to the actual time of connection.
7
8 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES
9
10 A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure, channels,
11 clarifier, conduit or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of
12 the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful manner.
13
14
15 END OF SECTION
MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT
02064 -4 05/31/13
1 SECTION 02140
2
3 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of all equipment, materials
10 and labor necessary to design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain temporary
11 dewatering systems to remove subsurface ground waters as required by local
12 conditions in accordance with all applicable laws, the requirements set forth and
13 as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or as required for the completion
14 of the work.
15
16 B. The Contractor shall apply for and secure a State of Florida Department of
17 Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground
18 Water From Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity in accordance with 62-
19 621.300(2) FAC. The Contractor shall perform any and all groundwater testing
20 needed to obtain the Generic Permit at no additional cost to the Owner.
21
22 C. Ground water dewatering will be required at all times when either of the clarifier
23 structures are empty, being drained, or are otherwise susceptible to becoming
24 buoyant during the performance of the work of this project.
25
26 D. Groundwater discharge from dewatering operations is not to be directed to the
27 drainage swale that surrounds the east clarifier.
28
29 E. An existing dewatering system, consisting of perforated pipe as shown on the
30 Drawings, is installed around the clarifiers. Record drawings show this piping
31 is connected to a manhole and to a pump sump. The Contractor is to clean and
32 inspect by video camera the existing dewatering system and submit the video
33 to the Owner and the Engineer. This cleaning and inspection includes the
34 manhole connected to the dewatering system as shown on the Drawings.
35
36 F. The Contractor shall install new well points under this project that shall remain
37 in place after the project is complete. These well points shall be used in
38 conjunction with a temporary manifold (suction header) and vacuum pumping
39 system furnished by the Contractor as part of the temporary dewatering system.
40
41 G. The Contractor shall demonstrate that operation of some combination of the
42 permanent and temporary dewatering systems has the ability to control the
43 groundwater level.
44
45 H. The Contractor shall provide a groundwater elevation monitoring system that
46 continuously shows the groundwater level in response to operation of the
47 dewatering system(s) remotely through a cellular -based internet portal. The
TEMPORARY DEWATERING 8/9/16
02140 -1 CONFORMED
1 groundwater elevation monitoring systems shall be installed in each monitoring
2 well and shall be complete with electronic data logging and real time secure
3 internet access for current and historic groundwater levels. No clarifier shall be
4 drained until it is demonstrated that the continuous on -line monitoring system is
5 fully operational and that the groundwater level can be controlled. The two
6 dedicated monitoring wells (one existing and to be installed by the Contractor)
7 are to be used for this monitoring system.
8
9 I. It is intended that the two dewatering systems be fully redundant to each other,
10 and be operated concurrently by the Contractor, if necessary, to control
11 groundwater. Each system shall have 2 pumps, a duty pump and a standby
12 pump. Each pump shall have sufficient capacity to meet the peak demand of
13 the respective system.
14
15 J. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs associated with both dewatering
16 systems and for disposing of product water from dewatering activities. At the
17 completion of construction, when the dewatering systems are no longer needed,
18 the Contractor shall remove the temporary pumps, manifold and vacuum
19 system. The contractor shall ensure that the permanent dewatering system
20 structures are left in the conditions designed for.
21
22 K. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for installing, operating and
23 maintaining the temporary dewatering system and for disposal of product water.
24
25 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
27 A. Groundwater dewatering and disposal of product water from dewatering shall
28 be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and Regulations; with
29 the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and, with the Contractor's
30 approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and the Contractor's
31 approved Dewatering Plan.
32
33 1.03 DEWATERING PLAN
34
35 A. Prior to commencing any excavations, the Contractor shall submit a written
36 Dewatering Plan to the Engineer for review.
37
38 B. The Dewatering Plan shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan,
39 the dewatering system shown on the Drawings, and shall itemize all pumping
40 equipment, pump controls, vacuum equipment, manifolds and temporary piping
41 system connections. The pumping and piping arrangement, the volume of
42 proposed discharge, the location of the proposed discharge, and the monitoring
43 system shall be identified in the Dewatering Plan.
44
45 C. The Dewatering Plan shall include provisions to install, operate, and maintain
46 the dewatering system and demonstrate that the installed system is capable of
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140 -2
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 controlling the ground water level such that buoyancy conditions are never
2 experienced by either clarifier.
3
4 D. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered
5 Professional Engineer.
6
7 1.04 UPLIFT AND FLOTATION
8
9 A. Uplift of a structure could occur if the groundwater elevation is higher than the
10 elevation of water inside the structure. The Contractor shall monitor the
11 groundwater elevation, by constructing piezometers (dedicated monitoring
12 wells) where necessary and using the water level monitoring and data logging
13 system at all times when either of the clarifiers are dewatered (drained), being
14 rehabilitated, or with water levels below their typical operating level.
15
16 B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that ground water levels
17 are controlled as required to prevent flotation and shall be fully responsible and
18 liable for all damages to structures and or pipes that may result from the
19 operation and /or failure of the dewatering system.
20
21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
22
23 PART 3 — EXECUTION
24
25 3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING
26
27 A. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or
28 subsurface waters that may accumulate in tanks or excavations, or that may
29 seep through the bottom of the east clarifier while it is being rehabilitated. The
30 Contractor shall prevent flotation and migration of fines by maintaining a positive
31 and continuous operation of the dewatering system.
32
33 B. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable
34 equipment to adequately dewater the tanks or the excavation so that it will be
35 dry to the bottom or to a depth of 12- inches below the subgrade compaction
36 level or over - excavation level, as appropriate. The well point system, existing
37 pipe drain system, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method selected
38 by the Contractor shall be utilized to maintain the work area in a dry condition
39 for rehabilitation of the clarifiers, structures or pipes to be built thereon have
40 been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise
41 damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No water shall be
42 allowed to contact masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being placed.
43
44 C. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the
45 undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom of
46 excavations and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures and utilities.
47 Well or sump installations shall be constructed and operated continuously with
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140 -3
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding
2 ground.
3
4 D. Engine- driven dewatering pumps and vacuum pumping systems shall be
5 equipped with residential type mufflers. Where practical and feasible, electrical
6 "power drops" and electric motor - driven equipment shall be used in lieu of
7 portable generators.
8
9 E. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any
10 structure during construction, including the installation of piezometers for water
11 level monitoring.
12
13 F. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental discharge
14 of fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. All costs
15 associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the Contractor.
16
17 3.02 DISPOSAL
18
19 A. The Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow
20 in the drainage facilities, and shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean
21 as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or
22 restored as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no
23 cost to the Owner.
24
25 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all permits
26 required to dispose of the product water' from dewatering and shall protect
27 adjacent waterways from product water run -off and turbidity while the system is
28 in operation.
29
30 C. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled
31 trenches may be used for water disposal. The Contractor's plan shall include
32 temporary culverts, barricades and other protective measures to prevent
33 damage to property or injury to any person or persons.
34
35 D. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways or private property shall be
36 permitted.
37
38
39 3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND AREA RESTORATION
40
41 A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is no
42 longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system shall be
43 removed by the Contractor.
44
45 B. All sock drains shall be filled with flowable fill when no longer needed, and
46 abandoned in place.
47
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140 -4
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
C. All areas shall be restored in accordance with Specification Section 02485.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140 -5
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
TEMPORARY DEWATERING
02140 -6
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02221
2
3 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for pipelines
10 and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, disposal of
11 surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces.
12
13 B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and
14 appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along straight
15 lines before excavating.
16
17 C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and
18 shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem
19 unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and in
20 all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely to
21 the rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in open trenches.
22
23 D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of the
24 manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength
25 designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape,
26 appropriately color -coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12- inches
27 below final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of location.
28 The appropriate tape color codes are as follows:
29
30 Gray - Gravity Sewer
31 Green - Sanitary force main
32 Blue - Potable water
33 Lavender - Reclaimed water
34
35 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
36
37 2.01 MATERIALS
38
39 A. General
40
41 1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the
42 Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at
43 least ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such
44 material.
45
46 2. Materials shall be furnished as required from offsite sources and hauled
47 to the site.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -1 10/14/14
1 3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See
2 Paragraph 3.10.
3
4 B. Common Fill
5
6 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam,
7 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible
8 or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill shall not contain
9 stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken concrete, masonry,
10 rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have physical properties such
11 that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling.
12
13 2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the
14 excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All
15 material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse
16 shall be spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials.
17
18 C. Crushed Stone
19
20 1. Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer
21 below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on the
22 Drawings.
23
24 2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation as
25 defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of Transportation
26 Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge Construction.
27
28 D. Select Fill
29
30 1. Select fill shall be noncohesive, non - plastic material free of all debris,
31 lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed of sand or
32 an approved mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within
33 one foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or
34 rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4 -inch in diameter for PVC
35 pipe.
36
37 PART 3 — EXECUTION
38
39 3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
40
41 A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the trench
42 bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much as
43 possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as
44 specified below.
45
46 B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable for
47 use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -2 10/14/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required.
2 Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck,
3 stumps and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of by
4 the Contractor.
5
6 C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from the
7 site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the
8 Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been approved by the
9 Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material.
10
11 D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to
12 the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by the
13 Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in backfilling the
14 trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling material.
15
16 3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING
17
18 A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing
19 required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground which
20 could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures. If the
21 Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have
22 not been provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of
23 the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care
24 shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are formed,
25 they shall be immediately filled and rammed.
26
27 3.03 TEST PITS
28
29 A. The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of locating
30 underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise location
31 of new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired information
32 has been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a satisfactory
33 condition for travel until resurfaced as hereinafter specified.
34
35 B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and
36 shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
37
38 C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be properly
39 barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the Engineer, in
40 accordance with State and Local laws.
41
42 3.04 DRAINAGE
43
44 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all
45 incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he
46 proposes for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -3 10/14/14
1 assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and equip -
2 ment employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is assured that
3 the proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements for a stable
4 subgrade are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his drainage
5 methods, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is unsatisfactory.
6
7 B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly
8 remove and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade
9 shall be maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed
10 therein are completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the
11 trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities.
12
13 C. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after
14 being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after
15 placement.
16
17 D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until
18 the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent
19 flotation of the pipe promptly placing backfill.
20
21 E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish
22 and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish
23 and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level
24 continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid with open
25 joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and to a depth of
26 6 -in. below the invert of underdrain.
27
28 F. The invert of underdrain shall be 12 -in. below the normal subgrade. Pipe
29 underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the
30 completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall
31 be limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete
32 shall be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths of the
33 underdrain system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction is
34 completed. All excavation below normal grade for the purpose of installing
35 underdrains, the crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be considered a part
36 of the drainage work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall
37 continuously guard against the loss of earth through subbase or the underdrain.
38 Should loss of either take place, the Contractor shall alter the stone size to
39 provide a satisfactory barrier or filter.
40
41 G. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall
42 furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities.
43
44 H. The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer prior to
45 commencement of work in accordance with Section 02140.
46
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -4 10/14/14
1
1
1 3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION
I 2
3 A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the installation
4 of pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures.
I 5
6 B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of soil,
7 and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench,
I 8 sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot
9 greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended
10 clear width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside
I 11 diameter plus 2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench width must be
12 exceeded or if the pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, then pipe
13 embedment should be compacted to a point of at least 2 -1/2 pipe diameters
I 14 from the pipe on both sides of the pipe or to the trench walls, whichever is Tess.
15
16 C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below the designated
I 17 subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no
18 more than slightly disturbed.
19
20 D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8 -in. clearance around the bottom and
1
21 sides of the pipe being laid.
22
23 E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform
24 support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each joint
25 to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom
26 excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be compacted
27 as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable subgrade condition
28 is encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, additional trench
29 depth should be excavated and refilled with suitable foundation material. Ledge
II. 30 rock, boulders, and large stones should be removed to provide 4- inches of soil
31 cushion of all sides of the pipe and accessories.
32
I 33 3.06 PIPE BEDDING
34
35 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on
I 36 the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be Type 4 bedding at a
37 minimum. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor, holes in
38 the trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole excavated shall
I 39 be sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all Toads and yet provide support over the
40 total length of the pipe barrel.
41
I 42 B. Pipe shall be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal
43 support under the pipe. Backfill material shall be worked under the sides of the
44 pipe to provide satisfactory support under the haunches of the pipe. All bedding
45 material shall be select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger than 3 /4 -in.),
46 which could cause significant scratching or abrasion of the pipe, shall be
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -5 10/14/14
1
1 excluded from the embedment material. Proper compaction procedures shall
2 be exercised.
3
4 C. Where required to provide a firm bedding for the pipe, and with the approval of
5 the Engineer, a crushed stone bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12"
6 below the pipe up to the pipe haunches.
7
8 3.07 BACKFILLING
9
10 A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded,
11 backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously.
12
13 B. Select backfill material, free from stones and other foreign material, shall be
14 placed to a depth of 12- inches over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be
15 thoroughly compacted by hand - tamping as placed. The remainder of the trench
16 shall be backfilled in loose 12 -inch lifts of common or structural fill as applicable.
17
18 C. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be packed
19 full by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a diameter
20 greater than 2 -inch, and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as fast as placed
21 up to a level of 12- inches above the top of the pipe.
22
23 D. Backfilling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person
24 tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench.
25
26 E. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described
27 shall be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may
28 direct, sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling.
29
30 F. Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly compacted.
31 All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes connected to
32 the structures.
33
34 G. All fill shall be placed in a dry condition.
35
36 3.08 COMPACTION
37
38 A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to exceed
39 eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each layer shall be
40 compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental compaction due to
41 traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward the required
42 minimum four (4) coverages.
43
44 B. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12- inches and should be
45 compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry density,
46 as established in accordance with ASTM D -1557. Density tests should be
47 performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is placed.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -6 10/14/14
1
1
1
2 C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or truck
3 shall be compacted with approved hand guided mechanical compaction
4 equipment.
I 5
6 D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in
7 accordance with the requirements of FDOT.
I 8
9 E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the
10 condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that is too
11 wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing
12 if necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper
13 compaction as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or organic material
14 shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed from the trench
15 and replaced with suitable fill material.
16
1 17 3.09 GRADING
18
19 A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, to
20 the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer and shall
21 be made in such a manner that the requirements for formation of embankments
22 can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, or whatever nature
23 within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of as directed. During
24 the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained in such condition that
25 it will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage
26 ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect
27 the progress or condition of the work.
28
29 B. The right is reserved to make small adjustments or revisions in lines or grades
30 if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the
31 Drawings of in order to obtain satisfactory construction.
32
33 C. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will not
34 be permitted in the top 6- inches of the subgrade.
35
36 D. All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and
37 alignment shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
38
39 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or
40 otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall
41 be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and alignment shown on the
42 Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
43
44
1
1
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -7 10/14/14
1 3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL
2
3 A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the
4 property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project
5 site.
6 B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the
7 Specification for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated
8 material so approved may by neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by
9 the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the
10 operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If
11 space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be
12 required to make arrangements for off -site stockpiling. Transport of such
13 material from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements
14 shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds for
15 additional payment.
16
17 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes
18 as the Engineer may direct.
19
20 3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK
21
22 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not
23 suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to
24 spoil areas is to be replaced and approved surplus excavation obtained
25 elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill
26" material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources.
27
28 B. Rock may be used in fill only with the approval of the Engineer.
29
30
31 END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES
02221 -8 10/14/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 02485
2
3 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all
10 construction areas to their original conditions or better.
11
12 B. Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete,
13 asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner.
14
15 C. The restoration of grassed areas under this project shall be by sodding.
16
17 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
18
19 A. The Contractor shall provide a satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If
20 necessary, the Contractor shall repeat any or all of the work, including grading,
21 fertilizing, watering, and seeding or sodding at no additional cost to the Owner
22 until a satisfactory stand is obtained.
23
24 B. A satisfactory stand of grass is defined herein as a full lawn cover over areas to
25 be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive and growing, leaving no
26 bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft.
27
28 1.03 SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or
31 installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with the
32 contract documents.
33
34 B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to
35 determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program.
36
37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
38
39 2.01 MATERIALS
40
41 A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from
42 organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State and
43 Federal fertilizer laws.
44
45 1. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on
46 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B and approved by
47 the Engineer. For purpose of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6%
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485 -1 05/31/13
1 phosphorus and 6% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen
2 shall contain no less than 3% water - insoluble nitrogen.
3
4 2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original
5 unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of
6 manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed
7 statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance
8 covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a
9 weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its
10 effectiveness will not be impaired.
11
12 3. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as
13 commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20%
14 available phosphoric acid.
15
16 B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction or as approved
17 by the Engineer and shall be 99 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum
18 germination and 1 percent maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with
19 U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act
20 in effect. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit
21 or storage shall not be acceptable.
22
23 C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall receive vegetative
24 treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping
25 plans. Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover shall
26 be vegetated as follows:
27
28 1. Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine
29 Bahia or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The
30 blanket shall be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America
31 Gree or approved equal.
32
33 2. Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched.
34
35 D. Sodding
36
37 1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth
38 and good root development.
39
40 2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications,
41 absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other
42 objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind.
43
44 3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with
45 the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform
46 dimensions.
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond
3 to depth not less than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and
4 moisture content of mulch material.
5
6 F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during seeding
7 and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and until the work
8 is accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements may be
9 necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs for his
10 work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment,
11 attachments and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted
12 areas as may be required.
13
14 G. Asphaltic concrete surface shall consist of either Type S -1 or Type S -3
15 asphaltic concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida
16 Department of Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction
17 Procedures.
18
19 H. Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying with
20 FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100.
21
22 PART 3 — EXECUTION
23
24 3.01 INSTALLATION
25
26 - A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work on
27 lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from soft
28 spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 lbs. of 12 -3 -6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. ft.
29
30 B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected from traffic or other use by placing
31 warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas damaged prior
32 to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the Contractor as
33 directed by the Engineer.
34
35 3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION
36
37 A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and
38 the ground brought to an even grade as approved.
39
40 B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 -inch depth.
41
42 C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square
43 foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 1000
44 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross - disked into a
45 depth of 4 -6 inches.
46
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485 -3 05/31/13
1 D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other
2 foreign matter over 1 -inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall conform
3 to finish grade, Tess the thickness of sod, free of water - retaining depressions,
4 the soil friable and of uniformly fill texture.
5
6 3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
7
8 A. A one -foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except
9 fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement.
10
11 B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the
12 sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary
13 exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction
14 and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and
15 moisture.
16
17 C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid
18 tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other
19 slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope.
20 Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller
21 customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered.
22
23 D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub
24 areas. Top dressing with approved, clean, weed free, sand may be required at
25 no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
26
27 3.04 CLEANUP
28
29 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be removed
30 promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. Upon
31 completion of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, and
32 debris remaining shall be removed from the construction areas.
33
34 3.05 MAINTENANCE
35
36 A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the
37 Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer.
38
39 B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding,
40 cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from
41 insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure
42 normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility
43 of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall
44 receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week.
45
46 3.06 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485 -4 05/31/13
1
2 A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the
3 Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing,
4 and reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications.
5
6
7 END OF SECTION
8
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485 -5 05/31/13
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS
02485 -6 05/31/13
1
1
r
1 SECTION 02740
2
3 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
4
5
6 PART 1 — GENERAL
7
8 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
9
10 A. The Contractor shall rehabilitate existing pipes found to be leaking using
11 trenchless Cured -In —Place Pipe (CIPP) lining technology. This work shall
12 include the furnishing of all plant, labor, tools, equipment, and materials, and
13 the performing of all operations required for the proper rehabilitation by CIPP
14 lining of the East Clarifier influent, RAS, and drain pipes as shown on the
15 drawings, if these pipes are found to be leaking. Leak testing of these pipes is
16 identified in other Sections of these specifications. All CIPP lining materials
17 shall be suitable for use in domestic sewage on ductile iron pipe. Pipelines to
18 be rehabilitated are on City owned land.
19
20 B. Acceptable products shall be as manufactured by suppliers who have a
21 minimum of 500,000 lineal feet (LF) of documented, accepted gravity sewer
22 CIPP installations in the United States of the same pipe diameter as considered
23 for this project. Product installers shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience
24 with the specific product and have installed a minimum of 500,000 LF of
25 documented, acceptable sewer CIPP installations. A client/reference list shall
26 be submitted at the Owner's request, which shall include the product utilized for
27 the referenced installations along with the dates of installation and the lineal
28 footage of the individual installations.
29
30 C. The Contractor shall clean and videotape the interior of all pipelines to be
31 rehabilitated both prior to commencing work on any sewer segment and after
32 completing the work on each sewer segment. The Contractor shall provide
33 copies of the pre- construction and post- construction videotapes to the Owner.
34
35 D. The Contractor shall assume that all pipes to be lined using CIPP require
36 cleaning, including the removal of debris, as required to successfully install the
37 CIPP liner system in accordance with these specifications. The Contractor shall
38 be responsible for the proper off -site disposal of all materials removed from any
39 pipe in accordance with the appropriate regulatory agency requirements and
40 laws.
41
42 E. Any pipeline damaged during the rehabilitation process shall be promptly
43 repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner including, but not
44 limited to, point repairs, main line replacement, and any and all required permits,
45 by -pass pumping and surface restoration of all disturbed areas. The Contractor
46 shall be responsible for any wastewater spills during any by -pass operation, and
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
02740 -1 05/31/13
1 shall pay any and all fines, fees, property damage, environmental damage and
2 cleanup costs that are associated with wastewater spills.
3
4 F. The Contractor shall provide bypass pumping as required or when directed by
5 the Engineer. At all times, bypass pumping methods shall be acceptable to the
6 Engineer and Owner. The costs for bypass pumping shall be included in the unit
7 price bid for CIPP rehabilitation, as no additional payment will be made.
8
9 G. The Contractor shall employ only experienced personnel trained in all facets of
10 the work specified hereinto install the CIPP liners.
11
12 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
13
14 2.01 GENERAL
15
16 A. The Contractor shall furnish only materials that are new and that meet or exceed
17 these specifications and requirements. The installed and cured CIPP liners shall
18 be chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage and all
19 constituent materials shall be suitable for the environment intended. The final
20 product shall not deteriorate, corrode or loose structural strength reducing the
21 minimum design life.
22
23 2.02 CURED -IN- PLACE -PIPE (CIPP)
24
25 A. CIPP liner material shall be polyester or epoxy fiber felt, resin - impregnated
26 tubing or Engineer- approved equal, sized to tightly fit the internal circumference
27 and length of the gravity sewer designated on the drawings to be lined. The
28 outside of the CIPP liner shall have an impermeable PVC coating that will form
29 the inner layer of the CIPP when inverted during installation. The finished pipe
30 shall be such that, when the resin cures, the total wall thickness is a
31 homogeneous and monolithic felt and resin composite matrix that is chemically
32 resistant to domestic sewage and hydrogen sulfide.
33
34 B. The CIPP liner shall meet the minimum initial structural properties as listed in
35 ASTM F -1216 and /or ASTM F -1743. The liner shall be designed in accordance
36 with the Appendices in ASTM F -1216, and shall be based on a fully deteriorated
37 gravity sewer pipeline having no structural strength, H -20 traffic loading, the
38 tank full of water, the water table at the invert of the pipe, and a minimum
39 expected lifetime of 50 years. Prior to installation of the liner, design
40 calculations shall be submitted to determine the minimum thickness of the liner
41 to be installed. The design shall have sufficient strength to support all
42 anticipated loads throughout the product life cycle including dead loads, live
43 loads and water loads imposed. Design methods are to be derived from
44 traditionally accepted pipe formulas for various loading parameters and failure
45 modes. All equations will be modified to include ovality as a design parameter.
46
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
02740 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
' 33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
C. No CIPP technology that requires bonding to the host pipe for structural strength
will be allowed. All reinforcing materials, if used, shall be fully encapsulated with
the resin to ensure the reinforcement is not exposed to the inside of the installed
liner or at the surface between the liner and the host pipe. In no case shall the
liner thickness be less than 0.236 inches (6mm) for pipe sizes 8" through 10"
diameters. In no case shall the liner thickness be less than 0.118 inches (3mm)
for pipe sizes 4" and 6" diameters. Liner shall be sized to provide a tight fit to
the host pipe preventing annular space gaps, and shall be a continuous, joint -
less installation as applicable. Allowance shall be made for circumferential
stretching during insertion. Liner materials shall be as manufactured by Lanzo
Lining, LMK Enterprises, Layne In- Liner, National Liner, Perma- Liner,
Trelleborg, or Engineer- approved equal.
D. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use a specially designed
polyester, epoxy vinyl ester resin or epoxy resin and catalyst system with a fiber
felt tube compatible with the inversion process, or other approved alternate
installation process. The resin must be able to cure in the presence of water
and be resistance to corrosion by sulphuric acid, carbonic acid, hydrogen
sulfide, methane, and carbon dioxide. The resin - catalyst system shall have the
following minimum physical properties for the cured pipe:
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 -89
Flexural Strength Modified ASTM D 790 -86
Flexural Modulus of
Elasticity
Minimum Long -Term
(50 year)
3,000 psi
5,500 psi
Modified ASTM D 790 -86 250,000 psi
Modulus of Elasticity 125,000 psi
(ASTM D 790)
E. The epoxy or vinyl ester resin and fiber felt tubing system shall be in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM F 1216 -03 and be fabricated to a size that, when
installed, will neatly fit the interior of the host pipe. Allowance shall be made for
circumferential stretching during inversion and /or for longitudinal stretching
during a direct (non- inversion) pull in. The CIPP product shall fit tightly to the
host sewer pipe (with minimal shrinkage) in such a way as to minimize water
migration (tracking) between the liner and the host pipe. The tube shall be
impregnated with resin under controlled conditions. The volume shall be
adjusted by adding 5% to 10% excess resin for the change in resin volume due
to polymerization and to allow for any migration of resin into cracks or joints in
the original pipe.
2.03 JOINT AND CRACK SEALING MATERIALS FOR ACTIVE LEAKS
A. Specific areas of the pipe that are found to be actively leaking, as identified
during the initial pipe inspection videotaping, shall be repaired if necessary
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
02740 -3 05/31/13
1 using a chemical sealing material prior to lining to ensure that the CIPP liner is
2 properly installed. Only approved chemical joint and crack sealing materials
3 shall be used to seal these areas prior to lining. The use of these materials shall
4 be at the Contractor's discretion, but shall also be installed by the Contractor
5 where specifically directed by the Engineer at no additional cost.
6
7 B. Materials used for joint and crack sealing shall react quickly to form a permanent
8 watertight seal, with component packaging and mixing compatible with field
9 conditions and worker safety, and the resultant seal shall be flexible and
10 immune to the effects of wet/dry cycles; shall be non - biodegrabable and
11 immune to the effects of acids, alkalis, and organics in sewage. Extraneous
12 sealant left inside pipe shall be readily removable and shall be compatible with
13 the repair epoxy utilized and the resin utilized for the CIPP liner.
14
15 C. Chemical sealing materials shall be acrylic resin type and shall be furnished with
16 activators, initiators, inhibitors and any other materials recommended by the
17 manufacturer for a complete chemical grout system. Sealing materials shall be
18 furnished in liquid form, in the manufacturer's standard containers. Sealing
19 grout shall be AV -118 Duriflex manufactured by Avanti International, Houston,
20 Texas, or approved equal.
21
22 PART 3 — INSTALLATION
23
24 3.01 GENERAL
25
26 A. CIPP installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F -1216, Standard Practice
27 for the installation of Cured -in -Place Pipe by inversion lining.
28
29 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for reconnecting pipes, providing by -pass
30 pumping operations, or otherwise re- establishing pipeline service, as directed
31 and approved by the Engineer.
32
33 3.02 WASTEWATER FLOW CONTROL
34
35 A. All main gravity sewer lines shall be inactive (non - flowing) during CIPP liner
36 installation and curing through operation of the dewatering systems.
37
38 3.03 CLEANING AND COLOR AUDIO/VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS
39
40 A. The Contractor shall clean and prepare color audio -video DVD records of all
41 gravity sewers and manholes to be rehabilitated immediately prior to installation
42 of CIPP liners. The video equipment shall be specifically designed for viewing
43 the interior of underground pipes,. All existing conditions, including,
44 obstructions, dropped joints, and mainline fittings shall be recorded. The
45 Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of the pre- construction DVDs to the
46 Owner. A suitable log of the audio -video records shall be kept and two (2)
47 copies furnished to the Owner.
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
02740 -4 05/31/13
1
1
1
1 B. During the pre- construction audio -video recording and inspection, the
2 Contractor shall identify, and the Engineer shall verify, any conditions that may
3 prevent installation of a CIPP liner. The Contractor shall promptly notify the
4 Owner of any problems discovered during pre- construction audio -video
5 recording that would prohibit the installation of the liner. If any conditions are
6 discovered that could prevent the proper cleaning of the pipe, such as broken
7 pipe or major blockages, or where in the opinion of the Contractor additional
8 damage may occur if cleaning is attempted or continued, the Contractor shall
9 immediately notify the Owner. In such instances, the Owner shall, within a
10 reasonable period of time, provide further direction to the Contractor. Any
11 damage caused by the Contractor to any existing sewer or structure is to be
12 immediately repaired by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than its
13 original condition at no additional cost to the Owner.
14
15 C. The Contractor shall prepare the pipes to be lined by clearing all obstructions
16 including cleaning all solids, debris, roots, broken pipe, sand, rocks, gravel,
17 grease, mud, sludge, and other materials that would hinder the installation of
18 the CIPP. The Contractor shall furnish all cleaning equipment required and
19 perform all cleaning of the pipes to be lined, including high - pressure jet cleaning
20 equipment, root cutters, and mechanical brushes. Cuts made by cutting
21 equipment must be made flush with the wall of the pipe to be restored and the
22 debris pushed downstream and removed by the Contractor.
23
24 D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to remove and dispose of all debris
25 produced by cleaning the pipe in accordance with all applicable laws and
26 regulations. During the pre- construction audio -video recording, the Contractor
27 shall immediately notify the Owner and Engineer if, in his opinion, more rigorous
28 cleaning is required to properly prepare the host pipe for the CIPP lining. If
29 inspection reveals an obstruction that cannot be removed by conventional
30 cleaning equipment, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the cleaning
31 effort shall be abandoned in that section of the pipe.
32
33 E. Existing, roots, and other obstructions that are found to protrude into the pipe
34 shall be removed using remote robot cutting equipment designed especially for
35 this function and the protrusion shall be ground smooth using grinding tools
36 specifically designed for that purpose. The pipe shall be made uniform and
37 smooth to accept and provide a proper seal for the CIPP liner. Any damage to
38 any existing pipe or structure is to be immediately repaired to a condition equal
39 to or better than its original condition at no additional cost to the Owner.
40
41 F. Built up deposits on the pipe walls shall be removed and the removal shall
42 extend at least one -foot beyond the intended location of the liner.
43
44 G. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of all locations where active infiltration
45 is present. The active infiltration must be stopped by grouting before any liner
46 is installed and as directed by the Engineer.
47
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
02740 -5 05/31/13
I
I
1 H. Installation of CIPP shall not be made until approved by the Engineer
2
3 3.04 CIPP LINER INSTALLATION
4
5 A. The Contractor shall maintain standby (backup) robotic equipment on the site
6 of the work to minimize any delays in re- establishing service.
7
8 B. The Contractor shall obtain all field measurements required to properly size the I
9 CIPP liner. The CIPP liner shall be sized to provide a tight fit to the host pipe
10 and extend sufficiently. The CIPP liner shall be installed in strict accordance
11 with methods and requirements of applicable ASTM standards and of the I
12 manufacturer. Where a short sectional repair is needed to repair leaks, the
13 Contractor shall make said repairs using a packer assembly.
14 I 15 C. The Contractor shall designate a suitable location, acceptable to the Engineer
16 where the CIPP liner tube shall be saturated (wet out) with the appropriate resin
17 and equipment to thoroughly saturate the felt fiber tube prior to installation in 111 18 the pipe. The quantity of resin used shall be sufficient to fill the felt air voids,
19 with allowance for polymerization shrinkage and the loss of resin through cracks
20 and irregularities in the host pipe wall. The resin shall not be contaminated or
I21 diluted prior to installation. The resin - impregnated liner shall be loaded into
22 robotic equipment specifically designed to install CIPP by inversion methods
23 and completely inverted into place inside the host sewer pipe. Hydrostatic or air
24 pressure shall be used, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
I
25 recommended installation procedures, to hold the liner tight against the host
26 -pipe wall producing dimples at service lateral connections and flared ends at
27 manholes and terminus points.
I
28
29 D. Resin curing for the CIPP liner shall be at ambient temperature or at an elevated
30 temperature as recommended by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall
I
31 provide suitable equipment and a heat source capable of transferring and
32 recirculating heated air, water, steam or UV light to the liner in order to maintain
33 the appropriate and uniform temperature required to effect a cure of the resin I
34 as specified by the resin /catalyst manufacturer. The equipment shall be capable
35 of delivering sufficient heat throughout the entire section of the liner tube.
36 Suitable monitoring equipment shall be installed to measure the temperature of I
37 the heat transferring medium and the temperature at the surface of the inverted
38 liner at the extreme ends. The cure period shall be of a duration recommended
39 by the resin /catalyst manufacturer. Care shall be taken during the curing I
40 process so as to not overstress the liner or the host pipe.
41
42 E. Initial cure for the CIPP liner shall be deemed complete when inspection of the
43 exposed portions of the tube appear to be hard and sound and a test coupon
44 indicates that the temperature has been maintained and elapsed time has been
45 reached as recommended by the manufacturer. I
46
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP) I
02740 -6 05/31/13
1
1
1
1 F. If required, the Contractor shall cool the CIPP liner to a temperature below 100
2 degrees F before relieving pressure on the apparatus holding the liner against
3 the walls of the host pipe. Cool down may be accomplished by introducing cool
4 air or water into the pressure- sustaining device replacing hot air or water. Care
5 shall be taken to maintain proper pressure in the pressure- sustaining device
6 throughout the cool down period. Care shall also be exercised when releasing
7 the pressure and removing the pressure- sustaining device so that vacuum is
8 not developed that could damage the CIPP liner.
9
10 G. The interior finish of the installed CIPP liner shall be continuous, tight fitting,
11 watertight, and smooth over the entire length, and shall be free of any foreign
12 objects, dry spots, lifts, and delamination. Liners shall not inhibit video
13 inspection of the mainline pipes or service lateral connections when complete.
14 The CIPP liner shall be free of irregularities, pin holes, tears, cracks, excessive
15 wrinkling and sealed so as to eliminate any possibility of infiltration at the
16 termination point. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a tight seal is not obtained
17 between the CIPP liner/ and the host pipe and leakage occurs following
18 installation, a chemical sealant compatible with the liner resins shall be injected
19 by the use of a packer device into the annular space or gap to provide a tight
20 seal. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
21 recommendations and approved by the Engineer.
22
23 H. After the CIPP installation is complete, cured, and the ends trimmed, all
24 equipment used to install and cure the CIPP shall be removed and a color audio -
25 video recording of the newly lined pipe shall be performed. Audio -video
26 recording shall clearly depict. the entire interior of the pipe. No visible leakage
27 through the CIPP liner will be allowed. Further, no leakage between the CIPP
28 liner and the existing main line host sewer will be allowed at the CIPP terminus
29 point. The Contractor shall repair all leaks, holes and irregularities in the CIPP
30 liner and lateral connection seals to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no
31 additional cost to the Owner.
32
33 3.05 CLEANUP
34
35 A. Cleanup is an essential part of the work. As the work progresses and is
36 completed, the Contractor shall clean the various sites of all debris, trash
37 rubbish, etc., resulting from his operations, and completely restore all work
38 areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. This cleanup shall be
39 done as promptly as practicable or as directed by the Engineer.
40
41 3.06 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
42
43 A. Inspection of CIPP -lined sewers shall be by inspection of the audio -video
44 recording at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall provide the Owner
45 with two (2) copies of a DVD of the completed work with data view and accurate
46 footage displayed for this project as follows:
47
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP)
02740 -7 05/31/13
1 1. Date
2 2. Size and material of host pipe
3 3. All distances.
4
5
6 END OF SECTION
CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE (CIPP).
02740 -8 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03200
2
3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all
10 concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified
11 herein.
12
13 1.02 RELATED WORK
14
15 A. Cast -in -place Concrete is included in Section 03300.
16
17 B. Grout is included in Section 03600.
18
19 C. Modifications and Repairs are included in Section 03740.
20
21 1.03 SUBMITTALS
22
23 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and
24 product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for all
25 cast -in -place concrete tanks, retaining walls, building stem walls, wall sections,
26 and slabs
27
28 1. Reinforcing steel: Placement drawings shall conform to the
29 recommendations of ACI 315. All reinforcement in a concrete placement
30 shall be included on a single placement drawing or cross referenced to
31 the pertinent main placement drawing. The main drawing shall include
32 the additional reinforcement (around openings, at corners, etc) shown on
33 the standard detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings and /or to be of
34 special steel or special yield strength are to be clearly identified.
35
36 2. Bar bending details: The bars shall be referenced to the same
37 identification marks shown on the placement drawings. Bars to have
38 special coatings and /or to be of special steel or special yield strength
39 shall be clearly identified.
40
41 3. Schedule of all placements to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The
42 amount of fibers per cubic yard to be used for each of the placements
43 shall be noted on the schedule. The name of the manufacturer of the
44 fibers and the product data shall be included with the submittal.
45
46 B. Submit Test Reports, in accordance with Section 01300, of each of the following
47 items.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 -1
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
2 1. Certified copy of mill test on each steel proposed for use showing the
3 physical properties of the steel and the chemical analysis.
4
5 2. Welder's certification. The certification shall be in accordance with AWS
6 D1.4 when welding of reinforcement required.
7
8 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9
10 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
11
12 1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
13 Reinforcement.
14
15 2. ASTM A184 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar
16 Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.
17
18 3. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain,
19 for Concrete Reinforcement
20
21 4. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for
22 Concrete Reinforcement
23
24 5. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
25 Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
26
27 6. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel
28 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
29
30 7 ASTM A616 - Standard Specification for Rail -Steel Deformed and Plain
31 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
32
33 8. ASTM A617 - Standard Specification for Axle -Steel Deformed and Plain
34 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
35
36 9. ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and
37 Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
38
39 10. ASTM A767 - Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel
40 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
41
42 11. ASTM A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Steel
43 Bars.
44 12. ASTM A884 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated Steel Wire and
45 Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement.
46
47 13. ASTM A934 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated Prefabricated
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 8/9/16
03200 -2 CONFORMED
1 Steel Reinforcing Bars.
2
3 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
4
5 1. ACI 301 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
6
7 2. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
8
9 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
10
11 4. ACI SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual
12
13 C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
14
15 1. Manual of Standard Practice
16
17 D. American Welding Society (AWS)
18
19 1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
20
21 E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
22 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
23
24 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
25
26, A. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years'
27 experience in the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and
28 assistance during the first placement of the material.
29
30 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
31
32 A. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or
33 other foreign matter.
34
35 B. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and
36 shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with
37 waterproof markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on
38 the submitted Placing Drawings.
39
40 C. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground, protected from moisture and
41 kept free from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants.
42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
45 2.01 MATERIALS
46
47 A. Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture and shall comply with the
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 -3
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 following material specifications.
2
3 B. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars.
4
5 C. Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Welded: ASTM
6 A706.
7
8 D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets.
9
10 E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
11
12 F. Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars.
13
14 G. Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60
15 deformed bars.
16
17 H. The following alternate materials are allowed:
18
19 1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 may be used for ASTM A706 provided the
20 following requirements are satisfied:
21
22 a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill
23 tests shall not exceed the specified yield strength by more than
24 18,000 psi. Retests shall not exceed this value by more than an
25 additional 3000 psi.
26
27 b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile
28 yield strength of the reinforcement shall not be less than 1.25.
29
30 c. The carbon equivalency (CE) of bars shall be 0.55 or less.
31
32 I. Reinforcing Steel Accessories
33
34 1. Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class
35 1 - Maximum Protection.
36
37 2. Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support
38 Specifications, Class 2 - Moderate Protection.
39
40 3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications,
41 Precast Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the
42 surrounding concrete.
43
44 4. Steel Protected Bar Supports: #4 Steel chairs with plastic or rubber tips.
45
46 J. Tie Wire
47
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 -4
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16 -gauge or heavier, black
2 annealed wire.
3
4 K. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting taper
5 threaded type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as
6 manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal. They shall meet all
7 ACI 318 Building Code requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with
8 coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure proper taper and thread
9 engagement. Bar couplers shall be torqued to manufacturer's recommended
10 value.
11
12 1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices
13 shall be designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression
14 of not less than 125 percent of the ASTM specified minimum yield
15 strength of the rebar.
16
17 2. Compression type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing
18 from one bar to the other bar and shall be capable of developing the
19 ultimate strength of the rebar in compression.
20
21 L. Fiber Reinforcement
22
23 Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100 percent polypropylene
24 collated, fibrillated fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic
25 Industries Inc., Chattanooga, TN - Fibermesh or equal. Fiber length and
26 quantity for the concrete mix shall be in strict compliance with the
27 manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer.
28
29 2.02 FABRICATION
30
31 A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of
32 Standard Practice.
33
34 B. Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or rebent.
35
36 C. Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than
37 that recommended by the ACI 318.
38
39 D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in
40 metal, or threaded, shall have the applicable end(s) saw -cut. Such ends shall
41 terminate in flat surfaces within 1 -1/2 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the
42 bar.
43
44 E. Spirals
45
46 1. Provide a minimum of 1 -1/2 finishing turns at the top and bottom.
47
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 -5
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 2. Splices shall be tension lap splices at least 48 bar diameters, but not less
2 than 12 -in in length. Welded splices shall only be used where specifically
3 approved by the Engineer.
4
5 3. Provide spacers as recommended by the CRSI.
6
7 PART 3 - EXECUTION
8
9 3.01 INSTALLATION
10
11 A. Surface condition, bending, spacing and tolerances of placement of
12 reinforcement shall comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The
13 Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing an adequate number of bars
14 and maintaining the spacing and clearances shown on the Drawings.
15
16 B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the minimum concrete cover of
17 reinforcement shall be as follows:
18
19 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 -in
20
21 2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and /or weather: 2 -inch
22 (including bottom cover of slabs over water or sewage)
23
24 3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and /or weather:
25
26 a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells and folded plate
27 members - 1 -inch
28
29 b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals and
30 stirrups) - 1 -1/2 -inch
31
32 C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after
33 being placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry.
34
35 D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection
36 unless specifically shown on the Drawings or specified herein, or unless prior
37 written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been
38 welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately
39 removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called
40 for, it shall comply with AWS D1.4.
41
42 E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits
43 or embedded items, may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar
44 diameter, whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid
45 interference, shall only be made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut
46 reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings or other items
47 without the prior approval of the Engineer.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 8/9/16
03200 -6 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete
3 placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete.
4
5 G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the
6 Drawings or specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized,
7 bars shall be cold -bent around the standard diameter spool specified in the
8 CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the
9 reinforcing steel is damaged, replace, Cadweld or otherwise repair as directed
10 by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete
11 unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.
12
13 3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS
14
15 A. Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the
16 Drawings, provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening
17 equivalent to one half of the cross - sectional area of the reinforcing steel
18 interrupted by an opening. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond
19 at each end beyond the opening or penetration.
20
21 3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT
22
23 A. Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise
24 noted, shall be 30 bar diameters, but not Tess than 12 -in. The lap splice length
25 for column vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above.
26
27 B. Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI 318.
28 Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when
29 50 percent or less of the bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class
30 B splices shall be used at all other locations.
31
32 C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, splices in circumferential
33 reinforcement in circular walls shall be Class B tension splices and shall be
34 staggered. Adjacent bars shall not be spliced within the required lap length.
35
36 D. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members"
37 on the Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for
38 constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be
39 welded to develop, in tension, at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength
40 of the bar. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B
41 splice.
42
43 E. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall
44 be rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be
45 lapped in accordance with the requirements of ACI -318 but not less than 12 -in.
46 The spliced fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more than
47 24 -in on center and laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03200 -7
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 fabric. Do not position laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over
2 beams of continuous structures. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent
3 continuous splices.
4
5 F. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the
6 Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 30 bar diameters.
7 Mechanical reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel
8 conditions approved by the Engineer.
9
10 3.04 ACCESSORIES
11
12 A. Determine, provide and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars and the
13 like in sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement
14 and prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the
15 placement of concrete.
16
17 B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over
18 soil.
19
20 C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used
21 where the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to
22 weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing
23 areas). Use of galvanized or plastic tipped metal chairs is permissible in all
24 other locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
25
26 D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels
27 supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom
28 and top mats, may be used if approved by the Engineer.
29
30 3.05 INSPECTION
31
32 A. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the
33 installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing and position of the
34 reinforcement has been observed by the Engineer and the Engineer's release
35 to proceed with the concreting has been obtained. The Engineer shall be given
36 ample prior notice of the readiness of placed reinforcement for observation. The
37 forms shall be kept open until the Engineer has finished his /her observations of
38 the reinforcing steel.
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 8/9/16
03200 -8 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03300
2
3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install cast -in -place concrete
10 complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
11
12 1.02 RELATED WORK
13
14 A. Concrete Reinforcement is included in Section 03200.
15
16 B. Grout is included in Section 03600.
17
18 C. Modifications and Repairs are included in Section 03740.
19
20 1.03 SUBMITTALS
21
22 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and
23 product data including the following:
24
25 1. Sources of cement, pozzolan and aggregates.
26
27 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and
28 admixtures.
29
30 3. Air - entraining admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical
31 data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage,
32 temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM standards.
33
34 4. Water- reducing admixture. Product data including catalogue cut,
35 technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended
36 dosage, temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM standards.
37
38 5. High -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data
39 including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product
40 life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect,
41 slump range and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed
42 locations of use.
43
44 6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use including
45 constituent quantities per cubic yard, water - cementitious materials ratio,
46 concrete slump, type and manufacturer of cement. Provide either a. or
47 b. below for each mix proposed.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 8/9/16
03300 -1 CONFORMED
1
2 a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on
3 statistical records.
4
5 b. The curve of water - cementitious materials ratio versus concrete
6 cylinder strength for each formulation of concrete proposed based
7 on laboratory tests. The cylinder strength shall be the average of
8 the 28 day cylinder strength test results for each mix. Provide
9 results of 7 and 14 day tests if available.
10
11 7. Sheet curing material. Product data including catalogue cut, technical
12 data and conformity to ASTM standard.
13
14 8. Liquid curing compound. Product data including catalogue cut, technical
15 data, storage requirements, product life, application rate and conformity
16 to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use.
17
18 B. Samples
19
20 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer.
21
22 C. Test Reports
23
24 1. Fine aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious
25 substance.
26
27 2. Coarse aggregates - sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious
28 substances.
29
30 3. Cements - chemical analysis and physical properties for each type.
31
32 4. Pozzolans - chemical analysis and physical properties.
33
34 5. Proposed concrete mixes - compressive strength, slump and air content.
35
36 D. Certifications
37
38 1. Certify admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with
39 each other and the aggregates.
40
41 2. Certify admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after
42 30 days of concrete curing.
43
44 3. Certify curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water
45 after 30 days (non -toxic and free of taste or odor).
46
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -2
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
2
3 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
4
5 1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
6 Specimens in the Field.
7
8 2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
9
10 3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
11 Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
12
13 4. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
14 Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
15
16 5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete.
17
18 6. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
19 Concrete
20
21 7. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
22
23 8. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing
24 Concrete
25
26 9. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
27 Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
28
29 10. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
30 Concrete by the Pressure Method.
31
32 11. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for
33 Concrete.
34
35 12. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming
36 Compounds for Curing Concrete.
37
38 13. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
39 Concrete.
40
41 14. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
42 Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
43
44 15. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for use
45 in Producing Flowing Concrete.
46
47 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 8/9/16
03300 -3 CONFORMED
1
2 1 ACI 304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
3 Concrete.
4
5 2. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting.
6
7 3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
8
9 4. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
10
11 5. ACI 350 - Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
12
13 6. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in
14 effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
15
16 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
17
18 A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318, the recommendations of ACI
19 350R and other stated requirements, codes and standards. The most stringent
20 requirement of the codes, standards and this Section shall apply when conflicts
21 exist.
22
23 B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure.
24 Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance.
25
26 C. Weil in advance of placing concrete, discuss with the Engineer the sources of
27 individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement
28 methods, waterstops and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather
29 concreting as required. Prior to the placement of any concrete containing a
30 high -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor, accompanied
31 by the plasticizer manufacturer, shall discuss the properties and techniques of
32 batching and placing plasticized concrete.
33
34 D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the
35 required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the
36 Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may
37 be necessary to secure the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be
38 made at the Contractor's expense.
39
40 E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally
41 accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his /her expense,
42 make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes.
43
44 F Testing of the following materials shall be furnished by Contractor to verify
45 conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards.
46
47 1. Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis, physical
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 8/9/16
03300 -4 CONFORMED
1
1
1 properties, and deleterious substances.
I 2
3 2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 - sieve analysis,
4 physical properties, and deleterious substances.
I 5
6 3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150 - chemical analysis and
7 physical properties.
I 8
9 4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 - chemical analysis and
10 physical properties.
I 11
12 5. Proposed concrete mix designs - compressive strength, slump and air
13 content.
I 14
15 6. Concrete placements - compressive strength (cylinders), compressive
16 strength (cores), slump, and air content.
I 17
18 G. Field testing and inspection services will be provided by the Owner. The cost
19 of such work, except as specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the
I 20 Owner. Testing of the following items shall be by the Owner to verify conformity
21 with this Specification Section.
22
23 1. Other materials or products that may come under question.
1 24
25 H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples.
26
I 27 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28
29 A. Cement: Store in weather -tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from
I 30 dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set.
31
32 B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or
I 33 contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build
34 stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 -ft in thickness.
35 Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially
I 36
37 frozen aggregate.
38 C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain
I 39 to uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen
40 aggregates.
41
I 42
43 D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation or
damage. Provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform dispersion of
44 ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid
I 45 admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely
46 affect their characteristics.
47
1
1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -5
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 E. Pozzolan: Store in weather -tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection
2 from dampness and contamination.
3
4 F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weather -tight buildings or off the ground and
5 under cover.
6
7 G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers.
8
9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
10
11 2.01 GENERAL
12
13 A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose
14 of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.
15
16 2.02 MATERIALS
17
18 A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local
19 requirements.
20
21 B. Cement: Domestic portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining
22 cements shall not be used. Cement brand shall be subject to approval by the
23 Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following
24 cement type(s) shall be used:
25
26 1. All Classes — Type I /11 or Type II.
27
28 C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of
29 ASTM C33.
30
31 D. Coarse Aggregate: Well- graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to
32 the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in
33 ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of
34 Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed
35 in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the
36 concrete mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 herein.
37
38 E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
39 organic matter, or other deleterious substances.
40
41 F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those
42 attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a
43 concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures
44 shall be compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures and shall
45 be suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing.
46
47 1. Air - Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 8/9/16
03300 -6 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
2 recommendations.
3
4 2. Water- Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494,
5 Type A. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with
6 manufacturer's recommendations.
7
8 3. High -Range Water- Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply
9 with ASTM C494, Type F and shall result in non - segregating plasticized
10 concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low
11 water /cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of
12 maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportioning and
13 mixing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
14 Where walls are 14" thick or Tess and the wall height exceeds 12 ft a mix
15 including a plasticizer must be used.
16
17 4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not
18 be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the
19 admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water reducing or high
20 range water reducing admixtures.
21
22 G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash): Pozzolan shall be Class C or Class F fly ash complying with
23 ASTM C618 except the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3 percent
24 maximum.
25
26 H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white
27 burlap- polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171.
28
29 I. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane - forming curing compound shall
30 comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 -D (clear or translucent
31 with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. Curing compound
32 shall be approved for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non -toxic
33 and free of taste or odor). Curing compound shall comply with Federal, State
34 and local VOC limits.
35
36 2.03 MIXES
37
38 A. Development of mix designs and testing shall be by an independent testing
39 laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the
40 Contractor.
41
42 B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials
43 limits specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability,
44 durability, strength, appearance and other required properties. Proportion
45 ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work into
46 corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting
47 materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -7
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
2 C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with
3 essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data is not
4 available, be developed by a testing laboratory, acceptable to the Engineer,
5 engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Acceptance of mixes based
6 on standard deviation shall be based on the modification factors for standard
7 deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the concrete mix,
8 determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve showing the relation
9 between water cementitious ratio and 7 and 28 day compressive strengths of
10 concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined
11 by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test
12 specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to
13 yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified
14 below, without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be
15 used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16 percent
16 greater than the specified design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict
17 with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum
18 cementitious content as specified in Table 1.
19
20 D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to
21 demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in
22 conformity with the above paragraph.
23
24 E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1.
25
26 1. If the air - entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing
27 methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content,
28 make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal.
29
30 F Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143, shall be as shown in Table
31 1. If a high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall
32 be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a
33 slump ranging from 5 to 8 -in.
34
35 G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two
36 or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the
37 admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect
38 on the concrete or on the properties of each other.
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -8
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 TABLE 1
2 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS
3
4 Design Fine Coarse Cementitious
5 Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate Content
6 (1) (2) (2) (3) (4)
7
8
9 A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min.
10 B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min.
11 C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min.
12 D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min.
13
14 W /Cm AE Slump
15 Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR Range
16 (5) (6) (7) (8) Inches
17
18
19 A 0.62 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1 -4
20 B 0.54 max. 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1 -3
21 C 0.44 max. 25% max 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3 -5
22 D 0.40 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3 -5
23
24 NOTES:
25 (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days
26 (2) ASTM designation
27 (3) Size Number in ASTM C33
28 (4) Cementitious content in Ibs /cu yd
29 (5) W /Cm is Water- Cementitious ratio by weight
30 (6) AE is percent air - entrainment
31 (7) WR is water - reducer admixture
32 (8) HRWR is high -range water- reducer admixture
33 * HRWR used at contractor's option except where walls are 14" thick or Tess and the wall height
34 exceeds 12 ft a mix including a plasticizer must be used.
35
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -9
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 PART 3 — EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS
4
5 A. Concrete shall be composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse
6 aggregate, water and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant
7 acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall be
8 batched at the plant except a high -range water - reducer may also be added in
9 the field.
10
11 B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and
12 within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales
13 shall have been certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within 1
14 year of use.
15
16 C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3 percent with a
17 moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates.
18 Record the number of gallons of water as- batched on printed batching tickets.
19
20 D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or
21 measuring tanks, or by means of an automatic dispenser approved by the
22 manufacturer of the specific admixture.
23
24 1. Charge air - entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a
25 solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device.
26
27 2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence.
28
29 3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
30
31 A. Batch plants shall have a current NRMCA Certification or equal.
32
33 B. Concrete shall be ready -mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to
34 the Engineer. No hand - mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck
35 drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching
36 plant. Equip each transit -mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution
37 counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds.
38
39 C. Ready -mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or
40 mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name
41 plate.
42
43 D. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition
44 of water above the appropriate W /Cm ratio must be directed by the Engineer.
45 Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions.
46 All added water shall be metered and the amount of water added shall be shown
47 on each delivery ticket.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 8/9/16
03300 -10 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 E. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI
3 318 and ASTM C94.
4
5 F. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at
6 the delivery end. Metal or metal -lined non - aluminum discharge chutes shall be
7 used and shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not Tess
8 than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 -ft long and chutes not
9 meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper
10 before distribution.
11
12 G. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of
13 concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted.
14
15 H. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while
16 providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks
17 from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete
18 is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays
19 in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms.
20
21 I. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck
22 arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and
23 each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns
24 for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate
25 the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the
26 quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of
27 the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck.
28 Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer.
29
30 J. Temperature and Mixing Time Control
31
32 1. In cold weather, do not allow the as -mixed temperature of the concrete
33 and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop
34 below 40 degrees F.
35
36 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in
37 the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of
38 water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than
39 90 degrees F.
40
41 3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of
42 the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 degrees F.
43 If necessary, substitute well- crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water.
44
45 4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and /or
46 cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not
47 exceed the values shown in Table 2.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -11
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TABLE 2
MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE
Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time
80 to 90 Degree F (27 to 32 Degree C) 45 minutes
70 to 79 Degree F (21 to 26 Degree C) 60 minutes
40 to 69 Degree F (5 to 20 Degree C) 90 minutes
If an approved high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized
concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes.
16 3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE
17
18 A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse
19 aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition,
20 the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit, but
21 excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes
22 in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the
23 following:
24
25 1. The gradation of aggregate.
26
27 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate.
28
29 3. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits.
30
31 B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when
32 hardened, will have the required strength, durability and appearance. Mixtures
33 and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will
34 require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when
35 viewed in good lighting from 10 -ft away, shall be pleasing in appearance, and
36 at 20 -ft shall show no visible defects.
37
38 3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING
39
40 A. Placing
41
42 1. Verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and
43 is securely braced prior to concrete placement. Remove ice, excess
44 water, dirt and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that
45 reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a
46 competent workman at the location of the placement who can assure that
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -12
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in designated locations
2 while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi - porous subgrades or forms
3 to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous
4 subgrades in an approved manner.
5
6 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid
7 segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at
8 a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic
9 concrete. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has
10 been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which has
11 hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness
12 within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place
13 construction joints as specified or as approved.
14
15 3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate
16 sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approval.
17
18 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer
19 useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only
20 when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has
21 been obtained.
22
23 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously
24 placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs and /or walls) has
25 reached adequate strength.
26
27 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces
28 designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a
29 suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form.
30 Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids.
31
32 7 Slabs
33
34 a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds and jointing materials have
35 been positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously
36 between construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form,
37 or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the
38 previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and
39 segregation.
40
41 b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete
42 placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and
43 consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold
44 joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck
45 off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to
46 smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows.
47
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -13
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them,
2 place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass
3 between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit
4 consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the
5 wall moist so as to prevent cold joints.
6
7 8. Formed Concrete
8
9 a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to
10 prevent segregation. Bottom of tremie tubes shall preferably be
11 in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit
12 concrete to drop freely more than 4 -ft. Place concrete for walls in
13 12 to 24 -in lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized
14 concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to
15 7 -ft and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 -ft.
16
17 9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the
18 recommendations of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to
19 place underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to
20 12 -in in diameter and be spaced at not more than 16 -ft on centers nor
21 more than 8 -ft from an end form. Where concrete is being placed around
22 a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of each pipe.
23 Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for
24 underwater placement may be used subject to approval of the system
25 including details by the Engineer.
26
27 B. Compacting
28
29 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding or forking
30 so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded
31 items and openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc.,
32 shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to
33 eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or
34 planes of weakness.
35
36 2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators.
37 The number, type and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer
38 in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until
39 sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order)
40 are on the job.
41
42 3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators.
43 Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 -in apart. At each
44 insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to
45 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare
46 vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations.
47
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -14
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs Tess than 8 -in thick shall be
2 consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 -in thick shall be
3 compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds.
4 Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be
5 laid horizontally or laid over.
6
7 5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall
8 be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each
9 vibrator needed to melt down the batch at the point of discharge, one or
10 more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize and
11 perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular
12 intervals, through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if
13 any.
14
15 6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly
16 placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in
17 the forms. Vibration shall continue until:
18
19 a. Frequency returns to normal.
20
21 b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening.
22
23 c. Trapped air ceases to rise.
24
25 d. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not
26 disappeared.
27
28 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
29
30 A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of
31 any nature during construction operations.
32
33 B. Curing Methods
34
35 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture
36 and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7
37 days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows:
38
39 a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding,
40 continuous sprinkling or covered with saturated burlap. Begin wet
41 cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet
42 cure 24 hours a day.
43
44 b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material.
45 Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the
46 sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure
47 sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -15
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface
except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing
compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where
additional concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or
surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish
requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be
applied as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared
and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or
when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete.
Application shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Specified applications of curing methods.
a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only.
b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water
curing, sheet material curing or liquid membrane curing.
c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or
liquid membrane curing.
d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete,
Coatings, Grout or Other Material that Requires Bond to the
substrate: Water curing.
e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7
days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or
liquid membrane cured if forms are removed prior to 7 days.
Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be
water cured for 7 days or until next placement of concrete is made.
f. Surfaces of Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured.
C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun to
prevent checking and crazing.
D. Cold Weather Concreting:
1. "Cold weather" is defined as a period when for more than 3 successive
days, the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 degrees F.
The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the
highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to
midnight.
2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 8/9/16
03300 -16 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 requirements specified herein. Temperatures at the concrete placement
2 shall be recorded at 12 hour intervals (minimum).
3
4 3. Discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion
5 shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during
6 cold weather including the production, transportation, placement,
7 protection, curing and temperature monitoring of the concrete. The
8 procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather
9 conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather
10 concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the
11 Engineer.
12
13 4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide
14 continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required)
15 for a total of at least 350 degree -days of curing.
16
17 a. Degree -days are defined as the total number of 24 hour periods
18 multiplied by the weighted average daily air temperature at the
19 surface of the concrete (eg: 5 days at an average 70 degrees F =
20 350 degree- days).
21
22 b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum
23 hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the
24 surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50
25 degrees F as 0 degrees F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24
26 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day.
27
28 5. Salt, manure or other chemicals shall not be used for protection.
29
30 6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be
31 terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing
32 has been terminated.
33
34 E. Hot Weather Concreting
35
36 1. "Hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures,
37 low relative humidity and wind velocity which produces a rate of
38 evaporation estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or
39 exceeding 0.2 Ibs /sgft/hr).
40
41 2. Concrete placed during hot weather, shall be batched, delivered, placed,
42 cured and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI
43 305R and the additional requirements specified herein.
44
45 a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90
46 degrees F and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform
47 concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -17
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from Toss
2 of slump, flash set or cold joints.
3
4 b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to promptly deliver, to
5 promptly place the concrete upon its arrival at the job and to
6 provide vibration immediately after placement.
7
8 c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover
9 plastic concrete with sheet material.
10
11 3. Discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and
12 procedures proposed to use for concrete placement and curing during
13 hot weather periods. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the
14 work plan is acceptable to the Engineer.
15
16 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS
17
18 A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be
19 removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent of its
20 specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of
21 day- degrees of curing (whichever is the longer):
22
23 TABLE 3
24
25 MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL
26
27 Forms for Degree Days
28
29 Beams and slabs 500
30 Walls and vertical surfaces 100
31
32 (See definition of degree -days in Paragraph 3.05D above).
33
34 B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70 percent
35 of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its
36 own weight and construction live loads.
37
38 3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING
39
40 A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing and curing of concrete shall be
41 subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall
42 advise the Engineer of his /her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours prior to
43 each concrete placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for
44 concreting including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the
45 reinforcing steel and the alignment, cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No
46 placement shall be made without the inspection and acceptance of the
47 Engineer.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -18
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 B. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be collected and tested by an
3 independent testing company hired by the Contractor and subject to approval
4 by the Engineer. The cylinder specimens shall be collected and tested during
5 the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets of
6 concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall
7 not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yds of
8 concrete nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or
9 walls.
10
11 1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7
12 days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The
13 fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after
14 28 days if 28 day test results are low.
15
16 2. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any
17 set falls below the specified design strength or below proportional
18 minimum 7 day strengths (where proper relation between seven and 28
19 day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water
20 content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the
21 required strengths.
22
23 C. Cooperate in the making of tests by allowing free access to the work for the
24 selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens,
25 affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the
26 operations and furnish material and labor required for the purpose of taking
27 concrete cylinder samples. All shipping of specimens will be paid for by the
28 Owner. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
29
30 D. Slump tests will be made in the field immediately prior to placing the concrete.
31 Such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. If the slump is
32 greater the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected.
33
34 E. Air Content: Test for air content shall be made on fresh concrete samples. Air
35 content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall
36 be made in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM
37 C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173.
38
39 F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete
40 work such as construction joints and other locations as required for
41 determination of concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be
42 the basis for acceptance, rejection or determining the continuation of concrete
43 work.
44
45 G. Cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting
46 the use of ladders, scaffolding and such incidental equipment as may be
47 required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the cores will
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -19
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 be at the expense of the Owner.
2
3 3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS
4
5 A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in
6 compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1,
7 the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to
8 apply to the remainder of the work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the
9 right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented
10 by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be
11 at the Contractor's expense. In the event that such additional curing does not
12 give the strength required, as evidenced by core and /or Toad tests, the Engineer
13 shall have the right to require strengthening or replacement of those portions of
14 the structure which fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such
15 core borings and /or Toad tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement
16 required because strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be
17 entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet
18 strength requirements the Contractor and Engineer shall confer to determine
19 what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with Sections titled
20 "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The
21 "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this Section.
22
23 B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified
24 strength, the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means
25 of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and
26 C39: In the case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in
27 addition to other recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, Toad tests
28 on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such
29 concrete was used. Tests need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days.
30
31 C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60 percent of the required
32 minimum 28 day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed
33 and replaced.
34
35 3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
36
37 A. It is the intent of this Section to require quality work including adequate forming,
38 proper mixture and placement of concrete and curing so completed concrete
39 surfaces will require no patching.
40
41 B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer
42 shall be repaired as specified by the Engineer.
43
44 C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed,
45 fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form
46 ties shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural strength
47 shall be repaired. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -20
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 stained by leakage of concrete, to approval of the Engineer.
2
3 D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as
4 required by Section 03100. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows:
5 Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16 -in brush coat of neat cement
6 slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole
7 with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the
8 touch (just short of "balling "). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and
9 an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Trowel
10 smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing.
11
12 E. When patching exposed surfaces the same source of cement and sand as used
13 in the parent concrete shall be employed. Adjust color if necessary by addition
14 of proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone
15 at an age of 1 to 5 days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent
16 concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the
17 surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter.
18
19 3.10 SCHEDULE
20
21 A. The following (Table 4) are the general applications for the various concrete
22 classes and design strengths:
23
24 TABLE 4
25
26 CONCRETE SCHEDULE
27
28 Design
29 Strength
30 Class (psi) Description
31
32 A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct encasement
33
34 B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements
35
36 C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and
37 beam systems, columns, grade beams and all
38 other structural concrete
39
40 D 5,000 Prestressed concrete
41
42
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -21
8/9/16
CONFORMED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300 -22
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03600
2
3 GROUT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install grout
10 complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
11
12 1.02 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Submit to the Engineer shop drawings and product data showing materials of
15 construction and details of installation for:
16
17 1. Commercially manufactured non - shrink cementitious grout. The
18 submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage
19 requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature
20 considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material
21 Safety Data Sheet.
22
23 2. Commercially manufactured non - shrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall
24 include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life,
25 working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to
26 required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet.
27
28 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the
29 cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any
30 proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout.
31
32 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent
33 quantities per cubic yard, the water /cement ratio, and fiber reinforcement.
34
35 B. Laboratory Test Reports
36
37 1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer.
38
39 C. Certifications
40
41 1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout products
42 and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable
43 water after 30 days curing.
44
45 D. Qualifications
46
47 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least
GROUT
03600 -1 05/31/13
1 10 years' experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts to
2 be supplied.
3
4 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
5
6 A. Vertical Height Change /Shrinkage
7
8 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient
9 of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and
10 Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes
11
12 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
13 Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and
14 Polymer Concretes
15
16 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages
17 of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures
18
19 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,
20 Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non- shrink)
21
22 5. ASTM C1090 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height
23 of Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic- Cement Grout
24
25 B. Followability, Consistency, Working Time
26
27 1. ASTM C1437 — Flowable Grout
28
29 2. ASTM C939 — Fluid Grout
30
31 C. Compressive Strength
32
33 1. ASTM C109 modified per ASTM C1107 or ASTM C942
34
35 D. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD)
36
37 1. CRD C -621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non - shrink Grout
38
39 E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
40 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
41
42 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44 A. Qualifications
45
46 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in the
47 production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work.
GROUT
03600 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 B. Pre - installation Conference
3
4 1. Where specifically required, and well in advance of grouting, conduct a
5 pre - installation meeting to review the requirements for surface
6 preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product
7 proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the
8 meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date.
9
10 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative
11
12 1. A qualified field technician of the non - shrink grout manufacturer,
13 specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the
14 pre - installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation
15 of each type of non - shrink grout. Additional services shall also be
16 provided, as required, to correct installation problems.
17
18 D. Field Testing
19
20 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the
21 Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall
22 provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods
23 of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards.
24
25 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
26
27 A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled
28 with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed
29 instructions.
30
31 B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
32 Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be
33 limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time,
34 whichever is less.
35
36 C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately
37 removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional
38 cost to the Owner.
39
40 D. Non - shrink, cement -based grouts shall be delivered as pre - blended,
41 prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water.
42
43 E. Non - shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre- measured, prepackaged,
44 three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the
45 manufacturer.
46
47 1.06 DEFINITIONS
GROUT
03600 -3
05/31/13
1
2 A. Non - shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink
3 in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened
4 state and bonds to a clean base plate.
5
6 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
7
8 2.01 GENERAL
9
10 A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the
11 purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired.
12
13 B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to
14 provide standardization of appearance.
15
16 2.02 MATERIALS
17
18 A. Non - shrink Cementitious Grout
19
20 1. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of
21 ASTM C827 and ASTM C1107. Grouts shall be Portland cement based,
22 contain a pre - proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage
23 compensating agents and shall require only the addition of water. Non -
24 shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement or metallic
25 particles. The grouts shall exhibit 0% shrinkage at any time when tested
26 in accordance with ASTM C827 and shall meet the current version of
27 ASTM C1107.
28
29 2. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
30 standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set
31 Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill &
32 Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout
33 Corp. or equal.
34
35 3. Flowable (Precision) non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the
36 standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders,
37 Inc.; Hi -Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika
38 Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S.
39 Grout Corp. or equal.
40
41 B. Non - shrink Epoxy Grout
42
43 1. Non - shrink epoxy -based grout shall be a pre - proportioned, three
44 component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin,
45 hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength
46 of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and
47 have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10 -6 when tested in
GROUT
03600 -4 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by
2 Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur
3 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid
4 Chemical Co. or equal.
5
6 2. Epoxy grout shall generally be used over cementitious grout in
7 applications involving impact/dynamic loading, vibration, or chemical
8 attack.
9
10 3. There is no ASTM Standard for measuring vertical height change of
11 epoxy grout.
12
13 4. The constancy of epoxy grout may only be altered by adjusting the
14 amount of aggregate added to the epoxy mix. The manufacturer's limits
15 on aggregate must be strictly observed.
16
17 C. Cement Grout
18
19 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement conforming
20 to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to
21 ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content
22 shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree
23 that it will allow the grout to flow.
24
25 D. Concrete Grout
26
27 1. Concrete grout shall be proportioned with cement, pozzalan, coarse and
28 fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to produce
29 a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 2500 psi
30 nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8 - 1/2 inch maximum.
31 Slump should not exceed 5 inches and should be as low as practical yet
32 still retain sufficient workability.
33
34 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at
35 the rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be added
36 from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the
37 manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete
38 dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the
39 concrete grout.
40
41 E. Water
42
43 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic
44 matter, or other deleterious substances.
45
46
47
GROUT
03600 -5
05/31/13
1
1
1 PART 3 — EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 PREPARATION
4
5 A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design
I
6 strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
7
8 B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, t
9 dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints and free of all loose
10 material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the grout.
11 I 12 C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical
13 means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken
14 concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed I
15 if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete.
16
17 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the I
18 oil -less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from
19 being blown onto the surface.
20
I21 D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal
22 embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout.
23
I24 E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24
25 hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may
26 be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a
27 soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer.
I
28 Upon completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from the
29 surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of
30 surface saturation shall only be used when approved by the Engineer for each
I
31 specific location of grout installation.
32
33 F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. I
34 Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting.
35
36 G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms shall
I
37 be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer.
38 Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place and shored to
39 resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. I
40
41 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a
42 hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. I
43
44 H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with
45 the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment I
46 manufacturer.
47
GROUT 1
03600 -6 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by
2 shims, wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and
3 blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate
4 bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved
5 by the Engineer.
6
7 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
8
9 A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
10 recommendations and this Section.
11
12 B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous
13 mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at
14 hand.
15
16 C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout
17 between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours
18 thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer.
19 Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and
20 grout during the curing period.
21
22 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as
23 recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and /or the
24 temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and
25 90 degrees F range.
26
27 E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements
28 on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or
29 control joint.
30
31 F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through
32 the grout.
33
34 3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS
35
36 A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement,
37 sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer.
38
39 B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is
40 recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured
41 amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum
42 amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum
43 additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the
44 manufacturer's maximum recommended water content.
45
46 C. Placements greater than 3 -in in depth shall include the addition of clean,
47 washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer.
GROUT
03600 -7 05/31/13
1 Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of
2 aggregate to be added.
3
4 D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation or
5 entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the
6 material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of
7 all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces.
8 Provide grout holes as necessary.
9
10 E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement
11 grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial
12 stiffening.
13
14 F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at
15 a 45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise
16 approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish.
17
18 G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout
19 moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24
20 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate
21 the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or other approved
22 means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a
23 given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no
24 longer a problem or curing is finished.
25
26 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS
27
28 A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do
29 not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of
30 the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper
31 proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate.
32
33 B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for
34 special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above
35 90 degrees F.
36
37 C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air.
38 Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact
39 between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary.
40
41 D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate).
42 In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout
43 thickness.
44
45 E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish.
46 Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the
47 manufacturer's recommendations.
GROUT
03600 -8 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water.
3 Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature
4 range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the
5 manufacturer.
6
7 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT
8
9 A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the
10 surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface
11 clean until placement of concrete grout.
12
13 B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt
14 and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water.
15 Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted.
16
17 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the
18 concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker
19 hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water
20 just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately
21 ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed.
22 Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with
23 approximately 1/16 to 1 /8 -in thick cement paste. A bonding grout composed of
24 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding admixture and
25 water, mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be substituted for
26 the cement slurry.
27
28 D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for
29 surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless
30 specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper
31 mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed.
32
33 E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings.
34
35 F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete.
36
37 3.06 SCHEDULE
38
39 A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used:
40
41 1. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations
42 where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates
43 greater in area than 3 -ft wide by 3 -ft long and except for the setting of
44 anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete.
45
46 2. Flowable non - shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates
47 greater in area than 3 -ft by 3 -ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive
GROUT
03600 -9 05/31/13
1 flowable non - shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his /her
2 option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non - shrink grout
3 for general purpose non - shrink cementitious grout.
4
5 3. Non - shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts
6 and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated
7 to receive epoxy grout.
8
9 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental base
10 plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for
11 platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when
12 nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting
13 of primary structural steel members such as columns and girders.
14
15 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper
16 mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface
17 grade.
18
19 END OF SECTION
GROUT
03600 -10
05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 03740
2
3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
4
5 PART 1.— GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut,
10 remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or
11 appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work under
12 this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete.
13
14 1.02 SUBMITTALS
15
16 A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of
17 demolition to be used at each location.
18
19 B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for
20 use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's
21 installation and /or application instructions.
22
23 C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are
24 proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to
25 the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project.
26
27 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
28
29 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
30
31 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding
32 Systems for Concrete.
33
34 2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin
35 Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer.
36
37 3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of
38 Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete.
39
40 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
41
42 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
43
44 6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
45 Plastics.
46
47 7 ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -1 05/31/13
1 Punch Tool.
2
3 8. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
4 Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
5
6 B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
7 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
8
9 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10
11 A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise
12 altered until authorization is given by the Engineer.
13
14 B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making
15 openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary
16 barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to
17 prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work,
18 protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the structures or
19 contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown or
20 specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete.
21
22 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall
23 have a minimum of 10 years' experience in the manufacture of such products
24 and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically
25 supporting the Contractor's personnel.
26
27 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28
29 A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the
30 manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers.
31
32 B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the
33 manufacturer.
34
35
36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
37
38 2.01 MATERIALS
39
40 A. General
41
42 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local
43 regulations.
44
45 B. Epoxy Bonding Agent
46
47 1. General
48
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, solvent -free,
2 asbestos -free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to
3 bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the
4 requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional
5 requirements specified herein.
6
7 2. Material
8
9 a. Properties of the cured material:
10
11 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at
12 28 days.
13
14 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14
15 days.
16
17 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
18 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days.
19
20 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14
21 days.
22
23 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One percent
24 maximum at 14 days.
25
26 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500
27 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure.
28
29 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test.
30
31 8) Color: Gray.
32
33 3. Approved manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst,
34 NJ - Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive
35 Liquid (LPL) or equal.
36
37 C. Epoxy Paste
38
39 1. General
40
41 a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos
42 free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond
43 dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts,
44 dowels, anchor bolts and all- threads into hardened concrete and
45 shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade
46 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may also be
47 used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 1 /8 -in or
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -3 05/31/13
1 less.
2
3 2. Material
4
5 a. Properties of the cured material:
6
7 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
8 minimum at 28 days.
9
10 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14
11 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum.
12
13 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
14 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days.
15
16 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14
17 days.
18
19 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at
20 7 days.
21
22 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist
23 cure.
24
25 7) Color: Concrete grey.
26
27 3. Approved manufacturers include:
28
29 a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur
30 Hi -mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive
31 1438 or equal.
32
33 b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 32; Master
34 Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal.
35
36 D. Non - Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Cement Grout, Non - Shrink
37 Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600
38 GROUT.
39
40 E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive
41 Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall
42 consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a
43 polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained
44 in a separate vial within the capsule.
45
46 F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent
47
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -4 05/31/13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive
1. General
a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two- component,
solvent -free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable for
crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated
for the specific size of opening or crack being injected.
b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be
treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive
injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy coating
approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable water.
2. Material
a. Properties of the cured material
1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi
minimum at 28 days.
2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14
days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent.
Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture):
12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi
minimum at 14 days (injection)
4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14
days.
5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent
maximum at 7 days.
6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry;
2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist.
7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test.
3. Approved manufacturers include:
a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation,
NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod; Master Builders Inc.,
OH - Concressive 1380 or equal.
b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation,
NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod LV; Master Builders Inc.,
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -5
Lyndhurst,
Cleveland,
Lyndhurst,
Cleveland,
05/31/13
1 OH - Concressive 1468 or equal.
2
3 PART 3 — EXECUTION
4
5 3.01 GENERAL
6
7 A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing
8 structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or
9 necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements,
10 sealants, etc., are specified in respective Sections. All work shall comply with
11 other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings.
12
13 B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and
14 applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
15
16 C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or
17 control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between
18 components on either side of the joint.
19
20 D. When drilling holes for dowels /bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall
21 stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location
22 shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval
23 by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to
24 drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to
25 avoid rebar interference.
26
27 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL
28
29 A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings
30 or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits followed by
31 chipping or jack- hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be
32 taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or
33 existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment is not
34 damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be removed shall only be done if
35 indicated on the Drawings, or after obtaining written approval from the Engineer.
36
37 B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting /core drilling and no
38 new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface
39 treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness
40 of 1/4-in.
41
42 C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete
43 will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified,
44 the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1 -in deep saw cut on each exposed
45 surface of the existing concrete.
46
47 D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by
48 approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -6 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional
3 repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by
4 such other methods as may be appropriate.
5
6 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION
7
8 A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas
9 requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified
10 herein, or as directed by the Engineer.
11
12 B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting
13 materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. - sandblasting,
14 grinding, etc., as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than
15 1 /2 -in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they
16 are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject
17 to the Engineer's final inspection.
18
19 C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all
20 contaminants, rust, etc., as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of
21 the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped
22 behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1 /2 -in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not
23 be damaged during the demolition operation.
24
25 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be
26 incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove
27 all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair.
28 It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and
29 provided with 1 -in minimum cover all around.
30
31 E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used
32 where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the
33 Engineer.
34
35 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been
36 roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with
37 water. Brush on a 1/16 -in layer of cement and water mixed to the
38 consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement
39 paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings.
40
41 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and
42 cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field
43 preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply
44 strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete
45 or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints
46 recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond.
47
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -7 05/31/13
1 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1 /4 -in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The
2 hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing
3 epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with [epoxy paste], then
4 dowels /bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping.
5 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled
6 and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled
7 and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the Drawings,
8 the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and spacing of
9 dowels.
10
11 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C.
12
13 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by
14 drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear
15 strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system
16 shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized
17 as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall
18 be tipped with a double 45 degree chamfered point, securely fastened
19 into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the
20 capsule filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical
21 and overhead positions.
22
23 3.04 GROUTING
24
25 A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600.
26
27 3.05 CRACK REPAIR
28
29 A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant
30 into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16 -in
31 in thickness they shall be pressure injected.
32
33 B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant
34 through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per
35 manufacturer's recommendations.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE
03740 -8 05/31/13
1
1
1 SECTION 05500
I 2
3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
4
I 5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
I 8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
10 miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as specified
I 11
12 herein. The miscellaneous metal items include but are not limited to the
following:
13
I 14
15 1. All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including
gratings and supports.
16
17 2. Prefabricated access hatches and frames.
II18
19 3. Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with all
20 equipment.
1 21
22 4. Railings, posts and supports both interior and exterior.
23
I 24
25 5. Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders and drains.
26 6. Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel door frames, angle frames,
I 27
28 plates and channels.
29 7. Guardrails
I 30
31 1.02 COORDINATION
32
I 33
34 A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other
Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades
35 adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items
I 36
37 herein specified.
38 B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to
I 39 be built into the work of all other Sections.
40
41 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
I 42
43 A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes of
44 members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other members
I 45 shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication.
46
47
1
1
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -1 11/13/15
1 B. For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show the
2 following:
3
4 1. Details of Sections
5 2. Jointing and Connections
6 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate net
7 weld length.
8 4. Reinforcing
9 5. Fasteners and Anchors
10 6. Accessories
11 7. Location of each finish
12
13 C. Manufacturer's specifications, details and installation instructions. Submit for:
14
15 1. All manufactured products used in fabrications.
16
17 D. Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent review
18 with shop drawings.
19
20 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
21
22 A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement indicated
23 dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items.
24
25 B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and
26 masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together
27 with all coordination Drawings and installation instructions required. Provide
28 temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required for installation in new
29 concrete or other adjacent work.
30
31 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
32
33 A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein
34 specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed
35 organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is
36 made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the
37 standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
38
39 1. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A53
40 2. Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48 (Class 30)
41 3. Galvanizing, general ASTM A123
42 4. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153
43 5. Galvanizing, assemblies ASTM A386
44 6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners AISI, Type 316
45 7. Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire AISI, Type 316
46 8. Welding Rods for Steel AWS Spec. for Arc
47 Welding
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -2 11/13/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 9. ANSI /AWS D1.1 -88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988.
2 10. ANSI /AWS D1.3 -81 -- Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981
3 11. ASTM A 36/A 36M -88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel;
4 1988.
5 12. ASTM A 307 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
6 Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988.
7 13. ASTM A 501 -88 -- Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded and
8 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988.
9 14. ASTM A 563 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
10 Nuts; 1988.
11 15. ASTM B 221 -85a -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alumi -num-
12 Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985.
13 16. FS FF -S -92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross - Recessed or Hexagon
14 Head; 1974 (Amended 1975).
15 17. FS FF -W -84A -- Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980).
16 18. FS FF -W -92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974.
17 19. SSPC -PA 1 -- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel Structures
18 Painting Council; 1982.
19 20. SSPC -Paint 12 -- Cold - Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film); Steel
20 Structures Painting Council; 1982.
21 21. SSPC -Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One -Coat Shop Paint; Steel Structures
22 Painting Council; 1982.
23 22. SSPC -SP 1 -- Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
24 23. SSPC -SP 3 -- Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council;
25 1982.
26 24. SSPC -SP 5 -- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
27 Council; 1985.
28 25. SSPC -SP 6 -- Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
29 Council; 1985.
30 26. SSPC -SP 8 -- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982.
31 27. SSPC -SP 10 -- Near -White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting
32 Council; 1985.
33
34 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
36 2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES
37
38 A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the work
39 of this Section.
40
41 B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and shall
42 be equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured by Star
43 Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal. Anchors
44 shall be minimum "two unit" type.
45
46 C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the sizes
47 shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or masonry by
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -3 11/13/15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
means of stainless steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall be attached with
steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted.
D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be Wej -it
"Ankr- Tite ", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors ", or Hilti "Kwik- Bolt ". When length
of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the length of bolt provided
shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1 -inch
behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete. Material shall be as noted on
the Construction Drawings. If not listed, all materials shall be stainless steel.
2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS
A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I -Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063 -T6, and shall
be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I -Bar Grating; or equal. Bearing
bars shall be 1 -1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient strength to carry a
uniformly distributed live load of not less than 200 pounds per square foot with
maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide bearing angles,
anchors, and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless steel and as detailed.
Grating shall be removable type with standard removable fasteners. Aluminum
surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces shall be protected with a special
protective lacquer or bituminous coating or other approved coating in order to
keep stains to a minimum. Top surface of all bars shall be flush; ends of gratings
shall be provided with binding strips of same depth and thickness as the main
bars welded thereto. All openings 2 inches and greater in diameter shall be
banded with a bar of the same depth and thickness as the main bearing bars of
the grating, or furnished with continuous cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be
welded to the band if banding is utilized. The ends of all grating sections shall
be likewise banded. Clamps and bolts used for attaching grating to supporting
members shall be stainless steel. All grating shall be clamped unless noted
otherwise. Clamps shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive
nonslip nosing.
C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion of 4 -inch minimum
width with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit Treads,
Type 116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or equal. Embedded
anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three anchors per tread.
D. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and installed
as shown on the Construction Drawings.
E. Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type:
1. All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and guardrails
shall be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as specified herein
and indicated on the Construction Drawings. Handrails shall be made of
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -4 11/13/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 nominal 1 -1/2 inches inside diameter pipe (schedule 40 for rails,
2 schedule 80 for posts) fabricated of seamless 6105 -T5 or 6061 -T6 alloy,
3 ASTM B -429 or ASTM B -221. The supplier of the handrail system shall
4 supply all necessary fittings, rackets, transition, corner and connector
5 pieces, toeboards, protective gaskets, etc., for a complete job at the
6 locations indicated on the Construction Drawings. All mounting hardware
7 including bolts, studs, nuts, etc., shall be stainless steel Type 316. Bends
8 shall be smooth and accurate to the details shown. The handrail systems
9 shall comply with all OSHA codes and Section 1012 of the Florida
10 Building Code. Railing systems incorporating pop- rivets or glued fittings
11 shall not be allowed.
12
13 2. Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson
14 Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal.
15
16 3. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib
17 concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail.
18 Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a load of 50
19 lb /ft. applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be applied
20 simultaneously with the 50Ib /ft. load. In addition, the handrails shall be
21 designed to withstand a load of 100Ib /ft. applied vertically downward to
22 the top rail and simultaneously with the 501b /ft. horizontal load. The
23 100Ib /ft. vertical load does not apply to stair rails.
24
25 4. Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop
26 drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the
27 requirements of OSHA and Section 1013 of the Florida Building Code.
28 Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the maximum
29 spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and guardrail system
30 shall be responsible for the design and preparation of shop drawings and
31 design calculations (signed and sealed by a Registered Professional
32 Engineer to meet OSHA requirements and Section 1012 and 1013 of the
33 Florida Building Code.
34
35 5. All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and
36 expansion compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice
37 sleeves. Make provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed and
38 where shown on the Construction Drawings.
39
40 6. Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the
41 manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum
42 sleeves cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy resin
43 by E -Bond Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded Reinforced
44 Plastics, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars shall be placed
45 on the posts and fastened in place, as shown and as detailed on
46 approved shop drawings.
47
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -5 11/13/15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
7. Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done by
the use of approved sockets, flanges, brackets, or other approved
means, which will provide neat and substantial support for the pipe
railing.
8. All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic or by an approved
coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, paint, or other
defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacent work
by other trades has been completed.
F. Toeboards:
1. Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming to
latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations.
2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum shape bolted
by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring any drilling
or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as manufactured by
Thompson Fabricating Company, or approved equal. Toeboards shall
have pitched top and tear drop bottom to prevent accumulation of dirt, or
other material.
3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063 -T6. All fastening hardware
shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Toe boards shall be provided with smooth edges and rounded corners.
Sharp edges and pointed corners shall not be acceptable.
G. Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the
Drawings.
1. Kickplates shall be provided with smooth edges and rounded corners.
Sharp edges and pointed corners shall not be acceptable.
H. Aluminum safety gate shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum.
Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD ", or "KD"
as manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock -Davis Associates, Inc.; Type
"AM" Inland- Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division; or equal, sized
as shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet -6 inches shall be double
leaf type. Hatches shall be designed for a live Toad of 300 pounds per square
foot. Hatches shall be watertight.
J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall
have abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company,
Birmingham, Alabama.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -6 11/13/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown and
2 installed at the locations shown.
3
4 L. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as shown
5 on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall be
6 fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb.
7
8 M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown.
9 Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete with
10 welded strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum shown but
11 not otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items shall conform to
12 the detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the tolerances published by
13 the American Aluminum Association.
14
15 2.03 STEEL ITEMS
16
17 A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as
18 shown on the Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center anchor around
19 circumference as shown.
20
21 B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses as
22 required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according to the details as shown
23 on the Drawings.
24
25 C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the
26 Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets,
27 closure angles in roof at edge of T -beam; base plates to support ends of
28 T- beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment
29 furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other miscellaneous
30 steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.
31
32 D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W -Beam design with reflectors. All
33 mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized.
34
35 2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS
36
37 A. Outside pipe clean -out frames and covers, when and where shown on the
38 Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R- 6013 -R -6099 series as
39 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean -outs
40 shall be 6 -inch diameter.
41
42 B. Frames, covers and grates for manholes, catch basins and inlets shall be of a
43 good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of supporting an
44 H -20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S. Foundry, Neenah
45 Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall be as shown on the
46 Drawings. Covers to have letters "WATER ", "SEWER" or "DRAIN ", as
47 applicable, embossed on top.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -7 11/13/15
1
2 C. Electric and telephone manhole frames and covers, when and where shown on
3 the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to all
4 requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall have the
5 letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE," as
6 applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high. The clear opening shall
7 be 36- inches.
8
9 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS
10
11 A. Stainless steel items, where shown on the Drawings, shall be manufactured
12 using 316 S.S., unless otherwise noted.
13
14 2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS
15
16 A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened and
17 for the type of connection required.
18
19 1. For concealed interior and exterior use or built into exterior walls use
20 nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated.
21
22 2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use
23 fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being
24 fastened.
25
26 PART 3 — EXECUTION
27
28 3.01 FABRICATION
29
30 A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight,
31 sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and
32 free from defects impairing strength or durability.
33
34 B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand
35 stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel accessories and
36 connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless otherwise specified.
37 Threaded connections shall be made so that the threads are concealed by
38 fitting.
39
40 C. Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as specified
41 or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Exposed joints
42 shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous.
43
44 D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and Gas
45 Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done where
46 shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be done only
47 by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in accordance with the
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -8 11/13/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of built -up members to be
2 welded shall be adequately supported and clamped or held by other adequate
3 means to hold the parts in proper relation for welding.
4
5 E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as possible
6 in order to prevent pitting or discoloration.
7
8 F. All aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have
9 manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an
10 anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association
11 Specification AA- C22 -A41. A coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied
12 to all aluminum before shipment from the factory.
13
14 G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even - grained, smooth, free
15 from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render
16 them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be
17 thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field by
18 the Engineer. All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and /or specified
19 shall be machined to a true plane surface and shall be true and seat at all points
20 without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns so that the thickness
21 specified or shown shall not be reduced in obtaining finished surfaces. Castings
22 will not be acceptable if the actual weight is less than 95 percent of the
23 theoretical weight computed from the dimensions shown. The Contractor, if
24 requested by the Owner or Engineer, shall provide facilities for weighing
25 castings in the presence of the Owner or Engineer showing true weights,
26 certified by the supplier.
27
28 H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose
29 mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given one shop
30 coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting Section after
31 fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall
32 be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open
33 spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up with primer immediately after
34 erection. Final painting is specified in Painting Section 09900.
35
36 I. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot -dip zinc process after fabrication.
37 Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be galvanized shall be
38 thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of
39 molten zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent and shall be the normal
40 coating to be obtained by immersing the items in a bath of molten zinc and
41 allowing them to remain in the bath until their temperature becomes the same
42 as the bath. Coating shall be not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface.
43
44 J. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and finish
45 as item except where specifically indicated otherwise.
46
47 K. Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -9 11/13/15
1
1
1
2
3
4 3.02 INSTALLATION
5
6 A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other
7 masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to
8 concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in I
9 accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will
10 not be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before fabrication
11 is started. I
12
13 B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall
14 receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic I
15 applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
16
17 C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved I
18 bitumastic troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions
19 prior to installation.
20
1 21 D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene
22 gasket between the aluminum and the concrete or masonry.
23
I24 E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of
25 zinc - chromate primer and provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene gasket between the
26 aluminum and the dissimilar metal.
27
I
28 F. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and
29 masonry paint to the wood.
30
I
31 G. Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required.
32
33 H. Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation.
34
35 1. Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline joints.
36 I 37 2. Weld joints as indicated.
38
39 a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for appearance I
40 and quality of welds, and for corrective methods.
41 b. Grind exposed joints smooth.
42 I 43 I. Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and free of
44 rack, measured from established lines and levels.
45
I46 J. Provide temporary bracing as required.
47
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -10 11/13/15
1
2
3
4 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH -UP
5
6 A. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection.
7
8 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces.
9
10 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry film
11 thickness.
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
15
16
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -11 11/13/15
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500 -12 11/13/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 06600
2
3 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SUMMARY
8
9 A. This section includes all furnishing and installing Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
10 (FRP) Products and Fabrications, including but not limited to:
11
12 1. FRP Weir Plates
13 2. FRP Scum Baffles
14 3. FRP Splice Plates
15 4. FRP Scum Baffle Supports
16 5. FRP Accessories
17
18 B. The Contractor shall pressure wash and clean the existing clarifier walls where
19 the new FRP scum baffles and weir plates are to be installed to the satisfaction
20 of the Engineer.
21
22 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
23
24 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as
25 required for the provision and proper installation of all of the FRP Products as
26 shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All anchor bolts, gaskets,
27 sealants, and other accessories and appurtenances, required for a complete
28 and operating installations shall be included whether specifically mentioned or
29 not.
30
31 1.03 REFERENCES
32
33 A. ANSI /NSF 61 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects.
34 B. ANSI /AWWA F101 — Contact - Molded, Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Wash
35 Troughs and Launders
36 C. ASTM D 638 — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
37 D. ASTM D 695 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
38 Plastics
39 E. ASTM D 790 — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
40 and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
41
42 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44 A. All FRP products and fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm who
45 has continually engaged in the manufacture and /or fabrication of fiberglass
46 reinforced plastics. Firms not listed in this specification must clearly document
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600 -1 05/31/13
1
1
1 a minimum of five years experience with similar projects of equal scope or
2 design.
I
3
4 B. The Contractor shall assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and
5 communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a
I
6 proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instructions and
7 recommendations are followed.
8
I
9 C. The scum baffle and scum baffle mounting brackets shall be manufactured and
10 installed such that no interference with the weir plate or weir plate mounting
11 hardware exists. With the exception of cutting to length, field modifications to I
12 the scum baffle plate, the scum baffle mounting brackets, and to the weir plates
13 will not be permitted.
14 I 15 1.05 SUBMITTALS
16
17 A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all FRP materials and fabrications I
18 as required by this scope of work.
19
20 B. Product Data:
1 21
22 1. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications,
23 and identification of materials of construction, including resins and glass
24 fiber content and layout for FRP constructions.
I
25
26 2. Manufacturers catalog data with load and deflection charts for all FRP •
27 gratings.
I
28
29 3. Manufacturers catalog data for all FRP Structural Shapes.
30
I
31 4. Manufacturer's 6 -inch square samples of FRP laminate of the same
32 construction, thickness, and color as the structural item.
33
I
34 5. Test results of FRP laminate.
35
36 6. Installation instructions and manufacturer certification that materials I
37 comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended
38 application.
39 I 40 C. Shop Drawings:
41
42 1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all I
43 dimensions, connections, fasteners, structural supports, adjustments,
44 openings, anchors, tolerances, assembly, and installation details as
45 required and shall be based on field measurements by the Contractor to
I46 ensure proper installation.
47
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1.07 WARRANTY
2
3 A. The manufacturer shall warrant the weirs, scum baffles and bracket supports to
4 be free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with
5 Specification Section 01740.
6
7 1.08 COORDINATION
8
9 A. The Contractor and the manufacturer shall coordinate the weir and scum baffle
10 design and installation requirements with the clarifier mechanism, scum box,
11 scum beach, and effluent launder channel configurations.
12
13 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
14
15 2.01 GENERAL
16
17 A. All FRP materials shall be manufactured with vinylester resin and chemical
18 formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and
19 other physical properties compatible with domestic wastewater and granular
20 HTH as required.
21
22 B. All structural shapes shall be constructed of continuous strand roving,
23 continuous transverse mat, and synthetic surface veil, and shall include
24 ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors.
25
26 C. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes, and abrasion shall be sealed according
27 to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion.
28
29 2.02 FRP WEIRS, SCUM BAFFLES, SPLICE PLATES, AND SUPPORTS
30
31 A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein, weirs, splice places, baffles, and
32 supports shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber and molded
33 to produce uniform smooth surfaces.
34
35 B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not
36 more than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final
37 laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness.
38
39 C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots,
40 crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion
41 resistance and UV protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with
42 resin. The weirs, splice places, baffles, and supports shall all be the same color
43 and shall be green, white, or grey.
44
45 D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on
46 all surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional UV
47 protection.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600 -3 05/31/13
1
1
1
2 E. The weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be a minimum of
I
3 1/4" thick plastic laminate. Oversized mounting holes shall be provided for
4 vertical and horizontal alignment of at least 2" with 5" diameter FRP washers to
5 cover the holes. I
6
7 F Weirs and splice plates shall be mounted with 1/2" x 4 -1/4 inch stainless steel
8 anchors on 24 -inch centers. The weirs shall not exceed 12 -feet in length unless I
9 otherwise noted. Cut ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed with resin.
10
11 G. The scum baffle panels shall be 12- inches high and shall not exceed 12 -feet in I
12 length unless otherwise noted. Splice plates shall be minimum 6 -inch x 12 -inch.
13 The scum baffle brackets shall be 7 -inch x 10 -inch x'/4 -inch FRP with gussets
14 on both sides and slotted holes to provide horizontal, vertical and radial I
15 adjustment of the baffle. The brackets shall be installed a maximum of 4 -feet
16 on center or as shown on the Drawings. Fastening holes in the scum baffle
17 panel shall be countersunk to accommodate 3/8 -inch flat head fasteners. Cut I
18 ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed with resin.
19
20 G. Anchors, nuts, bolts, washers and all other hardware shall be Type 316 stainless
I21 steel.
22
23 H. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties:
24 1
25
26 Method Test Min. Value
27 ASTM D -638 Tensile Strength 24,000 psi
1
28 ASTM D -790 Flexural Strength 25,000 psi
29 ASTM D -790 Flexural Modulus 1.4 x 106 psi
30 ASTM D -2583 Barcol Hardness 40
I
31 ASTM D -570 Water Absorption 0.2%
32 I. Construction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI /AWWA/NSF standards
I
33 listed above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such certification.
34
35 J. Straight weirs shall be cut from a flat sheet. Curvilinear weirs (clarifier) cut from
I
36 a flat sheet will not be acceptable.
37
38 K. Weir notch configuration and dimensions shall match the existing weirs.
39 II
40 L. Caulking or weir gaskets shall be installed or applied to provide a leak free seal
41 between the weir plate and the concrete wall. The gasket shall be 1/4-inch, I
42 closed cell neoprene or as recommended by the weir plate manufacturer. The
43 caulking shall be Sikaflex 1A or as recommended by the weir plate
44 manufacturer. 1
45
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS I
06600 -4 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 M. Weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be as manufactured
2 with vinyl ester resin by MFG Water Treatment Products or approved equal.
3
4 PART 3 — EXECUTION
5
6 3.01 INSPECTION
7
8 A. Upon receipt of material at job site, the Contractor shall inspect all materials for
9 shipping damage. Any damage is to be noted on the shipping receipt / packing
10 list and reported promptly to the shipper.
11
12 3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE
13
14 A. Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use
15 shipping pallets to move material. Do not drag FRP materials.
16
17 B. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent
18 twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind.
19
20 3.03 INSTALLATION
21
22 A. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify that other construction trades and
23 materials have been installed per the Drawings, and, that they are accurate in
24 location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level.
25
26 B. Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings and
27 instructions supplied by the FRP Manufacturer.
28
29 C. Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level, and plumb. Field
30 fabricate as necessary for accurate fit.
31
32 D. All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with Manufacturer's sealing
33 resin according to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion.
34
35 E. If the Work requires the Contractor to perform additional tasks that may damage
36 the installed FRP materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for covering the
37 FRP materials with plywood, or other suitable protective material.
38
39 F. Prior to installation of the weirs and scum baffle supports, the Contractor shall
40 pressure wash and grind smooth the concrete surface where those items will
41 be mounted to the existing structure.
42
43 3.04 CLARIFIERS WEIR INSTALLATION
44
45 A. V -notch weirs on all clarifiers shall be installed level around the entire perimeter
46 of the clarifier. The weirs shall be checked for level with a surveying instrument
47 at 12 locations around the circumference of each clarifier representing the face
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600 -5 05/31/13
of a clock. The weirs shall be adjusted to a tolerance of ± 1/32 -inch at each of
the 12 locations.
END OF SECTION
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
06600 -6 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 09865
2
3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface
10 preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this Contract
11 in its entirety.
12
13 1.02 SUBMITTALS
14
15 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications
16 and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface preparation, application
17 procedures and dry mil thickness.
18
19 B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by
20 the Engineer.
21
22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
23
24 2.01 MATERIALS
25
26 A. Submerged Services:
27
28 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are subject
29 to splash action or that are specified to be considered submerged service
30 shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 at 3.0 -5.0 mils
31 (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt-Guard Epoxy Coating 97 -145 at 4.0 -6.0 mils (D.F.T.),
32 or approved equal.
33
34 2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces must be filled with Tnemec
35 Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1 ' /z" deep)
36 or approved equal recommended by manufacturer of approved paint
37 system.
38
39 B. Non - submerged Services:
40
41 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph
42 2.01A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast
43 Dry Primer 94 -109 (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) or approved equal.
44
45 C. Non - primed Surfaces:
46
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865 -1 05/31/13
1 1. Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be
2 painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable
3 rust - resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to
4 prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be
5 satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test.
6
7 D. Compatibility of Coating Systems:
8
9 1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the
10 manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and
11 finish coats specified in Section 09900 for use in the field and which are
12 recommended for use together.
13
14 PART 3 — EXECUTION
15
16 3.01 APPLICATION
17
18 A. Surface Preparation and Priming:
19
20 1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above,
21 shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC -SP -6, Commercial
22 Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components scheduled
23 for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in accordance
24 with SSPC- SP -10. Near White, immediately prior to priming.
25
26 2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill
27 scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces shall
28 be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4 -6.
29
30 3. Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's
31 recommendations.
32
33 4. Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has
34 occurred and within 24 hours.
35
36 5. Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for
37 moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263).
38
39
40 END OF SECTION
SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
09865 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 09900
2
3 PAINTING
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment
10 and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete
11 this Contract in its entirety.
12
13 B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled,
14 exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and all
15 other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor
16 items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this
17 Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated
18 herein.
19
20 C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted:
21
22 1. Portions of metal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This
23 does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or masonry
24 surfaces that shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be
25 embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated to
26 prevent electrolysis.
27
28 2. Stainless steel.
29
30 3. Fencing
31
32 4. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces.
33
34 5. Acoustical ceilings.
35
36 6. Tile.
37
38 7. Fiberglass other than piping.
39
40 8. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of
41 mechanical equipment.
42
43 9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels,
44 and control panels.
45
46 10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks.
PAINTING
09900 -1 11/05/15
1 1.02 REFERENCES
2
3 A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
4
5 1. SSPC -SP -1 through SSPC -SP -10 Surface Preparation Specifications
6
7 B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI)
8
9 1. ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation
10 Standards.
11
12 1.03 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
15 shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's
16 specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface
17 preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness.
18
19 B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions,
20 color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections.
21
22 C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review a complete
23 Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and properly notify and
24 coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting operations with
25 these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each surface to be painted,
26 the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the coverage and the number of
27 coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to achieve the specified dry film
28 thickness, and color charts. When the Schedule has been approved, apply all
29 material in strict accordance with the approved Schedule and the
30 manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gages shall be made
31 available to the Engineer to verify the proper application while work is in
32 progress.
33
34 1.04 SPARE MATERIAL
35
36 A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used.
37
38 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
39
40 A. Contractor shall submit a list of projects successfully completed during the past
41 3 years of similar projects. Contractor shall also supply record of Certificates of
42 Approval from Manufacturers to show they have completed technical product
43 and application training. Contractors shall submit a list of surface preparation
44 and application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the products specified.
45
46
PAINTING
09900 -2
11/05/15
1
1
' 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 MATERIALS
I 4
5 A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the Tnemec
6 Company Inc., Carboline, PPG /Porter Coatings, and Sherwin Williams. The
I 7 painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these products and
8 recommendations for applications. No brand other than those named will be
9 considered for approval, unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each
I 10
11 item in the following schedule, together with sufficient data substantiated by
certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality
12 to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval within
I 13 30 days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The type and number of
14 tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
15
I 16 B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken
17 containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch
18 number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned,
19 and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable
I20 materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before using.
21
22 C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the
23 manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used.
24
25 D. . No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil.
I 26
27 E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all
28 painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements
I 29 of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the
30 buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing
31 fixture shall be used for this purpose.
I 32
33 F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and safety
34 of workmen shall be followed.
I 35
36 G. Where new painting is specified for surfaces with existing finishes, the
37 Contractor shall sample the existing coating(s) for compatibility with the
I 38 proposed new paint and notify the Engineer of any incompatibilities found.
39
40 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS
I 41
42 A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for
43 structural steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel.
44
I45 B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied at
46 the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting
I PAINTING
09900 -3 11/05/15
1
1
1
1 systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require
I
2 an additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color coverage.
3
4 1. Non - submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings:
5
6 a. Tnemec
7 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) I
8 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
9
10 b. Carboline
I
11 1st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
12 2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
13
14 c. PPG /HPC
I
15 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
16 D.F.T.)
17 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
18 D.F.T.)
19
20 d. Sherwin Williams I
21 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
22 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
23
24 2. Submerged Concrete
25
26 a. Tnemec
27 1st Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
28 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
29
30 b. Carboline I
31 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.)
32
33 c. PPG /HPC ,
34 2 Coats: Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949
35 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
36
37 d. Sherwin Williams
38 1st Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T
39
40
I
41 3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions)
42
43 a. Tnemec '
44 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 54 -660- (80 -100 sq. ft. per gal.)
45 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
46 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) I
47
48 b. Carboline
PAINTING
09900 -4 11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 Coat: Sanitile 600 /600TG (60 -80 sq. ft. per gal.)
2 2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
3
4 c. PPG /HPC
5 1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97- 685/686 (40 to
6 80 sq. ft. per gal @ 12.0 -24.0 mils D.F.T.)
7
8 2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy
9 Coating
10 97 -130 Series. (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
11
12 d. Sherwin Williams
13 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer
14 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat
15
16 4. Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted)
17
18 a. Tnemec
19 Regular CMU
20 2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75 -100 SF /gallon /coat
21 Split face CMU
22 2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65 -80 SF /gallon /coat
23
24 b. Carboline
25 CMU
26 1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB @ 60 -80 SF /gallon
27 Split Face CMU
28 2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1st coat @ 40 -60 SF /gallon &
29 2nd coat @ 80 -120 SF /gallon
30
31 c. PPG /HPC
32 2 Coats: PPG /HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF
33 per gallon.
34
35 5. Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls
36
37 a. Tnemec
38 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
39 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.)
40
41 b. Carboline
42 1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.)
43 2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils DFT)
44 3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL
45
46 c. PPG /HPC
47 1st Coat Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900 -5
11/05/15
1 2nd Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils
2 D.F.T.)
3
4 6. Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing
5
6 a. Tnemec
7 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
8 Coating (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
9 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy
10 Coating (8.0 - 10.0 mils D.F.T.)
11
12 b. Carboline
13 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.)
14
15 c. PPG /HPC
16 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949
17 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
18 1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949
19 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
20
21 d. Sherwin Williams
22 1st Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
23 2nd Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.)
24
25 7 Exterior non - submerged ferrous metals:
26
27 a. Tnemec
28 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
29 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
30 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.)
31
32 b. Carboline
33 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
34 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
35 3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.)
36
37 c. PPG /HPC
38 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
39 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
40 D.F.T.)
41 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 mils
42 D.F.T.)
43
44 d. Sherwin Williams
45 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
46 2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0 -4.0 mils (D.F.T.)
47
48 8. Interior non - submerged ferrous metals:
PAINTING
09900 -6 11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 a. Tnemec
3 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
4 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.)
5
6 b. Carboline
7 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
8 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
9
10 c. PPG /HPC
11 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
12 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
13 D.F.T.)
14
15 9. Exterior galvanized and non - ferrous metal:
16
17 a. Tnemec
18 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
19 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
20
21 b. Carboline:
22 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.)
23 2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.)
24
25 c. PPG /HPC
26 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
27 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
28 D.F.T.)
29 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0
30 mils D.F.T.)
31
32 d. Sherwin Williams
33 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T.)
34 2nd Coat: H- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mills D.F.T.)
35
36 10. Interior galvanized and non - ferrous metals:
37
38 a. Tnemec
39 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
40 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.)
41
42 b. Carboline:
43 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.)
44 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
45
46 c. PPG /HPC
47 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
48 D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900 -7
11/05/15
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
D.F.T.)
11. Galvanized and non - ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
2 "d Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG /HPC
1st Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
2nd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
3rd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97-
946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat)
12. Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250 °F:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450 °F (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.)
or
1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400 - 1000 °F (2.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG /HPC
2 Coats: Speedhide Int/Ext Aluminum Paint 6 -230. (1.0 -1.3 mils
D.F.T. per coat)
13. Insulated Pipe:
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 "d Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG /HPC
2 Coats: PITT -TECH Interior /Exterior Satin DTM Industrial
Enamels 90 -474 Series.(2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
PAINTING
09900 -8 11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals:
3
4 a. Tnemec
5 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
6 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
7
8 b. Carboline
9 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.)
10 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.)
11
12 c. PPG /HPC
13 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
14 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils
15 D.F.T.)
16
17 15. Plastic Piping - Interior:
18
19 a. Tnemec
20 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
21 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
22
23 b. Carboline
24 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.)
25 2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
26
27 c. PPG /HPC
28 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130
29 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
30 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130
31 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
32
33 16. Plastic Piping - Exterior
34
35 a. Tnemec
36 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
37 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
38
39 b. Carboline
40 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.)
41 2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.,per coat)
42
43 c. PPG /HPC
44 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130
45 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
46 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130
47 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
PAINTING
09900 -9 11/05/15
3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800
(2.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
d. Sherwin Williams
1st Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T)
2nd Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T)
17. Interior Drywall and Plaster - Industrial Areas
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils DFT)
3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.)
c. PPG /HPC
1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130
(4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130
(4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.)
18. Interior Drywall and Plaster -Office Areas
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 -1.5 mils D.F.T.)
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.)
b. Carboline
1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.)
2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
c. PPG /HPC
1st Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer /Sealer 6 -2
(1 mil DFT)
2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6 -411
(2 mils D.F.T. per coat)
19. Interior Concrete Floors
a. Tnemec
1st Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 - 7.0 mils D.F.T >)
PAINTING
09900 -10
11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2nd Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 —10.0 mils D.F.T.)
2
3 Note: Apply 50 — 70 mesh silica sand at 5 lbs. per 150 sq. ft.
4 between 1st and 2nd coat to provide non -slip surface.
5
6 b. Carboline
7 1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.)
8 2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat)
9
10 Note: Utilize 40 -60 mesh silica sand to provide non -slip surface.
11 Consult with Carboline for application details.
12
13
14 c. PPG /HPC
15 1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99 -6639
16 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T)
17 2nd Coat: Megaseal Self- Leveling Epoxy 99 -6680
18 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.)
19
20 20. Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating
21
22 a. Tnemec
23 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma - Shield H2S
24 (125 mils D.F.T.)
25 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma -Glaze
26 (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.)
27
28 b. Carboline
29 1st Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils)
30 2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.)
31
32 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Concrete Headworks)
33
34 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
35 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
36 (100 mils)
37 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
38 (100 mils)
39
40 d. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity
41 Mains)
42
43 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer
44 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
45 (100 mils)
46 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner
47 (100 mils)
PAINTING
09900 -11
11/05/15
1
2 e. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Concrete Headworks)
3
4 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT)
5 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
6 (20 -40 mils DFT)
7 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac
8 (20 -40 mils DFT)
9
10 f. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity
11 Mains)
12
13 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT)
14 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT)
15 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT)
16
17 g. Sherwin Williams
18 1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T)
19
20 21. Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive
21 Environment Special Coating
22
23 a. Tnemec
24 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma - Shield H2S (30 mils D.F.T.)
25
26 b. Carboline
27 1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0 -40.0 mils D.F.T.)
28
29 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec
30 1st Coat:
31 2nd Coat:
32
33 d. Sherwin Williams
34 1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T)
35 2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T)
36
37 22. Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite
38
39 a. Tnemec
40 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5002 Tenemeliner
41 (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.)
42 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5001 Tenemeliner
43 (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.)
44
45 b. Carboline
46 1st Coat: Semstone 800 primer
47 Finish Coats: Semstone 870
PAINTING
09900 -12 11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 (reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details)
2
3 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec
4 1st Coat:
5
6 23. Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating)
7
8 a. Tnemec
9 1st Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar
10 (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T)
11 2 "d Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar
12 (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T)
13
14 b. Carboline
15 1st Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T)
16 2nd Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T)
17
18 c. Sherwin Williams
19 1st Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T)
20 2nd Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T)
21
22 C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically
23 excepted shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with
24 materials consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select which
25 of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall
26 be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be made for this
27 painting.
28
29 2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT
30
31 A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed
32 conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquid and semi -
33 liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings,
34 fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating accessories that
35 are integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit
36 system. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color Coding Schedules
37 attached at the end of this Section.
38
39 B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and
40 with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to,
41 but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the
42 flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe
43 system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the same
44 color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and
45 Color Coding Schedule.
46
PAINTING
09900 -13
11/05/15
1
1
1 C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from 1
2 the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted
3 between and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the
4 equipment.
I
5
6 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES
7
111
8 A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each
9 pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids.
10 Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be located I
11 more than twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly adjacent
12 to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side of the valve
13 regulator, flowcheck, strainer clean -out, and all pieces of equipment. I
14
15 B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title locations
16 shall be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be placed where '
17 the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe or covering where
18 they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from operating positions
19 especially those adjacent to control valves.
I20
21 C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible,
22 or at the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more than
23 one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered
24 consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as directed by the
25 Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed
26 and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1.
1
27
28 D. Application of titles.
29
30 1. The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best
31 contrast with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil
32 applied. I
33
34 2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the
35 Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line. I
36
37 3. Letter sizes.
38 I 39 Outside Diameter
40 of Pipe or Size of Legend
41 Covering (inches) Letters (inches) I
42
43 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2
44 1-1/2 to 2 3/4
I45 2 -1/2 to 6 1 -1/4
46 8 to 10 2-1/2
PAINTING
09900 -14 11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 More than 10 3-1/2
2
3 Equipment titles are to be two inches high.
4
5 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or
6 covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2 "a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow
7 head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum
8 "a" dimension shall be 6 inches.
9
10 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers
11 and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a
12 double- headed directional flow.
13
14 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
15
16 A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and
17 shop or field finished.
18
19 B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material
20 prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall have
21 been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications shall have
22 been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white metal and
23 re- primed in accordance with these Specifications.
24
25 C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance
26 with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with
27 these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified prime coat at no
28 additional cost to the Owner.
29
30 D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots
31 retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint
32 coats in the field.
33
34 E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect
35 the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other
36 cause.
37
38 F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a field
39 applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat does
40 not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature,
41 prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed by the
42 Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Submit
43 to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is compatible with
44 the specified finish coat.
45
PAINTING
09900 -15
11/05/15
1 G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all
2 motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found
3 to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned.
4
5 PART 3 — EXECUTION
6
7 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
8
9 A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section
10 09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given
11 to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks
12 before application of finish.
13
14 B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in accordance
15 with SSPC -SP -3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by hand
16 cleaning in accordance with SSPC -SP -2. All pits and dents shall be filled and
17 all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for
18 painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by use of
19 approved solvents, wire brushing or sanding.
20
21 C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report
22 unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of
23 dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall
24 have any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings
25 using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface
26 tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D -4541 standard. Testing is
27 required to confirm this strength using ASTM D -4541 standard and methods.
28 Surface profile shall be CSP -3 to CSP -6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete
29 Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing an
30 anchor profile equal to 60 -grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete surfaces
31 by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired profile.
32 Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or less per 1,000 square feet
33 over 24 hour timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride test as per
34 ASTM E -1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM F -2170,
35 should confirm concrete RH results < 75 %. Application of coatings and linings
36 should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during periods when
37 surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface thermometer
38 to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. When in doubt,
39 double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, cracks, expansion
40 joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior to application of
41 coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and contaminated surface
42 layers prior to application of coatings and linings.
43
44 D. Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence,
45 chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter.
46
PAINTING
09900 -16
11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting.
2
3 F. Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. All encrustations
4 shall be removed.
5
6 G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed locations.
7 Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in accordance
8 with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is inadvertently
9 installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before priming and
10 painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall have the gap
11 between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component polysulfide sealant
12 to prevent rust stains.
13
14 H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated
15 surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All
16 nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be
17 done in accordance with SSPC -SP -1, Solvent Cleaning.
18
19 I. Shop- Finished Surfaces: All shop- coated surfaces shall be protected from
20 damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas
21 immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop- coated
22 surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same materials
23 as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, discolored, or
24 which require more than minor touch -up, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall
25 ° receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut edges of
26 galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized piping,
27 electrical conduit and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished painted,
28 shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust -zinc oxide metal primer.
29
30 J. Galvanized and Zinc - Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted shall
31 be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such surfaces not
32 to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per SSPC -SP7
33 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion.
34
35 K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one shop
36 coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented
37 asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC -SP7 of galvanized surfaces to insure
38 optimum coating adhesion.
39
40 3.02 WORKMANSHIP
41
42 A. General:
43 1. Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be
44 as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint
45 manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition will
46 be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted areas
PAINTING
09900 -17 11/05/15
1 on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. Finished
2 repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee specified for
3 remainder of work.
4
5 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in
6 strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all
7 painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Finished
8 areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of
9 workmanship. Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the
10 satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not
11 satisfactory.
12
13 3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and
14 accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations.
15 Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact
16 with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove
17 all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and
18 replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates and all
19 machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint
20 shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting
21 is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all
22 damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted.
23
24 4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the
25 manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If
26 material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun,
27 the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with
28 undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the
29 manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun
30 than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness
31 shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On
32 masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture,
33 however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be
34 exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to
35 achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the
36 coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint.
37
38 5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All
39 paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred
40 while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added
41 to any paint.
42
43 6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be
44 employed where required.
45
46
PAINTING
09900 -18
11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Field Priming:
2
3 1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and
4 other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not
5 require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be
6 painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather,
7 and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting
8 schedule.
9
10 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked -on enamel finish
11 or with a standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless the
12 prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the finish
13 has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that
14 have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the shop
15 coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and
16 retouched before any successive painting is done on them in the field.
17 All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish.
18
19 C. Field Painting:
20
21 1. All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting.
22
23 2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting
24 shall be done when the temperature is below 50 °F, in dust -laden air,
25 when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely
26 disappeared from the surface to be painted.
27
28 3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily
29 distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the
30 approximate shade of the finished coat.
31
32 4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities.
33 Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00
34 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even
35 surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all exterior
36 trim shall be back - primed before installation.
37
38 5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly
39 manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry
40 paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by
41 structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as
42 quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be
43 inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.
44
PAINTING
09900 -19
11/05/15
1 6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically
2 approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
3 damage caused by overspray or drifting.
4
5 7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting is
6 to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if
7 necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint
8 shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's
9 directions.
10
11 8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall
12 be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer.
13
14 9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar
15 or asphalt- compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG /HPC PITT -
16 GUARD® Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95 -2328 or equal before successive
17 coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends using 66
18 Hi -Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run initially to test
19 the paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not recommend
20 application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline recommends
21 removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable coatings based
22 on the substrate and intended service application.
23
24 3.03 CLEANUP
25
26 A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste material
27 and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting
28 remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from and about
29 the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified.
30
31 B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed or
32 splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc.,
33 leaving the work ready for inspection.
34
35 C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed
36 metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the
37 work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the Engineer.
38
39 3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES
40
41 A. Inspection
42
43 1. All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to assure
44 proper performance and compliance with the specifications.
45
46 2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surface
PAINTING
09900 -20 11/05/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor shall
2 apply additional coats only after the previous coat has been approved by
3 the Engineer or Owner's representative.
4
5 B. Testing
6
7 1. The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing
8 equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order.
9 Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers'
10 instructions or as directed by the Engineer.
11
12 a. Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings
13 shall be taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings
14 shall be taken at the start of the mornings work, mid day and
15 afternoon. Should environmental conditions change, additional
16 reading shall be taken to assure that coatings are being applied
17 under the conditions as outlined by the coatings manufacturer.
18
19 b. Surface Temperature Thermometer: Surface temperatures shall
20 be taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface
21 temperature shall be that as specified by the coatings
22 manufacturer.
23
24 c. Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X- Course Replica Tape shall
25 a be employed to determine the surface profile of blasted surfaces.
26 Surface profile shall be as specified.
27
28 d. Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading
29 shall be taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's
30 instructions) Type 1 (magnetic) or Type 2 (electromagnetic)
31 instrument. Dry film thickness reading will be taken and recorded
32 in the in a frequency and manner as dictated by the Engineer.
33
34 e. Holiday Detection: After completion of immersion coating systems
35 on steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected in
36 accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection.
37 Holiday detector shall be a Tinker & Rasor Model M -1 or equal.
38 Areas found to have holidays shall be marked and repaired in
39 accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. The
40 Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he might be
41 present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders,
42 rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check
43 paint thickness of each coat.
44
45
46
47
PAINTING
09900 -21
11/05/15
1 3.05 PAINT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. General Notes & Guidelines:
1. All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors
of specified equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of the
Engineer.
2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be
assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part
of the Contract.
3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall consist
of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through
lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or semi - liquids,
including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings,
fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating
accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and
electrical conduit systems.
4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows:
COLORS
White
Ivory
Red
L. Green
Green
D. Green
COLORS
L. Brown
Brown
Bronze
L. Gray
M. Gray
D. Gray
TNEMEC #
11WH
01 BR
06SF
52GN
09SF
08SF
TNEMEC #
06BR
84BR
86BR
31GR
33GR
34GR
COLORS
Tank Blue
Blue
D. Blue
L. Blue
Aqua
TNEMEC #
25BL
11,SF
78BL
26BL
1 OGN
COLORS
Inter. Orange
Orange
Tan
Yellow
Safety Yellow
TNEMEC #
05SF
04SF
04BR
03SF
02SF
5. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which
are potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF.
6. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA
standards.
7. All in -line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall
be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be
painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached
PAINTING
09900 -22 11/05/15
1
1
1
2
3
' 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
' 33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. Tanks
shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the
tank is fiberglass or polyethylene.
8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface.
9. Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish
Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer.
10. Control panels shall be factory finished.
3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION
A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of
the project.
B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary
date and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating
system shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Should a failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior,
the entire surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these
specifications.
3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
Piping and Legend
Backwash Waste
Blower Air
Coagulant
Compressed Air
Drains
Fuel
Potable Water
Process Sample
Reclaimed Effluent
Return Activated Sludge
Sodium Hypochlorite
Sprinkler
Thickened Sludge
Wastewater
Waste Activated Sludge
Color
Light Brown
Green
Aqua
Dark Green Red
Black
Red
Dark Blue
Light Grey Red
Pantone Purple 522C
Brown
Yellow
Red
Dark Brown
Dark Gray
White
Bands
Orange
White
PAINTING
09900 -23
Orange
11/05/15
1 Equipment and Building Color
2 Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Match System
3 Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished) Match System
4 Structural Steel (Interior) White
5 Ceiling White
6 Cranes and Hoists Yellow
7 Ductwork Match Surface Mounted
8 Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Match Surface Mounted
9 Valve and Gate Operators Match System
10 Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Match Surface Mounted
11 Submerged Concrete Black
12
13 3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE
14
15 A. PVC pipe shall not be painted.
16
17 B. All ferrous metals shall be considered submerged or subject to splashing and
18 shall be painted the same color as equipment it is replacing.
19
20 C. The additional section of the scum wet well shall not be painted.
21
22 D. Stainless Steel and galvanized metal shall not be painted.
23
24 E. Aluminum shall not be painted unless in contact with dissimilar metals.
25
26
27
28
29 END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900 -24
11/05/15
1 SECTION 11225
2
3 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Disregard all work described at the Northeast Plant and the Marshall Street
10 Plant. All work under this project is at the East Plant.
11
12 B. The Clarifier equipment is being purchased under a separate project by the City.
13 The scope of work for the East Plant does not include purchasing clarifier
14 equipment. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate all pertinent
15 activities with the City and the Clarifier Equipment Manufacturer.
16
17 C. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install
18 replacement parts, perform repairs, and rehabilitate the existing clarifiers at the
19 locations shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
20
21 • East Plant East Clarifier and West Clarifier
22
23 D. East Plant, East and West Clarifiers
24
25 The Work at the East Plant, East and West Clarifiers consists of the removal of
26 existing equipment and installing of new equipment including but not limited to:
27
28 • Center Column
29 • Skimmer Arm and Blade Assembly (100 -foot diameter)
30 • Complete Rotating Mechanism
31 • Drive
32 • East and West Clarifier Access Bridge and Center Platform Assemblies
33 • Influent Baffle Well
34 • Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly
35 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors, and Hardware
36 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 2.5
37 • Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.9
38 • Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) = 1.5 - 8.75
39 • Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 4.4 (Includes RAS Flow)
40
41 The East Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of one clarifier shall
42 remain in service at all times.
43
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -1
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 E. Existing equipment shall be removed and dismantled or demolished and
2 disposed of or recycled as necessary for the repairs and replacements in
3 accordance with the requirements specified herein.
4
5 F. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of a factory representative who
6 has complete knowledge of the proper equipment operation and maintenance
7 to provide for a minimum of (1) day to instruct representatives of the Owner and
8 the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. This work
9 may be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of installation and the test
10 run as provided under PART 3 of this Specification. If there are difficulties in
11 operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication,
12 additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner.
13
14 G. The Clarifier equipment is being procured by the City under a separate contract.
15 Delivery dates established in that contract for the equipment are as noted:
16
17 East Clarifier: Ship from Thomasville, GA, on Friday, December 2, 2016 -
18 Expected Delivery on Monday, December 5, 2016
19
20 West Clarifier: Ship on Friday, January 13, 2017
21
22 The Contractor shall provide for off - loading the clarifier equipment as it arrives
23 on -site and shall immediately begin installation of the equipment. The
24 Contractor's construction schedule shall reflect these dates as critical path
25 items.
26
27 H. The Contractor may not take the East Clarifier out of service before October 28,
28 2016 or earlier if approved by the Owner. All materials and services required to
29 repair the bottom and the piping of the East Clarifier, to the extent known, shall
30 be secured and onsite.
31
32 I. The scope of supply and other details of the City procurement contract with the
33 clarifier equipment vendor are included in the Appendix and are hereby
34 incorporated into this rehabilitation contract as applicable.
35
36
37 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
38
39 A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment for
40 use with the activated sludge waste treatment process and shall be designed
41 for use in center feed type circular clarifiers with peripheral weirs and troughs.
42 All clarifiers furnished under this project shall be of the same design in all
43 aspects.
44
45 B. Control of sludge withdrawal is by existing telescoping valves, one dedicated to
46 each clarifier, located external of the clarifier basin.
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 8/9/16
11225 -2 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 C. Existing Clarifier Floor, Influent Piping, RAS Piping and Drain Piping
3
4 1. The existing clarifiers are equipped with drain piping connected to sumps
5 located in the floor near the center.
6
7 2. All of the existing drains must remain functional and provide for continued
8 operation of the drains after the project has been completed.
9
10 3. The Contractor shall modify the floor, the existing drain sump, the
11 existing drain piping, the existing RAS pipe, and the existing influent pipe
12 in the clarifiers as necessary to accommodate the equipment.
13
14 D. Clarifier Equipment
15
16 Except as noted on the Drawings, new clarifier equipment shall include:
17
18 1. Drive mechanism complete with reducer, motor, and overload trip device;
19 2. Sludge removal equipment including supports, center cage, truss arm,
20 and sludge collection device;
21 3. Influent energy dissipating system and supports;
22 4. Influent flocculating well and supports;
23 5. Center support column, adapter if required, anchor bolt template, and
24 grout shield;
25 6. Access bridge and platform including hand railings, kick plates, and
26 walkway surface as shown on the Drawings;
27 7. New aluminum stairs and handrails;
28 8. Dual rotating surface skimmer assemblies with pivoted skimmers. One
29 scum trough and submerged shelf (beach plate);
30 9. All bolts, drill -in anchors, and hardware of Type 316 stainless steel;
31 10. All other appurtenances shown on the Drawings or as required for a
32 completely operational system.
33
34 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
35
36 A. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, delivered and installed in
37 accordance with the best practices and methods. Each component and
38 ancillary equipment item furnished under this specification shall be new and
39 unused.
40
41 B. All clarifier equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's
42 recommendations.
43
44 1.04 WARRANTY
45
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -3
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum one (1) year warranty in accordance
2 with Section 01740 of these Specifications or as required for individual pieces
3 of equipment as noted.
4
5 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
6
7 2.01 GENERAL
8
9 A. These Specifications call attention to certain features, but do not purport to
10 cover all details of construction of the equipment. They are, however, intended
11 to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation and field testing of all materials,
12 equipment and apparatus, as required. Any additional auxiliary equipment
13 necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not mentioned
14 in these Specifications, nor shown on the Drawings, shall be furnished and
15 installed.
16
17 B. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard
18 equipment of proven ability and as manufactured by reputable concerns having
19 experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment furnished shall
20 be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with best practice and
21 methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the
22 Drawings.
23
24
25
26 2.02 HARDWARE
27
28 A. All equipment fasteners, bolts, drill -in anchors, and associated hardware shall
29 be 316 stainless steel, furnished in accordance with the Manufacturer's
30 recommendations and of ample size and strength for the purpose intended.
31
32 B. All equipment drill -in anchors and attachment bolts shall be set by the
33 Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and shall be of
34 316 stainless steel construction.
35
36 2.03 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND POWER
37
38 A. Electrical control and power for each clarifier shall be installed as shown on the
39 electrical drawings and specified in Division 16.
40
41 PART 3 — EXECUTION
42
43 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
44
45 A. Prior to placing the clarifier in service for testing, the Contractor shall coordinate
46 the services of the Manufacturer's field service representative to ensure proper
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -4
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 assembly and in accordance with Specification 01625 as needed in order to
2 inspect the installed equipment, supervise testing, and supervise unit start up.
3 The Manufacturer's services shall be provided to verify proper mechanical
4 installation, adjust alarm and shut off switch settings, and to perform torque
5 tests.
6
7 B. Prior to placing the clarifier in service for testing, a written report of the
8 Manufacturer's field service representative's findings shall be submitted to the
9 Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted.
10 This report shall be included in the O &M Manual.
11
12 C. Prior to placing the clarifier in service for testing, the Manufacturer, through the
13 Contractor, shall provide an executed Certificate of Proper Installation to the
14 Engineer that all equipment has been installed in accordance with the
15 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and is ready to be placed in
16 service.
17
18 3.02 DEWATERING, DEMOLITION, AND MODIFICATIONS
19
20 A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for designing, permitting, furnishing,
21 installing and operating a dewatering system as needed to protect the existing
22 clarifiers against flotation. Both clarifiers are equipped with hydrostatic pressure
23 relief valves, which may or may not be functional or capable of adequately
24 dewatering and protecting the clarifiers against hydrostatic uplift and floating.
25 Although the Work of this project includes the installation of new hydrostatic
26 pressure relief valves in all of the clarifiers, the Contractor shall be responsible
27 for installing piezometers, monitoring groundwater levels and providing and
28 operating such dewatering equipment as needed to protect the clarifiers from
29 flotation. The Contractor shall repair any damage to any clarifier and piping
30 caused by flotation, to the Engineer's satisfaction and at no cost to the Owner.
31
32 B. Equipment and hardware shall be designed and manufactured to replace or
33 upgrade the existing equipment being removed /demolished. Installation shall
34 require no modifications to the existing concrete structure. All equipment shall
35 be "bolt in ". Unless otherwise stated, all equipment supplied in this section shall
36 be stainless steel and all fasteners and associated hardware shall be Type 316
37 stainless steel. Galvanized steel shall be used only where noted on the
38 drawings.
39
40 3.03 INSTALLATION
41
42 A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and
43 accurately aligned in orientation with related equipment in order to insure proper
44 operation.
45
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -5
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 B. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial
2 operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the
3 Manufacturer's recommendations.
4
5 C. Drill -in anchor bolts shall be furnished by the Manufacturer and installed by the
6 Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's templates and
7 recommendations.
8
9 D. Each component shall be prefabricated in the factory of the manufacturer and
10 shall be shipped in assemblies complete and operable as detailed on the
11 Drawings and specified herein. Each component assembly shall be erected in
12 the field in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation drawings.
13
14 E. The Contractor shall install all equipment and supply all necessary temporary
15 construction equipment, power and labor in accordance with the General
16 Requirements and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations to
17 provide a complete and satisfactory installation.
18
19 F. The Contractor shall plumb, adjust for true plane of rotation, grout beneath the
20 center column, grout beneath the center sludge collection assembly, grout
21 beneath the manifold seal plate, and grout beneath the bridge as required by
22 the Manufacturer.
23
24 G. Any field welding shall have weld spatter and burrs removed by chipping and
25 grinding to prevent operator injury and shall be coated in accordance with
26 Specifications 09865 and 09900. Any accessories mounted on or attached to
27 the exterior of the tank and supplied by the Manufacturer will be considered part
28 of the Manufacturer's erection responsibility.
29
30 3.04 PAINTING
31
32 A. All areas where the factory applied galvanizing has been compromised shall be
33 repaired in accordance with ASTM A780 Practice for Repair of Damaged and
34 Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings.
35
36 3.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING
37
38 A. The rotating mechanism of each unit shall be field tested, after erection, and in
39 the presence of the Engineer to confirm and verify the structural, mechanical,
40 and electrical integrity of the equipment. Each unit shall be loaded to 100% and
41 120% of the design torque specified. This field test shall include checking the
42 operation of all alarm and drive shutdown electrical and electro- mechanical
43 equipment, as well as the SCADA functionality of all new and reconnected
44 equipment.
45
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -6
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 B. Testing shall be accomplished with the mechanism in operation and under its
2 own power. Loads shall be applied to the arms by tensioning cables attached
3 to the arms and the floor or wall.
4
5 1. Test by anchoring each of the lower arms of each rotating mechanism to
6 the floor or wall.
7
8 2. Demonstrate proper operation of high torque alarm, power cut -off and
9 shear pin break points for each clarifier under its own power.
10
11 3. Repeat test to verify results
12
13 C. All labor, materials and test apparatus necessary for conducting the above tests
14 shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
18
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -7
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
11225 -8
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 11317
2
3 SCUM PUMP
4
5 PART1 GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish and install one (1) progressing cavity scum pump complete with bases
10 and appurtenances as specified herein.
11
12 B. Electric motors shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section and shall
13 be as specified in Division 16.
14
15 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications to the existing design
16 that may be needed to accommodate a scum pump that is not the brand name
17 pump specified herein. All such modifications shall be subject to the approval
18 of the Engineer.
19
20 D. The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and maintain a temporary scum
21 pumping and piping system as required during construction.
22
23 1.02 SUBMITTALS
24
25 A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all
26 materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall
27 include at least the following:
28
29 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of
30 construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations.
31
32 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and /or catalogs of the equipment.
33
34 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of the pumps. The data
35 shall include performance curves, based on actual shop tests of like
36 pumping units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for
37 head, capacity and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8- 1 /2 -in
38 by 11 -in sheets.
39
40 4. Complete data on motors in accordance with Division 16.
41
42 5. Furnish wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics as
43 requested.
44
45 6. Complete data on pump drive including gearbox.
46
SCUM PUMP
11317 -1
12/31/15
1
1
1 7. All information required by Section 01340. 1
2
3 8. The total weight of the equipment, including the weights of the larger
4 components.
5
6 9. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment.
7
8 10. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the
9 manufacturer's current price for each item. Include a rotor and a stator,
10 all gaskets, all bearings, and the mechanical sea. List the bearings by
11 the bearing manufacturer's numbers only.
12
13 11. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting.
14
15 B. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of this Section due
16 to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all nonconforming
17 aspects.
18
19 C. Operating and Maintenance Data
20 111
21 1. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the
22 Engineer as provided for in Section 01730. The instructions shall be
23 prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all cuts,
24 drawings, equipment lists, and descriptions that are required to instruct
25 operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.
26 1 27 2. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper
28 operation and maintenance of the pumps shall be provided in
29 accordance with Specification Section 01820 to provide instruction to
30 operations and maintenance personnel on proper operation and
31 maintenance. The work may be conducted in conjunction with the
32 inspection of the installation and test run as provided. If there are
33 difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design
34 or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to
35 the Owner.
36
37 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
38
39 A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
40
41 B. Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)
42
43 C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
44
45 D. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA)
46
SCUM PUMP
11317 -2 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
2
3 F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect
4 at the time of bid opening shall apply.
5
6 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
7
8 A. The pump to be furnished under this Section shall be manufactured by Moyno
9 and shall be a Moyno EZ Strip Model or approved equal.
10
11 B. Should equipment which differs from the specified requirements be offered and
12 determined to be equal to that specified, such equipment shall be acceptable
13 only on the basis that any revisions in the layout and construction of the
14 structures, piping and appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc required to
15 accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the City
16 and be as approved by the Engineer.
17
18 C. The pump, motor, and drive assembly shall be furnished by the pump
19 manufacturer and be factory- mounted on a common base plate of fabricated
20 304 stainless steel.
21
22 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
23
24 A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment
25 designed for use in pumping secondary clarifier scum.
26
27 B. The scum pump shall pump scum from the scum collection wet well and requires
28 a suction lift.
29
30 C. The design conditions for the pump are 250 gpm maximum at 15 feet TDH.
31
32 1. The pump drive shall be constant speed and close coupled mounted
33 directly to the pump with the pump speed to be approximately 280 RPM.
34
35 2. The pump shall be controlled at a constant speed as described in
36 Specification 13630.
37
38 3. The pump motor shall be 10 HP, 3PH /60HZ/460V, 1750 RPM, Inverter
39 duty.
40
41 PART 2 PRODUCTS
42
43 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
44
45 A. General
46
SCUM PUMP
11317 -3
12/31/15
1
1
1 1. The equipment specified herein is intended to be standard pumping
1
2 equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable firm having
3 long experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment
4 furnished shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the best
I
5 practices and methods and the same model and pump performance
6 currently in use at the plant.
7
8 2. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength
9 and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work to be done.
10 Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs and I
11 adjustment.
12
13 3. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be of Type I
14 304 stainless steel.
15
16 4. Brass or stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer I
17 pump model and serial number shall be attached to each pump.
18
19 5. The nameplate rating of the motors and drives shall not be exceeded,
I20 nor shall the motor design service factor be reduced when its pump is
21 operating at the maximum design performance.
22
23 2.02 PUMP
1
24
25 A. Pump shall be heavy duty, positive displacement, and pragressing cavity type
26 with compact, close - coupled designed and equipped with EZ strip technology,
1
27 and designed specifically for for pumping sludge. The pump body shall be of
28 cast iron ASTM A48 grade 40B and shall have multiple connections for vents,
29 drains, gauges. Suction and discharge connections shall be 1ANSI B16.1
I
30 flanges sized for the pump specified.
31
32 B. The pump rotor shall be one -piece alloy steel conforming to BS970 grade I
33 708M40T/709M40T (ASTM A322 grade 4140/4145) or equivalent. The rotor
34 shall be machined and coated with a hard chrome plate to a nominal thickness
35 of 0.10 inches at the scroll peaks. The chrome plate shall be hardened to a I
36 Rockwell "C" value of 57 to 60 and polished to a minimum of Ra value of 1.6
37 um.
38 I 39 C. The rotor shall rotate relative to a one - piece, medium -high acrylonitrile Buna "N"
40 rubber stator of approximate 70 Durometer hardness (Shore A) securely
41 bonded to its steel tube housing. The stator shall be arranged to prevent the I
42 pumped material from contacting the bonding or the tube.
43
44 D. The rotor shall be joined to the drive shaft by heavy duty, oil lubricated, pin type
I45 universal joint. A two -piece connecting rod shall be used that allows the rotor
46 and stator to be removed without disturbing or dismantling the pump pin -joint
SCUM PUMP I
11317 -4 12/31/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 drive connections.
2
3 E. The rotor, stator connecting rod shall be capable of being removed and replaced
4 without disturbing or removing the suction and discharge pipe connections. This
5 should also apply to the removal /replacement of the connecting rod, driveshaft
6 and gland seal.
7
8 F. The suction chamber area shall have unrestricted 360 degree access.
9
10 G. The pump stuffing box shall be equipped with a Crane Type 1
11 (SilCar /SilCar /Fluoroelastomer with 316 SS components).
12
13 H. The proposed pumps shall fit in the existing space provided therefore without
14 encroaching on adjacent pump access space or working space. To this end,
15 the Contractor shall, with 30 days from the Notice to Proceed, submit installation
16 drawings (scaled and dimensioned) of any pump whose dimensions differ more
17 than 2- inches from the specified pump. The Engineer will review the installation
18 drawings and advise the Contractor whether the proposed pump is acceptable.
19 The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of pumps other than
20 that specified.
21
22 2.03 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
23
24 A. Furnish a list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the
25 manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, etc., on the list.
26 List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only.
27
28 B. One set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall
29 be provided.
30
31 C. At minimum, the following spare parts shall be provided:
32
33 1. One mechanical seal.
34 2. One set of gaskets.
35 3. One rotor and one stator.
36 4. One set of shaft universal joints.
37 5. One year's worth of oil and grease lubricants
38
39 2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVE
40
41 A. Motors shall be Inverter duty, horizontal, totally enclosed, fan cooled, of
42 horsepower and speed as specified in Paragraph 1.05 above and shall conform
43 to Divisions 16 requirements. The motor shall be rated for outdoor use.
44
45 B. The motor shall be mounted in -line with the pump on a baseplate as shown on
46 the drawings and direct driven through a gear reduction unit.
SCUM PUMP
11317 -5 12/31/15
1
1
1
2
3 C. The pump shaft shall be connected to the drive with a close coupled flange
4 mounted gear motor with a cross drilled shaft.
5
6 D. The gear reducer shall be sized for a minimum service factor of 1.5 and
7 designed with thrust load capability of 150 percent of the actual thrust load.
8
9 2.05 BASE
10
11 A. The motor, drive, and pump shall be mounted in -line on a bent stainless steel
12 base. The base shall be fitted with lifting lugs and grout holes for grouting to
13 the concrete base.
14
15 2.06 CONTROLS
16
17 A. Control of the pump shall be locally through a NEMA 4X control panel supplied
18 by the Contractor.
19
20 B. The pump shall be controlled at a constant speed as described in Specification
21 13630
22
23 2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING
24
25 A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop primed as part cif the work under this
26 Section. Surface preparation and shop priming shall be as specified in Section
1
27 09900.
28
29 PART 3 EXECUTION
30
31 3.01 INSTALLATION
32
33 A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
34 recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall
35 include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades
36 of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
37 recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the
38 manufacturer's recommendations.
39
40 B. The base shall be set on a concrete pad and grouted in place after proper
41 leveling with an approved non - shrink grout. '
42
43 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING
44
45 A. Furnish the services of a factory representative in accordance with specification
46 01820 who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to
SCUM PUMP
11317 -6 12/31/15
1 inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment. These
2 services may be combined with those provided under Paragraph 1.02 C. above.
3
4 B. The Contractor shall fabricate and connect a seal water supply system to the
5 pump such that seal water is automatically supplied to the inlet port of the
6 stuffing box when the pump is started and in operation. The seal water system
7 shall start and stop with the pump motor.
8
9 C. After all pumps have been completely installed under the direction of the
10 manufacturer's factory representative the Contractor shall conduct, in the
11 presence of the Engineer, such tests as are necessary to ensure that pump
12 conforms to the requirements specified herein. Field tests shall include all
13 pumps included under this Section. Pumps shall be operated for at least 24
14 hours run time prior to acceptance.
15
16 D. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective
17 measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps
18 that satisfy the conditions specified.
19
20 E. The factory representative shall provide written certification that the pump is
21 installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
22
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
26
SCUM PUMP
11317 -7
12/31/15
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SCUM PUMP
11317 -8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 13615
2
3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all instrumentation and controls
10 hereinafter specified to perform the intended function and achieve a fully
11 integrated and operational system. The equipment and services defined herein
12 shall be furnished by a single instrumentation system integrator who shall
13 coordinate the instrument and control system for proper operation with related
14 equipment and materials provided by other suppliers of the Owner.
15
16 B. Work shall include all labor, materials, plant facilities and equipment,
17 performance of all work necessary to complete the manufacture, to make
18 factory tests, to prepare and load for shipment, to deliver to the site, to provide
19 programming, calibration, installation supervision, training system start-up,
20 services and incidentals required to completely furnish and install an
21 instrumentation and control systems, including all work necessary during the
22 Warranty Period, as specified herein, in other specification sections as listed
23 below under related work, and as shown on the Contract Drawings. It should
24 be noted that SCADA HMI graphic development and PLC programming shall
25 be performed by the Owner's Systems Programmer as specified in Section
26 13630.
27
28 C. The equipment and services to be provided include:
29
30 1. All general instrumentation requirements as specified herein.
31 2. All field and analytical equipment and services as specified herein.
32 3. All control panels and control panel mounted equipment and services as
33 specified herein and in Division 16
34 4. All coordination and interfacing with the control system equipment
35 specified under Section 13630.
36 5. All coordination and interfacing with each piece of equipment specified
37 under Division 11 (equipment), Division 15 (mechanical), and Division 16
38 (Electrical), where applicable.
39
40 D. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or
41 performance, such as transducers or relays to interface with existing equipment
42 or equipment provided by other suppliers under other Sections of these
43 Specifications, shall be furnished, coordinated and interfaced by the
44 instrumentation system integrator whether or not they are shown on the
45 drawings or specified herein.
46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -1 01/22/16
1 E. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper
2 operating condition in full conformity with detail Drawing and Specifications,
3 engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the equipment
4 manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
5
6 1.02 SUBMITTALS
7
8 A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include.
9
10 1. Manufacturer's data.
11 2. Shop drawings.
12 3. Certificates of compliance.
13 4. Certified test reports.
14 5. Operation and maintenance manual.
15 6. Certificate of Proper Installation. The Contractor shall furnish the
16 Engineer with a written certification signed by the manufacturer's
17 representative that the equipment has been properly installed, tested,
18 calibrated, and operated under typical operating conditions, and
19 satisfactory operation has been obtained.
20
21 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22
23 A. Instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall be manufactured by a
24 firm regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar
25 equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of curent design.
26
27 B. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access
28 to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments
29 where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of
30 a panel or cover.
31
32 C. Materials and Installation shall comply with the requirements of the referenced
33 electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall
34 be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment
35 supplied and installed. Equipment of the same type shall be a product of the
36 same manufacturer. Capacities of equipment shall not be less than that
37 indicated on the drawings or specified.
38
39 D. All exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through ,s device designed to
40 protect the tubing from crushing through incidental contact. The pneumatic
41 tubing shall be attached to the protective track as required by manufacturer's
42 recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by those attachment
43 methods. The protective track devices shall be stainless steel and shall be
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -2 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 "Tube- Track" or approved equal.
2
3 E. All exterior mounted instruments shall be furnished with appropriately sized
4 stainless steel rain shields.
5
6 F. Model numbers and names for equipment listed herein are for the purpose of
7 establishing a standard of quality or matching existing instrumentation. Like
8 equipment of a different manufacturer must be pre- approved by the Engineer.
9
10 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING
11
12 A. Shipping Precautions
13
14 1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval, all
15 equipment, cabinets and the panel insert shall be packed in protective
16 crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured
17 sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust and moisture.
18 Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. Boxed
19 weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for
20 unloading, transporting, storing and handling at job site.
21
22 2. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage and installation
23 required by manufacturer for proper protection shall be securely attached
24 to each piece of equipment prior to packaging and shipment.
25
26 3. None of the central control and monitoring equipment shall be shipped to
27 the site until the room(s) is /are environmentally suitable.
28
29 B. Identification
30
31 1. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number and
32 function in the system. Identification shall be prominently displayed on
33 the outside of the package.
34
35 2. A permanent stainless steel or other non - corrosive material tag firmly
36 attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag
37 number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided on each piece of
38 equipment supplied.
39
40 C. Storage
41
42 1. Equipment shall not be stored out -of- doors. Equipment shall be stored
43 in dry permanent shelters including in -line equipment, and shall be
44 adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has
45 been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the contractor at his
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -3 01/22/16
1
1
1 own expense. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by
I
2 water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such tests as
3 directed by the engineer. This shall be at the cost and expense of the
4 contractor, or the apparatus shall be replaced by the contractor at his
I
5 own expense.
6
7 1.05 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
8
9 A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with
10 Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation
11 and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions,
12 programming logic, calibration requirements, etc., that are required to instruct
13 operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment the I
14 number and special requirements shall be as specified.
15
16 1.06 WARRANTY 1
17
18 A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty in accordance with Section 01740 and
19 shall guarantee that the equipment furnished is suitable for the purpose
20 intended and free from defects of design, material and workmanship. In the
I
21 event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the Contractor shall promptly
22 repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the Owner
23 (including handling, shipment and labor costs).
I
24
25 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
26
I
27 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL
28
29 A. Type I
30
31 1. All instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer's latest design
32 and shall produce or be activated by signals, which are established I
33 standards for the water and wastewater industries.
34
35 2. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solicl -state type and shall I
36 utilize linear transmission signals of 4 to 20 mA DC.
37
38 3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined,
I
39 shall have the output immediately raised and/ or converted to compatible
40 standard signals for remote transmission. No zero based signals will be
41 allowed. 1
42
43 4. All instruments shall be provided with mountinc hardware and floor
44 stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the drawings or
45 as required.
I
46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -4 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 5. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet class, group and
2 division classification as shown on the electrical drawings, or comply with
3 the local or national electrical code, whichever requirement is most
4 stringent.
5
6 6. All indicators and recorder readouts shall be linear in process units.
7
8 7. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or conduit
9 mounted indicators in process units, accurate to two percent of full scale.
10
11 8. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design,
12 utilizing printed circuitry and suitably coated to prevent contamination by
13 dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid -state components shall be
14 conservatively rated for their purpose, to assure optimum long term
15 performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations
16 and 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. The field mounted equipment and
17 system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid,
18 and slightly corrosive service conditions.
19
20 9. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy -
21 duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall
22 contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall
23 consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All
24 equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be
25 capable of field expansion.
26
27 B. Electrical
28
29 1. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 hertz alternating
30 current power source at a normal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent,
31 except where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies
32 required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power
33 supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires
34 voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be furnished and
35 installed.
36
37 2. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be 4 to 20 milliamps
38 into a minimum Toad range of 0 -750 ohms, unless specifically noted
39 otherwise.
40
41 3. All switches shall have double -pole, double -throw contacts rated at a
42 minimum of 600 volts- amperes (VA), unless specifically noted otherwise.
43
44 4. Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever such
45 approved equipment and materials are available.
46
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -5 01/22/16
1
1
1 5. All equipment shall be designed and constructed S o that in the event of
I
2 a power interruption, the equipment specified shall resume normal
3 operation without manual resetting when power is restored.
4
5 2.02 LIGHTNING /SURGE SUPPRESSION
6
7 A. General - in addition to manufacturer's standard, internal protection, I
8 supplementary lightning /surge protection shall be provided to protect all
9 systems from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The
10 protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with
I
11 normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument : ;urge withstand level,
12 and shall be maintenance -free and self- restoring. Instruments shall be housed
13 in a suitable metallic case, and properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge I
14 protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground and, where practical, each
15 ground wire shall be run individually and insulated from each other. These
16 protectors and specified instrumentation /transmitters shall be mounted in a I
17 separate NEMA 3R stainless steel vented enclosure. The units shall be
18 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered.
19
I20 B. Power supply - additional protection of all alternating current (ac) instrument
21 power supply lines shall be provided. Cabinet(s)/panel(s) and groups of field
22 instruments, as approved by the Engineer, shall be protected by isolation
I23 transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be
24 protected by high discharge heavy -duty zinc oxide varistors /spark gap
25 combination. The ac suppressor shall have a response time of less than 25
26 nanoseconds, a surge current rating of 4kA, an input voltage of 120 VAC, 50/60
27 Hz, and have a 6kAms short- circuit withstand capability. Surge protection
28 device model 953 204 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be
29 considered. I
30
31 C. Signal line - protection of all field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered signal
32 lines shall be provided. Protection devices shall be installed at the both ends
I
33 as close to the instrument being protected as possible. Where signal lines enter
34 control rooms through an interface cabinet, the protection devices shall be
35 mounted in the interface cabinet. Protection shall be with the use of silicone
I
36 avalanche diodes or approved equal. The suppressor shall be capable of
37 protecting a signal pair plus the cable shield with a DC clamping level of 33V,
38 be rated 20kA nominal discharge current and have at least a .75A current rating. I
39 Surge protection device model 920 300 + 926 324 manufactured by DEHN.
40 Substitutions will not be considered.
41 I 42 2.03 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
43
44 A. Ultrasonic level transmitter systems shall be furnished for fluid level
I45 measurement. The ultrasonic level transmitter system shall include an
46 ultrasonic transducer and transmitter connected by a cable. The ultrasonic level
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT I
13615 -6 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 transducer shall be designed to operate on the principle of sound echoing to
2 provide level measurement without contact of fluid. The transducer shall
3 provide electronic signal output to the transmitter proportional to the fluid level.
4 The transmitter shall be furnished with all equipment as necessary to meet the
5 requirements as set forth herein shall be included and connected so as to
6 provide a complete and operational system.
7
8 B. The Contractor shall furnish cable with sufficient length for connection of the
9 transducer and the transmitter. Contractor shall size ultrasonic transducer to
10 measure entire depth of wetwell structure.
11
12 C. The transmitter shall operate on 120 volts, 60Hz, and shall have a NEMA 4X
13 polycarbonate enclosure. The transmitter output shall be 4 -20 mA DC.
14 Calibration parameters shall be permanently stored even during power
15 interruptions. Contractor shall be responsible for calibration.
16
17 D. The ultrasonic level transducers shall be Siemens Echomax XPS and
18 transmitters shall be Siemens HydroRanger 200 or Engineer approved equal.
19
20 E. Ultrasonic level indicators shall be installed in the locations as shown on the
21 drawings using the manufacturers recommended mounting recommendations.
22
23 2.04 TRANSIENT PROTECTION /SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
24
25 A. Surge and transient protection devices shall be two -stage units incorporating
26 gas discharge tube and diodes to earth. Surge protective device shall be rated
27 10kA nominal discharge current for surge events and 1 kA current for lightning
28 events. Surge protection shall be used on all 4 -20 mA transmitters (e.g. LIT,
29 PIT, FIT). Surge protection devices for instrument loops of 4 -20 mA shall be
30 Model 929 921 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered.
31
32 PART 3 — EXECUTION
33
34 3.01 INSTALLATION
35
36 A. Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started -up in strict
37 compliance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
38 Conflicts between the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations and
39 these Specifications or the Drawings shall be presented to the Engineer for
40 resolution before any affected work is started. Installed equipment shall be
41 certified as appropriate and as properly installed for the application and process
42 by the Contractor.
43
44 B. Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as practical
45 to the point of connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for the maximum
46 process pressure and temperature and for the material involved. If connections
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -7 01/22/16
1 are of threaded or welded pipe, there shall be a union cr flanged connection
2 located to facilitate disassembly of the connection and removal of the instrument
3 without interrupting process operation.
4
5 C. All field- mounted instruments shall be protected and isolated from vibration,
6 temperature extremes, radiant heat, rain, sleet or falling water, and similar
7 adverse conditions.
8
9 D. Impulse lines of pressure instruments shall be as short as practical and shall be
10 installed with a minimum slope of I -inch per foot (1:12) downward toward the
11 instrument in liquid system and upward toward the instrument in gaseous
12 systems. If this preferred direction of slope cannot be maintained, the contractor
13 shall submit for approval an installation configuration utilizing traps, drains,
14 and /or vents at high and low points, which will ensure freedom from mixed
15 phase offset effects and provide ease of purging or draini lg. Pressure lines of
16 pressure instruments shall be insulated.
17
18 E. Field mounted elements shall be marked with data required for calibration such
19 as location of adjustments, span, offset, zero suppression, and test voltages. If
20 such data are not provided in permanent markings or on the manufacturer's
21 nameplate, a durable tag or label shall be affixed in a protected location that will
22 become readily visible in the normal course of servicing the instrument.
23
24 F. Provide DC power supplies for devices as required. MoJnt on a stanchion in
25 proximity of device in a NEMX 4X box. Provide conduit aid wire to device.
26
27 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND CALIBRATION
28
29 A. Factory Tests and Calibration. All field- mounted elements shall be
30 factory- tested by the manufacturer to assure satisfactory performance prior to
31 shipment to the job site. Whenever possible, this shall include calibration to the
32 actual range and conditions of use. Calibration shall be traceable to the National
33 Bureau of Standards with an uncertainty not more than 1/2 of the specified or
34 claimed accuracy of the instruments.
35.
36 B. Field Tests and Calibration. Field mounted elements which were not calibrated
37 to final working values of range, span, and zero suppression at the factory shall
38 be so calibrated prior to or at the time of installation. This calibration shall meet
39 the same requirements for accuracy and be traceable, as required for factory
40 testing above. The Engineer shall be given 48 hours' notice and the opportunity
41 to witness this calibration.
42
43 END OF SECTION
44
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT
13615 -8 01/22/16
1 SECTION 13630
2
3 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install at the scum pump station a new local
10 control panel (LCP) equipped with a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) as
11 described herein.
12
13 B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a Systems Integrator to perform the
14 work of this section and all related Division 13 specifications, to install, test, and
15 coordinate the start-up of the control system as specified. The Systems
16 Integrator shall have not less than 5 years verifiable experience in the
17 water /wastewater field. The Systems Integrator shall be Rocha Controls,
18 Commerce Controls, Curry Controls, or approved equal.
19
20 C. The "Owner's Systems Programmer" referred to in this specification shall mean
21 the Systems Programmer that will be performing PLC ladder logic programming
22 and development of SCADA HMI graphics for monitoring and controlling the
23 equipment specified herein. The cost for performing the PLC programming and
24 SCADA HMI graphics development by the Owner's Systems Programmer shall
25 be paid for under the SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance bid
26 item.
27
28 D. PLC ladder logic programming of the PLC, SCADA HMI graphics, and alarms
29 for the monitoring and control of the equipment as specified herein shall be
30 performed by the Owner's Systems Programmer. The Contractor shall be
31 responsible for furnishing, installing and testing the complete control system.
32 The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, equipment,
33 calibration, coordination and incidentals required to furnish and install the
34 control system specified or required.
35
36 1. The Owner's Systems Programmer through the Contractor shall furnish
37 the Owner a detailed description for the proposed work and associated
38 costs based on labor effort required and hourly rates. The Contractor
39 shall obtain the Owner's written authorization of the scope and cost prior
40 to initiating the work. The following list generally summarizes the
41 Owner's Systems Programmer's Scope of Work:
42
43 • Develop and submit Citect SCADA HMI graphic screens
44 • Configure MCC /Motor Starters equipped with Ethernet to
45 communicate over the existing Ethernet network
46 • Prepare, develop, debug PLC program
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -1 CONFORMED
1
1 • Update the existing Plant2Business /Plant2Net databases
2 • Provide startup services
3 • Prepare and submit a control narrative
4 • Provide application software electronic backup liles
5
6 E. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is
7 required, but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the
8 requirements of the equipment furnished. They are, however, intended to cover
9 the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation and field
10 testing, of all materials equipment and appurtenances for the complete system
11 herein specified, whether or not specifically mentioned in .:he Specifications.
12
13 F. For all systems, the Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary and
14 desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries, whether or not specifically
15 mentioned in these Specifications. This work shall include field- testing of the
16 entire installation and instruction of the operating personnel in the care,
17 operation and maintenance of all equipment.
18
19 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
20
21 A. The Contractor, thru the Systems Integrator, shall assume full responsibility for
22 the satisfactory installation and operation of the control system.
23
24 B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused
25 and shall be the standard cataloged product of a manufacturer having a
26 successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems
27 specified herein.
28
29 C. The Systems Integrator shall hold current "Certified Programmer" status with
30 Citek. In addition the Systems Integrator shall hold current, "Programmer" status
31 with Allen Bradley.
32
33 1.03 SUBMITTALS
34
35 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the Specifications
36 shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions and the General
37 Requirements. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
38
39 1. Shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer end submitted to the
40 Engineer for review prior to the manufacture of the equipment. The shop
41 drawings shall include outline dimensions and external connection
42 diagrams. A list of components, interface cables specifications and a
43 copy of the manufacturer's warranty shall be included with the submitted
44 data.
45
46 2. Operating Instructions: The Contractor shall submit operation and
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -2 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 maintenance manuals for the entire control system.
2
3 a. General - equipment function, description and normal and limiting
4 operating characteristics.
5
6 b. Installation instructions - assembly procedures and alignment and
7 adjustment procedures.
8
9 c. Operation instructions - start-up procedures, normal operating
10 conditions, emergency and normal shutdown procedure.
11
12 d. Maintenance instructions.
13
14 e. Trouble- shooting guide.
15
16 f. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
17
18 g. Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly and wiring diagrams.
19
20 3. Complete master wiring diagrams and control schematics shall be
21 furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture or
22 modification of an existing panel.
23
24 4. Ethernet Network Drawings: furnish an Ethernet network drawing
25 showing cable types, all equipment (new and existing) connected to the
26 Ethernet network, and IP addresses.
27
28 5. Certifications: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a written
29 certification signed by the manufacturer's representative that the
30 equipment has been properly installed, tested, calibrated, and operated
31 under typical operating conditions, and satisfactory operation has been
32 obtained.
33
34 6. The Contractor through the Systems Integrator shall provide to the
35 Owner and Engineer a completed as -built drawing showing the actual
36 control components and devices that are mounted in the local control
37 panel. Drawing shall also include identification of each wire in the
38 existing panel to which terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker
39 identification, I/O modules and corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional
40 copies of the panel as -built shall be placed in the pocket holder on the
41 door of the new panel.
42
43 1.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
44
45 A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with
46 Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation
47 and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions,
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -3 CONFORMED
1 programming logic, calibration requirements, etc., that are required to instruct
2 operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment the
3 number and special requirements shall be as specified.
4
5 1.05 SPARE PARTS
6
7 A. The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts:
8
9 1. One (1) spare of each type of PLC I/O module shall be provided.
10 2. One (1) spare DC power supply of each size and type shall be provided.
11 3. Fuses: 20 percent of each size and type use, but no less than ten of
12 each size and type.
13 4. Relays: 20 percent of each type used, but no less than ten of each type.
14 5. One copy of the PLC program, after debugging, recorded on CD -ROM
15 for each PLC.
16 6. Corrosion Inhibiting Vapor Capsules: Provide 100 of each type and size
17 used.
18
19 B. Spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed
20 in a box clearly identified with indelible markings as to the contents in
21 accordance with Division 1 General Requirements.
22
23 1.06 WARRANTY
24
25 A. - The Contractor shall provide a warranty in accordance with Section 01740 and
26 shall guarantee that the equipment furnished is suitable for the purpose
27 intended and free from defects of design, material and •Norkmanship. In the
28 event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the Contractor shall promptly
29 repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the Owner
30 (including handling, shipment and labor costs).
31
32 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
33
34 2.01 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
35
36 A. All new local control panels (LCP) shall be NEMA 4X 316 S.S., powder coated
37 white. The LCP shall be equipped with 316 S.S. power cc ated white sunshields
38 on all four sides (top, left, right, and front panels). The loyal control panel shall
39 be as manufactured by Hoffman or approved equal.
40
41 B. The panel shall be the wall mounted type complete with PLC and lights, buttons
42 and switches as specified herein.
43
44 C. All components, wiring, and equipment furnished and installed in a LCP located
45 outdoors shall be designed to operate between 0 — 55 ,Degrees C without air
46 conditioning.
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -4 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 D. Unless otherwise specified on applicable panel drawings, all panels shall be of
3 the fully enclosed type designed for use with high density instrumentation
4 mounting.
5
6 E. Conductors running from the field to the panels shall be continuous without
7 splices, except at approved junction boxes. The junction boxes shall have
8 terminal blocks with 20 percent spare terminals. Special care shall be exercised
9 to carry grounding lines through such junction boxes with the least possible
10 resistance. Cables entering panels shall be multi- conductor. Conduit and multi -
11 conductor cables entering panels shall be sealed to prevent the intrusion of gas
12 and moisture.
13
14 F Multi- conductor cable shall be used between junction boxes and the panels.
15
16 G. The LCP panels shall be completely fabricated, with instruments installed and
17 wired, at the System Integrator's facility.
18
19 H. All components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing,
20 adjustment, testing and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any
21 other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be
22 mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall
23 be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is otherwise required by the
24 manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component mounting shall
25 be oriented in accordance with other internal components and shall be identified
26 with suitable plastic or metal engraved tags attached with drive pins adjacent to
27 (not on) each component, identifying the component in accordance with the
28 drawing, specifications, and System Integrator's data.
29
30 I. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets,
31 faceplates, etc. required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel.
32
33 J. All panels shall be supplied with suitable nameplates that identify the panel and
34 individual devices.
35
36 K. All panels and panel assemblies shall be assembled by a UL 508 approved
37 panel shop. Each panel and panel assembly shall bear the mark of such.
38
39 L. Panels shall be constructed of steel with angle or channel bracing. Side filler
40 panels, top filler panels, and sub panels shall be 12 gauge steel. Panels shall
41 be suitable for the environments they are to be installed within.
42
43 M. Panels shall be of continuous welded steel construction. Provide steel angle
44 stiffeners as required on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection
45 under instrument loading or operation. Internally the panels shall be supplied
46 with a structural steel framework for instrument support purposes and panel
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -5 CONFORMED
1 bracing. The internal framework shall permit panel lifting without racking or
2 distortion. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe
3 rigging, and lifting of the control panels during installation. Plugs shall be
4 provided and shall unobtrusively fill the panel lifting ring holes when substituted
5 for the lifting rings after installation is complete. All exposed welds, seams, or
6 edges shall be ground smooth.
7
8 N. Each panel shall be provided with full height, fully gasketed access doors.
9 Doors shall be provided with a three point latch and heavy duty locking handle.
10 Rear access doors shall be conveniently arranged and sized such that they
11 extend no further than 24 inches beyond the panel when opened to the 90
12 degree position. Panel access doors shall be provided with full length,
13 continuous, piano type, steel hinges with stainless steel pins.
14
15 O. The panels, including component parts, shall be constructed and assembled in
16 a thoroughly workmanlike manner and shall be free from sharp edges and
17 welding flaws. Wiring shall be free from kinks and sharp bends and shall be
18 routed for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection
19 purposes.
20
21 P. Provide overhead switched lighting and at least one (1) GFI convenience duplex
22 receptacle 110/120VAC in each panel.
23
24 Q. The panel shall be suitable for top or bottom conduit entry as required. For top
25 mounted conduit entry the panel top shall be provided with nominal one foot
26 square removable access plates, which may be drilled to Etccommodate conduit
27 and cable penetrations. All conduit and cable penetrations shall be provided
28 with ground bushings, hubs, gasketed locknuts, or other accessories as
29 required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and electrical rating of the
30 conduit system.
31
32 R. Internal Electrical Wiring
33
34 1. Panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on or within the cabinet.
35 Wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Wiring within the
36 panel shall be grouped together with harnesses or ducts and secured to
37 the structure. Wiring shall be numbered in compliance with the
38 numbering system used on the wiring /connection diagrams. Wiring and
39 connection diagrams shall comply with ISA 5.4 Instrument Loop
40 Diagrams and shall be submitted by the System Integrator as part of the
41 Shop Drawings for review by the Engineer.
42
43 2. Power and low voltage DC signal wiring shall be routed in separate wire
44 ways. Crossing of the two system wires shall be at right angles.
45
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -6 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3. Control wire shall be 14. AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insu-
2 lated for not less than 600 volts unless specified otherwise. Conductors
3 shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting wiring, except
4 for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not Tess than 90 degrees C.
5
6 4. Signal wire shall be 1 pair 16 AWG shielded. Conductors shall be of
7 tinned copper construction.
8
9 5. Wire color shall be: Line Power - Black; Neutral or Common - White; AC
10 Control - Red; DC Control - Blue; Equipment or Chassis Ground - Green;
11 specified externally powered circuits - Orange.
12
13 6. Wiring shall terminate at a master terminal board, rigid type and
14 numbered. The master terminal board shall have a minimum of 25
15 percent spares.
16
17 7. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into
18 groups (Power, AC control, and DC signal).
19
20 8. Terminal blocks shall be barrier type with the appropriate voltage rating
21 (600 volts minimum). Terminal strips shall be provided for the purpose
22 of connecting all control and signal wiring. They shall be the raised
23 channel mounted type as manufactured by Allen Bradley or approved
24 equal.
25
26 9. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with snap
27 on covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire changing
28 without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the sub panel by
29 stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the panel with glue
30 or adhesives.
31
32 10. Each wire shall be provided with numbered heat shrink tubing
33 identification markers at both ends and the numbering shall be in
34 accordance with the Control Panel Drawings. Identification markers shall
35 be pre- typed. Handwritten markers or paper markers are not permitted.
36
37 11. Direct interlock wiring between equipment is not allowed. Only one side
38 of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field wiring
39 side of the terminal shall not be within 6- inches of the side panel or
40 adjacent terminal.
41
42 12. Wiring troughs shall not be more than 60 percent visible fill. Wiring trough
43 covers shall be match marked to identify placement. If component
44 identification is shown on covers for visibility, the ID shall also appear on
45 the mounting sub - panel.
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -7 CONFORMED
1 13. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for
2 all signal and shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in
3 accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's5 recommendations.
4
5 14. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding
6 bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National
7 Electrical Code.
8
9 15. Each panel, where required, shall be provided with analog signal
10 isolation (1 /1) where analog signals are sent from one panel or console to
11 another.
12
13 16. Each panel shall be provided with surge suppression protection
14 (electrical transients) for connections between AC power systems and
15 electrical and electronic equipment. Surge suppressor grounding shall
16 be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
17
18 17. All wiring to hand switches and the like that are live circuits independent
19 of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection shall be clearly identified
20 as such.
21
22 S. Relays not provided under Division 11, 15, or 16 and required for properly
23 completing the control function defined in this Section, shown on the Drawings,
24 or required for the proper operation of the equipment being provided shall be
25 provided under this Section. For example, discrete fie d control and status
26 circuitry shall be isolated from PLC I/O termination boards using relays. Relays
27 shall have red LED indicators that illuminate upon coil energization.
28
29 T Relays shall be mounted in their respective panel and shall be clearly identified
30 as being live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker
31 protection.
32
33 U. Nameplates shall be provided for flush mounted equipment. The nameplates
34 shall be approximately 1 -in x 3 -in constructed of black and white laminated,
35 phenolic material having engraved Helvetica letters approximately 1 /4 -in high,
36 extending through the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be
37 beveled and attached to panels by self- tapping stainless steel screws.
38 Adhesive bonded or glued -on name plates shall not be accepted.
39
40 V. Components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment,
41 testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other
42 component.
43
44 W. Components shall be mounted on plates on the inside of panels in such a
45 manner that allows for removal of the components without removal of the plate.
46 Components shall not be mounted directly to the enclosure.
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -8 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 X. Internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic engraved name
3 plates attached with stainless steel drive pins adjacent to (not on) each
4 component identifying the component in compliance with the Drawings,
5 Specifications, and System Supplier's data.
6
7 2.02 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION
8
9 A. All components provided, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with
10 permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire tag number of the
11 component. Panel mounted tags shall be white with black lettering lamicoid
12 plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel.
13
14 B. Nameplates for panels and panel mounted equipment shall be as indicated on
15 the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
16
17 C. Field mounted tags shall be 16 -gauge 316 stainless steel, with 3/16 -inch high
18 characters.
19
20 D. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a commercial tag holder using a
21 stainless steel band with a worm screw clamping device or by a holder
22 fabricated with standard stainless steel hose clamps and meeting the same
23 description. In some cases where this would be impractical, use 20 -gauge
24 stainless steel wire.
25
26 E. For field panels or large equipment cases, use stainless steel screws, however,
27 such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily replaceable part. In
28 all cases, the tag shall be plainly visible to a standing observer and not obscure
29 adjustment ports or impair the function of the instrument. Field mounted control
30 stations, recorders or indicators shall have a nameplate indicating their function
31 and the variable controlled or displayed. Nameplate shall be attached by one
32 of the above methods.
33
34 2.03 PANEL COMPONENTS
35
36 A. The scum pump LCP shall accept a 110/120 VAC, 60 hertz, single phase power
37 input and be equipped with a fused disconnect switch. When the disconnect
38 switch is in the open position, all power shall be removed from the control
39 system. The LCP shall also be equipped with a 120VAC transient voltage surge
40 suppressor (TVSS).
41
42 B. The LCP shall be furnished with a 316 S.S. dead front. The deadfront shall
43 include the following mounted equipment:
44
45 1. Control Panel Power On Status Light
46 2. Pump Status Indicator Lights (Run /Off /Fail)
47 3. HAND - OFF -AUTO selector switch
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -9 CONFORMED
1
1
1 4. Manual Rotary Timer Dial (0 -15 minutes, 1- minute increments)
1
2 5. Hydroranger level controller (specified under Section 13615)
3 6. Wetwell Light On /Off Switch
4
5 C. Industrial Relays and Time Delays
6
7 1. Type: I
8
9 a. Industrial heavy duty relays.
10
I
11 2. Functional /Performance:
12
13 a. Contact arrangement/function shall be as - equired to meet the I
14 specified control function.
15
16 b. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps continuous at 600 volts. I
17
18 c. Relays shall be provided with convertible contact blocks.
19
I20 d. Pneumatic time delay relays shall be used on time delays less
21 than 180 seconds and shall be adjustable.
22
1 23 e. Solid state time delay relays shall be used on time delays between
24 180 seconds and one -hour.
25
26 3. Options /Accessories Required:
I
27
28 a. Provide all mounting rails, etc., as required.
29
I
30 4. Manufacturers:
31
32 a. Allen Bradley I
33
34 b. Square D
35
II
36 D. General Purpose Relays and Time Delays
37
38 1. Relays shall be double pole, double throw, octal plug in type with a I
39 transparent dust cover. The relay shall be equipped with an indicating
40 Tight to indicate when its coil is energized. The rnechanical life of the
41 relay shall be 10,000,000 operations, minimum. I
42
43 a. Type:
44
I45 (1) Units shall be of the general purpose plug -in type.
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -10 CONFORMED
1
1
I 1
2 b. Functional /Performance:
3 (1) Coil voltage shall match supply voltage.
I 4
5 (2) Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet
6 the specified control function.
I 7
8 c. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation.
9
I 10 d. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polarity protection
11 (DC units) and transient protection.
12
I 13 e. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from
14 0.1 second to 4.5 hours.
15
I 16
17 2. Physical:
18 a. For 120VAC service, provide contacts rated 10 amps at 120VAC;
19 for 24VDC service provide contacts rated 5 amps at 28VDC, for
20 electronic (milliamp/ millivolt) switching applicator provide gold
21 plated contacts rated for electronic service.
22
' 23 b. Relays shall be provided with dust and moisture resistant covers.
24
25 3. Options /Accessories Required:
I 26
27 a. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks rated
28 300 volt and 10 amps.
I 29
30 b. Provide mounting rails /holders as required.
31
I 32 4. Manufacturers:
33
34 a. Allen Bradley
I 35
36 b. Potter & Brumfield
37
I 38
39 c. Eagle Signal Controls
40 E. Signal Isolators /Boosters /Converters
I 41
42 1. Type:
43
I 44
45 a. Externally powered solid state electronic type. Loop powered
devices are not acceptable.
46
1
1
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -11 CONFORMED
1 2. Functional /Performance:
2
3 a. Accuracy - 0.15 percent.
4
5 b. Inputs - Current, voltage, frequency, temperature, or resistance as
6 required.
7
8 c. Outputs - Current or voltage as required.
9
10 d. Isolation - There shall be complete isolation between input
11 circuitry, output circuitry, and the power supply.
12
13 e. Adjustments - Zero and span adjustment shall be provided.
14
15 f. Protection - Provide RFI protection.
16
17 3. Physical:
18
19 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or instrument
20 rack.
21
22 4. Options /Accessories Required:
23
24 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required.
25
26 5. Manufacturers:
27
28 a. Phoenix Contact or approved equal
29
30 F. Signal Relay Switches (Current Trips)
31
32 1. Type:
33
34 a. Solid state electronic type.
35
36 2. Functional /Performance:
37
38 a. Input - 4 -20 mA.
39
40 b. Output - Isolated contact output, double pole double throw, rated
41 5 amps at 120 VAC.
42
43 c. Accuracy - 0.1 percent.
44
45 d. Protection - Provide RFI protection.
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -12 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 e. Deadband - Adjustable between 0.1 to 5.0 percent of span.
2
3 f. Setpoint Adjustment - Provide graduated dial for each alarm
4 setpoint from 0 to full scale. Alarms shall be adjustable to trip on
5 rising or falling input signal.
6
7 g. Repeatability - Trip point repeatability shall be at least 0.1 percent
8 of span.
9
10 3. Physical:
11
12 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or high density
13 instrument rack.
14
15 4. Options /Accessories Required:
16
17 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required.
18
19 5. Manufacturers:
20
21 a. Rochester Instrument Systems
22
23 b. Acromag Inc.
24
25 c° Moore Industries
26
27 G. Intrinsically Safe Relays
28
29 1. Type:
30
31 a. Relays shall be of the solid state electronic type in which the
32 energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to
33 allow safe usage in hazardous areas.
34
35 2. Options /Accessories Required:
36
37 a. Relays shall match power supply provided.
38
39 b. Relays shall be located in non - hazardous areas.
40
41 3. Manufacturers:
42
43 a. Consolidated Electric
44
45 b. Gems Safe -Pak
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -13 CONFORMED
1 c. Warrick Controls
2
3 d. R. Stahl, Inc.
4
5 H. Manual Rotary Timer
6
7 1. Manual rotary timer shall be spring wound type and shall require no
8 electrical power to operate and have an SPDT contact arrangement.
9 Manual rotary timer shall be suitable for control panel mounting.
10
11 2. Manual rotary timer shall be model 15T as manufactured by Murphy
12 Enovations Controls or approved equal.
13
14 I. All other relays, switches, timers, lights, and ancillary control devices, ancillary
15 wiring, and hardware, whether specified herein or not, and required for a
16 complete and operational control system shall be furnished and installed.
17
18 2.04 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) SYSTEM
19
20 A. A PLC shall be furnished and installed in the new Scum Pump LCP.
21
22 B. The PLC shall be an Allen- Bradley CompactLogix 5370 Model 1769- L33ER,
23 with Dual Ethernet, 2MB memory, and 2GB SD card.
24
25 C. The PLC shall be furnished with an Allen- Bradley series 1769 Power Supply to
26 provide power to the PLC and all I/O modules.
27
28 D. The PLC shall be furnished with sufficient I/O modules for all I/O plus 20%
29 installed spare. All I/O modules (Al, AO, DI, DO) shall be series 1769 as
30 manufactured by Allen- Bradley.
31
32 E. All installed I/O shall be wired to terminal blocks for field termination.
33
34 F. All input/output shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label.
35
36 G. PLC Programming Software
37
38 1. The Owner's Systems Programmer possesses the appropriate versions
39 of Rockwell Automation Software, RS Linx, RSNetworx, RSLogix
40 Programming Software needed to program all PLC's.
41
42 2. The Owner's Systems Programmer shall supply all programming
43 necessary to provide a fully debugged and operating system. The
44 software required shall consist of those programs necessary for the
45 equipment to efficiently perform the functions specified herein, plus
46 enable convenient and efficient preparation of new programs. All
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -14 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 programs shall be completely debugged and operable prior to delivery of
2 the equipment. The Contractor shall provide whatever additional controls
3 required for smooth operation of the system, whether or not specified
4 herein, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner or Engineer shall
5 not be required to expend any programming effort in order to achieve a
6 fully operational system.
7
8 3. The Contractor shall provide hard copy (paper printouts) of the PLC
9 program. The program shall show an English annotated ladder or
10 boolean logic description of the PLC logic.
11
12 2.05 DC POWER SUPPLIES
13
14 A. 24VDC power supplies shall be provided in the control panels. 24VDC power
15 supplies shall be switching type, din rail mountable power supplies.
16
17 B. 24VDC power supplies shall be approved for use in UL -580 industrial control
18 cabinets.
19
20 C. Provide fuse or short- circuit protection. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry
21 contacts configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling
22 purposes.
23
24 D. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius.
25
26 E. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental
27 touch.
28
29 F Provide self - protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in
30 case of short circuit.
31
32 G. 24VDC power supplies shall be Allen Bradley 1606 Series Power Supply.
33
34 2.06 UPS AND SURGE SUPPRESSION
35
36 A. An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be furnished in the LCP to operate
37 all critical components of the panel in the event of a power failure.
38
39 B. The UPS shall provide backup power for the entire PLC system including PLC
40 power supply, I/O modules, 24VDC power supplies and any other devices inside
41 the LCP.
42
43 C. The UPS shall be capable of sustaining the operation of the equipment for a
44 minimum ten (10) minutes in the event of a power failure.
45
46 D. There shall be no measureable break in the output power of the UPS during
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -15 CONFORMED
1 transfer from normal AC line supply to battery power or from battery power back
2 to normal AC line supply.
3
4 E. Exact sizing of the UPS shall be the responsibility of the Systems Integrator.
5 Submit LCP load calculation with UPS product data showing compliance with
6 specifications.
7
8 F. The UPS shall be capable of providing surge suppression for all equipment in
9 the event of a surge or spike on the incoming 120VAC power lines.
10
11 G. The UPS shall be by Allen- Bradley.
12
13 2.07 MANAGED SWITCHES
14
15 A. Where shown on the drawings or required for proper communication, Ethernet
16 switches shall be furnished and installed in LCPs.
17
18 B. All switches shall be capable of 10 /100BT /X connection speeds and shall auto -
19 detect the appropriate speed for communication with the connected device.
20
21 C. All switches shall have one port capable of being configured as an uplink port
22 to another switch for future expansion or shall provide an expansion slot for this
23 purpose.
24
25 D. All switches shall be capable of operating on 110- 120VAC /60Hz or 24VDC
26 power.
27
28 E. All switches shall be capable of operation in a temperature range from 0 to 55
29 deg C with relative humidity of 90% non - condensing.
30
31 F. All switches shall provide diagnostic indicators for each channel indicating
32 connection speed, traffic and collision status.
33
34 G. All switches shall be capable of DIN rail mounting as designed or through the
35 use of a provided kit.
36
37 H. Managed switches shall be equipped with four (4) RJ45 Ethernet ports and two
38 (2) fiber optic ports.
39
40 I. Managed switches shall be Allen- Bradley Stratix Switch 1783 series.
41
42 J. The Systems Integrator shall be responsible for configuring the Ethernet switch
43 (IP address, subnet, etc.) to be compatible with the existing Ethernet network.
44
45 2.08 ETHERNET MEDIA AND SURGE SUPPRESSION
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -16 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. The network equipment shall be connected using pre - molded Cat -5e or Cat -6
2 patch cords with RJ -45 connectors. Lengths shall be as required.
3
4 B. If it is not possible to use pre - molded cables due to installation requirements,
5 plenum rated Cat -5e or Cat -6 cable shall be used. In addition, a qualified
6 installer must be employed to make the RJ -45 connections at each end of the
7 Ethernet run, as well as to test the cable. Testing shall include a computer
8 generated print -out of the test results, including pin connections and dB Toss in
9 the cable. Furnish test results to the Engineer.
10
11 C. All non -fiber communications cables leaving a PLC panel or a network
12 enclosure shall be equipped with surge suppression devices capable of
13 protecting the communications cards in the event of a voltage spike on the
14 communications line.
15
16 D. Ethernet surge suppression rated for Cat 5/6 and POE applications shall be fully
17 shielded, provide protection for all pins, and shall be DEHN 929 121.
18 Substitutions will not be considered by the City.
19
20 2.09 LIGHTNING /SURGE SUPPRESSION
21
22 A. General - in addition to manufacturer's standard, internal protection,
23 supplementary lightning /surge protection shall be provided to protect all
24 systems from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The
25 protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with
26 normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level,
27 and shall be maintenance -free and self- restoring. Instruments shall be housed
28 in a suitable metallic case, and properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge
29 protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground and, where practical, each
30 ground wire shall be run individually and insulated from each other. These
31 protectors and specified instrumentation /transmitters shall be mounted in a
32 separate NEMA 3R stainless steel vented enclosure. The units shall be
33 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered by the City.
34
35 B. Power supply - additional protection of all alternating current (ac) instrument
36 power supply lines shall be provided. Cabinet(s) /panel(s) and groups of field
37 instruments, as approved by the Engineer, shall be protected by isolation
38 transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be
39 protected by high discharge heavy -duty zinc oxide varistors /spark gap
40 combination. The ac suppressor shall have a response time of Tess than 25
41 nanoseconds, a surge current rating of 4kA, an input voltage of 120 VAC, 50/60
42 Hz, and have a 6kAms short- circuit withstand capability. Surge protection
43 device model 953 204 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be
44 considered by the City.
45
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -17 CONFORMED
1 C.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 2.10
13
14 A.
15
16
17
18
19 B.
20
21
22 2.11
23
24 A.
25
26
27
28 B.
29
30
31
32 C.
33
34 D.
35
36
37 E.
38
39
40
41 F.
42
43
44 2.12
45
46 A.
Signal line - protection of all field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered signal
lines shall be provided. Protection devices shall be installed at the both ends
as close to the instrument being protected as possible. Where signal lines enter
control rooms through an interface cabinet, the protection devices shall be
mounted in the interface cabinet. Protection shall be with the use of silicone
avalanche diodes or approved equal. The suppressor shall be capable of
protecting a signal pair plus the cable shield with a DC clamping level of 33V,
be rated 20kA nominal discharge current and have at least a 0.75A current
rating. Surge protection device model 920 300 + 926 324 manufactured by
DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered by the City.
IP ADDRESSING
The existing plant network has an IP address scheme defined for some existing
equipment. All new equipment requiring IP addresses shall be assigned IP
addresses matching the existing plant network IP address scheme to allow the
complete and operational control of all equipment as specified herein.
The Contractor shall submit a list of proposed IP addresses for all new
equipment requiring IP addresses to be approved by the Owner.
FIBER OPTIC CONVERTERS
Media converters shall be industrially hardened and rated for use in the
environment specified or shown. Office grade media converters are not
acceptable.
The copper side of each media converter shall be a 10/100BT/X RJ -45
connector. The media converter shall support both 10Base -T and 100Base -TX
Ethernet.
The fiber side of each media converter shall be a standard ST or SC connector.
The media converter shall provide an auxiliary RJ -45 port to maintain a local
programming connection for a laptop.
Sufficient quantities of Cat -5e or Cat -6 patch cable and fiber patch cables with
appropriate connectors shall be provided and installed where a fiber connection
is required. Patch cables shall conform to the specification provided herein.
Fiber Optic Converters shall be as manufactured by Phoenix Contact or
approved equal.
CORROSION CONTROL
Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
13630 -18
the use of
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 corrosion - inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Northern Instruments
2 Model Zerust VC, Hoffman Engineering Model A -HCI or approved equal.
3
4
5
6 2.13 HMI GRAPHIC SCREENS
7
8 A. The existing SCADA HMI at the facility is a Schneider Electric Citect SCADA
9 system. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval all HMI graphic
10 screens in color print on 8.5" x 11" sized paper. The Contractor shall provide
11 the following as a minimum for all HMI graphic screens:
12
13 1. All rotating equipment, such as pumps, shall be programmed with
14 elapsed run time meters and the cumulative run time shall be displayed
15 on the HMI. A separate screen shall be furnished to display elapsed run
16 times for all equipment.
17
18 2. All 4 -20mA level signals shall be capable of being "trended" (depict
19 historical data) on the HMI.
20
21 3. One (1) dedicated HMI graphic screen for control and monitoring of
22 process equipment related to the structure /process. At minimum the
23 following screens shall be provided.
24
25 Scum Pump Station
26 Clarifier Motor Control Center /Starters
27 Trending screens for each 4 -20mA analog input
28 Elapsed time meters for rotating equipment
29
30 B. All HMI graphic screen development, SCADA training, SCADA documentation,
31 SCADA startup services, and any other related services shall be performed by
32 the Owner's Systems Programmer and paid for under the SCADA Software
33 Implementation Services Allowance.
34
35 C. Any other PLC /HMI programming requested by the Owner shall be performed
36 by the Owner's Systems Programmer and paid for under the SCADA Software
37 Implementation Services Allowance.
38
39 2.14 CONTROL STRATEGY REQUIREMENTS
40
41 A. General
42
43 1. All I/O shown on the I/O list shall be programmed by the System
44 Integrator into the new PLC and displayed on the existing SCADA HMI
45 graphics screens.
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
13630 -19
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 B. Level Transmitter (LIT -100)
2
3 1. The level transmitter shall measure, record and indicate level at the
4 SCADA HMI. Operator adjustable high level and low level alarms shall
5 be provided at the SCADA HMI.
6
7 C. Scum Pump (SP -100)
8
9 1. The scum pump shall be furnished with a HAND - OFF -AUTO selector
10 switch located on the LCP to allow the operator to select the mode of
11 operation. The mode of operation shall be displayed on the SCADA HMI.
12
13 2. The scum pump shall be furnished with a manual rotary timer dial located
14 on the LCP to allow the operator to set the amount of time the scum pump
15 is to run when it is in HAND mode.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 4. In OFF, the scum pump shall deactivate and 'remain off.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32 6. In any mode of operation, HAND or AUTO, the PLC shall automatically
33 open the pump priming solenoid valve (SV -100) for an operator
34 adjustable amount of time to allow the pump to be properly primed. After
35 the set amount of time, the PLC shall automatically close the pump
36 priming solenoid valve (SV -100). The amount of time to keep the pump
37 priming solenoid valve open shall be operator adjustable at the SCADA
38 HMI.
39
40 7. The operation mode (HAND- OFF -AUTO) status of the pump shall be
41 displayed on the SCADA HMI.
42
43 8. The general fault alarm, run /stop status, shall be indicated at the SCADA
44 HMI.
45
46 9. The elapsed run time for the pump shall be calculated and displayed at
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -20 CONFORMED
3. In HAND, the scum pump shall start and continue to pump when the
manual rotary timer dial is manually turned by the operator past the "OFF"
position on the timer. When the timer expires and reaches the "OFF"
position, the pump shall stop. In HAND mode, should the water level in
the wetwell decrease below an operator adjustable low level setpoint as
measured by the level transmitter (LIT -100), the pump shall shut off, even
if the manual timer has not expired.
5. In AUTO, the scum pump shall automatically start/stop based on an
operator adjustable start (high level) and stop (low level) setpoints as
measured by the ultrasonic level transmitter (LIT -100). The high and low
level setpoints shall be operator adjustable at the SCADA HMI.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 the SCADA HMI and shall be equipped with a software RESET button.
2
3 D. Motor Control Centers /Starters
4
5 1. The four (4) new Clarifier Motor starters are equipped with Intellegent
6 Motor Management Systems and Ethernet communications. As such,
7 the following status shall be displayed on the SCADA HMI:
8
9 a. Status (On, Off, Tripped, No Response)
10 b. Current in each phase
11 c. Percent phase unbalance
12 d. Control voltage
13 e. Overload protection settings
14 f. Trip current magnitude
15 g. Average motor current
16 h. Hand /Manual /Local Control
17 i. Cause of trip indication (i.e. Torque Shutoff)
18
19 E. Existing Clarifiers
20
21 1. The run status and torque alarms for each of the existing clarifiers are
22 already connected to the SCADA HMI. As part of the rehabilitation of the
23 clarifiers, new mechanical hardware will be installed, which will require
24 the removal and /or disconnection of field wiring (i.e. I /O) and
25 reconnecting of the existing I /O. The Owner's Systems Programmer
26 shall be responsible for testing the existing SCADA HMI to ensure that
27 run status, torque alarm(s), and high torque shutoff are functional on the
28 SCADA HMI after the existing clarifier is rehabilitated and brought back
29 in- service.
30
31 F. Existing Sludge Blanket Level System
32
33 1. Each clarifier is equipped with a sludge blanket level system that is
34 already connected to the SCADA HMI. As part of the rehabilitation of the
35 clarifiers, the existing sludge blanket level system will be temporarily
36 removed and upon rehabilitation of the clarifier, the sludge blanket level
37 system will be reconnected to the new PLC located in the Scum Pump
38 LCP. The Owner's Systems Programmer shall be responsible for testing
39 the existing SCADA HMI to ensure that sludge blanket level system
40 status, levels, and alarm(s), are functional on the SCADA HMI after the
41 existing clarifier is rehabilitated and brought back in- service.
42
43
44
45
46
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
13630 -21
8/9/16
CONFORMED
1 G. I/O List
2
Tag Name Description
Clarifiers
CL1 -ZI West Clarifier Run /Off Status (via motor starter /Ethernet)
CL1 -OA West Clarifier High Torque Alarm (via PLC in Scum Pump LCP)
CL1 -OA West Clarifier High Torque Shutoff Alarm (via motor starter /Ethernet)
CL1 -LI West Clarifier Sludge Blanket Level
CL2 -ZI East Clarifier Run /Off Status (via motor starter /Ethernet)
CL2 -OA East Clarifier High Torque Alarm (via PLC in Scum Pump LCP)
CL2 -OA East Clarifier High Torque Shutoff Alarm (via motor starter /Ethernet)
CL2 -LI East Clarifier Sludge Blanket Level
Level Transmitter
LIT -100 Scum Pump Wetwell Level Indicating Transmitter
Scum Pump
SP- 100 -HOA Scum Pump HOA Switch Position Status
SP- 100 -ZI WAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status
SP- 100 -OA WAS Pump #1 Failed Status
Solenoid Valve
SV -100 Scum Pump Solenoid Valve
3
4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
6 3.01 INSTALLATION
7
8 A. The work included in this section consists of furnishing, installing and placing in
9 operation the instruments and appurtenances, including all conduit, wiring and
10 circuitry necessary to provide the Owner with a fully operable system properly
11 calibrated and installed.
12
13 B. Install and mount equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents,
14 manufacturer's instructions and installation detailed shop drawings. Mount
15 equipment so that it is rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in such a manner
16 as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from heat, shock
17 and vibration; and freedom from interference with other equipment, piping and
18 electrical.
19
20 C. Include the services of a factory trained, qualified service engineer of the
21 equipment manufacturer and the Systems Integrator to inspect the complete
22 equipment installation to assure that it is installed in accordance with the
23 manufacturer's recommendations, make all adjustments necessary to place the
24 system in trouble -free operation and instruct the operating personnel in the
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -22 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 proper care and operation of the equipment furnished.
2
3 D. All workmanship utilized in the manufacture and installation of this system shall
4 be of the highest quality and performed in a manner consistent with all accepted
5 practices for industrial controls.
6
7 3.02 START -UP SUPERVISION
8
9 A. The Systems Integrator shall provide a qualified service technician to inspect all
10 final connections and check the system prior to start -up. The service technician
11 shall coordinate with the Owner's representative and the other system
12 manufacturer's representative for functional check -out of the complete system.
13
14 3.03 FIELD TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE
15
16 A. Field tests shall consist of the sequential installation check -out, Field
17 Acceptance Test and Final Inspection. Each phase of testing shall not be
18 commenced until the preceding phase is complete as determined by the
19 Engineer.
20
21 B. Field Test: When the operating setpoints have been established to the
22 satisfaction of the Engineer and the facility is complete and ready for operation,
23 the PLC and associated components shall be inspected and tested for
24 compliance with the Contract Documents. Testing of the equipment shall be
25 made by the Contractor in the presence of the Systems Integrator, the Engineer,
26 the Electrical subcontractor, and the Owner's representative. The equipment
27 field tests shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
28
29 1. Controls: Controls shall be tested to determine satisfactory performance.
30
31 2. Electrical: Contractor shall record readings of voltage and amperage on
32 all electrical components at start and steady state operating conditions.
33 Such readings shall be recorded on a form provided by the manufacturer
34 and the results shall meet the manufacturer's prescribed limits. If a
35 tested item fails to meet its requirements, then it shall be replaced.
36 Results of the tests, including the serial number of the accessories
37 tested, shall be furnished to the Engineer.
38
39 3. Inspection: A thorough inspection of all mechanical and electrical
40 equipment and controls, fittings, brackets, mountings, seals, conduit,
41 painting, components, and features shall be made while the facility is
42 being tested to determine performance and compliance with design
43 requirements and specifications.
44
45 4. Repairs, Adjustments and Replacements: The Systems Integrator shall
46 make any and all necessary repairs, adjustments, and replacements until
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -23 CONFORMED
1 performance has been demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall bear the cost of any repair, adjustment and
3 replacement.
4
5 5. Upon completion of the installation, the LCP equipment manufacturer's
6 field service technician shall furnish a certificate of compliance stating
7 that the local control panel and all components and materials have been
8 installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
9
10 3.04 TRAINING
11
12 A. Provide up to eight (8) hours of operator training by the Systems Integrator in
13 accordance with Section 01820 to train the Owner's personnel. Training shall
14 highlight procedures on navigating through screens, adjusting setpoints, and
15 turning on /off equipment through the LCP. Training shall also include the
16 operation and maintenance of all networking equipment and the new pump
17 control panel PLC.
18
19 3.05 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
20
21 A. The Contractor, through the Systems Integrator, shall provide to the Owner and
22 Engineer complete as -built drawing(s) showing the actual control components
23 and devices that are mounted in the new scum pump LCP. Two additional
24 copies of the panel as -built drawings shall be placed in the pocket holder in the
25 door of the existing panel.
26
27
28
29 END OF SECTION
30
31
32
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 8/9/16
13630 -24 CONFORMED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 13640
2
3 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
9 A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
10 shown, specified and required to furnish and install fiber optic cabling, including
11 fiber testing, accessories and splicing requirements.
12
13 B. The entire fiber optic system is considered to be one component and provided
14 by a single source, hereafter referred to as the Supplier.
15
16 C. The Contractor shall furnish and install fiber optic (FO) data lines and connection
17 equipment for the following:
18
19 1. Fiber optic cable for connection of all SCADA system equipment as
20 shown on the Drawings.
21
22 1.02 REFERENCES
23
24 A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:
25
26 1. ASTM D 1248, Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and
27 Extrusion Materials.
28
29 2. ASTM D 1603, Test Method for Carbon Black in Olefin Plastics.
30
31 3. ASTM D 1765, Classification System for Carbon Blacks used in Rubber
32 Products.
33
34 4. ASTM D 3349, Test Method for Absorption Coefficient of Ethylene
35 Polymer Material Pigmented with Carbon Black.
36
37 1.03 SUBMITTALS
38
39 A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:
40
41 1. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed fiber optic cable, and fiber
42 optic cable accessories (terminations).
43
44 2. Manufacturer specifications and data clearly and unambiguously
45 showing that the fiber optic cable meets all the requirements specified
46 herein.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -1 01/22/16
1
1
1 1
2 3. Samples of the proposed cable.
3
4 4. Physical dimensional drawings of all fiber optic accessories. 1
5
6 5. Proposed fiber identification sequence and labeling.
7
8 6. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL).
9
10 1.04 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS I
11
12 A. Provide off -line maintenance aids and on -line diagnostics to check the
13 performance of the communication links and interfaces of devices on the data I
14 highway.
15
16 B. Provide a list of recommended special tools for fiber installation, testing or
17 maintenance.
18
19 C. Furnish to the Owner one (1) hand -held optical Tight source with ATT- compliant
20 adapters (SC or ST), Corning, or equal.
21
22 D. Furnish to the Owner one hand -held optical power meter with ATT - compliant
23 adapters (SC or ST), Corning, or equal.
24
25 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
26
1
27 2.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SUMMARY SPECIFICATIONS
28
29 A. The Contractor shall use multimode fiber where distances between connecting
1
30 equipment are within the fiber optic cable manufacturer's recommended
31 maximum distance. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval,
32 the type of fiber optic cable that shall be used if distances between connecting
I
33 equipment exceed the multimode fiber optic cable manufacturer's
34 recommendation. The fiber optic cable shall meet the following summary
35 specifications:
36
37 1. Fiber Type: Multimode.
38 2. Core Diameter: 62.5 microns. I
39 3. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns.
40 4. Cable Outside Diameter: 13.30 -mm (0.52 -in).
41 5. Cable Weight: 191 kg /km (128 Ibs /1000 ft). '
42 6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB /km at 850 nm, 1.0 dB /km at 1300 nm.
43 7. Bandwidth: 160/500 (MHZ X km)2.
44 8. Buffer Type: Loose tube, gel filled. I
45 9. Number of Fibers: Twenty -four (24)
46 10. Cable Central Strength Member: Dielectric.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -2 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 11. Cable Fill: Waterbocked, gel -free
2 12. Outer Jacket: MDPE.
3 13. Maximum Pulling Load: 600 Ibf (2700 N).
4 14. Operating Temperature Range: -40 °C to +70 °C.
5 15. Parallel Plate Crush Resistance: 400 Ibf.
6 16. Quantity: As shown.
7 17. Packaging: Spools /reels, protected from shipment.
8
9 B. Fibers within the cable shall be color -coded so that each fiber may be
10 individually identified. The color sequence suggested is as follows: blue,
11 orange, green, brown, slate, white, red, black, yellow and violet. Dashed
12 versions of the same colors may be used to continue the sequence, depending
13 on the cable structure and fiber count.
14
15 C. The outer jackets of the cable shall be continuous, free from holes, splits,
16 blisters or inclusions. The same requirement holds for any inner jackets within
17 a given cable structure as well as for fiber coatings.
18
19 D. Materials used for fiber optic cable shall present no environmental or
20 toxicological hazards as defined by current industry standards and shall comply
21 with OSHA and EPA standards or applicable federal or state laws or regulations.
22
23 E. The color of the polyethylene outer jacket material shall be black in accordance
24 with ASTM D 1248, and contain a suitable antioxidant substance. The carbon
25 black used shall be furnace -type conforming to designation N 110 in accordance
26 with the requirements of ASTM D 1765. The carbon black content in the jacket
27 material when measured in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 1603
28 shall be 2.6 percent ±0.25 percent by weight. The light absorption coefficient of
29 the jacket material shall be at least 400 when measured at a wavelength of 375
30 nm in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 3349.
31
32 1. Outer polyethylene jacket materials shall meet tensile strength and
33 elongation minimum requirements for unaged and aged samples as
34 follows:
35
36 a. Tensile Strength at Break: 2800 psi (Unaged), 2100 psi (Aged).
37 b. Elongation at Rupture: 400 percent (Unaged), 375 percent
38 (Aged).
39
40 F. The cable jacket shrinkage test measures the shrinkage or expansion of a cable
41 jacket exposed to temperature aging for a specified period of time. Maximum
42 shrinkage shall be less than five percent for each specimen tested. The test
43 procedure is described in EIA -RS -455, FOTP -86.
44
45
46
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -3 01/22/16
1 2.02 CABLE PACKAGING
2
3 A. The cable shall be permanently marked to identify the manufacturer, date of
4 manufacture, length markings, a product identification code, and UL messages,
5 where appropriate. The markings shall be printed at regular intervals of not
6 more than two feet apart.
7
8 B. The cable shall be packaged on a reel with inner hub diameter greater than the
9 recommended minimum bending diameter of the cable. The anchor holes on
10 the reels shall admit a 2 -1/2 -inch diameter spindle without binding. The package
11 shall be sturdy enough to endure reasonable handling in the process of shipping
12 and storage. The package shall bear the name of the manufacturer, the product
13 identification code and the total amount of product on the reel.
14
15 C. The following information shall be securely attached to the reel as a tag or
16 clearly and permanently stenciled or labeled on each reel:
17
18 1. Customer Order Number.
19 2. Customer Job Number.
20 3. Customer Reel Number.
21 4. Termination.
22 5. Ship Date.
23 6. Manufacturer's Name.
24 7. Factory Reel Number.
25 8. Manufacturer's Cable Code (Type and Fiber count).
26 9. Length of Cable.
27 10. Weight of Cable and Reel.
28 11. Defect Tag.
29
30 D. The ends of all cable shall be sealed to prevent the escape of filling compound
31 and to prevent the entry of moisture during shipping, handling, storage and
32 installation.
33
34 2.03 ADDITIONAL FIBER
35
36 A. The fiber count of the cable shall be as specified above. Each fiber will be tested
37 at the completion of cable installation to verify that there are, indeed, the total
38 quantity of fibers, which conforms to these Specifications.
39
40 B. Contractor may, at their option, furnish a cable with more than the specified
41 numbers of fibers to allow for accidental fibers damaged during installation.
42
43 2.04 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURER
44
45 A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following:
46
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -4 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1. Corning Inc.
2 2. Lucent.
3 3. Or equal.
4
5 2.05 MANUFACTURER TEST DOCUMENTATION
6
7 A. Test documentation from the fiber optic cable manufacturer shall be delivered
8 to the Engineer upon delivery of the cable to the Site, as a prerequisite for cable
9 installation.
10
11 B. The documentation shall include Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
12 traces for each fiber of each reel at 850 nm and 1300 nm. Optical attenuation
13 test data shall be furnished for each fiber of each reel, as measured at 850 nm
14 and 1300 nm.
15
16 2.06 PRE - INSTALLATION TESTING
17
18 A. Contractor shall test the fiber optic cable prior to its installation. This testing
19 shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
20
21 B. Testing shall consist of making an OTDR trace of each fiber of each reel, at both
22 850 nm and 1300 nm. The test shall incorporate a one km long backscatter
23 suppression cable inserted between the OTDR and the fiber end. Each trace
24 shall include the optical length and average attenuation.
25
26 C. The results of the testing shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to installation.
27 Any cable that shows "out -of- spec" performance shall be replaced, at no
28 additional cost to the Owner.
29
30 2.07 CABLE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE AND HARDWARE
31
32 A. Cable termination enclosures shall be furnished and installed at each site
33 accessed by fiber optic cable. The enclosures shall be used to terminate each
34 fiber of the cable.
35
36 B. The enclosures /cabinets shall be suitable to be mounted within a control panel
37 and having provisions for terminating multiple fiber optic cables. Splice trays,
38 strain relief cable attachment points, fiber organizers and bend radius hardware
39 shall be furnished within each termination cabinet. The cabinets shall be
40 furnished with an integral lock to prevent unauthorized entry. All locks shall be
41 keyed identically, and two keys shall be furnished for each cabinet installed.
42
43 C. The enclosure cabinets shall house a patch panel internally. The patch panel
44 shall swing out for ease of use. Panel size shall be suited to the number of
45 fibers in the cable, for both directions. Bayonet/flanged couplings shall be
46 furnished and mounted for each fiber to be terminated.
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -5 01/22/16
1
2 D. The termination enclosure shall have a swing -down front door that provides
3 access to all splice trays and patch panels. They shall be sized to accept two,
4 12 fiber cables and provide space for unstripped, coiled cable, each being up to
5 25 feet long.
6
7 E. The cable termination enclosures and hardware shall be manufactured by
8 Blackbox, or equal.
9
10 2.08 PIGTAIL CABLES AND CONNECTORS
11
12 A. Each of the fibers shall be terminated by splicing pigtails in the termination
13 enclosures.
14
15 B. Pigtails shall be nine feet long. They shall be multimode for operation at 850
16 nm and 1300 nm, loose- buffered and manufactured from fiber meeting these
17 Specifications described for the main cable.
18
19 C. All connectors shall be identical. They shall be stainless steel AT &T and be
20 compatible with the equipment to which the fiber optic cable is connected.
21
22 2.09 SPLICING
23
24 A. Contractor shall field splice each fiber to a pigtail cable at the termination
25 enclosures. All splices shall be made by the fusion process and shall have a
26 splice loss no greater than 0.35 dB. Loss measurement shall be performed at
27 the time of splicing and documentation shall be furnished for each splice. Splice
28 testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
29
30 B. Prior to stripping the cable, Contractor shall record the cable length from the
31 cable jacket. This length shall be documented and included in the test
32 documentation, specified elsewhere.
33
34 2.10 COMMUNICATIONS PULL BOXES
35
36 A. Pull boxes shall be manufactured of fiber reinforced polymer concrete. Minimum
37 dimensions shall be 24" wide x 36" long x 30" deep.
38
39 B. Pull boxes shall be equipped with cable racking on both long walls, suitable to
40 support fiber optic cable of all sizes.
41
42 C. All pull boxes shall be provided with 20K traffic -rated lids. Lids shall have the
43 identification marking of "FIBER OPTIC" permanently indented in the cover.
44
45
46
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -6 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2.11 FINK PLATED MARKER POSTS
2
3 A. All fiber optic cables shall be furnished with fiber optic and electrical buried Fink
4 Plated marker warning posts that meet the following requirements:
5
6 1. Material: Composite reinforced thermoplastic, or High Density Polymer.
7 2. Length: 6 ft.
8 3. Top: Domed Cap
9 4. Color: White Post and Cap (orange cap at pull box)
10 5. Text: Caution Buried Communication Cable Call... (front and back).
11 6. Text Color: Black on Orange Background.
12 7. Width: 3 -inch minimum (diameter).
13 8. Phone number to call if line is hit
14
15 B. Fink Plated marker warning posts, (Model 303 or current Model) shall be
16 provided by Pro -Mark or approved equal.
17
18 C. Marker post shall be installed at 100 feet spacing and shall be buried a minimum
19 18 -inch and encased in 12 -inch deep concrete footing.
20
21 2.12 DETECTION WIRE AND WARNING TAPE
22
23 A. Fiber optic warning tape shall be bright orange color, minimum 3- inches wide.
24 Warning tape shall be installed for the full length of the cable or conduit run.
25
26 B. Warning tape shall be marked "WARNING FIBER OPTIC CABLE."
27
28 C. Warning tape shall be buried 12- inches below existing grade.
29
30 D. The tape shall be a dielectric, polyolefin film tape. The tape shall be constructed
31 using material and ink colors, which will not change when exposed to acids and
32 other destructive substances commonly found in the soil.
33
34 E. Detection wire of #12 gauge (minimum) shall be woven into the tape.
35
36 2.13 CONDUIT
37
38 A. All fiber optic cable shall be installed in conduit specified herein. Conduit shall
39 be manufactured from virgin high - density polyethylene. Conduit shall be
40 extruded from colored material for uniform full- thickness coloring. Where
41 striping is required, a minimum of three colored longitudinal stripes of HDPE
42 material shall be co- extruded on the conduit outer wall. The three stripes shall
43 be equally spaced around the circumference and continuous for the entire
44 length of conduit. Printed or embossed striping is not permitted.
45
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -7 01/22/16
1 B. All conduit shall be labeled with durable identification giving the name of the
2 manufacturer, conduit size (inner diameter trade size and wall thickness /rating),
3 manufacture /date codes, and sequential foot marking. Labeling shall occur a
4 maximum of every 2 feet. Conduits to be used in bends and sweeps shall have
5 a minimum burn through time of 30 minutes when tested in accordance with
6 Generic Requirement GR- 356 -CORE, Issue 1, October 1995.
7
8 C. Conduits shall be 2 in. diameter and shall conform to ASTM D -3035 meeting
9 the following requirements:
10
11 1. Smoothwall SDR 11
12 2. Nominal outer diameter: 2 in
13 3. Minimum inner diameter: 2 in.
14 4. Minimum wall thickness: 0.151 in.
15
16 D. Conduits shall be factory treated with an atomized silicone or manufactured in
17 a manner to reduce friction during pulling of fiber optic cable.
18
19 PART 3 - EXECUTION
20
21 3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION
22
23 A. All fiber optic cable shall be installed, terminated, and tested by the fiber
24 subcontractor specified above.
25
26 B. In pulling the cable, strain - release, or other tension limiting devices shall be
27 used to limit the pull tension to less than 600 pounds. The Engineer shall
28 witness the cable being pulled.
29
30 C. Minimum bend radius restrictions shall be satisfied both during and after cable
31 installation.
32
33 D. All conduit and cabinet entrances shall be sealed with RTV or other re- enterable
34 sealant material to prevent ingress of water, dust or other foreign materials.
35
36 E. Splices in the fiber optic cable shall only be made at termination points where
37 connectorized pigtails are applied. Non - terminating field splices shall not be
38 made, unless authorized by the Engineer, in writing. If a field splice is required,
39 it shall be fusion spliced and placed in a buried pull box. Closures shall be AT &T
40 UCB1 with Type 2000 outer case, Siecor SC5, or equal. Encapsulant shall be
41 placed between inner and outer closures. Such splices shall meet the loss
42 parameters /testing requirements specified elsewhere.
43
44
45
46 3.02 CABLE DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -8 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 A. If the cable is damaged during installation, Contractor shall stop operations and
3 notify the Engineer, in writing, immediately. The Owner and Engineer will decide
4 whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a splice at the damaged
5 section.
6
7 B. If the Owner decides to replace the entire reel of cable, Contractor shall begin
8 the installation at the last designated splice point. The damaged cable between
9 these points shall be removed, coiled, tagged, and given to the Owner.
10 Installation of new cable to replace damaged cable shall not be a basis of extra
11 payment.
12
13 C. If the Owner decides to install a splice at the damaged point, and the cable is
14 damaged a second time, the entire reel of damaged cable (and all subsequent
15 damaged reels) shall be replaced with new reels at the Contractor's expense.
16
17 3.03 CABLE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
18
19 A. Acceptance testing of the data highway (fiber and electronic equipment) shall
20 be conducted as a part of integrated system field- testing, as specified
21 elsewhere. Prior to such tests, however, the fiber optic cable shall be tested as
22 specified herein.
23
24 B. The Contractor shall conduct fiber optic cable testing as specified below. All
25 testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer and the Owner. A test plan shall be
26 submitted at least one week prior to the proposed test date(s). The test plan
27 and procedures shall be mutually agreed upon prior to conducting the tests.
28
29 C. Each optical fiber in every span shall be tested after installation and termination.
30 For each fiber, an OTDR trace hardcopy shall be provided. This end -to -end
31 trace shall be performed from BOTH ends of the fiber. The traces shall be made
32 at 850 nm and 1300 nm. Also for each fiber, and end -to -end power attenuation
33 (insertion loss) test shall be performed from BOTH ends of the fiber. The
34 attenuation test shall use a stabilized optical source and an optical power meter
35 calibrated to the appropriate operating wavelength (850 nm and 1300 nm).
36
37 D. For each installed fiber, the power attenuation shall not exceed the following,
38 tested from connector to connector at the respective patch panels, at 850 nm
39 and 1300 nm. For the 1300 nm test, substitute 0.0020 for 0.0035 in the first
40 term of the equation.
41
42 (0.0035)L + (0.35)N + 3.0 dB
43
44 where L = the length of the fiber in meters, and
45 N = the number of fusion splices in the fiber.
46
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -9 01/22/16
1 E. Any fiber optic cables containing one or more fibers not meeting this
2 performance criteria will not be accepted by the Owner, and shall be repaired
3 or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
4
5 F. All fiber optic testing shall be documented on pre- approved test forms. Three
6 copies of all documents (including OTDR traces) shall be submitted to the
7 Engineer upon successful completion of the testing.
8
9 G. Work at the termination cabinets shall be performed such that the fiber optic
10 cables, and the fibers, are not subjected to undesirable bending both during the
11 Work and when permanently fixed in place. The cables, fibers, pigtails, etc.
12 shall be organized in a neat and orderly fashion within the enclosure. Inspection
13 of the Work shall be performed by the Engineer. Unsatisfactory Work shall be
14 reworked.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
18
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
13640 -10 01/22/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 15010
2
3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
77 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification
10 sections apply to the work.
11
12 1.02 SUMMARY
13
14 A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and
15 includes requirements common to more than one section of these
16 specifications.
17
18 1.03 ACCESSIBILITY
19
20 A. Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for
21 service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the final
22 location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all parts
23 that may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an
24 accessible location.
25
26 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
27
28 A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building
29 components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify final locations
30 for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual
31 equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other
32 building components to allow for mechanical installations.
33
34 B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured
35 in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
36 Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and
37 equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large
38 equipment requiring positioning.
39
40 C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical
41 services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
42 Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above
43 ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.
44
45 D. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
46 overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 -1 05/31/13
1 regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide
2 required connection for each service.
3
4 1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA
5
6 A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated
7 mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number,
8 serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested
9 compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible
10 location.
11
12 1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION
13
14 A. All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a system
15 for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in
16 accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and NFPA 70,
17 "National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90 -7.
18
19 PART 2 — PRODUCTS -NOT USED
20
21 PART 3 — EXECUTION- NOT USED
22
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 15062
2
3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and
10 appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in continuous
11 satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations and to the
12 elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper completion of all work.
13
14 B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already
15 completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every
16 detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the
17 Engineer and the Owner.
18
19 C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or detailed
20 on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and indicate
21 pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility to furnish
22 all materials, pipe and fittings required.
23
24 D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete
25 in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or
26 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all
27 details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly
28 furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and
29 complete the Work in an acceptable manner.
30
31 E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe
32 and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating
33 compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the
34 Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material
35 Supplier. The Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and installation of the
36 ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this Specification,
37 and 3) alternative materials offered by the Contractor, shall not relieve the
38 Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for meeting all performance
39 requirements and guarantees.
40
41 F. The requirements of this specification 15062 supersede relevant articles in
42 Section IV.
43
44 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
45
46 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -1 05/31/13
1 specified herein.
2
3 B. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping shall
4 be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
5
6 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
7
8 A. All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the below
9 listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference
10 is made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the
11 standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
12
13 B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
14
15 1. BI.1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads.
16
17 2. B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings and
18 other special Alloys.
19
20 C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
21
22 1. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
23 psi Tensile Strength.
24
25 2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
26
27 3. C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine
28 Aggregate.
29
30 4. C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar.
31
32 5. C150 - Portland Cement.
33
34 6. D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
35
36 7. E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.
37
38 8. E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
39
40 9. G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test.
41
42 D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
43
44 1. C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and
45 Fittings for Water.
46
47 2. C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping for
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Water and Other Liquids.
2
3 3. C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure
4 Pipe and Fittings.
5
6 4. C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with
7 Threaded Flanges.
8
9 5. C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe.
10
11 6. C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or
12 Other Liquids.
13
14 7. C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3 -inch through
15 16 -inch for Water and Other Liquids.
16
17 8. C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their
18 Appurtenances.
19
20 9. C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
21
22 E. NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company
23
24 1. No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects.
25
26 2. No. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
27
28 1.04 SUBMITTALS
29
30 A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings and
31 all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and Sections
32 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C110, C150, C151 and the
33 following supplemental requirements are applicable:
34
35 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings.
36
37 2. Joint and pipe /fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type and
38 thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance history; and
39 all other pertinent information required for the manufacture of the
40 product.
41
42 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets,
43 connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials where
44 shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and position
45 of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly reinforced to
46 withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and longitudinal, and
47 the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -3 05/31/13
1
1
1 Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special castings indicating all pertinent
1
2 dimensions.
3
4 B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and
I
5 other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications,
6 as specified in ANSI /AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and
7 certified copies of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and
I
8 specials:
9
10 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement
I
11 that the inspection and all specified tests have been made and all results
12 thereof comply with the requirements of these Specifications.
13 I 14 C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the
15 preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor.
16 I 17 D. Approval of the Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the
18 responsibility to ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict
19 accordance with the Contract Documents. I
20
21 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22 t 23 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused
24 and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their
25 respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service
26 intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
I
27
28 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect,
29 and have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in such
I
30 work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be
31 required.
32
I
33 C. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and
34 regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements.
35 I 36 D. The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with AWWA
37 C151 except as it may be modified herein.
38 I 39 E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized
40 welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe
41 and fittings.
Il 42
43 F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated
44 and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified or I
45 required.
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -4 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will be
2 accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
3
4 H. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing
5 and recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise specified.
6
7 I. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be rejected
8 as defined in AWWA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection."
9
10 1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS
11
12 A. All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar -lined or
13 epoxy -lined by a single qualified Manufacturer. Fittings may be fabricated and
14 the lining for force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than
15 where the pipe is manufactured. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years
16 experience in work similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on this
17 project. The Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in supplying
18 pipe in environments similar to those expected to exist on this project and that
19 the pipe supplied in those environments has functioned satisfactorily.
20
21 1.07 SHOP TESTS
22
23 A. All pipes shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104,
24 C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this
25 Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and /or
26 Owner, and /or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be
27 submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor for approval. No lot of pipe shall
28 be shipped to the site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed
29 and approved.
30
31 1.08 INSPECTION
32
33 A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design
34 testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall
35 be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and /or the Engineer in
36 the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this plant
37 inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and /or the Engineer.
38
39 B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's
40 opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the
41 Project site.
42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
45 2.01 GENERAL
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -5 05/31/13
1
1
1 A. All ductile iron pipes, including flanged, mechanical joint, push -on joint,
1
2 restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance with
3 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
4
5 B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings,
6 above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be
7 mechanical joint, restrained joint or push -on joint, as required. I
8
9 C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C 110/A
10 21.10 Section 10 -9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be marked
I
11 in accordance with Section 51 -10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI /AWWA Specification
12 C 151/A21.51.
13 I 14 D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as
15 required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as allowed
16 by AWWA C151. I
17
18 E. Shop cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and
19 shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness. I
20
21 F. Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with
22 these Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings
23 and the following schedule:
I
24
25 1. All blow -offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections to or from the
26 pipe shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and /or couplings.
I
27
28 G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings,
29 gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with
I
30 and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61.
31
32 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA I
33
34 A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement mortar
35 or epoxy Tined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The pipe shall
I
36 consist of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement mortar
37 (potable water and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an
38 exterior coating of asphalt. I
39
40 B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked
41 according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified, I
42 shall conform to ANSI /AWWA C104, C150, C151.
43
44 C. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH
I45 (approximately 7.0) meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards (reclaimed
46 water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated drinking water
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
I
15062 -6 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 (potable water).
2
3 2.03 PIPE DESIGN
4
5 A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness corresponding to Class
6 150, as calculated according to AWWA C150.
7
8 B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum thickness
9 of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than
10 the minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net thickness, casting
11 tolerance and service allowance.
12
13 C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations
14 showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the
15 design Toads.
16
17 2.04 MATERIALS
18
19 A. All ductile -iron pipes shall meet the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C 151 /A21.51.
20 The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the Hazen - Williams friction factor
21 will not be Tess than 130. Each length of pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to
22 at least 500 psi by the manufacturer in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C
23 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30 -inch and larger pipe shall be hydrostatically tested
24 to 75% of the yield strength of the metal, based on the nominal thickness of the
25 pipe.
26
27 B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell and
28 flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall meet the
29 requirements of ANSI /AWWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces may be
30 fabricated.
31
32 C. The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be field
33 coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry film
34 thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils per coat
35 minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5 mils per
36 coat minimum dry film thickness. Field coatings shall be applied in strict
37 conformance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and Section
38 09900.
39
40 D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating
41 specified in ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51.
42
43 E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a
44 contrasting color on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after
45 the shop coat has cured.
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -7 05/31/13
1 F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at least
2 20% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is Proteco 401
3 Ceramic Epoxy or approved equal.
4
5 2.05 JOINTS
6
7 A. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions
8 and requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded flanges are
9 used, they shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of ANSI /AWWA
10 Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be
11 rated for 250 pound working pressure and shall be faced and drilled to match
12 ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges unless special drilling is called for or required.
13 Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped
14 accordingly.
15
16 B. All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust preventive coating, as specified in
17 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have been
18 faced and drilled.
19
20 C. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately
21 straddle the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling is
22 called for, or required.
23
24 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe are
25 compatible with the flanges of the various components and /or appurtenances.
26
27 E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or Tess in length, shall have
28 flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12)
29 inches in length may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such
30 length that, with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project beyond
31 the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced to give a flush
32 finish to the flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the axis of the pipe.
33 Flanges shall be of such design that the flanged neck completely covers the
34 threaded portion of the pipe to protect it against damage and corrosion.
35
36 F. Push -on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
37 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to
38 push -on joints.
39
40 G. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and
41 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud bolts
42 are required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Contractor shall
43 tighten joint bolts by the use of approved wrenches, to a tension recommended
44 by the pipe Supplier.
45
46 H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -8 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 shall paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar pitch and where
2 joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be wrapped with
3 two laps of 8 mil polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe with polyethylene
4 adhesive tape.
5
6 I. Restrained Joints:
7
8 1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as
9 specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping
10 system shall be restrained based on the pressures shown on the
11 drawings or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to gravity flow
12 shall be restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure. Restrained joint
13 length indicated in the Tables included on the Drawings represents the
14 length on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be
15 restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be
16 restrained.
17
18 2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line
19 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but not less
20 than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -on joints or
21 restrained mechanical joints.
22
23 3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type utilizing
24 cast lugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing against pipe
25 shoulders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such as Megalugs, as
26 manufactured by EBAA Iron, or approved equal, are required for
27 restraining mechanical joint fittings. Field welding or grooving of the
28 restrained joint or components shall not be acceptable. Restrained joints
29 shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust that can be
30 developed within the pipeline due to the sum of the working and surge
31 pressures.
32
33 4. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on the
34 Drawings.
35
36 5. Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined
37 previously.
38
39 2.06 FITTINGS
40
41 A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push -on joint shall be ductile
42 iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the
43 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153.
44
45 B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI /AWWA Specification
46 C110 /A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1,
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -9 05/31/13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1
1
Class 125. Fittings shall be short radius (compact) type were possible.
1
C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as shown
in the current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the Ductile Iron
Pipe Research Association.
D. All fittings furnished under ANSI /AWWA Specification C110 /A 21.10 or C153
shall be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the
pipe to which it is connected.
E. Special fittings, where required, shall be of an approved design and have the
same diameters and thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwise required,
but their laying lengths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by
their positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which
they connect.
2.07 INTERIOR LINING ,
A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping:
1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single '
thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at the
point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI /AWWA Specification C
104/A 21.4. Portland cement for cement mortar lining shall be in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C150, Type 11 cement. Shop
cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and
shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing,
disbondment, and roughness.
2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior
lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3. Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and
approval.
4. The use and type of any admixtures must be approved by the Engineer 1
prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight.
5. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one with
which the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a
successful history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to 111 the Engineer so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a
minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbonded areas.
B. Epoxy Lining for Wastewater Service ,
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -10 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective
2 compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil,
3 grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be
4 solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has been
5 made free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive the
6 protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit
7 abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the
8 blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are removed from the
9 surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the
10 surface. Any area where rust reappears before lining must be re- blasted.
11
12 2. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation,
13 the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of
14 Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient
15 temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be
16 dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, the
17 lining shall not be used on the face of the flange.
18
19 3. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6
20 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils
21 nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint
22 Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should
23 be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in
24 the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and
25 spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining.
26
27 4. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the
28 lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied
29 above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining
30 manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time
31 between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material
32 manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material shall
33 be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without
34 roughening of the surface.
35
36 5. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch -up or repair in
37 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
38
39 2.08 EXTERIOR COATINGS
40
41 A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for
42 underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of
43 manufacture, in accordance with ANSI /AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51.
44
45
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -11 05/31/13
1
1
1 2.09 PIPE APPURTENANCES
I
2
3 A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of
4 ANSI /AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall be
I
5 screwed on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange
6 and the end of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage
7 through the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to prevent corrosion
I
8 of the threads from outside. Flanges shall meet the requirements of ANSI
9 B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to that standard, unless special drilling is
10 called for or required. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the
I
11 flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges of the various components
12 and /or appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at right angles to the
13 pipe axis, drilled smooth and true, and the machined faces covered with zinc I
14 dust and tallow or equivalent material. The back of the flanges and bolt holes
15 shall be coated with asphaltic coating meeting the requirements of ANSI /AWWA
16 C151/A21.51, Section 51 -8.1. Coating material shall be applied immediately I
17 after facing and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be
18 tapped. All flanged joints shall be thoroughly bolted through, stud or tap bolts
19 of required size. All flanged joints buried underground shall also be protected
I20 as specified under Section 2.08. Only flanges made in USA shall be supplied to
21 the Project.
22
I23 B. All bolts, studs, and threaded rods used in the finished work for flanges shall be
24 of carbon steel and shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The ends of all
25 bolts shall be finished to the standard radius in an acceptable manner. All screw
26 threads shall be "American Standard, Coarse Thread (N.C.). Stud bolts shall
I
27 be hexagonal, cold pressed semi - finished and made of medium open - hearth
28 steel. All dimensions shall be in accordance with "American Standard, Heavy."
29 Nuts used shall be "Grade A Heavy Hex" in conformance with ASTM A563 and
I
30 be compatible with the bolts. Bolts and nuts shall be cadmium or zinc plated at
31 the point of manufacture by an approved process with a plating thickness of
32 0.0003 to 0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts furnished shall be delivered to the
I
33 field free from grease, rust, and dirt.
34
35 C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried shall I
36 be painted with two (2) heavy coats of an approved coat tar pitch, in accordance
37 with Section 09900.
38 I 39 D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full -faced type EPDM gaskets one - eighth
40 (1/8) inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a Durometer
41 of 75 to 85 or neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an alternate, the I
42 Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's) gasket such as
43 American Cast Iron Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gasket or U.S. Pipe's "Flange
44 Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell and spigot joints shall be fabricated and tested I
45 in accordance with AWWA C111.
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -12 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 E. Subject to the Engineer's approval, welded outlets shall be allowed; however,
2 the welded -on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the diameter
3 of the main line.
4
5 2.10 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
6
7 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on the
8 Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39
9 where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the
10 Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or an approved equal.
11 The compression couplings shall consist of two (2) steel follower flanges, one
12 (1) steel middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread,
13 track -head bolts to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the middle
14 and follower rings shall be cold expanded to size and dimension. Thickness of
15 the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified, and the application,
16 and in no case be less than one -half (1/2) inch thick. All parts of the
17 compression coupling shall be galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at the
18 point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA
19 C210 or AWWA C203.
20
21 B. The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working pressure
22 plus surge pressure as a minimum.
23
24 C. The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance
25 with AWWA C203 and these Contract Documents.
26
27 D. Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type
28 coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees between
29 any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and /or grade in
30 excess of three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be made by
31 deflecting multiple joints or by using fittings approved by the Engineer.
32
33 PART 3 — EXECUTION
34
35 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
36
37 A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work,
38 the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance
39 with the provisions of applicable permits and easements.
40
41 B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be
42 provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie -down straps or padded banding.
43 In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be taken to
44 prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such work shall
45 be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under no condition
46 shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not be allowed,
47 except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during shipping by
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -13 05/31/13
1
2
3
4 C.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 D.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 E.
29
30
31
32
33 F.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42 G.
43
44
45
46
1
1
covering or some other means acceptable to the Engineer to prevent
1
contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining from drying during transport.
All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage
to the lining and coating /interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free
fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe
handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other
devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings.
The use of forks, chains, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe
or its lining or coating shall not be allowed.
1
In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as
possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction.
Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a
manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench
site or elsewhere. Coated pipe shall be stored on padded skids, sand or dirt
berm, sand bags, or other suitable means so that coating will not be damaged.
Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. Pipe fittings and specials
which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be so arranged as not to
cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be protected sufficiently to
prevent any damage including but not limited to the interior lining and exterior
coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the pipe,
fitting or special coating or lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been
improperly distributed and which must be moved longitudinally along the trench
shall be reloaded on a suitable car or truck or lifted and swung by a derrick or
moved by such means as may be satisfactory to the Engineer. '
If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron
pipe, fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or
connections, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all
pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings or
specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement
mortar linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the
Contractor's expense immediately remove the same from the job site, or repair
to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed not suitable
for installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the Contractor's
own expense.
The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no
damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having
been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a
1 satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -14 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign
2 substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being
3 placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall
4 be closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the
5 Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall
6 completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and any
7 other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any
8 necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed
9 pipeline.
10
11 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
12
13 A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
14 instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been excavated as
15 described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench shall be laid to a
16 firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be taken against
17 flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine excavated material as
18 shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted to one foot above the top of
19 the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified in Section 02221.
20
21 B. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the
22 bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a
23 continuous and uniform support for the full length of the pipe except that the
24 grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes shall be
25 formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings.
26 Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field
27 joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations.
28
29 C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying
30 schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or
31 minus one inch.
32
33 D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water,
34 reclaimed water and sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal
35 separation of 3 feet, outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw water
36 lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 feet
37 separation between sewage lines and either water or potable water lines. In
38 instances where water lines cross a potable water main or a sewage collection
39 line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches shall be maintained between
40 the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower pipe. In instances where
41 a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line and a potable water
42 main or a sewage collection line cannot be achieved, then the raw water line
43 shall be placed in a cast iron sleeve or encased in concrete centered at the point
44 of crossing.
45
46 E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -15 05/31/13
1 other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and /or the grades. Such
2 change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of additional
3 fittings.
4
5 F. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not be
6 laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill grade
7 shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the
8 following pipe to prevent movement.
9
10 G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36
11 inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise indicated
12 on the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical separation
13 between pipes shall be maintained while also maintaining 36 -inch minimum
14 cover, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
15
16 H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these
17 Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings.
18
19 I. Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom and
20 the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of the pipe,
21 but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both sides.
22
23 J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
24 recommended procedures. In general the procedure shall be as described
25 herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be thoroughly
26 cleaned, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. The spigot shall
27 be carefully cleaned and the bell containing the gasket and the spigot lubricated
28 with a vegetable -based lubricant. The spigot of the pipe section shall then be
29 aligned with the bell end and inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and
30 telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the
31 bell will not be permitted.
32
33 K. Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described above
34 except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the
35 Manufacturer's recommended procedures.
36
37 L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical
38 centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing
39 before installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and
40 nuts by wire brushing.
41
42 M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and
43 progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to
44 the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening joints to
45 prevent any strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. After tightening
46 all bolts any stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is not to be
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -16 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 buried.
2
3 N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset
4 or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the
5 joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight.
6
7 O. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding
8 and backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill has been
9 placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property of the
10 Contractor.
11
12 P. After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the
13 pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The
14 frequency of checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shall
15 be Tess than the frequency of soil density testing.
16
17 Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded and
18 imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly above
19 the utility, for identification and ease of location. The appropriate tape color
20 codes are as follows:
21
22 1. Sanitary Force Main: Green
23 2. Potable Water: Blue
24 3. Reclaimed Water: Purple
25
26 R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the
27 opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or
28 prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket. The
29 pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts shall be
30 gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket compression
31 around the entire flange.
32
33 S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or
34 at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost
35 at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be
36 established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and frost
37 occurs.
38
39 T Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6-
40 inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (except
41 pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8 -inch minimum
42 concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up to and including 36
43 inches and 9 inches minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 36
44 inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge
45 of structure or slab.
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -17 05/31/13
1 U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required on
2 the Construction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent
3 thrust forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be
4 harnessed by using the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint
5 arrangements conforming to these Specifications. Where approved by the
6 Engineer, joints may be restrained by the use of rods and clamps. The rods
7 and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed utilizing lugged fittings
8 and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe bells. Saddle
9 clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction or set screws to
10 prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe clamps, tie rods and
11 their assembly shall meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection
12 Association Bulletin No. 24. After each tied joint is connected up, all pipe
13 clamps, bolts, heads, tie rods and nuts shall be coated as recommended by the
14 Supplier.
15
16 V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous
17 interior surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe
18 and remove any obstructions that may reduce the pipe's carrying capacity.
19 Following completion of pipeline progressively or in sections, including
20 completion of inside inspections, insofar as might be possible or practicable, the
21 line shall be kept partially filled with water.
22
23 W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a crack
24 exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining failures
25 that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than 12- inches
26 shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more than one
27 patch on the lining of any one joint of pipe, fitting or special.
28
29 X. Wherever necessary and approved by the Engineer, patches shall be made by
30 the Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts clean,
31 sharp sand; all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to
32 be patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall
33 not be installed until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and
34 approved for laying by the Engineer.
35
36 Y All buried process piping (excluding drainage and stormwater piping) shall be
37 restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the Drawings.
38 Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall be restrained
39 based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be
40 restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained joint length indicated
41 in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fittings and valves within which
42 all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves
43 shall be restrained. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against
44 withdrawal for line pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure but
45 not Tess than 150 psi on pipe subject to pressure and 30 psi on pipe subject to
46 gravity flow. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained mechanical joints.
47
48
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -18 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3.03 CUTTING PIPE
2
3 A. Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a
4 satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of
5 the pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that
6 purpose. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions
7 of the Manufacturer's specifications.
8
9 3.04. COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS
10
11 A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be
12 in contact with the gaskets.
13
14 B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall
15 slip the gaskets that have been lubricated with an approved vegetable based
16 lubricant over the pipe ends. The Contractor shall place the middle ring over
17 the previously laid pipe then insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle
18 ring, and position both gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The
19 Contractor shall insert bolts in bolt holes of follower rings and tighten nuts in the
20 sequence and with the torque requirements of the coupling manufacturer. After
21 tightening all bolts the stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is
22 not to be buried.
23
24 3.05 DRILLING AND TAPPING
25
26 A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings or where required, ductile iron pipe,
27 fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets, air
28 relief outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and /or chlorination.
29 Holes shall be drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or
30 fitting.
31
32 B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses or
33 reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish
34 such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and tapped
35 as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
36
37 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
38
39 A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign
40 material by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required.
41
42 B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and nuts
43 a chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer
44 especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this
45 pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows:
46
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -19 05/31/13
1
1
1 C. Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer.
I
2
3 D. Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these
4 Contract Documents. I
5
6 E. All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified
7 in Sections 09865 and 09900. I
8
9 3.07 SUPPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE
10 I 11 A. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe Manufacturer's
12 field representative to be on -site and provide instruction to each crew working
13 during the installation of a minimum of four push -on joints and four restrained
I14 joints The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify that the installations
15 observed were satisfactorily completed and all pipe installation crews were
16 familiar with the proper methods and procedures for the pipeline installations.
17
I
18 3.08 FLUSHING AND TESTING
19
20 A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter from the pipeline as
I
21 work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed, in a manner
22 approved by the Engineer, at each break or pause in pipe laying, and at the end
23 of each work day, so as to minimize the amount of materials that can enter the I
24 pipe.
25
26 B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24 -inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to I
27 remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water
28 shall not be less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the
29 direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water I
30 without causing property damage or violation of environmental regulations or
31 permits.
32
I33 C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30 -inch and larger mains shall be televised. All dirt
34 and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned in a manner
35 approved by the Engineer. After cleaning, the mains shall be re- televised. Pre-
I36 and post - cleaning videotapes shall be furnished to the Owner.
37
38 D. Testing of lines shall be as specified in Section 01625.
39
1
40
41 END OF SECTION
42
I
43
1
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
15062 -20 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 15064
2
3 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in the
10 locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and appurtenances
11 as specified herein.
12
13 B. The requirements of this specification 15064 supersede relevant articles in
14 Section IV.
15
16 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
17
18 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings.
19
20 B. All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall
21 be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water.
22
23 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
24
25 A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single
26 manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the
27 manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed,
28 constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods
29 and shall comply with these Specifications.
30
31 1.04 SUBMITTALS
32
33 A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with
34 the General Conditions and shall include dimensioning and technical
35 specification for all piping to be furnished.
36
37 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
38
39 1.05 TOOLS
40
41 A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal
42 installation shall be furnished with the pipe.
43
44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
45
46 2.01 MATERIALS
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 -1 05/31/13
1
2 A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:
3
4 1. Class -rated PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4 " -12 ") in
5 diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the
6 requirements of AWWA Specification C900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
7 Pressure Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 235, meeting requirements of
8 Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 with cast iron outside diameters. Each length
9 of pipe shall be hydrotested to four (4) times its class pressure by the
10 manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C900. W3 RCW piping shall be
11 pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 14.
12
13 2. Class -rated fourteen inch (14 ") or larger PVC pipe and accessories for
14 force main use only shall meet the requirements of AWWA Specification
15 C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe ". Pipe shall be Class
16 235, meeting the requirements of DR 18 with cast iron outside diameters.
17 Each length of pipe shall be hydrotested by the manufacturer to two (2)
18 times its class pressure in accordance with AWWA C905.
19
20 3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" shall be 200 psi SDR -21
21 conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main
22 pipe shall have EPDM gasket push -on joints conforming to ASTM F 477.
23 Force main pipe shall have SBR gasket push -on joints conforming to
24 ASTM F -477.
25
26 4. PVC pipe less than 4" in diameter which is exposed to view shall be
27 ASTM D -1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors.
28
29 5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured for this project.
30 Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D -3034, F794, and
31 D -1784 (PVC compound). The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by
32 Johns- Manville Corporation, Certain -Teed Corporation, or equal. All
33 PVC sewer pipe shall be green and conspicuously labeled with the
34 manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, applicable material code or
35 PVC cell classification, standard dimension ratio number, product type,
36 standard specification designation, and production record code.
37
38 6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be
39 made for expansion and contraction at each joint with an elastomeric
40 ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. PVC
41 Class pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni -Bell Plastic Pipe
42 Association Guide Specification UNI- B -3 -76, and as recommended by
43 the manufacturer.
44
45 7. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet,
46 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water supply
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 -2 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 and accessories shall bear the NSF mark indicating pipe size,
2 manufacturer's name, and AWWA and /or ASTM Specification number,
3 working pressure and production code. Pipe and couplings shall be
4 made from Class 12454 -A or Class 12454 -B virgin compound, as
5 designed in ASTM D1784.
6
7 8. PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green; potable
8 water mains - blue; reclaimed water mains — lavender, process piping —
9 brown. Specific colors shall match county standard colors as applicable.
10
11 B. Joints:
12
13 1. Joints for PVC sewer shall be of the bell and spigot type conforming to
14 ASTM D -3212 using factory installed flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets).
15 These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F -477. Joints
16 for PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type using factory
17 installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These gaskets shall be
18 EPDM and shall conform to ASTM F -477.
19
20 2. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push -on type unless other -
21 wise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be
22 connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any special
23 equipment. The push -on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint
24 designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded
25 rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe or fitting socket and the
26 forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby
27 compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The
28 gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the
29 gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is assembled.
30 The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal expansion or
31 contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75 degrees F in
32 each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an integral wall
33 section with a solid cross - section elastomeric ring which shall meet
34 requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell section shall be
35 designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubricant furnished
36 for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the growth of
37 bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or pipe
38 material, and shall not impart color, taste, or odor to the water.
39
40 3. PVC joints for exposed pipe shall be threaded or solvent welded joints
41 where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the
42 Engineer. Teflon thread tape or liquid Teflon thread lubricant shall be
43 used on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant.
44 Threaded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is hand
45 tight a strap wrench should be used to make up one to two (1 -2)
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 -3 05/31/13
1
1
1 additional full turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches
1
2 or pump pliers on plastic pipe or fittings.
3
4 C. Fittings:
I
5
6 1. Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" in diameter shall be
7 solvent weld or threaded Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform to ASTM I
8 Specification D 2467 or D D2464 as appropriate.
9
10 2. The manufacturer of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride
111
11 accessories as well as any adaptors and /or specials required to perform
12 the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard
13 double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe will slip I
14 completely through the coupling.
15
16 2.02 RESTRAINED JOINTS I
17
18 A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table
19 provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping
20 system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject
I
21 to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure.
22 Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides
23 of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, I
24 the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained.
25
26 B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line
27 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure but not less than 150
28 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -on joints or restrained
29 mechanical joints. 1
30
31 C. PVC push -on pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni- Flange
32 Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or approved equal. The restraining device and
33 Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting
I
34 ASTM A -536, Grade 65- 45 -12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured
35 of corrosion resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the
36 requirements of ASTM A -242. I
37
38 D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained with
39 the Uni - Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series 2000PV
I
40 Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or approved equal. The restraining device
41 and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting
42 ASTM A -536, Grade 65- 45 -12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured I
43 of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the
44 requirements of ASTM A -242.
45 I 46 E. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings.
47
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 -4 05/31/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to
6 the pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings
7 shall be replaced.
8
9 B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being
10 laid or installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective.
11
12 C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be
13 removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no
14 additional expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly
15 cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and
16 when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required.
17
18 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
19
20 A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported
21 thrust anchors shall be provided where required. Each length of pipe shall be
22 cleaned out before erection.
23
24 B. Sleeves shall be installed of proper size for all pipes passing through floors or
25 - walls as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or required
26 for liquid or gas- tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal equal to
27 Link -Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan.
28
29 C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in
30 the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accordance with the
31 requirements of the piping layout and jointing method and their locations shall
32 be verified from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings.
33 Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 15094 of these
34 specifications.
35
36 D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances needed upon the pipelines
37 shall be set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves
38 and appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All
39 pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a
40 manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When
41 manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be
42 transmitted to their equipment, a certification shall be submitted stating that
43 such requirements have been complied with.
44
45
46
47
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 -5 05/31/13
1
1
1 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING
I
2
3 A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other
4 foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 feet
I
5 per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. The
6 Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance or
7 property damage. I
8
9 B. Complete PVC piping systems shall be field pressure tested after installation
10 and including all components to 150 psi for 2 hours. Any leaks discovered I
11 during testing shall be repaired. The repaired component or portion must be
12 retested until the entire system passes the pressure testing.
13 I 14 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
15
16 A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be
17 painted as specified in Sections 09865 and 09900 of these specifications.
18 Surface preparation and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section. Pipe
19 marking is included in Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of this
20 Section to assist as required by the Engineering in identifying pipe contents,
I
21 direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe.
22
23
I
24 END OF SECTION
25
1
1
1
1
1
1
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
15064 -6 05/31/13
1 SECTION 15080
2
3 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and
10 appliances for and shall properly install, connect, adjust, test and place at the
11 locations shown on the Drawings, or as directed, all copper pipe and fittings and
12 small diameter miscellaneous pipe and fittings at the locations and to the
13 elevations indicated, specified or required, as necessary for the proper
14 completion of the Work.
15
16 B. Attention is called to the fact that miscellaneous pipe and fittings are not
17 necessarily shown complete on the Drawings, which are more or less
18 schematic, but the Contractor shall do all piping work indicated or required for
19 the proper operation of all equipment and services requiring such piping, and all
20 such work shall be done by competent workmen in a thorough workmanlike
21 manner, according to best custom and practice, and in compliance with all Laws
22 and Regulations, with proper provisions for dismantling, draining, expansion
23 and contraction.
24
25 C. Wherever the Work disturbs existing conditions or Work already completed, the
26 same shall be restored to its original condition in every detail. All such
27 replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the Engineer.
28
29 D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation under this
30 Section complete in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, or
31 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all
32 details, devices, accessories and special construction necessary to properly
33 furnish, install, adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory service a
34 complete installation of miscellaneous pipe and fittings.
35
36 E. Full responsibility for fabricating, and installing the miscellaneous pipe and
37 fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating strict
38 compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the
39 Contractor and, through the Contractor, the Supplier. The Engineer's approval
40 of the 1) Shop Drawings, 2) construction of the miscellaneous pipe and fittings,
41 3) the use of materials included in this Specification, shall not relieve the
42 Contractor and Suppliers of full responsibility for meeting all performance
43 requirements and guarantees specified in the Contract Documents.
44
45
46
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -1 06/24/14
1 1.02 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS
2
3 Requirements contained herein under the Specifications for Ductile Iron Pipe shall be
4 considered as and are hereby made a part of the Specifications for Small Diameter
5 Pipe and Fittings insofar as they may apply.
6
7 1.03 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
8
9 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Specification which are new,
10 unused and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of
11 their respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the
12 service intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
13
14 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship which is first class in every respect
15 and have the installation performed by workers thoroughly experienced in such
16 work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished work shall be
17 required.
18
19 C. The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with all Laws and
20 Regulations.
21
22 1.04 SUBMITTALS
23
24 A. The Contractor shall submit detailed, dimensioned Shop Drawings and data
25 conforming to the requirements of Section 01300 and 01340 of the General
26 Requirements to the Engineer for approval before fabrication, shipment or Work
27 specified under this Section begins.
28
29 B. The Contractor shall make detailed drawings for pipe and fittings to a scale of
30 not Tess than 1/4 inch equals one (1) foot, indicating piping layout in plan and
31 elevation as may be required to clearly indicate all pipe and fittings. Completely
32 dimension the drawings and indicate connections to equipment and reference
33 to approved shop drawings of such equipment.
34
35 C. The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of pipe, fittings and specials
36 with mark numbers on the schedules and on drawings corresponding to the
37 mark numbers which will be on the pipe, fittings and specials when delivered to
38 the job site, as called for hereinafter.
39
40 D. The Contractor shall indicate location and type of pipe supports, hangers and
41 anchors on the Shop Drawings.
42
43
44
45
46
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -2 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 PART 2 - MATERIALS
2
3 2.01 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 A. Steel pipe, when specifically called for, shall meet the "Standard Specification
6 for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
7 Seamless, for Ordinary Uses," - A.S.T.M. Designation: A 120 -83. Schedule 40
8 pipe shall be "Standard Weight" pipe and used except as modified herein.
9 Fittings used on black steel pipe lines two and one -half (2 -1/2) inches or Tess in
10 diameter, unless otherwise specifically called for, shall be standard weight, one
11 hundred fifty (150) pound, beaded, malleable iron conforming to ASTM A338 for
12 "Malleable Iron Flanges, Pipe Fittings and Valve Parts for Railroad, Marine and
13 other Heavy Duty Service" at temperatures up to 650 °F (345 °C), Class 150.
14 Fittings used on black steel pipe lines three (3) inches and larger shall be of the
15 welded American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.) type, long radius
16 design of standard weights, A.N.S.I. B 16.9 -1971, "Factory- Made Wrought
17 Steel Buttwelding Fittings."
18
19 B. Flanges shall be of the forged steel slip -on type, faced and drilled, of the one
20 hundred fifty (150) pound series, meeting A.N.S.I. Specification B 16.5 -1977
21 "Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings" , and "Standard Specification for
22 Forging, Carbon Steel for General Purpose Piping," A.S.T.M. Designation: A
23 181 -83.
24
25 C. All gaskets for flanged pipe joints except for air or steam service shall be full
26 face type with a minimum thickness of one - eighth (1/8) inch and shall be red
27 rubber or neoprene. Air and steam service gaskets shall be compressed non -
28 asbestos material Style No. 3000 Garlock Blue Gard, similar products by
29 Granite or equal.
30
31 D. The Contractor shall provide unions in each run of pipe and at equipment for
32 easy removal. Furnish unions of the ground joint type with brass seats. No
33 gasketed unions shall be permitted.
34
35 E. The Contractor shall provide fittings as required and expansion couplings in
36 each run of straight pipe and at structural expansion joints. Groove pipe for
37 expansion couplings where noted or specified.
38
39 F. The Contractor shall provide each length of pipe with a coupling.
40
41 G. Malleable iron screwed fittings shall meet the standards of A. N.S.I. B 16.3-
42 1977, "Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ". Hot - dipped galvanized malleable iron
43 fittings shall be used on all galvanized steel pipe lines. Malleable iron grooved
44 end fittings shall meet the requirements of "Standard Specification for Malleable
45 Iron Castings ", A.S.T.M. A 47 -77 and be hot - dipped galvanized. Furnish pipe
46 and fittings with sound, well fitting threads. Pieces having defective threads
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -3 06/24/14
1
1
1 shall be rejected.
I
2
3 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
4
5 A. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel,
6 unless shown or specified otherwise. Stainless steel pipe shall be seamless or
7 welded and furnished in strict accordance with "Standard Specification for I
8 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe" , A.S.T.M. Designation
9 A 312 -83 and fittings in accordance with "Standard Specification for Wrought
10 Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings ", A.S.T.M. Designation A 403 -83a. I
11 Butt welded fittings shall meet the standards of ANSI B 16.9 -1971. All pipe and
12 fittings shall be annealed and pickled, and shall have a surface finish equivalent
13 to a No. 1 Mill Finish in accordance with "Standard Specification for General I
14 Requirements for Flat - Rolled Stainless and Heat- Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet
15 and Strip ", A.S.T.M. Designation A 480/ A 480M -83a. Schedule 40 pipe shall
16 be "Standard Weight." Fittings shall have the same schedule wall thickness as I
17 the pipe.
18
19 B. Where stainless steel pipe is connected by grooved -end couplings or flange
I20 adaptors, the pipe shall be of the roll grooved (no metal removed) end type.
21
22 C. All welding shall be done by a fully automatic, shielded arc, inert gas method.
23 Welds shall be fully penetrated and gas shielded on both sides. All welds shall
I
24 be smooth, uniform bead and thickness, and brushed with stainless steel wire
25 brush, with deposits and discoloration removed.
26
I
27 2.03 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS
28
29 A. All copper pipe shall be of standard size, as indicated on the Drawings, specified
I
30 or required and shall conform in all respects to the "Standard Specification for
31 Seamless Copper Water Tube," A.S.T.M. Designation: B 88 -83. The
32 Contractor shall provide copper tubing manufactured by Anaconda American
I
33 Brass Company, Revere Copper and Brass, Inc., or equal. Copper water pipe,
34 when used underground, shall be Type K, soft temper, coil or straight lengths
35 as directed and when used elsewhere shall be Type L, hard temper, drawn I
36 copper tubing, unless otherwise specifically called for. All fittings on these lines
37 shall be cast bronze fittings, as manufactured by Mueller Company; Stanley G.
38 Flagg Co.; or equal. For soft temper tubing the Contractor shall provide cast I
39 bronze flared tube type fittings. For hard drawn copper tube fittings the
40 Contractor shall provide the cast bronze sweat type. Unions shall be of the
41 solder type, with brass -to -brass seats. Gasketed unions shall not be acceptable. I
42 A liberal amount of unions shall be installed to allow removal of valves and
43 equipment.
44
I45 B. Where copper piping is connected to steel pipe, the Contractor shall furnish and
46 install an insulating union by EPCO Sales, Incorporated, or Capital
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
I
15080 -4 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Manufacturing Co., or equal.
2
3 C. Where copper pipe is connected to ductile iron pipe, the Contractor shall furnish
4 and install a tapped cap, Clow F -1042, or ACIPCO Type A -338 or equal, and a
5 brass corporation stops, Type HI5025 by Mueller Co., or equal.
6
7 2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS
8
9 A. Brass pipe shall meet the "Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube,"
10 A.S.T.M. Designation: B 135 -82, drawn temper. Fittings shall be brass.
11
12 B. Where more rigidity is required in erecting and supporting copper pipe, the
13 Contractor shall, with the approval of the Engineer or when so directed by the
14 Engineer, substitute brass pipe.
15
16 2.05 PIPING SCHEDULE
17
18 Unless otherwise called for by the Drawings or elsewhere in these Specifications, the
19 following schedule shall be a guide of minimum requirements for piping for the Work.
20
21 A. Pipe for Underground Service
22
23 1. Potable Water and Sealing Water
24
25 - 3" and smaller - Type K (heavy wall) soft temper copper tube with
26 soldered fittings.
27
28 2. Compressed Air
29
30 a. 2" and smaller - Type K (heavy wall) soft temper copper tube with
31 soldered fittings.
32
33 b. 2 -1/2" to 4" - Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed
34 joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings.
35
36 3. Black iron and steel pipe for underground service shall be coated with a
37 polyethylene sheath. The coating system shall meet Federal
38 Specification L- C -530B. All joints shall be wrapped after laying, so that
39 the finished job shall be completely protected.
40
41 B. Pipe for Above Ground Service
42
43 1. Potable Water and Sealing Water
44
45 3" and smaller - Type L (medium wall) hard temper copper pipe with
46 soldered fittings. Use red brass pipe around equipment, and in other
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -5 06/24/14
1
1
1 locations where vibration is expected.
1
2
3 2. Compressed Air
4 1 5 a. 2" and smaller - Type L (medium wall), hard temper copper pipe
6 with soldered fittings. Use red brass pipe around equipment, and
7 in other locations where vibration is expected. I
8
9 b. 2 -1/4" to 6" - Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, with screwed
10 joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings.
11
12 3. Vent Gases
13 I 14 3 -1/2" and smaller - Schedule 40 galvanized steel, with threaded joints,
15 slip -on flanges or compression couplings.
16 I 17 4. Hydraulic Piping
18
19 a. 1/2" and Tess - Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with hydraulic I
20 connectors.
21
22 b. 3/4" and larger - Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with screwed
I23 joints or welded joints.
24
25 5. Black iron or steel piping for interior use, that is not covered by insulation,
26 shall be primed and painted as specified under the painting schedule of
I
27 Section 09900.
28
29 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
30
31 A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary hangers and supports for piping
32 installed in the Work. III 33
34 B. Hangers and supports for all piping shall meet the following requirements. No
35 perforated strap hangers and no wire supports shall be permitted. I
36
37 1. Hangers supporting insulated piping 2 -1/2" and larger shall be sized to fit
38 the pipe plus the insulation. The insulation at support points shall be I
39 provided with metal shields to prevent damage to the insulation.
40
41 2. Pipe hangers used to support uninsulated copper piping shall be copper I
42 or copper plated.
43
44 3. Guides shall be located not more than twenty (20) feet away from each I
45 expansion loop or joint.
46
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS I
15080 -6 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 4. Horizontal runs of pipe shall have supports spaced so that the sag of the
2 unsupported length shall not create any pockets in the piping.
3
4 5. All vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for
5 this purpose or supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor
6 with a riser extension pipe clamp. The Contractor shall provide riser
7 extension clamps at each floor.
8
9 6. All anchors that are installed in existing concrete shall be expansion case
10 inserts. The Contractor shall drill clean holes for insertion of case and
11 patch concrete around drill hole as required.
12
13 7. The Contractor shall furnish and install concrete inserts that shall be cast
14 in the concrete walls and slabs as required for the proper hanging and
15 supporting of the piping and equipment that is to be furnished and
16 installed.
17
18 8. If approved by the Engineer, continuous slotted concrete inserts shall be
19 shall be used. The Contractor shall provide secondary angle supports
20 between main inserts to hang the various pipes where the loads are such
21 that they can be properly supported by this arrangement.
22
23 9. All inserts and support bolts shall be galvanized or stainless steel as
24 noted.
25
26 2.07 SLEEVES AND FLOOR PLATES
27
28 A. Wherever pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings, the Contractor shall
29 provide Standard Wall steel pipe sleeves of the proper size. The Contractor
30 shall properly cement or build sleeves into the masonry in a rigid position. The
31 Contractor shall set ends of the sleeves flush at wall and ceiling surfaces and to
32 extend one inch above floor surfaces.
33
34 B. For sleeves in walls below grade, the Contractor shall provide water stops and
35 tightly caulk after the pipe is installed. Such sleeves shall be completed tight
36 and tested for leaks.
37
38 PART 3 - EXECUTION
39
40 3.01 INSTALLATION
41
42 A. All pipe shall be carefully placed by the Contractor to proper lines and grades
43 and shall be connected up, unless otherwise shown or indicated, with screw
44 fittings. Screw joints shall be made tight, with an approved jointing compound,
45 and screwed home. If welding of pipe is called for, it shall be installed in accord
46 with the requirements of the Engineer.
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -7 06/24/14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
B. All piping shall be installed in such manner and at such times as will require a
minimum of cutting and repairing of the building structures. In case any such
cutting and repairing is necessary, it shall be done only with the permission of
the Engineer. All cutting and repairing shall be performed by mechanics of the
trade which originally executed the work, with all repairs matching the original
condition.
C. The following general piping practices, when applicable, shall be followed in
installing all steel, copper and brass piping:
1. Full lengths of pipe shall be used wherever possible; short lengths of pipe
with couplings shall not be permitted.
2. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement and shall be installed without
forcing or springing.
3. Tool marks and unnecessary pipe threads shall not be allowed. Burrs
formed when cutting pipe shall be removed by reaming. Before installing
any pipe, care shall be taken that the inside is thoroughly clean and free
of cuttings and foreign matter.
4. In general, all changes in direction shall be made by using pipe fittings.
Field bends of pipe shall not be permitted. Wherever there is a galvanized
steel pipeline longer than 30 feet, the Contractor shall provide a plugged
tee in the line.
5. A liberal number of unions shall be used on pipe two and one -half (2 -1/2)
inches or smaller in diameter, and companion flanges on pipe three
(3) inches and larger, to permit the ready removal of any section.
Unions shall be installed in all piping connections to equipment, to
regulating valves, and wherever necessary to facilitate the removal of
valves, strainers, accessories and other items requiring maintenance.
Flanges on equipment may be considered as unions when connecting
pipe is provided with companion flanges. All unions shall be of the
ground joint type, with brass -to -metal seats. No gasketed unions will be
permitted. Where wrought iron or steel pipe is to be connected to
copper pipe, a dielectric union, such as those manufactured by EPCO
Sales, Inc., Capital Manufacturing Company, or equal, shall be used.
6. Exposed piping shall be neatly arranged, straight, run parallel and at right
angles to walls, unless otherwise directed or shown, and shall be so
graded that the entire system can be drained. Drain valves or stop and
waste valves shall be installed at all low points of piping.
7 Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -8 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 doors or windows, shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and
2 equipment, and shall not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of
3 any equipment.
4
5 8. The Contractor shall cut annealed, Type K, copper tube square, ream
6 ends and flare using suitable tools. The Contractor shall use bending
7 tools for making bend on annealed copper pipe only and shall assemble
8 hard drawn, Type L, copper tubing, using solder alloy and flux as
9 recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing. The Contractor shall
10 cut tubing square, ream ends, and polish both fitting and tube with steel
11 wool before fluxing; properly heat, taking care not to overheat and after
12 running solder, wipe the joint clean. The Contractor shall install copper
13 tubing only in accordance with the supplier's instructions.
14
15 9. Where copper tubing is connected to ferrous piping or equipment with
16 ferrous fittings, the Contractor shall provide approved insulating
17 bushings.
18
19 10. Where copper lines pass through exterior walls, the Contractor shall
20 carry Type K through a pipe sleeve provided for this purpose and connect
21 Type L inside the building by use of adapter fittings.
22
23 11. All welding shall be performed by qualifies welders. All welding of steel
24 pipe shall be carried out in strict accordance with A.W.S. procedures.
25 Welding of black steel pipe shall be accomplished by means of the
26 manual, shielded metal -arc process. Welding of stainless steel pipe shall
27 be by the shielded arc, inert gas method.
28
29 12. When cast iron companion flanges are required to connect steel piping
30 to cast iron piping, or in steel pipe two and one -half (2 -1/2) inches or
31 larger in lieu of unions, such flanges shall be furnished drilled and tapped,
32 as necessary, and included with the pipe.
33
34 13. After welding slip -on flanges to galvanized steel pipe, the disturbed
35 galvanized interior and exterior areas the Contractor shall clean and
36 restore, by hot -dip galvanizing or painting with a zinc -rich cold
37 galvanizing paint.
38
39 14. After testing, exposed pipe threads on joints laid in the ground the
40 Contractor shall paint with one (1) coat of Bitumastic No. 50, Tnemecol
41 or equal coal -tar pitch paint.
42
43 15. In general, the Contractor shall furnish and install pipe expansion joints
44 on all piping where such piping crosses structure expansion joints,
45 whether or not shown on the Drawings. Pipe expansion joints shall be
46 approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall assemble expansion
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -9 06/24/14
1 couplings with bolts drawn sufficiently tight to prevent leakage but not to
2 prevent expansion and contraction.
3
4 16. Where pipes pass through concrete or masonry walls or floors, the
5 Contractor shall provide galvanized pipe sleeves. For pipe two (2) inches
6 and smaller in diameter, provide sleeves two (2) sizes larger than the
7 pipe itself. For pipe 2 -1/2 inches and larger in diameter, provide sleeves
8 one (1) pipe size larger than the pipe itself. The Contractor shall extend
9 sleeves through the floor two (2) inches above the finished slab, except
10 in finished areas where the Contractor shall finish the sleeve just above
11 the finished slab, unless it is noted to be flush. The Contractor shall make
12 ends of sleeves flush with wall and ceiling surface, shall render sleeves
13 gas tight and caulk sleeves passing through exterior walls watertight
14 using lead wool.
15
16 17. Provide chromium plated floor, wall and ceiling plates to cover exposed
17 piping passing through surfaces; furnish Grinnell Fig. 10, American
18 Standard, or equal.
19
20 18. Underground piping shall be cradled and backfilled as specified. The use
21 of slag for cradle or backfill material under, around or over steel, copper
22 and brass pipe is prohibited.
23
24 3.02 TESTING
25
26 After all piping has been connected up in place, and before application of insulation or
27 covering, the Contractor shall test to the satisfaction of the Engineer all piping in
28 accordance with the requirements of Section 01625 and 15062 of these Specifications,
29 as such relate to testing. Any leaks which develop shall be made tight before final
30 acceptance of the work, by rewelding, tightening, renewing packing, or replacing
31 materials, as required or as ordered. Caulking is not permitted. All labor, material and
32 equipment for tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. After all lines have been
33 tested and approved, they shall be blow n dry with compressed air and carefully
34 cleaned by the Contractor.
35
36 3.03 DISINFECTION
37
38 All steel or copper or brass piping carrying potable water shall be disinfected after
39 testing, in accordance with the procedures specified in Section 01625.
40
41
42 END OF SECTION
43
SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS
15080 -10 06/24/14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 15094
2
3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and
10 straps and furnish and install new pipe supports, hangers, and straps as shown
11 on the Drawings.
12
13 B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers,
14 supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and
15 supporting devices for supporting exposed piping.
16
17 C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors
18 shall be 304 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and
19 capacity of the existing supports.
20
21 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
22
23 A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design and shall be
24 adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating
25 conditions. The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5) times
26 the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe being
27 supported.
28
29 B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such
30 a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When
31 manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be
32 transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating
33 that such requirements have been complied with.
34
35 1.03 SUBMITTALS
36
37 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions, shop
38 drawings of all items to be furnished under this section.
39
40 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein.
41
42
43
44
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -1 09/22/13
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 GENERAL
4
5 A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses
6 in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support and secure the
7 pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to
8 adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal
9 expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces
10 such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe supports shall be
11 approved prior to installation.
12
13 B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of
14 meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests and
15 physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP -58.
16
17 C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that
18 the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise specified
19 herein.
20
21 D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be
22 manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any reference
23 to a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality
24 of and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item in type, style, quality,
25 design and performance will be for approval. All pipe hangers and supports
26 shall be 304 stainless steel unless otherwise specified.
27
28 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE
29
30 A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 304 SS hangers suspended by
31 steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as follows:
32
33 1. Hangers:
34
35 Pipe Size, Inches Piping Technology & Products Fig. No.
36 1/2" to 3" 50
37 3" to 30" 83
38 Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
39 Paragraph 2.04
40
41 2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded with
42 load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the
43 rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the following
44 minimum diameters:
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -2 09/22/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 Pipe Size, Inches Min. Rod Diameter, In.
3 Less than 2 -1/2 3/8
4 2 -1/2 though 4 1/2
5 4 5/8
6 6 3/4
7 8 -12 7/8
8 14 -16 1
9 20 -30 1-1/2
10 Above 30 See SPECIAL SUPPORTS,
11 Paragraph 2.04
12
13 3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam
14 clamps, for rod sizes 1/2 -inch through 3/4 -inch shall be equal to Grinnell
15 Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8 -inch through 1 -1/4 inches shall be
16 equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 228 or equal.
17
18 4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in
19 ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or ceiling
20 mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as manufactured
21 by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows:
22
23 a. 304 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used where
24 applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and including
25 7/8 -inch diameter.
26
27 b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and be
28 for hanger rod sizes 1 -inch through and including 1-1/4 inches,
29 shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Grinnell or
30 approved equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical
31 adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as
32 required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell Fig.
33 No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be supported by
34 welded steel brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194, 195, and 199, as
35 required, for pipe sizes up to and including 20 -inch diameter.
36 Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required.
37
38 5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on a
39 0.5 -inch neoprene pad and U -bolt assembly supported by the bracket for
40 pipes 4- inches and larger or by a U -bolt for pipes smaller than 4- inches.
41 U -bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137.
42
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -3 09/22/13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 B.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39 C.
40
41
42
43
44
1
1
6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be supported
1
by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. Hangers and
steel rods shall be as specified above.
7. Wall or column supported pipes 8- inches and smaller may be supported 1
by hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required.
Floor supported pipes 3- inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by
either cast -in -place concrete supports or adjustable pipe saddle supports as
directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when
lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is provided),
and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where lateral
displacement of the pipes is not probable.
1
1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the
Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with
temporary supports. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete
support shall have 1 -inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each
concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to the
concrete with cast -in -place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where directed
by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted into drilled
holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral displacement
of the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer,
maximum height shall be five (5) feet.
2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to
that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular.
3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the
corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip -on welding flanges
respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe
construction of the size recommended by the pipe support manufacturer.
Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a minimum of two
(2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle supports shall be equal
to Grinnell Fig. No. 259. Where used under base fittings, a suitable
flange shall be substituted for the saddle. Floor supported pipes less
than 3- inches shall be supported by fabricated stainless steel supports.
Vertical piping shall be supported as follows: 1
1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be 111 supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction
by pipe supports as previously specified herein.
1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -4 09/22/13
1
1
1 2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight- inches
2 in diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown
3 in the drawings.
I 4
5 3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall
6 be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the pipe
I 8
7 sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262. Anchor bolts
shall be equal to Kwik -Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock Industries,
9 Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej -it manufactured by Wej -it Expansion
I 10
11 Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado.
12 D. All components of each support shall be 304 Stainless Steel.
I 13
14 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE
15
I 16
17 A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously specified
herein.
18
I 19 B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber
20 hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder
21 by Husky - Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States
22 Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing
' 23 shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber nose.
24 Tray width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs of rubber hose and
25 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be
I 26 furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger
27 clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall
28 be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps fasteners equal to
29 Globe Model M -CAC, Husky - Burndy Model SCR or equal. Spacing between
30 clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide continuous support
31 along the length of the pipe.
I 32
33 C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide
34 firm support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal expansion
I 35 and contraction.
36
37 2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS
I 38
39 A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on
40 the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored
I 41
42 into the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably secured to
horizontal support members connected at each end vertical support members
43 and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation.
44
1
1
1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -5 09/22/13
1 1. The complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the
2 Unistrut Corporation, Globe -Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products
3 Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal supporting
4 members shall be U- shaped channels similar to Unistrut Series P1000.
5
6 2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe
7 clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series
8 P2558. All components shall be of 304 stainless steel.
9
10 3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and
11 fittings required for a complete assembly.
12
13 4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility
14 of the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all
15 details of the installation including dimensions and types of supports.
16
17 B. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are
18 not applicable, including pipe supports for above 30 -inch diameter pipe; high
19 temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or
20 constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance with Specifications,
21 concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein and
22 shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be subject to review by
23 the Engineer.
24
25 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all
26 related Sections of this Specification.
27
28 2. Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be
29 provided, for review by the Engineer.
30
31 3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting
32 structures, in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is
33 designed.
34
35 4. Hanger rods for above 30 -inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inch
36 diameter and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum
37 recommended safe load.
38
39 2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
40
41 A. Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1.1.0
42 and MSS SP -69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed
43 the following:
44
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -6 09/22/13
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Maximum unsupported pipe span
(FEET)
Nominal Pipe Size -
Inches
Ductile Iron
Steel
PVC -1 and PVC -2
(Sch. 80)
1/2
N/A
5
3.5
3/4
N/A
6
3.5
1
N/A
7
3.8
1 -1/4
N/A
7
4.0
1 -1/2 - 3
N/A
9
4.0
4
7
10
5.5
5 -10
10
10
10
12 -48
10
per manufacturer
or as shown on
drawings
10
8
9
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
12 3.01 INSTALLATION
13
14 A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building
15 structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in
16 direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No
17 piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and
18 walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or
19 authorized by the Engineer.
20
21 B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support
22 the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading
23 conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure
24 forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable externally
25 applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the
26 Engineer.
27
28 C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both
29 sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe
30 forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support
31 connecting pipes.
32
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -7 09/22/13
1 D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows:
2
3 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support
4 spacing of 10 feet -0- inches with a minimum of one support per pipe
5 section at the joints.
6
7 2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever possible.
8 Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended
9 by the manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five (5)
10 feet.
11
12 3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not
13 exceed five (5) feet.
14
15 4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at least
16 15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, and at
17 all points necessary to insure rigid construction.
18
19 E. Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads
20 evenly along the pipe circumference.
21
22 F. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for
23 in pipe support selection and installation.
24
25 G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete
26 is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked
27 which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper
28 location of pipe supports is included under this Section.
29
30 H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface.
31
32
33 3.02 PRIME COATING
34
35 A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean,
36 dry, and free from all mill - scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign
37 substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
38
39 B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy
40 Primer or equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust -
41 Inhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc.,
42 Pittsburgh, Pa. or equal.
43
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -8 09/22/13
1
1
1 C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be
2 applied, as specified in Section 09900.
3
4 3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS
5
6 A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable
7 insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct
8 contact and any resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous
9 impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or
10 washers, or upon approval by the Engineer.
11
12
13 END OF SECTION
14
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -9 09/22/13
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15094 -10 09/22/13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 15100
2
3 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
4
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
6
7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
8
9 A. All labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish and install for
10 complete and ready operation all valves and appurtenances shown on the
11 Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
12
13 B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings.
14
15 C. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in
16 raised letters on some appropriate part of the body.
17
18 D. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
19
20 1. Eccentric Plug Valves
21 2. Slanting Disk Check Valve
22 3. Swing Check Valve
23 4. Telescopic Valves
24 5. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves
25 6. Pressure Relief Valves
26 7. Ball Valves
27 8. Air Release Valves
28 9. Combination Air and Vacuum Release Valves
29 10. Valve Actuators
30 11. Valve Boxes
31 12. Gauges
32 13. Flange Adapter Couplings
33 14. Flexible Couplings
34 15. Quick Connect Couplings
35 16. Flexible Type Expansion Joints
36 17. Unions
37
38 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
39
40 A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard
41 for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, waste activated sludge, return
42 activated sludge, scum, etc., depending on the application.
43
44 B. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals,
45 and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be of EPDM
46 construction.
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -1 11/16/15
1 C. All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of
2 the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing
3 actuator.
4
5 D. In the case of existing valves that are being replaced with new valves, all
6 replacement valves shall have the identical lay length as the existing valves.
7 This applies to all types of valves. Prior to ordering any replacement valve, the
8 contractor shall notify the Engineer if the valve in questions has to be special
9 manufactured or ordered because of a non - standard lay length.
10
11 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
12
13 A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well -
14 established reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the
15 manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall
16 be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices
17 and methods and shall comply with these Specifications, as applicable.
18
19 1.04 SUBMITTALS
20
21 A. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to
22 the Engineer for review.
23
24 1.05 TOOLS
25
26 A. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be
27 supplied with the equipment.
28
29 1.06 VALVE INDICES
30
31 A. The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for
32 the work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify the
33 valve's function, and the normal operating position for each valve.
34
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
36
37 2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
38
39 A. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with standard
40 ANSI /AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient- Seated Cast -Iron Eccentric Plug Valves,
41 of the latest revision unless otherwise specified. The Manufacturer shall provide
42 affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. Valves shall be as manufactured
43 by DeZurik, Val - Matic, Homestead or approved equal.
44
45 B. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, latest edition.
46 Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -2 11/16/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 the above reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as
2 described in Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage
3 test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The
4 manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design
5 testing as described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference.
6
7 C. Valves shall be of the non - lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs
8 and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged
9 valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/150 Ib. standard.
10 Mechanical joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AWWA
11 C111/A21.11. Screwed ends shall be to the NPT standard.
12
13 D. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron.
14
15 E. Minimum port areas for all valves shall be 100 percent of full nominal pipe area.
16
17 F. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium plated.
18 Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A -48, Class 40 cast iron or ASTM A-
19 536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene.
20
21 G. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel,
22 oil- impregnated bronze or non - metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings.
23
24 H. Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not
25 acceptable.
26
27 I. Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual
28 gear actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
29
30 J. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V -ring type with a packing gland follower.
31 Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the
32 actuator or bonnet from the valve.
33
34 K. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
35 resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
36 requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550 -90
37 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ".
38
39 2.02 SLANTING DISK CHECK VALVE
40
41 A. Valve body shall be heavy two -piece ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron. The two
42 (2) body halves and body seat shall be 0 -ring sealed and bolted together in a
43 manner to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each body half shall have a
44 covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall
45 be fully machined to accept the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot.
46
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -3 11/16/15
1 B. The seat ring and disc ring shall permit replacement in the field without need for
2 special tools or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The area
3 throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area.
4
5 C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc Tugs shall be stainless
6 steel of different hardness to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit to
7 prevent wear.
8
9 D. An indicator shall be provided to show position of the disc.
10
11 E. The valve shall have a bottom mounted buffer for free open and positive non -
12 slam closing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last
13 10% of closure and thereafter control the disc closure until the valve is shut in a
14 manner to minimize or prevent water hammer. The rate of hydraulic control and
15 the initial point of buffer contact to the disc closure shall be externally adjustable
16 and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom buffer hydraulic
17 system must be self- contained and independent from pipeline media to prevent
18 contamination of the media and protect the cylinder against corrosion. The
19 buffer rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be stainless steel.
20
21 F Valve shall be Apco Series 800B slanting disc check valve with bottom mounted
22 buffer or approved equal.
23
24 2.03 SWING CHECK VALVES
25
26 A. Replacement check valves shall be supplied with end connections identical to
27 those valves they are replacing and have identical lay lengths as those valves
28 they are replacing.
29
30 B. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body
31 with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a noncorrosive shaft for
32 attachment of weight and lever. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard
33 B.16.1, 125 Ib. Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of water
34 or wastewater back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below
35 the delivery pressure.
36
37 C. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock.
38 The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a
39 threaded joint.
40
41 D. Check valves shall be the lever and weight type with an adjustable position
42 weight and lever arm attached to the disc assembly to allow adjustment of the
43 closure force.
44
45 E. The valves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller, Kennedy or approved
46 equal, and shall be suitable for horizontal installation.
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -4 11/16/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2.04 TELESCOPING VALVES
2 A. New telescopic valve assemblies shall be installed at existing locations as
3 shown on the Drawings. The valves shall be sized and manufactured to be in-
4 kind replacements for the existing valves that are to be removed. The new
5 valves shall be mounted on the existing mounting stands and function properly
6 without requiring modifications to the existing structure or the existing piping.
7
8 B. Each valve assembly shall be of the rising stem type and shall be complete and
9 include but not be limited to the following components:
10
11 • Cast iron or ductile iron floor mounting pedestal
12 • Manual, threaded rod lifting mechanism with a cast hand wheel
13 • The threaded rod shall be solid 1 -1/2 -inch diameter 316 stainless steel,
14 90,000 psi minimum tensile strength
15 • A Stem cover with a stainless steel graduated position indicator
16 • Stem Guide (brass, bronze or UHMW polyethylene)
17 • Bail (304L ASTM A240 stainless steel)
18 • Slip Tube with v -notch (304L ASTM A240 Stainless Steel)
19 • Gasket Retainer and Flange (stainless steel)
20 • Neoprene Gasket
21
22 C. The slip tube shall be of 304 stainless steel and manufactured from seamless
23 pipe minimum 1/8 -inch wall thickness. The finish O.D. of the tube shall be within
24 + 0.04 inches runout, cylindrical within 0.100 TIR and have a smooth 125 micro -
25 inch or better surface. The slip tube shall have two opposing v -notch weirs at
26 the top and penetrate the existing riser pipe a minimum of 3- inches in the up
27 position and have a 54 -inch minimum travel as shown on the drawings.
28
29 D. The bail shall be of the same material as the slip tube and shall be rigidly welded
30 to the slip tube and shall be connected to the stem with a flanged type
31 connection and multiple fasteners. A connection with the stem penetrating a
32 single hole in the bail with jamb nuts on either side of the bail is not acceptable.
33
34 E. A stainless steel companion flange and double % -inch thick neoprene wiper
35 gasket shall be installed and attached to the top of the existing riser pipe. The
36 I.D. of the gasket shall be 1/8 -inch smaller than the O.D. of the tube. The
37 gaskets shall be of split design, sandwiched between the riser pipe flange and
38 the companion flange, and replaceable without removing the slip tube from the
39 riser pipe. The drilled hole pattern and dimensions of the companion flange
40 shall match the drilled hole pattern of the existing riser pipe flange.
41
42 F. Lifts shall be hand wheel type, mounted to a floor stand pedestal with a threaded
43 rod and an integral nut as the actual lifting mechanism. The hand wheel shall
44 contain a threaded nut that is mated with the threaded rod. The lifting
45 mechanism shall be self - locking and to secure the stem in any infinite position
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -5 11/16/15
1
1
1 throughout the travel range. The lift mechanism shall use a stainless steel
I
2 square tube with torque nut design or a keyed shaft, with torque plate, to prevent
3 valve tube rotation.
4
5 G. The valve manufacturer shall select the proper size handwheel to ensure that
6 the valve can be operated with no more than a 40 Ib effort and shall be a
7 minimum of 16- inches in diameter of cast aluminum, cast iron, or stainless steel. I
8 An arrow with the word "OPEN" shall be permanently attached or cast onto the
9 wheel to indicate the direction or rotation to open the valve. Handwheel
10 operators shall be provided with a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the I
11 operating stem. Handwheel operators shall be equipped with thrust bearings
12 above and below the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts.
13 Positive mechanical seals shall be provided above and below the operating nut I
14 to exclude moisture and dirt and prevent leakage of lubricant out of the hoist.
15 The handwheel shall be removable.
16 I 17 H. The threaded stem shall have a maximum L/R ratio for the unsupported part of
18 the stem not to exceed 200. In compression, the stem shall be designed for a
19 critical buckling load caused by a 40 Ib effort on the crank or handwheel with a
I20 safety factor of 2, using the Euler column formula. The stem shall be designed
21 to withstand the tension load caused by the application of a 40 Ib effort on the
22 crank or handwheel without exceeding 1/5 of the ultimate tensile strength of the
23 stem material. The threaded portion of the stem shall have machine rolled
1
24 double lead threads of the full Acme type with a 16 microinch finish or better.
25 Stub threads are not acceptable. Stems of more than one section shall be
26 joined by stainless steel or bronze couplings. The coupling shall be pinned and
I
27 bolted to the stems. Stems, on manually operated valves, shall be provided
28 with adjustable stop collars to prevent over travel.
29
I
30 I. Stem guides shall be provided when necessary to ensure that the maximum L/R
31 ratio for the unsupported part of the stem is 200 or less. Stem guide brackets
32 shall be fabricated of stainless steel and shall be outfitted with UHMW or bronze
33 bushings and shall be adjustable in two directions.
34
35 J. The valves shall include a position indicator, calibrated in' inch increments to I
36 illustrate valve position. The position indicator shall be mounted on the side of
37 the floor stand assembly and operate in proportion to the rotation of the threaded
38 lifting stem. The position indicator shall provide a true and accurate indication I
39 of the tube elevation by comparing it to the top of the threaded stem.
40
41 K. the valves shall be equipped with fracture - resistant clear butyrate or lexan I
42 plastic stem covers. The top of the stem cover shall be closed and the bottom
43 end of the stem cover shall be mounted in a housing or adapter for easy field
44 mounting. 1
45
46
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -6 11/16/15
1
1
1 L. Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be used to mount the floor stand assembly to
2 the existing support. Cleaning, shop prime coating, and finish painting of the
3 floor stand assembly shall be as specified in Section 09865 and Section 09900.
I 4
5 M. The telescoping valve assemblies shall be manufactured by Waterman or
6 approved equal.
I 7
8 2.05 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES
9
I 10 A. All gate valves shall be resilient seated or resilient wedge, manufactured to meet
11 or exceed the requirements of AWWA C515 of latest revision and in accordance
12 with the following Specifications. Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway
I 13 equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of the valve.
14
15 B. The 24 -inch valves shall be non - rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged
II 16 or rolled bronze as shown in AWWA C515. The 30 -inch valves shall be rated
17 for 250 psi.
18
I 19 C. All gaskets shall be pressure energized 0-ring type seals. The stem shall be
20 sealed with three 0-rings. The top two 0-rings shall be replaceable with the
21 valve fully open and exposed to full working pressure. Thrust washers shall be
22 installed on each side of the thrust collar.
I23
24 D. The gate shall be ductile iron with an EPDM coating. The resilient sealing
25 mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the valve design pressure when
I 26 installed with the line flow in either direction.
27
28 E. All cast ferrous components shall be ductile iron ASTM A536. All internal and
I 29 external surfaces of the valve body and valve tlonnet shall have an epoxy
30 coating complying with AWWA C550. All valves are to be tested in strict
31 accordance with AWWA C515.
I 32
33 F. Each 30 -inch valve shall be equipped with a spur gear operator with a 2 -inch
34 square nut and a removable hand wheel that fits over the nut. The hand wheel
I 35 shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the valves. Handwheels shall
36 be of ample size and shall have an arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to
37 indicate the direction of opening.
I 38
39 G. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy
40 resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all applicable
I 41 requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard C550 -90
42 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ".
43
1 44 H. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American Flow Control,
45 M &H, Mueller, Kennedy, Clow, or equal.
1
1
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -7 11/16/15
1
2 2.06 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
3
4 A. Floor type hydrostatic pressure relief valve shall be designed for installing in the
5 floor of concrete tanks and shall be type F -1493 as manufactured by Clow Valve
6 Company or equal. The valves shall be designed to open at a hydrostatic head
7 of 9- inches of water.
8
9 B. The assembly shall consist of three parts: cover, body, and grate. All three
10 parts shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM specifications A -126 Class B.
11 They shall be designed so that neither the cover nor grate can become
12 separated from the body of the valve, due to ground water pressure around the
13 tank. However, when necessary, both may be easily removed by turning them
14 to right or left to free them from locking lugs cast integrally on the inside of the
15 body.
16
17 C. The seats shall be of Buna -N rubber, bonded to the cover, mating with a
18 machined bronze seat in the body.
19
20 2.07 BALL VALVES
21
22 A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded
23 or flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic
24 construction, 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T- handles. PVC ball
25 valves shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Hayward, or equal.
26
27 B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on the chemical clean system
28 and shall be manufactured to ASTM F 1970 specifications and constructed from
29 PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All 0-rings shall be
30 Latharge Viton. All valves shall have stem with double 0-ring seals. All valve
31 handles shall be polypropylene with built -in lockout mechanism. All valve union
32 nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal carriers shall be Safe -T- Blocked. All
33 valve components shall be replaceable. All valves shall be certified by NSF
34 International for use in potable water service. All 1/2" through 2" valves shall be
35 pressure rated to 235 psi, all 2 -1/2" through 8" and all flanged valves shall be
36 pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73° F. Valves shall have a vent hole in
37 the ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. Install valve with ball vent on the
38 pressure (upstream) side when in closed position. Vented ball valves shall be
39 True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Valves as manufactured by Spears, True Union
40 Z -Ball Valves by Hayward, or Engineer approved equal.
41
42 C. Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2 -piece (1" and smaller)
43 or 3 -piece (1 -1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi
44 saturated steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pressure. Valves shall have
45 stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrome plated brass
46 ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -8 11/16/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 covered steel handle. All end connections shall be threaded.
2
3 D. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are
4 plainly visible when standing on the floor.
5
6 2.08 AIR RELEASE VALVES
7
8 A. The air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Construction Drawings.
9 The valves shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float,
10 EPDM seat and stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. Air release
11 valves shall be equipped with a vacuum ball or check feature in order to prevent
12 air from entering the valve during vacuum conditions. The valves for wastewater
13 and sludge applications shall be Model D -025 as manufactured by A.R.I. or
14 equal. Air release valves for reclaimed and potable water service shall be A.R.I.
15 Model D- 040 -C -VAC or equal.
16
17 B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air release
18 valves. Stainless steel or brass piping shall be provided for air release valves
19 on pumps.
20
21 2.09 COMBINATION AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVES
22
23 A. The air and vacuum valves for the transfer pump discharge lines shall be
24 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. The valves shall have a cast
25 iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, and an EPDM seat. The valves
26 shall be 2" threaded connection. Air and vacuum valves shall be equipped with
27 a baffle to protect the float from direct contact with the rushing air and water and
28 to prevent the float from closing prematurely in the valve. The valves shall be
29 Model D -040 -C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal.
30
31 B. A stainless steel ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air and vacuum
32 valves.
33
34 2.10 QUARTER —TURN VALVE ACTUATORS
35
36 A. General
37
38 1. All valve actuators shall conform to the latest version of the AVWVA
39 Standard Specifications for the respective type of valves and shall be
40 either manual, motor - operated, or air operated and shall match the
41 existing valve operator.
42
43 2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the
44 full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry
45 system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve.
46 Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body.
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -9 11/16/15
1
2
3
3. The actuator manufacturer shall be responsible for properly sizing the
actuator for the installed pressure conditions.
4 4. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing the valve and
5 actuator in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
6 Contractor shall replace any damaged actuator without cost to the
7 Owner.
8
9 5. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be
10 equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than five
11 (5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel and
12 electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel.
13
14 B. Manual Actuators
15
16 1. Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed
17 gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of required
18 opening and closing torque values. Actuators shall be equipped with
19 handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop - limiting locking
20 devices to prevent over travel in the open and closed positions. They
21 shall turn counter - clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be
22 the self - locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in any
23 intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without
24 creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and designed to
25 produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the
26 handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall withstand an input
27 of 450 -foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300 -foot pounds for larger
28 than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions without damage.
29 Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or chain wheel and
30 position indicator, and valves located below grade shall be equipped with
31 a 2 -inch square AWWA operating nut located at ground level and cast
32 iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators shall conform to AWWA
33 C504, latest revision.
34
35 2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to
36 open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an
37 arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of
38 opening.
39
40 3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the
41 operator walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall
42 have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a
43 minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway.
44
45 2.11 VALVE BOXES
46
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -10 11/16/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 A. All buried valves shall have cast -iron three -piece valve boxes. Valve boxes
2 shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation
3 at or slightly above the finished grade surface, as directed by the Engineer. The
4 barrel shall be two- piece, sliding type, having 5 -1/4 -inch shaft. The upper
5 section shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to
6 prevent settling and shall be complete with cast iron covers.
7
8 B. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended within 12 inches of the top of the
9 valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with concrete base and valve
10 nameplate engraved with lettering 1/8 -inch deep as shown on the Construction
11 Drawings.
12
13 2.12 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES
14
15 A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges
16 installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on their
17 discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this Contract
18 shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements.
19
20 B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless
21 steel case with a 4-1/2-inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass crystal
22 window, 1/4 -inch shut -off valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. Provide
23 stainless steel diaphragm seals between shut -off valve and pressure gauge on
24 all lines with unclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges shall be
25 weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with jet black
26 graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both pounds per
27 square inch and feet of head.
28
29 C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of mercury vacuum to 50 feet of head.
30 Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected shutoff head
31 of the respective pump.
32
33 D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown
34 Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal
35
36 2.13 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS
37
38 A. Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings.
39
40 B. Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating.
41
42 C. All couplings shall be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor
43 studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi
44 minimum.
45
46 D. Couplings shall be Ebaa Iron Series 24100 Megaflange Restrained Flange
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -11 11/16/15
1 Adapter or equal.
2
3 2.14 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
4
5 A. Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on
6 the Drawings.
7
8 B. Split type coupling shall be used with all interior piping and with exterior piping
9 as noted on the Drawings. The couplings shall be mechanical type for radius
10 groove piping. The couplings shall mechanically engage and lock grooved pipe
11 ends in a positive couple and allow for angular deflection and contraction and
12 expansion.
13
14 C. Couplings shall consist of malleable iron, ASTM Specification A47, Grade
15 32510 housing clamps in two or more parts, a single chlorinated butyl
16 composition sealing gasket with a "C" shaped cross - section and internal sealing
17 lips projecting diagonally inward, and two or more oval track head type bolts
18 with hexagonal heavy nuts conforming to ASTM Specification A183 and A194
19 to assemble the housing clamps. Bolts and nuts shall be hot - dipped galvanized
20 after fabrication.
21
22 D. Victaulic type couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of flanged joints. Pipes
23 shall be radius grooved as specified for use with the Victaulic couplings.
24 Flanged adapter connections at fittings, valves, and equipment shall be Victaulic
25 Vic., Flange Style 741, equal by Gustin -Bacon Group, Division of Certain -Teed
26 Products, Kansas City, Kansas or equal.
27
28 E. Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall
29 be of steel and shall be Dresser Style 38 or 40, as shown on the Drawings, or
30 equal. The coupling shall be provided with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts
31 and nuts unless indicated otherwise.
32
33 F. All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stop removed.
34
35 G. Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure
36 to the liquid within the pipe.
37
38 H. If the Contractor decides to use victaulic couplings in lieu of flanged joints, he
39 shall be responsible for supplying supports for the joints.
40
41 2.15 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS
42
43 A. Quick connect couplings shall be Model 633 -E hose shank adapter and Model
44 633 -C hose shank coupler as manufactured by Dover Corporation OPW
45 Division, Cincinnati, Ohio, Ever -tite Coupling Co., Inc., New York, New York, or
46 equal.
47
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -12 11/16/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2.16 FLEXIBLE TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS
2
3 A. Expansion joints shall be manufactured of molded EPDM rubber with filled
4 arches and wire reinforcement. Joints shall be reinforced with baked enamel
5 ductile iron or split galvanized steel retaining rings placed directly against the
6 inside of the flange to prevent damage to the rubber surface when the bolts are
7 tightened. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150 #. Rated working pressure shall
8 be 150 psi. Retaining rings, control rods, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
9 coated according to Section 09900 or shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel.
10
11 B. Joints shall be rated for a minimum operating temperature of 180 °F.
12
13 C. Tapered expansion joints shall be eccentric, single arch, and shall be capable
14 of a 1/2" maximum lateral deflection. Double arch expansion joints shall be
15 required where called out on the drawings.
16
17 D. Joints shall be provided and installed with the manufacturer's standard control
18 rods. Total joint deflection shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended
19 maximum. Joints shall be installed in neutral position.
20
21 E. Expansion joints shall be Mercer Series FER, Proco, Red Valve Redflex, or
22 equal.
23
24 2.17 UNIONS
25
26 A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds
27 malleable iron, zinc - coated. Unions on water piping 2 -1/2 inches in diameter
28 and larger shall be flange pattern, 125 -pound class, zinc - coated. Gaskets for
29 flanged unions shall be of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be concealed
30 in walls, ceilings, or partitions.
31
32 PART 3 — EXECUTION
33
34 3.01 INSTALLATION
35
36 A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to
37 alignment, rigidly supported, and oriented in accordance with the
38 manufacturer's instructions with respect to flow. Any damage to the above
39 items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are
40 installed.
41
42 B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours
43 at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different
44 test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired
45 to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
46
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -13 11/16/15
1
1
1 C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of
I
2 operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry
3 floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as
4 forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, I
5 the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on
6 their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these valves
7 and appurtenances during the construction of the structures. I
8
9 D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the
10 respective pipe sections in Division 15.
11
12 E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and
13 washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy I
14 steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the
15 pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats (14 -20
16 mils DFT) of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 300M,
I17 Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar, or approved equal.
18
19 F. Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall be
20 thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be
I
21 moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite paste,
22 and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe has
23 been brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly over
I
24 the pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then shall
25 be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened until
26 the housing sections are firmly in contact, metal -to- metal, without excessive bolt
I
27 tension.
28
29 G. Prior to the installation of sleeve -type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned
I
30 thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket
31 lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe
32 to a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed
I
33 on the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner.
34
35 H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the I
36 Construction Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard
37 manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over
38 each stem with base bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade.
39 Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. I
40 Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill
41 from valve box.
I42
43 3.02 SHOP PAINTING
44
45 A. Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall
I
46 receive a coating of rust - inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES I
15100 -14 11/16/15
1 in Section 09900. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the
2 entry of foreign matter prior to installation.
3
4 3.03 FIELD PAINTING
5
6 A. All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view,
7 except ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900.
8
9 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
10
11 A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in
12 accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested.
13 Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to
14 prevent movement during tests.
15
16
17 END OF SECTION
18
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -15 11/16/15
1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
15100 -16 11/16/15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16010
2
3 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
4
5 PART I - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
8 General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
9 to work of this Section.
10
11 1.02 CODES:
12
13 A. The work shall be in conformance with the latest adopted version of the
14 following:
15
16 NFPA 70 National Electric Code
17 FBC Florida Building Code
18 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Codes
19
20 B. The installation shall also comply with all applicable rules and regulations of
21 local and state laws and ordinances. Include in the work, without extra cost,
22 any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply
23 with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Inform the
24 engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable
25 codes, standards, laws, and regulations before submitting their bid.
26
27 1.03 ROUGH -IN:
28
29 A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the
30 requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
31
32 B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 15 for rough -in
33 requirements.
34
35 1.04 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:
36
37 A. Existing services shall not be interrupted without prior consent of the owner's
38 authorized representative and may be interrupted only at, and for, the
39 specific time designated by the owner's authorized representative.
40
41 B. Make a thorough examination of the site and the contract documents. No
42 claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties are encountered
43 which an examination of site conditions and contract documents prior to
44 executing contract would have revealed.
45
46
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS
16010 - 1 07/13/16
1 C. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building
2 components.
3
4 D. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
5
6 E. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to
7 allow for electrical installations.
8
9 F. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be
10 set in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are
11 constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical
12 materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular
13 attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the
14 building.
15
16 G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate
17 the installation of electrical equipment and materials.
18
19 H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or
20 replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
21 equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other
22 installations.
23
24 I. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above
25 ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and
26 structural components.
27
28 J. Temporary electrical service and construction lighting shall be provided
29 under this section. Provide all Temporary electrical equipment as shown on
30 the drawings for the duration of the project. All Temporary electrical
31 equipment and its installation shall not interfere with the operation of the
32 facility and shall not interfere with access to the existing facility's equipment.
33 Provide for all electrical service for construction period, making all
34 connections and removal of same at job conclusion. Furnish and install
35 temporary lighting for construction period. At job completion, all temporary
36 lamps shall be removed and replaced with new lamps; and all temporary
37 electrical equipment shall be disconnected and removed from the project
38 site.
39
40 K. All existing and new conduit/raceways within the project area shall be
41 properly (maximum of 6 feet between supports) supported. Add support to
42 existing conduit as required to comply with the NEC.
43
44 L. All enclosures for new electrical equipment shall be NEMA 4X stainless (316)
45 steel. All enclosures shall have internal mounting plates for components and
46 an interior safety door.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS
16010 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 M. There shall be no penetrations of existing clarifier tank or process basin
3 walls. All conduits shall be run surface mounted or on top of walls. Conduit
4 supports or associated hardware shall NOT penetrate existing clarifier tank
5 walls or process basin walls.
6
7
8 1.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
9
10 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general
11 requirements for cutting and patching.
12
13 B. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and
14 processes of cutting and patching.
15
16 C. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work because of damage
17 caused as a result of electrical installations.
18
19 D. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work
20 that is necessitated by ill- timed, defective, or non - conforming installations.
21
22 E. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials
23 required to:
24
25 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill -timed work.
26
27 2. Remove and replace defective work.
28
29 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the
30 contract documents.
31
32 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
33
34 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
35
36 6. Upon written instructions from the engineer, uncover and restore work
37 to provide for engineer observation of concealed work.
38
39 F. Cut, remove and legally dispose of, selected electrical equipment,
40 components, and materials as indicated; including, but not limited to, removal
41 of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the
42 new work.
43
44 G. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not
45 indicated or scheduled to be removed.
46
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS
16010 - 3 07/13/16
1 H. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to
2 prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
3
4 I. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through remodeling
5 or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained
6 operational. When transit services must be interrupted, provide temporary
7 services for the affected areas and notify the owner prior to changeover.
8
9 1.06 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS:
10
11 A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and
12 Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
13 for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures.
14
15 B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only
16 when submitted by the contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and
17 material suppliers directly to the engineer will not be processed.
18
19 C. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals with part lists as specified in
20 Division 1 Project Closeout; for the following electrical equipment: Panel
21 boards, Control Panels, Variable Frequency Drives, Soft Starters. Motor
22 Starters, Motors, Transformers, and Programmable Logic Controllers.
23
24 1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS: Refer to the Instructions to Bidders
25 and the Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION for requirements in
26 selecting products and requesting substitutions.
27
28 1.08 PRODUCT LISTING:
29
30 A. Prepare listing of major electrical equipment and materials for the project.
31
32 B. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the
33 Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42 D Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected
43 items.
C. When two or more items of the same material or equipment are required,
they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity
does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet
metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar
equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as otherwise
indicated.
44
45
46
E. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted
to the engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS
16010 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 F. If the engineer approves any proposed substitutions, such approval will be
3 set forth in an addendum.
4
5 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
6
7 A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers,
8 types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct
9 identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage
10 during shipment, storage, and handling.
11
12 B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off -site storage is
13 authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.
14
15 C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize
16 construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and
17 equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient
18 flow of installation.
19
20 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS:
21
22 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or PROJECT
23 RECORD DOCUMENTS for requirements. The following paragraphs
24 supplement the requirements of Division 1.
25
26 B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location, both exterior
27 and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines;
28 concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch
29 electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support
30 and hanger details; change orders; concealed control system devices.
31
32 C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; change orders; actual
33 equipment and materials used.
34
35 D. Contractor shall provide engineer with record drawings (AutoCAD compatible
36 file format) and one set of blueprints.
37
38 1.11 WARRANTIES:
39
40 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: SPECIFIC WARRANTIES for procedures
41 and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment
42 specifications for warranty requirements.
43
44 B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16 into a
45 separated set of vinyl- covered, three -ring binders, tabulated and indexed for
46 easy reference.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS
16010 - 5 07/13/16
1
2 C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or
3 equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or
4 bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for
5 filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
6
7 1.12 CLEANING:
8
9 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL
10 CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning.
11
12
13
14 END OF SECTION 16010
15
16
17
18
19
20
BASIC - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS BID DOCUMENTS
16010 - 6 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 SECTION 16110
3
4 RACEWAYS
5
6 PART 1 — GENERAL
7
8 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
9
10 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
11 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to
12 work of this Section.
13
14 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
15 section and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
16 electrical raceways specified herein.
17
18 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
19
20 A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
21
22 B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following:
23
24 Heavy Wall Aluminum
25 PVC Schedule 80
26 Liquid -tight flexible PVC coated metal conduit
27
28 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29
30 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway
31 systems of types and sizes require, whose products have been in
32 satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
33
34 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful
35 installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to
36 that required for this project.
37
38 C. Codes and Standards:
39
40 1. UL Compliance Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of
41 UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems.
42 Provide raceway products and components which have been UL
43 listed and labeled.
44
45
46
RACEWAYS
16110 - 1
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
4
5 A. General: Provide aluminum conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades,
6 sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated.
7
8 B. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection
9 determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with
10 applicable portions of NEC for raceways.
11
12 C. Rigid aluminum Conduit: Provide rigid aluminum, heavy wall, threaded
13 type.
14
15 D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Non - metallic Conduit: Provide liquid -tight flexible
16 non - metallic conduit for all motor connections.
17
18 E. Conduit Fittings: Couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 2" and
19 smaller shall be aluminum hex -nut, expansion -gland type. Aluminum set
20 screw type fittings may be used for conduit sizes 21/2" and larger.
21
22 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS
23
24 A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes
25 and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not
26 indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring
27 requirements which comply with provisions for NEC for raceways.
28
29 B. Electrical Plastic Conduit:
30
31 1. Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 80, 90 °C, UL- rated, constructed of
32 Schedule 80, 90 polyvinyl chloride. For direct burial, UL listed and in
33 conformity with NEC Article 347.
34 2. Standard Wall Conduit: PVC UL rated, constructed of Schedule 40
35 polyvinyl chloride. For exterior above grade exposure, direct exposure
36 to sunlight, UL listed for direct sunlight and in conformity with NEC
37 Article 352.
38
39 C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct
40 accessories of types, sizes and materials, complying with manufacturer's
41 published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing.
42
43 D. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies of types,
44 shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC
45 requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded conduit - entrance
46 ends, removable covers, either cast or galvanized steel and corrosion -
47 resistant screws.
RACEWAYS
16110 -2
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 PART 3 — EXECUTION
2
3 3.01 OBSERVATION
4
5 A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed
6 and substrate which will support raceways. Notify contractor in wiring of
7 conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
8 with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
9 acceptable to installer.
10
11 3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
12
13 A. General: Raceways run below grade, under floors on grade or in concrete
14 shall be PVC heavy wall type (Schedule 80) conduit, provided rigid
15 aluminum conduit is used on elbows and risers to boxes, cabinets, etc.
16
17 B. Sizes of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirements and shall not
18 in any case be less than indicated on drawings. Larger size raceways
19 and /or pull boxes shall be installed if there is excessive length unbroken
20 run or excessive number of bends. Combining of circuits other than those
21 indicated on the drawings will not be permitted.
22
23 C. Coordinate with other work, including wires /cables, boxes and panel work
24 as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and
25 components with other work.
26
27 1. Avoid use of similar metals throughout system to eliminate
28 possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact,
29 coast surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before
30 assembling.
31
32 2. Use roughing -in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished
33 by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only
34 after receiving review of dimensions and after checking location
35 with other trades.
36
37 3. Provide nylon pullcord in empty conduits where indicated. Test all
38 empty conduits with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects
39 ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restoration of conduit and
40 surrounding surfaces to original condition.
41
42 4. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of
43 the following conditions:
44
45 a. Exterior location.
46 b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be
47 expected to accumulate.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 3
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 c. Corrosive atmosphere.
2 d. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
3
4 D. Cut conduits straight, ream properly and cut threads for heavy wall conduit
5 deep and clean.
6
7 E. Field -bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort
8 nor vary internal diameter.
9
10 F. Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two (2) Iocknuts
11 and terminate with bushing. Install lock nuts inside and outside enclosure.
12
13 G. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings.
14
15 H. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot
16 water pipes or other sources of heat. Do not install horizontal raceway
17 runs below water and steam piping.
18
19 I. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
20
21 J. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited.
22 Where required, use 3 -piece union or split couplings.
23
24 K. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of
25 cables /wires within raceways.
26
27 L. Concealed Conduits:
28
29 1. Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or
30 outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion - inhibiting
31 compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and
32 conduit sufficiently tight to ensure water tightness.
33
34 2. For floors -on- grade, install conduits under concrete slab.
35
36 3. Install underground conduits a minimum of 24" below finished
37 grade.
38
39 4. All conduits installed below grade or under concrete slab to be
40 minimum of 3/4 inch.
41
42 M. Conduits in Concrete Slab:
43
44 1. Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing
45 steel. Place conduits either parallel or at 90° to main reinforcing
46 steel.
47
RACEWAYS
16110 - 4
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit to
2 ensure proper concrete bond.
3
4 3. Conduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by
5 engineer.
6
7 4. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed one -third (1/3) of slab
8 thickness.
9
10 N. Install conduits as not to damage or run through structural members.
11 Avoid horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls.
12
13 0. Exposed Conduits:
14
15 1. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit
16 systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building.
17
18 2. Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts,
19 lights or ventilation ducts or outlets.
20
21 3. Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips.
22 Support conduits minimum of 18" on each side of bends and outlet
23 boxes and on spacing not to exceed 6' -0 ".
24
25 4. Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors
26 for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.
27
28 5. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits
29 installed in space above hung ceilings and in crawl spaces.
30
31 P. Non - Metallic Conduits:
32
33 1. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations
34 of manufacturer.
35
36 2. Install PVC conduits in accordance with NEC and in compliance
37 with local utility practices.
38
39 Q. Conduit Fittings:
40
41 1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with
42 sharp edge for digging into metal and ridged outside circumference
43 for proper fastening.
44
45 2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1" and are to have
46 flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent
47 injury to cable insulation.
RACEWAYS
16110 - 5
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
2 3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1" and
3 larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides.
4 Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing.
5
6 4. Bushing of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding
7 terminal.
8
9 5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece
10 unions, split couplings and plugs to be specifically designed for
11 their particular application.
12
13 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
14
15 A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways for
16 conductors to form continuous electrical conductor and connect to
17 electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical
18 continuity and rigid mechanical assembly.
19
20 B. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of
21 electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with
22 corrosion - inhibiting compound before assembling.
23
24 C. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion
25 joints are crossed.
26
27 D. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings supplied by
28 raceway manufacturer. No field bends of raceway sections will be
29 permitted.
30
31 E. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural
32 materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported.
33
34 F Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull,
35 or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall
36 not be permitted for use with surface raceway installations.
37
38 G. Raceway penetrations of fire -rated walls and /or floors shall be sealed to
39 maintain integrity of construction. All products, materials and methods of
40 installation shall be UL approved and meet NFPA requirements.
41
42 H. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, notified by engineer and /or
43 authorities having jurisdiction, the following materials may be used:
44
45 1. Rock Wool: Minimum four pound cubit foot density; flame spread
46 15, smoke developed 0, fuel contribution 0 by ASTM 384; minimum
47 melting point 2000 °F.
48
RACEWAYS
16110 - 6
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 2. Concrete and masonry are also approved fire stop materials by
2 NFPA 90A.
3
4 3. UL approved products such as Nelson Type CLK Silicon Sealant.
5 Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed.
6
7 I. Submit complete data on fire - stopping materials and construction methods
8 for review by engineer before proceeding with work.
9
10 END OF SECTION
11
RACEWAYS
16110 - 7
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
2
3
4
5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
RACEWAYS
16110 - 8
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires
and cables specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of electrical wire and cable
schedules.
B. Types of electrical wire, cable, and
include the following:
Copper conductors
Split -bolt connectors
Wirenut connectors
work is indicated by drawings and
connectors specified in this Section
C. Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project
are as follows:
1. For power distribution circuits
2. For lighting circuits
3. For motor - branch circuits
4. For control circuits
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire
and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful
installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling
work similar to that required for this project.
WIRES AND CABLES BID DOCUMENTS
16120 - 1 07/13/16
1 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to
2 construction, installation, and color- coding of electrical wires and cables.
3
4 D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds. 82,
5 "Test Procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors ",
6 and Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems
7 in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems.
8
9 E. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2,
10 3, 8 and D -753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less
11 than 98% at 20 °C (68 °F).
12
13 F The following systems of color- coding shall be strictly adhered to:
14 Grounded Leads Green
15 Grounded Neutral Leads White
16 277/480 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Brown, Orange and Yellow
17 120/208 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Red, Blue, Black
18
19 G. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed
20 throughout.
21
22 H. Where existing base building color- coding differs from color- coding
23 assigned herein. Contractor shall use existing color coding as required to
24 maintain consistency. Advise engineer in writing of color- coding to be
25 used.
26
27 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
28
29 A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory- fabricated type
30 containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels.
31
32 B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect
33 products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.
34
35 C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing
36 wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance
37 integrity of wires /cables is maintained.
38
39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
40
41 2.01 Building Wires:
42
43 A. Provide factory- fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials
44 for applications and services indicated.
45
WIRES AND CABLES BID DOCUMENTS
16120 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 B. Conductor insulation shall be dual type THHN/THWN 75 °C (167 °F) for
2 dry, damp, and wet locations. Conductor insulation with single type
3 marking THHN 90 °C (194 °F) may be used for dry locations only.
4
5 PART 3 — EXECUTION
6
7 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES:
8
9 A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as
10 indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL,
11 and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized
12 industry practices.
13
14 B. Unless otherwise noted, all branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12
15 AWG. Branch circuits over 75 feet in length shall be No. 10 AWG unless
16 noted otherwise.
17
18 C. Install UL Type THWN or THHN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch
19 circuits.
20
21 D. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in
22 same raceway.
23
24 E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. Compound used
25 must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
26
27 F Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave
28 wire /cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
29
30 G. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
31
32 H. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent -or- better mechanical
33 strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use splices
34 and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
35
36 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
37
38 A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed feeder wires and cables
39 with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure
40 requirements are fulfilled. A list of feeders tested shall be submitted to the
41 engineer indicating the insulation resistance level for each cable.
42
43 B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for
44 short- circuits.
45
46
WIRES AND CABLES
16120 -3
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize circuitry and
2 demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where
3 necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
4 compliance.
5
6 END OF SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES BID DOCUMENTS
16120 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
SECTION 16135
ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this Section.
B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,
and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring
boxes and fittings specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of electrical
and schedules.
B. Types of electrical
following:
Control Panels
Outlet boxes.
Junction boxes.
Pull boxes.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
box and associated fitting work
boxes and fittings specified in
is indicated by drawings
this Section include the
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical
boxes and fittings of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than three (3)
years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar
to those required for this project.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and
installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514 -
Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide
electrical boxes and fittings which are UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS
16135 - 1 07/13/16
1
1
1
2 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS: 1
3
4 A. Outlet Boxes: Provide aluminum outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch
5 capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable for 1
6 installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting
7 holes and with cable and conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and
8 sides. 1
9
10 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required
11 for each installation; including box supports, mounting ears and 1
12 brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable
13 clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are
14 compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation 1
15 requirements for individual wiring situations.
16
17 B. Device Boxes: Provide aluminum, non - gangable device boxes, of shapes, 1
18 cubic inch capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable
19 for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush
20 mounting with mounting holes, and with cable -size knockout openings in 1
21 bottom and ends and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening
22 devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion - resistant screws for fastening
23 cable clamps and for equipment type grounding.
24
I
25 1. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required
26 for each installation; including mounting brackets, device box
27 extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board 1
28 expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes
29 being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring
30 situations.
31
32 2. Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4" square boxes or gang boxes,
33 not less than 1'/z' deep. Boxes shall be provided with extension rings I
34 and /or covers with sufficient depth to bring the covers flush with the
35 finished wall.
36 I 37 3. Boxes for flush mounting in concrete block work with one or two
38 devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised portion of
39 the cover. The covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to be
40 flush with the face of the block. The bottom side of the covers or 1
41 boxes shall be installed at the masonry course nearest to the
42 dimension specified or noted. I
43
44
45 4. Outlet boxes for exposed wall mounting and outdoor installation shall
111 46 be cast aluminum boxes with suitable cast aluminum covers.
47 Weatherproof receptacle covers shall have spring hinged lids.
ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS
I
16135 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 C. Rain -Tight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion - resistant, cast - aluminum, rain -
3 tight outlet wiring boxes; of types, shapes and sizes (including depth of
4 boxes), with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast -
5 aluminum face plates with spring- hinged watertight caps suitably configured
6 for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- resistant
7 plugs and fasteners.
8
9 D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide aluminum junction and pull boxes, with
10 screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location
11 and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts,
12 bolts, screws and washers. All junction boxes shall be designated with
13 permanent marker circuit numbers and panelboard numbers of circuits
14 contained within.
15
16 E. Control Panels /Enclosures:
17
18 1. The control panel /enclosures shall contain, as a minimum, devices
19 and equipment indicated on the drawings or other sections of these
20 specifications. All control panel /enclosures shall contain interior
21 mounting plate.
22
23 2. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel,
24 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 50 type 4 listed.
25
26 3. There shall be permanently affixed to the interior side of the exterior
27 enclosure door both a nameplate and a 10" x 12" pocket for drawing
28 storage. The nameplate shall contain the following information:
29 voltage, phase, date manufactured and intended use — equipment
30 service or function.
31
32 4. Inner safety door (dead front) shall be aluminum.
33 5. Provide surge arrestor per county requirements.
34
35 6. Contractor shall furnish shop drawings for control panel. Include
36 dimension, mounting and material requirements of control panel.
37 Furnish wiring diagrams of all internal components and devices.
38 Schematic diagram of system and PLC connection diagrams and data
39 sheet and programming functions. Furnish operating and
40 maintenance and programming manuals.
41
42
43 PART 3 - EXECUTION
44
45 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS:
46
ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS
16135 - 3 07/13/16
1 A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with
2 manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and in
3 accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
4
5 B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire /cable, wiring
6 devices, and raceway installation work.
7
8
9 C. Provide weather -tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to
10 weather or moisture.
11
12 D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have
13 been removed.
14
15 E. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to
16 enclosed electrical wiring. All existing and new junction boxes within the
17 project area shall be made accessible. Relocate existing junction boxes as
18 required to comply with the NEC.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 G In openings larger than 16 square inches, the wall shall be built around
28 openings so as not to interfere with the integrity of the wall rating.
29
30
31
32
33 I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish
34 thickness.
35
36 J. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.
37
38 K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces
39 to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
40
41 L. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris
42 and damage.
43
44 END OF SECTION 16135
F Metallic and approved nonmetallic electrical outlet boxes may be installed in
vertical fire resistive assemblies classified as 2 -hour or less without affecting
the fire classification, provided such openings occur on one side only in each
framing space and that openings do not exceed 16 square inches. Boxes
located opposite sides of walls or partitions shall be separated by a
horizontal distance of 24 ".
H. All clearances between such boxes and the gypsum board shall be
completely filled with joint compound or other approved material.
ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS BID DOCUMENTS
16135 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16142
2
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical connections for equipment specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings
20 and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include
21 connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.
22
23 B. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of
24 equipment, are specified in other Division 16 sections, and are work of
25 this Section.
26
27 C. Motor starters and controllers not furnished as integral part of equipment
28 are specified in applicable Division 16 sections and are work of this
29 Section.
30
31 D. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors
32 and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division
33 16 sections, and are work of this Section.
34
35 E. Electrical identification for wire /cable conductors is specified in Division 16
36 section, "Electrical Identification ", and is work of this Section.
37
38 F Raceways and wires /cables required for connecting motors and other
39 electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 16
40 sections, and are work of this Section.
41
42 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
43
44 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical
45 connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary
46 connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes,
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
BID DOCUMENTS
16142 - 1 07/13/16
1 and cable ties; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
2 service for not Tess than five (5) years.
3
4 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least two (2) years of successful
5 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for
6 equipment similar to that required for this project.
7
8 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to
9 type products used and installation of electrical power connections
10 (terminals and splices) for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect
11 switches.
12
13 D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and
14 Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited
15 to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide
16 electrical connection products and materials which are UL listed and
17 labeled.
18
19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
20
21 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
22
23 A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete
24 assembly of materials; including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure
25 connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, cable ties,
26 solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to
27 complete splices and terminations of types indicated. Metal shall not be
28 used for outdoor applications. The contractor shall use aluminum for
29 outdoor installations.
30
31 B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings, General: Provide metal conduit,
32 tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses)
33 indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not
34 indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to fulfill
35 wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways.
36 Provide products complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical and in
37 accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings:
38
39 Rigid aluminum conduit.
40 Rigid metal conduit fittings.
41 Electrical metallic tubing.
42 EMT fittings.
43 Flexible metal conduit.
44 Flexible metal conduit fittings.
45 Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit.
46 Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit fittings.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT BID DOCUMENTS
16142 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3 C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors:
4
5 1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with
6 Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods section "Wires
7 and Cables ".
8
9 2. Wires /Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires /cables
10 (conductors) for electrical connections which match (including sizes
11 and ratings) wires /cables which are supplying electrical power.
12 Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at
13 20 °C (68 °F).
14
15 D. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals
16 which mate and match (including sizes and ratings) with equipment
17 terminals, and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended
18 applications.
19
20 PART 3 - EXECUTION
21
22 3.01 OBSERVATION:
23
24 A. Observe area and conditions under which electrical connections for
25 equipment are to be installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions
26 detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
27 work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
28 acceptable to installer.
29
30 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:
31
32 A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment
33 manufacturer's written instructions, with recognized industry practices, and
34 complying with applicable requirements of UL and NEC to ensure that
35 products fulfill requirements.
36
37 B. Coordinate with other work, including wires /cables, raceway, and
38 equipment installation as necessary to properly interface installation of
39 electrical connections for equipment with other work.
40
41 C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in
42 accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
43 diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper
44 interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
45
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT BID DOCUMENTS
16142 - 3 07/13/16
1 D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and
2 operational facilities unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized
3 otherwise in writing by owner or engineer. Provide temporary service
4 during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule
5 momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring
6 systems. When that "cutting- over" has been successfully accomplished,
7 remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
8
9 E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater
10 insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those
11 conductors being spliced.
12
13 F. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket,
14 and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where
15 cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through
16 tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper
17 conductors while skinning wire.
18
19 G. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to
20 facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance.
21
22 H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and other electrical
23 equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration.
24
25 I. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other
26 electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration; and also
27 where connections are subjected to one or more of the following
28 conditions:
29
30 1. Exterior location.
31 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to
32 accumulate.
33 3. Corrosive atmosphere.
34 4. Water spray.
35 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water.
36
37 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
38
39 A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry
40 has been energized with rated power source, test connections to
41 demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that
42 direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct
43 malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
44
45 END OF SECTION 16142
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT BID DOCUMENTS
16142 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16143
2
3 WIRING DEVICES
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wiring
15 devices specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
20 Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution
21 systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.
22
23 B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:
24
25 Receptacles.
26 Ground -fault circuit interrupters.
27 Switches.
28 Wallplates.
29
30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
31
32 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical
33 wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have
34 been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
35
36 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least two (2) years of successful
37 installation experience on projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those
38 required for this project.
39
40 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and
41 wiring of electrical wiring devices.
42
43 D. UL Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and labeled.
44
45 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
46
47 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices.
WIRING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS
16143 - 1 07/13/16
1
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3
4 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
5
6 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
7 providing wiring devices which may be incorporated in the work include;
8 but are not limited to, the following (for each type and rating of wiring
9 device):
10
11 Arrow -Hart, Cooper Industries
12 Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
13 Harvey Hubbell Inc.
14 Pass and Seymour Inc.
15
16
17 2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:
18
19 A. General: Provide factory- fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and
20 electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA
21 Stds. Pub /No. WD1. Provide ivory color devices except as otherwise
22 indicated.
23
24 B. Receptacles:
25
26' 1. All receptacles shall be the grounding type with ground connection
27 made through an extra pole that shall be permanently connected to
28 the green grounding conductor.
29
30 2. Duplex receptacles for 20 ampere, 120 volt service shall be two -
31 pole, three -wire receptacles, rated 20 amperes at 125 volts.
32 Receptacles shall be Harvey Hubbell, Inc., Catalog No. 5362 -1.
33
34 3. Single receptacles for 20 amps, 120 volts service shall be two -pole,
35 three -wire rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be
36 Harvey Hubbell Inc., Catalog No. 5361 -1.
37
38 C. Switches:
39
40 1. Snap: Provide toggle switches, rated 20 amperes at 120/277 volts,
41 quiet type, and shall be UL approved without derating for tungsten
42 lamp loads or inductive loads. All switches shall have a grounding
43 terminal which shall be connected to the green grounding
44 conductor. The following catalog numbers are Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
45
46
47
WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 2
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1 Type Catalog No.
I 2
3 Single Pole HBL 1221 -1
4
I 5 2.03 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
6
7 A. In Use' covers for exterior receptacles.
I 8
9 B. Weatherproof caps for switches.
10
I 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION
12
13 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:
I 14
15 A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
16 written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of
I 17
18 Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill
project requirements.
19
I 20 B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from
21 excess building materials, dirt, and debris.
22
I 23 C. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
24
25 D. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.
26
I27 3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES:
28
29 A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise contractor
I 30 regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of
31 substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
32 including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
I 33
34 3.03 GROUNDING:
35
I 36 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for all wiring devices, unless
37 otherwise indicated.
38
I 39 3.04 TESTING:
40
41 A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity and for
I 42
43 short- circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.
Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate
44 compliance with requirements.
I 45
46 END OF SECTION 16143
47
WIRING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS
16143 - 3 07/13/16
1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WIRING DEVICES
16143 -4
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16170
2
3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to circuit
15 and motor disconnects specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on
20 drawings and schedules.
21
22 B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this Section include the
23 following:
24
25 Equipment disconnects.
26 Appliance disconnects.
27 Motor - circuit disconnects.
28
29 C. Wires /cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in
30 connection with circuit and motor disconnect work are specified in other
31 Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections.
32
33 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
34
35 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and
36 motor disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose
37 products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than
38 three (3) years.
39
40 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
41 installation experience with projects utilizing circuit and motor disconnect
42 work similar to that required for this project.
43
44 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to
45 construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect
46 devices.
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 1 07/13/16
1 D. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and
2 Dead -Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches
3 which have been UL listed and labeled.
4
5 E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds.
6 Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches" and 250, "Enclosures for Electrical
7 Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)."
8
9 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
10
11 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor
12 disconnect switches.
13
14 B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each circuit
15 and motor disconnect with proposed switch and accessories clearly
16 identified on each sheet. Identify each device with corresponding names,
17 abbreviations (numbers and lettering) to match terminology of contract
18 documents.
19
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21
22 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
23
24 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
25 manufacturers offering circuit and motor disconnects which may be
26 incorporated in the work are limited to:
27
28 Square D Company.
29 Westinghouse /Cutler- Hammer
30 General Electric Co.
31
32 2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES:
33
34 A. Heavy -Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface- mounted, heavy -duty type,
35 NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and
36 electrical characteristics indicated; incorporating quick -make, quick -break
37 type switches. Construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position
38 with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of
39 enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and
40 is padlockable in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high -
41 conductivity copper, with silver- tungsten type switch contacts and positive
42 pressure type reinforced fuse clips.
43
44 1. All fuses for safety switches shall be dual element, cartridge type.
45 Fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetron" or Chase - Shawmut "Trionic."
46 The contractor shall furnish and install proper size fuses where
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 required for all fusible equipment and shall furnish to the owner one
2 spare fuse for each fuse installed.
3
4 PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
6 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
7
8 A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with
9 manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
10 NEMA, NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with
11 recognized industry practices.
12
13 B. Install disconnect switches for use with motor - driven appliances and
14 motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise
15 indicated.
16
17 C. Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top
18 of cabinet or enclosure 6' -6" above finished floor; shall be properly
19 aligned; and shall be adequately supported independently of the
20 connecting raceways and other equipment. All steel shapes, etc.,
21 necessary for the support of the equipment shall be furnished and
22 installed where the building structure is not suitable for mounting the
23 equipment directly thereon. Unless otherwise indicated, all branch circuit
24 protective devices enclosures shall be NEMA type I, general purpose
25 type. Branch circuit protective devices installed outdoors or exposed to
26 the weather shall have weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 4X.
27
28 3.02 GROUNDING:
29
30 A. Provide equipment grounding connections sufficiently tight to assure a
31 permanent and effective ground for electrical disconnect switches where
32 indicated.
33
34 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
35
36 A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches,
37 energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with
38 requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site,
39 then retest to demonstrate compliance. Otherwise remove and replace
40 with new units and retest.
41
42
43
44 END OF SECTION 16170
45
46
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 3 07/13/16
1
1
1
2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3
4
5 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS BID DOCUMENTS
16170 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16190
2
3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical supporting devices specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by drawings
20 and schedules and /or specified in other Division 16 sections.
21
22 B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section
23 include the following:
24
25 Clevis hangers.
26 One -hole conduit straps.
27 Two -hole conduit straps.
28 Round steel rods.
29 Expansion anchors.
30 Toggle bolts.
31 Wall and floor seals.
32 Corn Clamps.
33
34 C. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory
35 fabricated equipment are specified as part of that equipment assembly in
36 other Division 16 sections.
37
38 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
39
40 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting
41 devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been
42 in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
43
44 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
45 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical supporting device
46 work similar to that required for this project.
SUPPORTING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS
16190 - 1 07/13/16
1 C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors
2 Association's "Standard of Installation ", pertaining to anchors, fasteners,
3 hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.
4
5 D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and
6 labeled.
7
8 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
9
10 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on supporting devices,
11 including catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for each
12 type of support, anchor, sleeve, and seal.
13
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15
16 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES:
17
18 A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's
19 standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published
20 product information and as required for complete installation and as
21 herein specified. Where more than one type of supporting device meets
22 indicated requirements, selection is installer's option.
23
24 B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials
25 indicated and having the following construction features:
26
27 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting conduit; aluminum with 1/2"
28 diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 pounds per 100
29 units.
30
31 2. Reducing Couplings: Aluminum rod reducing coupling, 1/2' by 5/8 ",
32 approximately 16 pounds per hundred 100 units.
33
34 3. One -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum.
35
36 4. Two -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum.
37
38 5. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2' rod size, aluminum.
39
40 6. Round Aluminum Rod: ' /2' diameter.
41
42 7. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit;
43 aluminum.
44
45 C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated with
46 the following construction features: (all aluminum)
SUPPORTING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS
16190 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1. Expansion Anchors: 1/2'.
2
3 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16" by 4 ".
4
5 D. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and
6 materials indicated, with the following construction features:
7
8 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory- assembled watertight wall
9 and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated, suitable for sealing
10 around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and
11 walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body,
12 neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings,
13 pressure clamps, and cap screws. Seals shall be fire -rated where
14 required.
15
16 E. U- Channel Strut Systems: Provide U- channel strut system for supporting
17 electrical equipment; aluminum of types and sizes indicated. Construct
18 with 3/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, and with the following
19 fittings which mate and match with U- channel:
20
21 Fixture hangers.
22 Channel hangers.
23 End caps.
24 Beam clamps.
25 Wiring studs.
26 Thinwall conduit clamps.
27 Rigid conduit clamps.
28 Conduit hangers.
29
30 2.02 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES:
31
32 A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate from
33 schedule 40 galvanized aluminum pipe. Remove burrs.
34
35 B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrate foundation walls
36 below grade or exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with
37 nontoxic, UL classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal. Seals
38 shall be fire -rated where required.
39
40 PART 3 - EXECUTION
41
42 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES:
43
44 A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance
45 with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry
46 practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply
47 with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices.
SUPPORTING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS
16190 - 3 07/13/16
1
2 B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work,
3 as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other
4 work.
5
6 C. Install hangers, supports and attachments to support piping properly from
7 building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
8 conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where
9 possible. Install supports with spacings indicated and in compliance with
10 NEC requirements.
11
12 END OF SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES BID DOCUMENTS
16190 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16195
2
3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to
15 electrical identification specified herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and
20 schedules.
21
22 B. Types of electrical identification work specified in this Section include the
23 following:
24
25 Equipment/system identification signs.
26
27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
29 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
30
31 A. Engraved Plastic- Laminate Signs:
32
33 1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in
34 sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard
35 letter style of sizes and wording indicated; black face and white
36 core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for
37 mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is
38 necessary because of substrate.
39
40 2. Signs shall be black face with white core plies (letter color).
41
42 a. Thickness: 1/16 ", except as otherwise indicated.
43 b. Fasteners: Self- tapping stainless steel screws, except
44 contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot, or
45 should not, penetrate substrate.
46 c. Nameplates for essential electrical systems shall be red with
47 white letters.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BID DOCUMENTS
16195 - 1 07/13/16
1
2 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:
3
4 A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used
5 in electrical identification work with corresponding designations shown,
6 specified, or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as
7 indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer
8 or as required for proper identification and operation /maintenance of
9 electrical systems and equipment.
10
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION
12
13 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION:
14
15 A. General Installation Requirements:
16
17 1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance
18 with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.
19
20 2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces
21 which require finish, install identification after completion of
22 painting.
23
24 3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of
25 governing authorities for identification of electrical work.
26
27 B. Equipment/System Identification:
28
29 1. General: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign on each major unit
30 of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit
31 of each electrical system including communication/ control /signal
32 systems, unless unit is specified with its own self - explanatory
33 identification or signal system. Provide text matching terminology
34 and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings.
35 Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical
36 work:
37
38 a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures.
39 b. Access panels /doors to electrical facilities.
40 c. Transformers.
41 d. Fire alarm equipment cabinets.
42 e. Disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors, including
43 current origination.
44
45 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise
46 indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BID DOCUMENTS
16195 - 2 07/13/16
1 interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure
2 to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners
3 should not, or cannot, penetrate substrate.
4
5 END OF SECTION 16195
6
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BID DOCUMENTS
16195 - 3 07/13/16
2 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3
4
5 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION BID DOCUMENTS
16195 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16452
I 2
3 GROUNDING
4
I 5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1 8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
I 11
12 work of this Section.
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is
I 14
15 part of each Division 16 Section making reference to grounding specified
herein.
16
17 1.02 SUMMARY:
II18
19 A. The extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by
I 20 drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding
21 work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment. All new
22 grounding electrodes (rods) and new ground conductors shall be bonded
23 to the existing grounding grid at four locations, minimum. All new control
24 panels, VFDs and electrical panels and cabinets shall be grounded with
25 new ground rods and shall also be bonded to the existing grounding grid.
26 All new connections to the existing grounding grid shall be made by
I 27 exothermic weld process. Contractor shall obtain approval the grounding
28 connections from owner before installation. Contractor shall furnish and
29 install one grounding test station at each Polymer control Panel and at
I 30 each VFD sample pump Panel. Test station shall include in grade box
31 with removable lid to exposed top of ground rod and grounding conductor;
32 all connections in test station shall be mechanical type — not exothermic
I 33 weld.
34
35 B. The type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this Section
I 36 includes the following:
37
38 Solidly grounded
I 39
40 C. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this Section
41 includes the following:
42
I43 Electrical power systems
44 Grounding electrodes
45 Separately derived systems
I46 Raceways
47 Service equipment
1
1
GROUNDING
16452 - 1
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 Enclosures /Control Panels
2 Equipment
3
4 D. Refer to other Division 16 sections for wires /cables, electrical raceways,
5 boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction
6 with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section.
7
8 1.03 SUBMITTALS:
9
10 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding
11 products and associated accessories.
12
13
14 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
15
16 A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the
17 manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types and ratings
18 required, and ancillary grounding materials; including stranded cable,
19 copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and
20 bonding jumpers; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
21 service for not less than five (5) years.
22
23 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
24 installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to
25 that required for project.
26
27 C. Codes and Standards:
28
29 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical
30 code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as
31 applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to
32 systems, circuits, and equipment.
33
34 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL
35 Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding
36 Equipment ", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment ", pertaining to
37 grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In
38 addition, comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and
39 Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide
40 grounding and bonding products that are UL listed and labeled for
41 their intended usage.
42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
45 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING:
46
47 A. Materials and Components, General: Except as otherwise indicated,
48 provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with
GROUNDING
16452 - 2
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables /wires,
2 connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate
3 electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional
4 accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one
5 type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is
6 installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated,
7 provide products that comply with NEC and UL, requirements, and with
8 established industry standards for those applications indicated.
9
10 B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding
11 conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply
12 wiring materials and are sized according to NEC.
13
14 C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical
15 bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs, and clamps as recommended
16 by bonding plate, connector, terminal, and clamp manufacturers for
17 indicated applications.
18
19 D. Ground Electrodes: Solid copper, 5 Ohms, three - quarter inch (3/ ")
20 diameter by twenty feet (20').
21
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
24 3.01 EXAMINATION:
25
26 A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and
27 bonding connections are to be made, and notify contractor in writing of
28 conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with
29 work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
30 acceptable to installer.
31
32 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS:
33
34 A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in
35 accordance with manufacturer's instructions; applicable portions of NEC,
36 NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized
37 industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements.
38
39 B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation
40 of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work.
41
42 C. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance to the
43 building cold water line and to three (3) three - fourths inch (3/4 ") diameter,
44 twenty feet (20') long ground rods spaced ten feet (10') apart.
45
46 D. Ground each separately- derived system neutral to separate grounding
47 electrode.
48
GROUNDING
16452 - 3
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 E. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed
2 noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway
3 systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground
4 connectors, and plumbing systems.
5
6 F. All raceways with No. 10 or 12 AWG phase conductors for receptacles,
7 lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity -sized
8 green equipment ground conductor. Ground conductor shall be installed
9 in entire raceway system, including wall switches and flexible conduit to
10 Tight fixtures. Equipment ground conductor sizes for circuits with phase
11 conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are indicated on drawings. Ground
12 conductors shall be connected to ground buss in panelboards. All power,
13 lighting, control circuits shall have a fully sized insulated copper conductor
14 run the entire length of the circuit. The raceway /conduit system shall not
15 be used as a means of the grounding system.
16
17 G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment - grounding
18 conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Conductors looped under
19 screw or bolt heads will not be permitted.
20
21 H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to one inch (1 ") diameter or
22 greater metallic cold water pipe, using a suitably sized ground clamp.
23 Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange.
24
25 I. Install clamp -on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces to ensure
26 electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.
27
28 J. Provide a grounding bushing and a continuous copper bonding jumper
29 from the bushing to the equipment ground bus in all feeders. The bonding
30 jumper shall be the same size as the equipment ground conductor.
31
32 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
33
34 A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding
35 systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests
36 show resistance -to- ground is over twenty -five (25) ohms, take appropriate
37 action to reduce resistance to twenty -five (25) ohms or Tess by driving
38 additional ground rods then retest to demonstrate compliance.
39
40 B. Submit test results (3 copies) to engineer of record. Test results shall
41 include grounding test method used, equipment used (manufacturer and
42 model number) with certification of calibration and data results.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION 16452
GROUNDING
16452 - 4
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 SECTION 16470
2
3 PANELBOARDS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section,
14 and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to panelboards
15 specified herein.
16
17 1.02 SUMMARY:
18
19 A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout
20 boxes, is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified herein.
21
22 B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the
23 following:
24
25 Power Distribution Panelboards
26 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
27
28 C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for wires /cables, electrical boxes and
29 fittings and raceway work required in conjunction with installation of
30 panelboards and enclosures.
31
32 1.03 SUBMITTALS:
33
34 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures.
35 Shop drawings shall indicate arrangement of busses, branch circuits,
36 enclosures, dimensions, etc.
37
38 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
39
40 A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of
41 panelboards and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required; whose
42 products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five
43 (5) years.
44
45 B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least three (3) years of successful
46 installation experience on projects utilizing panelboards similar to those
PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS
16470 - 1 07/13/16
1 required for this project.
2
3 C. Codes and Standards:
4
5 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code
6 requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384
7 as applicable to the installation and construction of electrical
8 panelboards and enclosures.
9 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67,
10 "Electric Panelboards ", and UL codes 50, 869, and 1053 pertaining to
11 panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelboard units
12 that are UL listed and labeled.
13
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15
16 2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
17
18 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
19 manufacturers offering electrical panelboard products that may be
20 incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
21
22 General Electric Company
23 Square D Company
24 Cutler- Hammer / Eaton Corp
25
26 2.02 PANELBOARDS:
27
28 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures,
29 and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which
30 comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and
31 construction in accordance with published product information. Equip with
32 proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete
33 installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with
34 NEC, UL, and established industry standards for those applications
35 indicated.
36
37 B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead - front, safety -type power
38 distribution panelboards as indicated; with panelboard switching and
39 protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown;
40 with anti -turn, solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use
41 with copper conductors. Select unit with feeders connecting at top of panel.
42 Equip with copper bus bars with not Tess than 98 percent conductivity, and
43 with full -sized neutral bus. Provide suitable Tugs on neutral bus for outgoing
44 feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide bolt -on, molded -case circuit
45 breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped.
46 Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for
PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS
16470 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as
2 panelboards which mate and match properly with panelboards.
3
4 1. Power panelboards shall be General Electric type 'Spectra', Square D
5 type 'I Line', or Cutler- Hammer type 'PRL3a'. Voltage shall be as
6 indicated.
7
8 C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type lighting
9 and appliance panelboards as indicated; with switching and protective
10 devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti -burn
11 solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for use with copper
12 conductors. Construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel. Equip with
13 copper bus bars, full -sized neutral bar, with bolt -in type heavy -duty, quick -
14 make, quick- break, circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when
15 tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder
16 required, and provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to
17 enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as
18 panelboards that mate and match properly with panelboards.
19
20 1. Panelboards shall be General Electric A- Series, Square D type "NQ ",
21 or Cutler- Hammer type PRL2. Panelboard boxes shall be five and
22 three - fourths inches (5 3/ ") deep. Voltage shall be as indicated.
23
24 D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet -type
25 enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated; code - gauge, minimum
26 16 -gauge thickness. Cabinets shall be furnished without knockouts and all
27 holes for raceways shall be drilled and punched on the job. Panelboard
28 enclosures shall be five and three - fourths inches (53/4") deep. Provide fronts
29 with adjustable trim clamps and doors with flush locks and keys; all
30 panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and
31 door swings as indicated. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust
32 inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide
33 enclosures that are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards that
34 mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.
35
36 E. All panelboards shall be connected distributed phase with circuit numbering
37 as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall be numbered with odd
38 numbers on the left side of the panel and even numbers on the right side of
39 the panel. Panelboards shall have a circuit directory card mounted in a
40 frame with plastic cover, mounted on the inside of the door, and directory
41 cards shall be completed with a typewriter to indicated areas and /or devices
42 served by each circuit. All new and existing panelboards being used for this
43 project shall have new typed directories.
44
45 F. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory- assembled, bolt -on, molded -
46 case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings, including
PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS
16470 - 3 07/13/16
1 RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with
2 permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault- current
3 limiting protection; ampere ratings as indicated. Multi -pole breakers shall
4 have a common trip bar so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip
5 all poles of the breaker. Construct with over - center, trip -free, toggle -type
6 operating mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action, and positive
7 handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any
8 physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 °C. Provide
9 breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs; AL /CU
10 rated.
11
12 1. Individual Enclosed Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be
13 molded case type. Breakers shall have thermal- magnetic trip units
14 and magnetic trip shall be adjustable. Breakers shall have a common
15 trip bar so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip all poles
16 of the breaker. Breakers shall be trip free and trip indicating and shall
17 have quick -make, quick- break contacts. Enclosure shall have
18 insulated, groundable neutral.
19
20 G. Panelboards shall be installed complete with connectors and associated
21 hardware for all circuit breakers and circuit breaker spaces listed in the
22 panelboard schedule.
23
24 H. When connecting equipment to existing panelboards, the new and existing
25 circuit breakers shall be identified. A new circuit directory card shall be
26 provided.
27
28 PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
30 3.01 EXAMINATION:
31
32 Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be
33 installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
34 completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
35 been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
36
37 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS:
38
39 A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with
40 manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of NEC
41 standards, NECA's "Standards of Installation ", and in compliance with
42 recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
43
44 B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
45 with equipment manufacturer's published torque- tightening values for
46 equipment connectors.
PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS
16470 - 4 07/13/16
1
2 C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they
3 are permanently and mechanically anchored.
4
5 3.03 GROUNDING:
6
7 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as
8 indicated.
9
10 B. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits
11 and for short- circuits.
12
13 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
14
15 A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
16
17 B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
18
19 END OF SECTION
20
PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS
16470 - 5 07/13/16
1
1
1
2 1 3
4
5
6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
7
8 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PANELBOARDS BID DOCUMENTS
16470 - 6 07/13/16
1
1
1 SECTION 16481
2
3
4 MOTORS
5 PART 1 — GENERAL
I 6
7 1.01 DESCRIPTION
8
I 9
10 Furnish and install the motors as hereinafter specified and as called for in other
sections of these Specifications.
11
12 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
I13
14 Motor shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed
15 their full -rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity.
I 16
17 1.03 SUBMITTALS
18
I 19 A. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer certified dimension
20 prints showing nameplate data and outline dimensions within three weeks
21 of the date they receive the order.
I 22
23 B. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual and parts lists as specified in
24 Division 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
U 25
26 C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall
27 be guaranteed against defects of .workmanship, materials and improper
I 28
29 installation for a period of eighteen month from date of acceptance. All
such equipment or parts proven defective, due to the above noted causes,
30 shall be replaced in the machines by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to
I 31
32 the Owner.
33 D. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Division 1 SPECIFIC
I 34
35 WARRANTIES.
36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
I38 2.01 RATING
39
I 40 A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors shall be of the low voltage type. All
41 motors 2 through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60
42 Hertz A.C., motors 125 horsepower through 300 horsepower shall be rated
43 460 volt, 3- phase, 60 Hertz, and motors below 2 horsepower shall be rated
1 44 115/230 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hertz A.C.
45
46 2.02 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
1 47
1
1
MOTORS
16481 -1
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1 A. Motors 25 HP and larger shall have a 120 -volt space heater for moisture
2 control.
3
4 B. Unless specifically noted in other sections of these Specifications, all
5 motors shall have an efficiency as indicated in the table below. Motors
6 shall be "premium efficiency" type.
7
8
9
TABLE 1
Motor
HP
Min.
Eff.
Max.
dba
Motor
HP
Min.
Eff.
Max.
dba
1 -2
84.0%
74
25 -30
92.0%
92
3 -5
86.5%
79
40 -50
93.0%
97
7.5 -10
90.2%
84
60 -75
94.0%
100
15 -20
91.0%
89
100
94.1%
102
10
11 C. Motors operating with variable frequency drives shall indicate on the
12 nameplate that they are suitable for their intended applications (Inverter
13 duty Rated) and they shall be provided with an integral temperature switch
14 that opens on high temperature. Motors operating with Variable
15 Frequency Drives (VFD's) shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1 Part
16 31.
17
18 2.03 CONSTRUCTION
19
20 A. General:
21
22 1. All dripproof and weather protected Type I motors shall have epoxy
23 encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed motors shall not be
24 encapsulated. Motors not readily available with encapsulated
25 windings may be standard type. Motors exposed to the outside
26 atmosphere shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) unless
27 otherwise specified.
28
29 2. Squirrel -cage rotors shall be made from high -grade steel
30 laminations adequately fastened together and to the shaft, or shall
31 be cast aluminum or bar -type construction with brazed end rings.
32
33 B. Low Voltage, Three Phase Motors:
34
35 1. Motors shall be of the squirrel -cage induction type, NEMA design B.
36 Horizontal, vertical solid shaft, vertical hollow shaft, normal thrust
37 and high thrust types shall be furnished as specified herein. All
MOTORS
16481 -2
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I1 motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI
2 and AFBMA standards where applicable. Motors shall be of the
I 3 type and quality described by these Specifications, fully capable of
4 performing in accordance with manufacturer's nameplate rating, and
5 free from defective material and workmanship.
6
7 2. Motors shall have normal or high starting torque (as required), low
8 starting current (not to exceed 600 percent full load current), and
I 9
10 low slip.
11 3. Outdoor motors shall be totally enclosed fan - cooled construction
12 with 1.15 service factor unless otherwise noted. Indoor motors shall
13 be ODP unless otherwise noted.
14
15 4. Outdoor motors shall be mill and chemical duty suitable for
I 16
17 operation in moist air with hydrogen sulphide gas present.
18 5. The output shaft shall be suitable for direct connection or belt drive
I 19
20 as required.
21 6. Motors shall have a Class B nonhygroscopic insulation system.
I 22 Class F insulation may be used but shall be limited to Class B
23 temperature rise.
24
I 25
26 7. All motors shall have a final coating of chemical resistant corrosion
and fungus protective epoxy fortified enamel finish sprayed over red
27 primer, over all interior and exterior surfaces. Stator bore and rotor
I 28
29 of all motors shall be epoxy coated.
30 8. All fittings, bolts, nuts, and screws shall be 316 stainless steel.
31 Bolts and nuts shall have hex heads.
32
33 9. All machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor for easy
I 34
35 disassembly.
36 10. Conduit boxes shall be gasketed. Lead wires between motor frame
I 37 and conduit box shall be gasketed.
38
39 11. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with condensate drain
40 hole and epoxy coated motor windings to protect against moisture.
41
42 12. Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Lifting lugs or "O" type bolts
43 shall be supplied on all frames 254T and larger. Enclosures will
44 have stainless steel screen and motors shall be protected for
45 corrosion, fungus and insects.
46
47 13. Low voltage, three phase motors shall be manufactured by General
48 Electric, U.S. Motors, Westinghouse or approved equal.
1
1
MOTORS
16481 -3
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
14. Fractional Horsepower:
a. Fractional horsepower motors shall be rigid, welded - steel,
designed to maintain accurate alignment of motor
components and provide adequate protection. End shields
shall be reinforced, lightweight die -cast aluminum. Windings
shall be of varnish - insulated wire with slot insulation of
polyester film, baked -on bonding treatment to make the
stator winding strongly resistant to heat, aging, moisture,
electrical stresses and other hazards.
b. Motor shaft shall be made from high - grade, cold - rolled shaft
steel with drive -shaft extensions carefully machined to
standard NEMA dimensions for the particular drive
connection.
c. All motors shall be equipped with vacuum - degassed (sealed)
antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of
ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing housing
shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize
the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be
provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old
lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing
shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect
against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or
leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity.
15. Integral Horsepower:
a. Motor frames and end shields shall be cast iron or heavy
fabricated steel of such design and proportions as to hold all
motor components rigidly in proper position and provide
adequate protection for the type of enclosure employed.
b. Windings shall be adequately insulated and securely braced
to resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibrations.
c. The shaft shall be made of high -grade machine steel or steel
forging of size and design adequate to withstand the load
stresses normally encountered in motors of the particular
rating. Bearing journals shall be gound and polished.
d. Rotors shall be made from high -grade steel laminations
adequately fastened together, and to the shaft. Rotor
squirrel -cage windings may be copper or bar -type
construction with brazed end rings.
e. All motors shall be equipped with vacuum- degassed (sealed)
antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of
ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing housing
shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize
the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be
provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old
MOTORS
16481 -4
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing
2 shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect
3 against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or
4 leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity.
5 f. Bearings of high thrust motors will be locked for momentary
6 up thrust of 30% down thrust. All bearings shall have a
7 minimum B10 life rating of 100,000 hours in accordance with
8 AFBMA life and thrust values.
9 g. Vertical hollow -shaft motors will have nonreverse ratchets to
10 prevent backspin.
11
12 C. Low Voltage, Single Phase Motors:
13
14 1. Single phase motors shall be split -phase and capacitor -start
15 induction types rated for continuous horsepower at the rpm called
16 for on the Drawings. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz,
17 single phase, open drip proof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as
18 called for on the Drawings, with temperature rise in accordance with
19 NEMA Standards for Class B insulation.
20
21 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be designed for
22 severe -duty.
23
24 3. Motors shall have corrosion and fungus protective finish on internal
25 and external surfaces. All fittings shall have a corrosion protective
26 plating.
27
28 4. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for
29 polyphase fractional horsepower motors.
30
31 PART 3 - EXECUTION
32
33 3.01 INSTALLATION
34
35 A. Motor Connections: All motors shall be connected to the conduit system
36 by means of a short section of flexible conduit, 18 inch minimum and 60
37 inches maximum, unless otherwise indicated. For all motor connections,
38 the CONTRACTOR shall install a grounding conductor in the conduit and
39 terminate at the motor control center with an approved grounding clamp.
40
41 B. Connection to motor leads shall be compression type with 3M brand heat
42 shrink boot.
43
44 3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS
45
46 A. The following tests shall be performed on all motors after installation but
47 before putting motors into service.
48
MOTORS
16481 -5
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1 The CONTRACTOR shall megger each motor winding before
energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be low,
shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the motor. The
CONTRACTOR shall check direction of rotation of all motors and
reverse connections if necessary. The following table gives
minimum acceptable insulation resistance in megohms at various
temperatures and for various voltages with readings being taken
after one minute of megger test run.
TABLE 2
Degree
Winding
Temperature
Voltage
°F
°C
115V
230V
460V
37
3.9
60
108
210
50
10
32
60
120
68
20
13
26
50
86
30
5.6
11
21
104
45
2.4
4.5
8.8
122
50
1
2
3.7
140
60
.5
.85
1.6
2. The CONTRACTOR shall check each motor for correct clearances
and alignment and for correct lubrication, and shall lubricate if
required in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 16481
MOTORS
16481 -6
BID DOCUMENTS
07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SECTION 16483
2
3 MOTOR STARTERS
4
5 PART 1 - GENERAL
6
7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
8
9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to
11 work of this Section.
12
13 B. This is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and
14 is part of each Division 16 Section making reference to motor starters
15 herein.
16
17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
18
19 A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
20
21 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
22
23 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of motor
24 starters of types, ratings, and characteristics required; whose products
25 have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)
26 years.
27
28 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful
29 installation experience on projects utilizing motor starters similar to that
30 required for this project.
31
32 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to wiring methods,
33 construction, and installation of motor starters.
34
35 D. UL Compliance: Provide motor starters and components which are UL
36 listed and labeled.
37
38 1.04 SUBMITTALS:
39
40 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters.
41
42
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 1 07/13/16
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
3 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
4
5 A. All Motor Starters Shall be Square D Class 8539 Motor Starters with
6 TeSys T Intellegent Motor Management System for Profibus DP
7 Monitoring and Control. No alternates are acceptable.
8
9 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS:
10
11 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and
12 ancillary components which comply with manufacturer's standard
13 materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product
14 information, and as required for complete installation.
15
16 B. Manual motor starters for 115 volts, single phase motors one horsepower
17 and smaller shall be single pole, horsepower rated switches with thermal
18 overload units and heaters. Starters shall be Square D Class 2510, with
19 stainless steel cover plates or equal.
20
21 C. Magnetic full voltage starters for three phase motors shall be three pole,
22 horsepower- rated, electronic overload auxiliary contacts. Control voltage
23 shall be 120 volts supplied from a control power transformer. A Hand -Off-
24 Automatic, HOA switch shall be mounted in front cover. Starters shall be
25 Square D Class 8536 or equal.
26
27 D. Phase loss protection shall be provided on all starters serving motors 15
28 horsepower or larger.
29
30 E. Provide 0 -15 minute on -delay auto restart function after power outage.
31
32 2.03 MICROPROCESSOR -BASED MOTOR CONTROL
33
34 A. Motor Starters — Based Motor Control
35
36 1. Provide motor starters of the electromechanical type with coil
37 controlled by an application- specific microprocessor.
38 2. Provide one (1) current sensor accurate to 2% for each phase to
39 provide motor running overload protection that yeilds a time - current
40 curve closely paralleling that of the respective motor heating
41 damage boundary. Running overload protection shall be DIP
42 switch selectable for the specific motor full load amperes.
43
44 3. Provide DIP switch selectable overload trip class of 10, 20, and 30.
45
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 2 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 4. Provide phase loss protection and phase unbalance protection. If
2 the phase unbalance on any two phases is greater than 30% of the
3 DIP switch selected trip rating, a phase loss /unbalance trip occurs.
4
5 5. Provide ground fault protection set at 20% of maximum continuous
6 ampere rating with a start delay of 17 seconds, and a run delay of
7 0.4 seconds to prevent nuisance tripping on startup.
8
9 6. Motor starters shall have replaceable fixed and movable contacts.
10
11 7. Accessories:
12
13 a. Motor starter shall be designed to acccommodate two (2)
14 auxiliary contact blocks, each capable of a combination of
15 up to four (4) normally closed or four (4) normally open
16 auxiliary contacts. Contacts to be color coded; black
17 designating NC and silver designatinv NO. Contacts to be
18 rated ten (1) amperes continuous, 7200 VA make, 720 VA
19 break for 120 through 600V AC, and 69 VA make and break
20 for 125 through 300V DC. Provide a minimum of one (1)
21 spare NO contact and one (1) spare NC contact in addition
22 to any auxiliary contacts required.
23
24 b. Provide a mechanical interlock on reversing or multispeed
25 contactors of the lever -type mechanism (with electrical
26 contacts included) to prevent closing of one contactor when
27 the other is closed.
28
29 c. Provide metering module capable of displaying control
30 voltage and staus where utilized in starter applications,
31 "cause of trip," "current at time of trip," and "current in each
32 phase" shall be capable of being displayed.
33
34 d. Provide an addressable communication card capable o
35 transmitting control and diagnostic data over an open
36 ethernet network to a personal computer or PLC. The
37 addition of the ethernet communication module shall not
38 increase the size of the controller. The starter shall also be
39 capable of transmitting the following data:
40
41 1) On -Off reset control functions
42 2) Status (On, Off, Tripped, No Response)
43 3) Current in each phase
44 4) Percent phase unbalance
45 5) Control voltage
46 6) Overload protection settings
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 3 07/13/16
1 7) Trip current magnitude
2 8) Average motor current
3 9) Hand /Manual /Local Control
4 10) Cause of trip indication
5
6 e. Furnish Schneider Electric "TESYS T Motor Management
7 System" Ovelerload and Control Module
8 2.04 INTELLIGENT MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY (IMPR)
9
10 A. Introduction
11
12 1. This part of the specification describes the requirements for the low
13 voltage Intelligent Motor Protection Relay (IMPR). This relay must
14 be integrated in the global Motor Management System for use
15 within standard IEC or NEMA, control gear.
16
17 2. The nominal values, the standard documents and the relays
18 minimum settings are defined in this document. Information
19 regarding motors and current transformers is not included in the
20 specification.
21 B. General Requirements for the Intelligent Motor Protection Relay
22 -1. Each individual Intelligent Motor Protection Relay (IMPR) shall be
23 mounted inside the motor starter enclosure. In option, it can be
24 completed by a local Human Machine Interface (HMI) display and
25 control unit mounted on the front panel of the enclosure.
26 2. The IMPR shall include accurate measurement processing
27 functions and perform motor protection functions to prevent
28 damaging the motor and thus extend the life of the motor and the
29 availability of the process.
30 3. It shall be possible to display on the Human Machine Interface the
31 metering and operation data and the configuration data as well.
32 4. Thanks to network communication capabilities, the IMPR shall
33 support the integration in Power Monitoring Systems and in SCADA
34 systems.
35 5. In order to ease implementation and startup, the IMPR shall
36 include:
37 a. internal current transformers, at least for most usual
38 currents, up to 100 A.
39
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS.
16483 - 4 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 b. several pre- defined operation modes and also allow for
2 customised mode.
3
4 c. an user - friendly configuration tool available on local HMI (at
5 least for main parameters) and on a laptop.
6 C. Environment and Applicable Standards
7 1. The IMPR shall comply with the most relevant national and
8 international standards and recommendations for industrial
9 electrical distribution.
10 2. The IMPR shall have certifications according to UL and CSA
11 standards, shall bear the CE marking, be CCC, EAC /GOST,
12 RCM /CTIC'K, marine approved (BV, LROS, DNV, RINA, ABS ) and
13 Atex certified ; therefore it shall conform to standards IEC /EN
14 60947 -4 -1 and Chinese deviations, UL 60947 -4 -1A and CSA 22 -2
15 n °60947 -4 -1.
' 16
17 3. The IMPR shall be IP 20, according to IEC 60947 -1 (protection
against direct contact).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
18 4. The protection for the HMI mounted outside an enclosure shall be
19 IP 54.
20 5. The following control power supplies shall be available in the range
21 of IMPR : 24 VDC and 100 -240 VAC.
22 D. Specific Requirements for the Intelligent Motor Protection Relay (IMPR)
23 1. Metering: The IMPR shall include as a minimum the following
24 features.
25 a. Measurements including line currents, ground fault current,
26 average line current, current phase imbalance, thermal
27 capacity level, motor temperature sensor and, as an option,
28 frequency, line to line voltage, line voltage imbalance,
29 average voltage, power factor, active power, reactive power,
30 active power consumption and reactive power consumption.
31
32 1) For line current measurements, the IMPR shall have
33 integrated Current Transformers rated up to 100 A.
34
35 2) For motors larger than 100 A, the connection of
36 external current transformers shall be possible.
37 For ground current, it shall be possible either to
38 calculate from line currents or, without need of any
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 5 07/1 3/1 6
1 additional component, to connect on the IMPR an
2 external ground Current Transformer.
3
4 3) The motor temperature measurement must be
5 possible through several types of sensors including
6 PTC binary, PTC analog, NTC analog and PT100.
7 Without any additional component, the IMPR shall
8 allow the connection of the temperature sensor.
9 4) Voltage measurement shall allow for line voltage up
10 to 690V.
11
12 b. Statistics including protection fault counts, protection
13 warning counts, diagnostic fault counts, motor control
14 function counts and fault history.
15
16 c. Diagnostics including internal watchdog results, controller
17 internal temperature, temperature sensor connections,
18 current connections, control commands (start, stop, run
19 check back and stop check back), control configuration
20 checksum, communication loss and, as an option, voltage
21 connections.
22
23 d. Motor control states (motor starter/L01 starts/ LO2 starts,
24 operating time, motor starts per hour, last start max current,
25 last start time, time to trip and time to reset).
26 2. Motor Protection Functions
27 a. As a minimum, the IMPR shall allow the selection of the
28 following protection functions : thermal overload, current
29 phase imbalance, current phase loss, current phase
30 reversal, long start, jam, undercurrent, overcurrent, ground
31 current, motor temperature sensor, rapid cycle lockout and,
32 as an option, voltage phase imbalance, voltage phase loss,
33 voltage phase reversal, undervoltage, overvoltage, voltage
34 dip management (autorestart and load shedding), power
35 limits and power factor limits.
36 1) The thermal overload trip curve shall be selectable
37 between inverse (I2t) and definite time (Ixt) curves.
38 2) The Auxiliary Fan Cooling application shall be also
39 selectable.
40 3. Control Functions
41 a. The IMPR shall come with the following pre- defined Motor
42 control modes : overload, independent, reverser, two -step,
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 6 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 two- speed. In addition it shall be possible to derive a
2 customised mode from any of the pre - defined modes.
3 b. For each mode, the IMPR shall come with the corresponding
4 wiring diagram for 2 and 3 wires control.
5
4. Fault and alarm Monitoring
6 a. The IMPR shall include an Alarm management function and
7 a Fault Management function, that can be independently
8 enabled /disabled with the relevant threshold(s) for each
9 protection function.
10 b. The Faults reset mode must be selectable between manual
11 reset, automatic reset after a set time and remote reset via
12 communication.
13 c. The Fault Management function shall also record the five
14 most recent faults.
15 5. User Machine Interface
16 a. In option, the IMPR shall have a local Human - Machine
17 Interface (HMI). This unit is to be used both for
18 commissioning and /or for normal operation. It shall allow the
19 configuration of the IMPR and the display of operating data
20 such as measurements, counters, status, faults and
21 warnings information.
22 b. The HMI shall have the capability to adapt to local
23 languages by selection or download. During the operation of
24 the IMPR, it shall be possible to select the HMI language
25 between at least two languages. In addition it shall be
26 possible to download other languages.
27 6. Communication
28 a. The IMPR shall communicate through an integrated
29 communication port so that it can be connected to a
30 communication architecture with information remote access.
31 b. It shall be an open communication system, meaning that it
32 shall be directly connected to the main industrial network
33 communication protocols including Etheternet IP. The IMPR
34 shall have the options to connect with these networks, one
35 each per application, with native connectivity embedded
36 directly from the factory.
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 7 07/13/16
1 7. Configuration Software
2 a. The IMPR shall use a user - friendly setting and operating
3 multi- lingual software in a Windows environment with menus
4 and icons for fast direct access to the data required, with
5 guided navigation to go through all the data on the same
6 function together in the same screen and with a file
7 management. The IMPR shall allow customised logic by the
8 end user via the "custom mode."
9
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
12 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS:
13
14 A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with equipment
15 manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices;
16 complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL and NEMA standards
17 to insure that products fulfill requirements.
18
19 B. Motor starters or any other electrical equipment located in smoke or fire
20 rated walls shall be mounted on Unistrut channels. Channels shall be
21 supported from floor and structure above ceiling. There shall be no
22 penetrations of the fire rated assembly pursuant to the equipment
23 installation.
24 <,
25 C. Unless otherwise indicated, motor starters shown on the drawing shall be
26 furnished and installed under this Section. The full load current and
27 starting characteristics of each motor shall be verified for proper selection
28 of motor over load devices.
29
30 D. Furnish and install all steel shapes, etc., necessary for a support of all
31 motor starters.
32
33 E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
34 accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
35 values for equipment connectors.
36
37 F. Provide Two Hand Held Tesys TProgramming Tools to the City
38 Representative
39
40
41 G. Provide Two Days of Factory Based Start Up, Commisioning and Training
42 on the TeSys T Communications and Programming.
43
44
45
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 8 07/13/16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
2
3 A. Inspect electrical starter's operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and,
4 where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.
5
6 B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
7
8 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
9
10 A. Subsequent to connecting wires /cables, energize motor starter circuitry
11 and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with
12 requirements. Where necessary correct malfunctioning units, and then
13 retest to demonstrate compliance. Ensure that direction of rotation of
14 each motor fulfills requirements.
15
16 END OF SECTION 16483
17
18
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 9 07/13/16
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MOTOR STARTERS BID DOCUMENTS
16483 - 10 07/13/16
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1
CONTRACT 3
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 9
PROPOSAL/BID BOND 10
AFFIDAVIT 11
NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 12
PROPOSAL 13
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 16
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 17
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA
CERTIFICATION FORM 19
SECTION V i Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.:
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(1)
This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant
under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in
subsections (2) and (10).
Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing
the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified
copv of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing
prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor
until the contractor has complied with this paragraph."
CONTRACTOR
SURETY OWNER
[name] [name]
[principal business address] [principal business address]
[phone number] [phone number]
City of Clearwater
Engineering Dept.
100 S. Myrtle Avenue
Clearwater, FL 33756
(727) 562- [xxxx]
PROJECT NAME: EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PROJECT NO.: 15- 0039 -UT
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Rehabilitation of two existing clarifiers at the East Water Reclamation
Facility, including miscellaneous improvements to the scum pumping system and the groundwater
dewatering system.
BY THIS BOND, We, , as Contractor, and
, a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the
City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $ , for payment of which
we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally.
THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor:
1. Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for
construction of the East WRF Clarifier Rehabilitation Project, the contract documents being made a part
of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond,
Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such
alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in
the manner prescribed in the contract; and
2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes,
supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the
prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and
3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate
proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and
SECTION V Page 1 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
Bond No.:
PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND
(2)
4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their
officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to,
reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful
misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the
construction contract; and
5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time
specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force.
6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the
notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes.
7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any
formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this
bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition
to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day
of , 20 .
(If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required).
(If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal).
[TYPE LEGAL NAME OF CONTRACTOR/
By:
Title:
Print Name:
WITNESS: WITNESS:
Corporate Secretary or Witness Print Name:
Print Name:
(affix corporate seal)
[Corporate Surety)
By:
ATTORNEY -IN -FACT
Print Name:
(affix corporate seal)
(Power of Attorney must be attached)
SECTION V Page 2 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(1)
This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20 by and between the
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and
, of the City of County of
and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ".
[Or, if out of state:]
This CONTRACT made and
City of Clearwater, Florida,
entered into this day of , 20 by and between the
a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and
, a/an (State) Corporation authorized to do
business in the State of
WITNESSETH:
Florida, of the City of County of
and State of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ".
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on
the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
PROJECT NAME: EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PROJECT NO.: 15- 0039 -UT
in the amount of $
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement,
instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be
hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor,
then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have
the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the
provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO
HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES,
SECTION V Page 3 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(1)
This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of 5 pM�,e20 t /
Qp l p by and between the
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and
e rvk , of the City of C1 e ,tJ o k County of
and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ".
[Or, if out of state:]
This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20 and between the
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and
, a/an (State) Corporation authorized to do
business in the State of Florida, of the City of County of
and State of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on
the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
PROJECT NAME: EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION
PROJECT NO 15- 0039 -UT
in the amount of $_1,273,70430
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement,
instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be
hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as
contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor,
then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have
the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the
provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO
HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, .
SECTION V Page 3 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE
UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE
CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES
RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB
CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2).
SECTION V Page 4 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment,
upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of
pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor
agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment,
notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination
clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein,
it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the
Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor
remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only
and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to
complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed
as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete
and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of
the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the
surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said
bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his
or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an
additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be
satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor
under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing
the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City
in a form satisfactory to it.
SECTION V Page 5 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(3)
In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement
agrees to comply with public records law.
IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF
CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE
PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE
CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727 -562 -4092,
Rosemarie .Call(a,mvclearwater.com, 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756
The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to:
a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public
agency ") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder.
b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public
agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied
within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter
119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by
law.
c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public
records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the
duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor
does not transfer the records to the public agency.
d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records
in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public
agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public
agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public
records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure
requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the
contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records.
All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from
the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the
information technology systems of the public agency..
e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for
services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess
the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the
request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the
records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time.
f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply
with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract
provisions in accordance with the contract.
SECTION V Page 6 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a
reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes.
h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating
to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the
contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if:
1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the
public records request within a reasonable time; and
2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written
notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has
not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor.
i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of
public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with
the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by
common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified
mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may
be in an electronic format.
J)
A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the
notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement.
SECTION V Page 7 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONTRACT
(4)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: (SEAL)
William B. Horne, II
City Manager
Countersigned:
Attest:
Rosemarie Call
City Clerk
By: Approved as to form:
George N. Cretekos,
Mayor
Matthew M. Smith
Assistant City Attorney
Contractor must indicate whether
Corporation
Partnership
Company
or
Individual
(Contractor)
By: (SEAL)
Print Name:
Title:
The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation — provide
Affidavit.
SECTION V Page 8 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT
TO OWNER: City of Clearwater
Utility Engineering Dept
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Clearwater, FL 33756
CONTRACTOR:
PROJECT NAME: East WRF Clarifier Rehabilitation Project
PROJECT NO.: 15- 0039 -UT
CONTRACT DATE:
BOND NO. : , recorded in O.R. Book , Page
, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida.
Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract
between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the:
[insert name of Surety]
[address]
[address]
on bond of
[insert name of Contractor]
[address]
[address]
,SURETY,
,CONTRACTOR,
hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor
shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to
City of Clearwater
Utilities Engineering Department
100 S. Myrtle Ave.
Clearwater, FL 33756
,OWNER,
as set forth in said Surety's bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this _ day of ,
(Surety)
(Signature of authorized representative)
(Printed name and title)
Attest:
(Seal):
SECTION V Page 9 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
1
' SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSALBID BOND
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned,
as Contractor, and
as Surety, whose address is
, are held and firmly bound unto the
City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Dollars
($ ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of
which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of
as Contractor, and as Surety,
for work specified as: East WRF Clarifier Rehabilitation Project all as stipulated in said Proposal, by
doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all
within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said
bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the
required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this
obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount
of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages.
Principal must indicate whether:
Corporation
Partnership
Company
or
Individual
Signed this day of , 20
The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation — provide
Affidavit.
Contractor
Principal
By:
Title
Surety
SECTION V Page 10 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF
being duly sworn, deposes and says that he /she is
Secretary of
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having
its principal office at:
(Street & Number) (City) (County) (State)
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of
(Name of Corporation)
Affiant further says that is
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for
or said corporation by virtue of
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of
Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption).
Sworn to before me this
Affiant
day of , 20
Notary Public
Type /print/stamp name of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
SECTION V Page 11 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION V — Contract Documents
NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF )
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
of
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or
indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from
bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or
communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any
advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed
contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder
has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data
relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
' Affiant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20
Notary Public
SECTION V Page 12 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION (PROJECT #15- 0039 -UT)
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION (PROJECT #15- 0039 -UT)
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of
the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract
without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to
be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all
the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is
hereby charged with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the
Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has
made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he
proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater,
Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery,
equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time
mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater,
Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices
to wit:
SECTION V Page 13 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may,
at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal
shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to
become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be
retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the
City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this
Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on
Bank, for the sum of
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the
name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements,
enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or
employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
($ )
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
Signature of Bidder:
SECTION V Page 14 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal:
By: Title:
Company Legal Name:
Doing Business As (if different than above):
Business Address of Bidder:
City and State: Zip Code
Phone: Email Address:
Dated at , this day of , A.D., 20_.
SECTION V Page 15 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT: EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION (PROJECT #15- 0039 -UT)
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
(Name of Bidder)
(Signature of Officer)
(Title of Officer)
(Date)
SECTION V Page 16 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: EAST WRF CLARIFIER REHABILITATION (PROJECT #15- 0039 -UT)
CONTRACTOR:
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Numbers)
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL:
(Words)
BASE BID ITEM
DESCRIPTION
EST.
QTY.
UNIT
UNIT PRICE
TOTAL
1
East WRF Clarifiers Rehabilitation in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.01A.
1
LS
$
$
2
West Clarifier Grouting in accordance with Section 01150,
3.O1B.
2
CY
$
$
3
East Clarifier Grout Removal in accordance with Section
01150, 3.01C.
100
TON
$
$
4
East Clarifier Bottom Slab Pilot Hole Coring and Repair in
accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1D.
25
EA
$
$
East Clarifier Bottom Slab Crack Repair in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.01E.
100
LF
$
$
6
East Clarifier Bottom Slab Section Repair in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.01F.
1500
SF
$
$
East Clarifier Bottom Void Grouting in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.01G.
CY
20
$
$
8
East Clarifier Bottom Slab New Grout Topping in accordance
with Section 01150, 3.01H.
100
CY
$
$
9
East Clarifier 24 -inch CIPP Pipe Repair in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.01I.
60
LF
$
$
10
East Clarifier 12 -inch CIPP Pipe Repair in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.O1J.
60
LF
$
$
11
East Clarifier 10 -inch CIPP Pipe Repair in accordance with
Section 01150, 3.01K.
60
LF
$
$
12
SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance in
accordance with Section 01150, 3.01IL
1
LS
$15,000.00
$15,000.00
13
Mobilization in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1M.
1
LS
$
$
14
Indemnification in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1N.
1
LS
$100.00
$100.00
SUB -TOTAL ITEMS 1 -14
$
15
10% Owner's Contingency in accordance with Section
01150, 3.010. (10% of Subtotal, Items 1 -14)
1
LS
$
$
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL OF ITEMS 1 -15
$
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON THE UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH
SECTION V
Page 17 of 19
Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
I
1
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING
BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP
SUM PRICES BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL
BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
SECTION V
Page 18 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
SECTION V — Contract Documents
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH
CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE
COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS
REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the
requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies
with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy
Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in
this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List,
the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business
operations in Cuba and Syria; and
3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce
in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining,
owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services,
personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce;
and
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary,
affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5)
calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in
Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in
business operations in Cuba and Syria.
Authorized Signature
Printed Name
Title
Name of Entity /Corporation
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 20 ,
by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as
the (title) of (name of corporation/entity),
personally known to me as described herein , or produced a
(type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath.
Notary Public
Printed Name
My Commission Expires:
NOTARY SEAL ABOVE
SECTION V Page 19 of 19 Updated 6/3/2016
1
1
1
1
APPENDIX
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS
AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
Table of Contents
OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE DOCUMENTS
• Evoqua Detail Scope of Supply
PROJECT PERMITS
The Owner has not obtained any permits for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all
City of Clearwater Building Department Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground
Water from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity.
GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT
The following geotechnical information is included:
• Results of Geotechnical Testing and Test Well Installation Clearwater East WRF Clarifier by Driggers
Engineering Services, Inc. dated June 24, 2016
' ASBESTOS REPORT
Not applicable to this project.
1
1
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
Available record drawings and shop drawings of the original construction of the clarifiers, scum pump station
and other applicable facilities are attached to the end of the Construction Drawings, and are provided for
information only.
APPENDIX Updated 2/11/2016
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1
'` 1 evoQua
WATER FER - ECHNOLOGIES
2607 N. Grandview Blvd., Suite 130, Waukesha, 'Al 53188
+1 (262) 547 -0141 (phone) +1 (262) 547 -4120 (fax) www.evoqua.com
CLARIFICATIONS / EXCEPTIONS:
The equipment specified herein shall conform to the specification sections referenced in
paragraph 1 of Evoqua's Quotation to the extent they are technically applicable to
"Evoqua /Seller /Manufacturer's" Evoqua's scope of supply as described in this Quotation and
subject to the following clarifications to the City/ "Buyer":
Article,
Section
Invitation to
Bid #31 -16
CLARIFICATIONS /PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS
Sellers quotation is incorporated into the Purchase order agreement
along with the City's Standard Terms and Conditions as modified and
as mutually agreed between the City and Seller. Seller's scope of
supply and the Standard terms and Condition as modified shall be the
governing terms for the Purchase order and shall take precedence and
govern any other conflicting terms within the Contract documents for
the Purchase order agreement.
5th bullet point for payment terms on page 18 concerning 5 % retainage:
add to the end " not to exceed 120 days from delivery, or whichever
occurs first."
ITB #31 -16
i.6
Performance
Security
Seller shall provide a performance bond, on the Sellers standard
form, equal in value to 100% of the purchase price to be paid to
the Seller for the System (for the product specified in Section 11225).
The performance bond furnished by the Seller shall name the City with
whom the Seller enters an agreement for the purchase of the Clarifier
Systems as the obligee. The obligee named in the bond is required to
return the original copies of the bond to the Seller's surety company
upon completion of the Sellers obligations under the Purchase
agreement as executed between the Seller and the City. If the original
copies of the bond are unavailable for any reason, the obligee will
complete a release letter addressed to Sellers surety company stating
that the Sellers obligations under the above referenced purchase
agreement have been satisfied and the surety company is released of
any further obligations under the performance bond. The performance
bond runs through the Warranty period as agreed.
Detailed
Specifications
8 Insurance
Requirements
In the 1st paragraph, delete the last sentence In addition, the City has
the right to review the "Sellers" deductible or self insured retention and
to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Seller can provide their
insurance certificate upon request, and can agree to the remainder of
Article 8 Insurance Requirements.
Technical
General
Requirement
Clarifications
16481 1.03 C. Refer to Warranty included herein in the terms as agreed
between City and Evoqua.
01820 Seller will provide video training and 4 DVDs.
01600 1.04 A Seller will provide the warranty time period and terms as stated
in this quotation. Replace 01030 1.08 A -D, 01740 1.03A, and 11225 1.07A
with the Warranties offered as stated herein under the Warranty terms above
in Sellers quotation, and warranty period will begin at initial operation of
Sellers equipment, after successful startup testing.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Section 01820,
Art. 2.02
Videotaping of Training - Evoqua takes exception to this Article. Evoqua's field
service personnel will videotape the training session (using a camera and a tripod)
and provide the City of Clearwater the SD card of the session and the required CD's.
EXCLUDED ITEMS:
Evoqua's price includes only those items listed in this Quotation. Therefore, the items listed
below will not be supplied by Evoqua:
Electrical, hydraulic, or pneumatic controls.
Wiring of motors or controls, control panels, or panel supports.
Piping, valves, wall sleeves, gates, drains, weirs, baffles.
Floor grating, stairways, ladders, platforms, handrailing (except as noted in the detail scope of
supply).
Concrete, grout, mastic, sealing compounds, grease piping, grease gun.
Machinery or bearing supports, Detail shop fabrication drawings.
Tools — No special tools are required — so none provided
Equipment offloading and installation of any kind.
Modifications to existing equipment or structures.
Underwriters Laboratory inspection of electrical controls.
Special written process performance or extended mechanical warranties.
DETAIL SCOPE OF SUPPLY
To: City of Clearwater — East Water Reclamation Facility
Attn: Purchasing
100 S. Myrtle Ave. 3Rd floor
Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520
Date: revised June 2, 2016
1) SUMMARY:
Evoqua Water Technologies LLC ( Evoqua) proposes to furnish the equipment specified in this
Quotation in accordance with the following technical specification sections of the document
entitled ITB — 31 -16, East WRF Clarifier Equipment, to the extent technically applicable to the
scope of supply described in this quotation and subject to the Clarifications /Exceptions and
Standard Terms and Conditions as mutually agreed between City and Evoqua.
All of the information set forth in this quotation (including drawings, designs and specifications)
is confidential and /or proprietary and has been prepared solely for the recipient's use in
considering the purchase of the equipment and /or services described herein. Transmission of
all or any part of this information to others, or use by the recipient, for other purposes is
expressly prohibited without Evoqua's prior written consent.
ITEM & DESCRIPTION: PRICE
Two (2) 100' dia. Clarifier Mechanisms See Bid Form (attached)
Evoqua's price includes only the specific items detailed in this quotation. Items not specifically
identified herein are to be furnished by others. Please refer to the excluded items in Section 4
of this quotation for a list of items to be furnished by others.
Please provide tax exempt certificate and copy of payment bond, as applicable, with purchase
order.
A) OPTIONS: The following items are quoted as a deduct. An order for these items will
be accepted only when included with the basic equipment order:
Clarifier bridge — Specifications and original contract drawings call for a beam bridge.
The existing equipment was furnished with pony truss bridges. We are offering hot dip
galvanized pony truss bridges as a deduct to our base bid. The pony trusses will serve
as handrail.
Deduct per clarifier $ 6570.00
B) FREIGHT: Pricing is FOB destination with standard freight allowed to the job site. Our
price does not include any costs for unloading, transporting on the site or storage.
Buyer agrees to inspect the equipment upon arrival and document damages and alleged
shortages, and notify Seller within 48 hours of those damages or shortages and to assist in
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
the filing of claims with the carrier.
C) QUOTATION VALIDITY: This quotation is valid for a period of ninety (90) days unless
extended in writing by Evoqua.
D) FIELD SERVICES: Evoqua's pricing includes the services of a factory field service
technician per Specification Articles 3.01 & 3.03
Trips with three (3) days onsite per clarifier for a total of six (6) days onsite for the two (2)
Clarifiers.
Additional service can be purchased per Section 7 of this proposal.
E) SERVICE MANUALS: Our pricing includes five (5) hard copies and one (1)
Electronic (CD) Approval version and five (5) hard copies on two (2) Electronic
(CD) Final versions of the service manuals. If requested, Evoqua will supply the
electronic version of the 0 & M Manual information in the form of a disc or CD -ROM in
unchangeable Adobe PDF file format only. Drawings will be supplied in the form of a
CD -ROM with unchangeable of or bitmap file format only. The rights to the content of
Evoqua 0 & M Manuals and drawings belong solely to Evoqua and Evoqua reserves the
right to make changes to content at any time.
2) DRAWING and SHIPMENT INFORMATION:
Evoqua will furnish shop drawing submittals and equipment per the following project schedule:
Submittals: 8/12/16, based on receiving PO by June 24, 2016, and measurements of 1St
'Clarifier by July 25, 2016
Approval: 8/26/16 - 2 weeks
Shipment of First Clarifier: Friday 12/2/16 - 14 weeks from approval - shipping from
Thomasville, GA (less than 5 hours away) will be onsite Monday 12/5/16.
Shipment of Second Clarifier: 1/13/17
Evoqua has provided typical standard times and shipment dates. Actual times will be provided
upon receipt of a Purchase Order based upon current backlog. Evoqua will work closely with the
General Contractor and /or Engineer to provide delivery dates to meet the overall project
schedule as possible.
If Submittal Drawing Reviews /Approvals are not received by Evoqua in accordance with the
project schedule noted above, Evoqua shall be entitled to a reasonable extension of the
"Shipment of Equipment" times and /or a reasonable increase in the contract price to cover costs
incurred as a result of Submittal Drawing Review /Approval delays unless the delay is the fault of
Evoqua.
3) EQUIPMENT SCOPE:
SECTION 11225 - CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT PROCUREMENT
Under this item Evoqua Water Technologies, Envirex Products, will furnish and deliver two (2)
Tow Bro sludge collectors to replace two (2) existing Envirex Tow Bro collectors, for installation
in two (2) existing concrete settling tanks, 100' 0" diameter, it is understood each clarifier will
have a different side water depth. The tank floor will pitch at a constant slope of 1/8" in 12 ".
Included in the price of the clarifiers are submittals per Section 11225 Article 1.04.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The sludge collector will include:
Drive mechanism complete with reducer, motor, and overload device.
Center pier
FEDWA flocculation baffles
Influent flocculation well and supports
Unitube sludge removal header
Center cage
Manifold
Access beam bridge and center drive platform
Two (2) truss arms for skimmer support (one will support the Unitube header and one
will support scraper blades)
Two (2) 4' wide skimmer assemblies
4' wide scum trough with submerged shelf
Associated 316 SS attachment and anchor bolts for above
The sludge collector mechanism will utilize a center drive mounted on a stationary center
support pier. A welded structural steel cage attached to the drive will support and rotate the
Unitube sludge collector header and manifold. The header will be located parallel to the tank
bottom and will have a series of inlet orifices so that in a single revolution the entire tank bottom
is swept clean. The header will continuously remove the required proportional settled sludge
volume to affect a uniform withdrawal over the entire radius of the tank. The header will be
hydraulically designed to remove larger volumes of sludge at greater distances from the tank
center. The slowly revolving mechanism will collect the sludge from the tank bottom and carry it
through the header to the center outlet, the removal being accomplished by use of a TSV.
All submerged steel components (except the skimming components) will be hot dip galvanized.
Skimming components will be 304L stainless steel.
The mechanism will be designed so there is no field welding required.
DESIGN CRITERIA
Each clarifier will be designed to hydraulically handle:
Min.
Ave. Max.
Effluent Flow (MGD) 1.00 2.50 6.25
Return Flow (MGD) .50 1.90 2.50
Mixed Liquor Flow (MGD) 1.50 4.40 8.75
Maximum headloss for header - 1.0 ft
Minimum flow velocity in header - .6 fps
Minimum header orifice diameter — 1.75 in
Center pier dia. - 30 in
Influent well size — 19' 6" dia. X 6' 0" depth
DRIVE
Internal gear pitch dia. - 38"
Ball race dia. - 42"
Motor horsepower - 3/4 HP
AGMA rated torque — 21,900 ft. lbs.
Speed - .04 RPM
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
Stress will be less than or equal to allowable, as defined by the current AISC standards when
designed for 200% of the AGMA rated torque, per Article 2.02 D of the specifications.
DRIVE MECHANISM
The drive mechanism will be completely factory assembled and will consist of a primary gear
reduction unit, an intermediate reduction unit, plus a final gear reduction unit consisting of a
pinion and internal gear enclosed in a turntable base. All gearing will be enclosed in gray cast
iron ASTM A -48 Class 40B housings.
The primary reduction unit will be helical gear reducer. All bearings will be anti - friction type and
running in oil in a cast iron housing.
The motor will be totally enclosed, fan cooled, ball bearing type, of ample power for starting and
continuously operating the mechanism without overloading.
The motor will conform to NEMA standards and be nameplated for operation on 230/460 volt, 3
phase, 60 Hertz current. The primary reduction gear reducer will drive the intermediate
reduction unit through a chain and sprocket arrangement. The drive chain will be #80 self -
lubricated roller chain and be covered with an OSHA approved removable guard of molded
polyethylene. Proper chain tension will be provided for by an adjustable steel base mounted on
the intermediate reduction unit.
The intermediate reduction unit will be a heavy -duty, worm gear speed reducer in a cast iron
housing, with grease and oil lubricated, anti - friction type bearings. The unit will be mounted on
a machined face on the top of the final reduction unit and properly aligned to maintain accurate
centers for the final reduction gearing.
An overload device will be mounted on the drive head at the thrust end of the worm shaft and
will consist of: a plate spring assembly, a plunger, indicator dial, two (2) microswitches (one N.O.
and one N.C.), and a terminal block, all enclosed in a weathertight, gray cast iron housing,
gasketed and mounted to the gear housing. The end thrust of the worm shaft against the plate
spring will actuate the plunger, which in turn will move the indicator dial.
A visual torque dial indicator will be provided and oriented so it may be read from the walkway.
The microswitches will be factory set to (1), sound an alarm when the load on the mechanism
reaches 100% of the AGMA rated torque capacity of the drive; and (2) to stop the motor when
the load reaches 120% of the AGMA rated torque capacity. A shear pin device, set for 140% of
the AGMA rated torque will be furnished.
The internal final gear will be driven by a heat - treated steel pinion from the slow speed shaft of
the intermediate gear reduction unit. The internal gear will be split for easy removal, will be of
ductile iron and will be designed to support the center cage and collector.
The turntable base will have an annular raceway to contain balls upon which the internal gear
rotates. The ball race will ensure a low unit ball load, long life and stability, without the
necessity of guide shoes or steady bearings. The balls will be alloy steel and will bear vertically
and horizontally on four (4) renewable special hardened (38 -42 Rockwell C) steel liner strips
force fitted into the turntable base and internal gear. The liner strips will be 3/8" thick x 3/4"
wide. The internal gear, pinion, and ball race will run in an oil bath and be protected by a felt
seal and steel dust shield.
The turntable base will be bolted to the center column and be designed to support the internal
gear with the rotating mechanism and the access bridge, will be furnished as part of this unit. A
pipe will be attached to the bottom of the turntable base for purposes of condensate removal.
The oil piping will terminate within the center of the base for easy access.
The turntable assembly will be so designed that the split internal gear, balls and strip liners may
be removed without raising the access bridge.
The drive mechanism will be designed in accordance with AGMA Sections 2001 -B92 (Sept.
1988), "Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute and Helical Gear
Teeth ", and 6034 -A87 (March 1988), "Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Worm Gear Speed
Reducers and Gearmotors "; for 24 hour continuous duty and 20 year design gear life, based on
the AGMA rated torque. All bearings will be designed for a minimum B -10 life of 200,000 hours.
CENTER PIER
A cylindrical carbon steel center pier will support the drive, collector mechanism, and access
bridge. The top of the pier will have a drive mechanism mounting plate which will be set plumb
with the centerline. The drive mechanism will be positioned, shimmed, leveled, and grouted in
place with a non - shrink grout. The center pier will be fabricated of 1/4" thick carbon steel plate,
hot dipped galvanized after fabrication and will be anchored to the concrete base with a
minimum of eight (8) 1" diameter stainless steel adhesive anchor bolts. Evoqua Water
Technologies, Envirex Products will provide a stainless steel template to accurately locate these
anchor bolts. The center pier will serve as an influent pipe and will have a minimum of four (4)
large inlet areas at its upper end to diffuse flow into the influent well at a velocity not to exceed
1.5 fps at maximum flow.
FEDWA FLOCCULATION BAFFLES
Provide inlet baffles to promote effective mixing and tapered flocculation. Flow shall impinge
three (3) overlapping vertical target baffles in secession with a series of four (4) increasing port
areas .Design to provide a "Gt" (t in seconds) value in the well not exceeding 6,000 with a
velocity gradient "G" within the well not exceeding 40 fps /ft at a minimum water temperature of
10 °C at maximum influent flow .Provide horizontal shelf baffles to prevent downward movement
in flocculation zone. Baffles shall bolt to center cage and well support beams. The baffles shall
be fabricated from minimum 3/16" thick carbon steel plate, hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication.
INFLUENT WELL
The influent well will be fabricated of 3/16" carbon steel plate sections, with 1/" rim angles, with
bolted connections, supported from the center cage and will be of adequate size and design to
diffuse the flow into the tank uniformly. The well will be designed such that the flow through
velocity does not exceed 0.05 fps at maximum flow. Ports will be cut in the influent well to
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
permit the escape of entrapped scum. The ports will have baffles to prevent short circuiting.
Influent well will be 19' 6" dia. X 6' 0" depth and will be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
HEADER
The Unitube header, of a rectangular shaped full tapered section, will vary in size from a
maximum near the tank center to a minimum at the outer end to provide uniform sludge draw -off
velocities throughout and will be fabricated of 1/4" thick plate and galvanized after fabrication.
The longitudinal cross sectional axis of the header will be mounted at an angle of 45 degrees
with the tank bottom to physically trap sludge for maximum solids concentration. The bottom
edge of the header will extend downward 2" to provide a fluidizing vane as an integral part of
the header and to direct the sludge into the area of influence of the orifices with minimum sludge
agitation. Attached to this vane will be a neoprene squeegee. The squeegee will have slotted
holes for 1" vertical adjustment. At the inner end of the header, a flange will be provided for
bolting to the center outlet manifold. The header will have a central scraper of 1/4" steel plate
with a neoprene blade to clean the tank bottom around the manifold directing the sludge to the
first orifice.
At regular intervals, not to exceed 30 ", inlet orifices varying in size from a minimum 1.75"
diameter near the tank center to a maximum at the outer end, will be accurately located in the
header.
The design of each orifice will be proportionate to the volume of sludge withdrawn and the
design of the orifices and header will be such to insure hydraulic balance in the tank and
uniform sludge withdrawal from the entire tank bottom at all flows.
HEADER SUPPORT
The header will be supported by a truss arm of all- welded steel construction with members
having a minimum thickness of 1/4 ". The connections between the truss and header will be 2-
1/2" hot dip galvanized Sch. 80 steel pipe.
CENTER CAGE, TRUSS AND MANIFOLD
The center cage will be of an all- welded construction made up of carbon steel members, hot
dipped galvanized after fabrication having a minimum thickness of 1/4 ".
The manifold will be constructed of 1/4" minimum thickness steel and fitted with two (2) sealing
rings. A stainless steel bottom plate will be securely anchored to the concrete floor and grouted
in place after proper aligning.
Truss sludge arms will be provided, supported from the center cage and manifold and used for
header and skimmer support. The arm will require no tie -bars for support, and will be all- welded
carbon steel construction of members having a minimum thickness of 1/4 ". The truss arm
opposite the header will be provided with scraper blades.
ACCESS BRIDGE, HANDRAILING AND TOE PLATE
An all- welded, hot dip galvanized, structural steel beam bridge, of wide flange beam
construction, will extend from the tank wall to the stationary drive base. A bridge extension will
be provided for access to the drive. The bridge will be designed to support, in addition to the
dead load, a live load of 150# per lineal foot, with a deflection not exceeding 1/360 of the span.
A 8' x 10' center drive platform will be provided. A 3' wide walkway, with aluminum grating, will
extend over the entire bridge length and the center platform.
A double handrail, consisting of 1-1/2" diameter aluminum pipe for the rails and vertical posts,
and a 3/16" thick x 4" high aluminum toe plate, will be furnished around the platform and for
both sides of the walkway.
SURFACE SKIMMER, SCUM TROUGH
Two (2) 'full surface' skimmers consisting of: a scum blade; structural "A" frames mounted on
top of the truss arms, and a hinged wiper assembly mounted on the outer end of the scum blade
to form a pocket for trapping the scum. The hinged arrangement will insure continual contact
and proper alignment between wiper blade, scum baffle and beach as the blade travels up the
beach. The wiper blade will have a wearing strip on its outer end which contacts the scum
baffle and a neoprene strip on its lower and inner edge. The hinged skimmer will be capable of
6" horizontal movement. The scum will be trapped as the wiper blade meets the skimmer blade
ramp and is raised up the beach to be dumped into the scum trough. All components of the
skimming assembly will be stainless steel. All skimmer components will be stainless steel.
The scum trough will be fabricated of 1/4" thick stainless steel plate, and supported from the
tank wall. The scum trough will be 4' 0" wide, with a minimum length of 4' -9" along the scum
baffle. A 6" standard pipe flange will be provided for connection to the scum discharge pipe.
A stainless steel submerged trough will continue on a horizontal run for an additional 4' along
the scum baffle. An inner radius baffle extending 9" below and 3" above the maximum water
level will run from the trough to the end of the submerged shelf.
GENERAL ITEMS
All equipment anchor bolts and hardware will be 316 stainless steel, furnished by Evoqua
Water Technologies, and of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. All anchor bolts
will be set by the General Contractor in accordance with Evoqua instructions.
SPARE PARTS
Spare parts as listed in paragraph 1.06B are included.
LUBRICANTS
Evoqua will provide four (4) @ 5 gallon buckets of Mobil SHC 630. (Each drive requires 16
quarts of oil per fill)
FACTORY PRE - ASSEMBLY
Evoqua will provide factory pre - assembly as discussed in conference call June 1, 2016 will be
provided.
4) EXCLUDED ITEMS:
Evoqua's price includes only those items listed in this Quotation. Therefore, the items listed
below will not be supplied by Evoqua:
Electrical, hydraulic, or pneumatic controls.
Wiring of motors or controls, control panels, or panel supports.
Piping, valves, wall sleeves, gates, drains, weirs, baffles.
Floor grating, stairways, ladders, platforms, handrailing (except as noted above).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Concrete, grout, mastic, sealing compounds, grease piping, grease gun.
Machinery or bearing supports.
Tools (no special tools are required for this equipment) Equipment offloading and installation of
any kind.
Modifications to existing equipment or structures.
Underwriters Laboratory inspection of electrical controls.
Special written process performance or extended mechanical warranties.
5) PAINTING AND SURFACE PROTECTION:
Evoqua's price is based on the following surface protection
All carbon steel will be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication
SHAFTING and EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES: Solvent wiping, followed by one (1) coat
of Evoqua's standard shop preservative.
WOOD, NONFERROUS MATERIALS, STAINLESS STEEL, and GALVANIZED SURFACES:
Unpainted.
DRIVE UNITS and CONTROLS: Manufacturer's standard.
TOUCH -UP and ALL ADDITIONAL COATS shall be furnished and applied by others at the site.
PRICES ARE BASED ON PAINTS AND SURFACE PREPARATIONS AS OUTLINED IN THIS
QUOTATION. IN THE EVENT AN ALTERNATE PAINT SYSTEM IS SELECTED,
PURCHASER'S ORDER MUST ADVISE OF ITS SELECTION. EVOQUA WILL, AT ITS SOLE
DISCRETION, EITHER ADJUST ITS PRICE AS NECESSARY TO COMPLY OR SHIP THE
MATERIAL UNPAINTED IF COMPLIANCE IS NOT POSSIBLE DUE TO PRICE
CONSIDERATIONS, APPLICATION PROBLEMS OR ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
EVOQUA DOES NOT GUARANTEE PRIMER'S COMPATIBILITY WITH PURCHASER'S
COATING SYSTEM UNLESS APPROVED BY THE COATING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER.
PRIMERS WILL ONLY PROTECT FOR A MINIMAL AMOUNT OF TIME, USUALLY THIRTY
(30) DAYS. SPECIFIC INFORMATION SHOULD BE OBTAINED FROM COATING SYSTEM
MANUFACTURER.
6) ADDITIONAL FIELD SERVICES:
Should the Purchaser feel that additional services will be required, they can be purchased from
Evoqua. Additional services may be purchased at the per diem rate stated below.
Evoqua price does not include service of a factory field service technician during the time of
installation of the equipment items.
TERMS GOVERNING FIELD SERVICES: Services of a factory field service technician to
inspect installation and /or first operation of the products specified in the quotation can be
furnished by Evoqua at the following rates:
A. Supervision or consultation of a process service technician within the continental limits of
the United States: $1,400 per eight (8) hour day, Monday through Friday inclusive.
B. Supervision or inspection of a field service technician within the continental limits of the
United States: $1,200 per eight (8) hour day, Monday through Friday inclusive.
Overtime Monday through Friday and Saturday work is charged at time and one -half.
Time worked on Sunday will be charged double time; time worked on U.S. Holidays will
be charged triple time.
C. Traveling, living and incidental expenses at cost, including shipping charges on tools and
other equipment which the factory field service technician has shipped to the
construction site.
D. Travel time will be charged to and from Purchaser's construction site, and weekend or
holiday travel request or required by Purchaser will be charged at the overtime rates.
Rates shown above apply only to additional services performed within twelve (12) months from
the date of Quotation. Additional services performed after twelve (12) months from the date of
Quotation shall be subject to Evoqua's current rates at the time such service is provided.
Except for the direct acts or omissions of the factory field service technician, the responsibility
for the installation and /or first operation shall be Purchaser's. Evoqua will assume responsibility
for workmen's compensation coverage of Evoqua employees only, and will provide umbrella
liability coverage during installation. All other insurance coverage and necessary materials to
accomplish installation shall be provided by Purchaser.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PROJECT PERMITS (as applicable)
The Owner has not obtained any permits for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining all City of Clearwater Building Department Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of
Produced Ground Water from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity.
Appendix.docx
7/7/2014
GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT
The following geotechnical information and reports were relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the
Drawings and Specifications:
• Driggers Geotechnical Testing and Test Well Installation Report (6/24/16)
Appendix.docx
7/7/2014
RESULTS OF THE
GEOTECHNICAL TESTING
AND TEST WELL INSTALLATION
CLEARWATER EAST WRF CLARIFIER
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
11.
D R I G G E R S INN
E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S I N C O R P O R A T E D
Geotechnical Engineering & Construction Materials Testing
King Engineering Associates, Inc.
4921 Memorial Highway
Tampa, FL 33 634
Attention: Mr. Thomas A. Traina, P.E.
RE:
Dear Tom:
Results of Geotechnical Testing
And Test Well Installation
Clearwater East WRF Clarifier
Clearwater, Florida
Our File DES 167870
June 24, 2016
In accordance with your authorization, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES
conducted the requested test borings and installation of wells planned for pump testing.
Presented herein are the results of our geotechnical investigation.
FIELD INVESTIGATION AND TEST WELL INSTALLATION
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORINGS — Plate I of the report illustrations identifies
the respective positioning of two (2) Standard Penetration Test borings that were requested,
flanking the easterly clarifier that warrants remediation as a result of damage sustained due to
uplift pressures during previous maintenance operations. The Standard Penetration Test borings
were performed in accordance with ASTM D -1586.
Logs of the test borings are presented in the report attachments reflecting visual, together
with estimated Unified Soil classification. The test boring logs also present tabulated and
graphically plotted Standard Penetration resistance values corresponding to each sample interval.
A brief description of this method of sample is also included in the attachments.
TEST WELL INSTALLATION — Plate I of the report illustrations also identifies the
respective positioning of two (2) wells that were requested. One well was requested to a nominal
diameter of two (2) inches, and the other to a nominal four (4) inch diameter. Details of the well
Sarasota Clearwater Tampa
Phone: 941.371.3949 P.O. Box 17839 • Clearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 813.948.6027
Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572.4090 Fax: 727.572.4090
saroffice @driggers - eng.com clwoffice@driggers- eng.com tpaoffice@driggers- eng.com
1
1
2
installations are included in the attachments, together with logs of the soil lithology at each well
location, from the ground surface to the tip depth. It should be noted that these wells were
installed where directed by Leggette, Brashears & Graham, together with representatives of the
City of Clearwater.
INDICATED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
Our test borings identified the presence of a fill mixture of sands, clayey sands and sandy
clays with variable concentrations of gravel extending to about 8 to 10 feet below existing grade
at the Standard Penetration Test boring locations. You will note that the elevations noted on
each boring log were visually estimated with respect to the top rim of the adjacent clarifier,
which we understood to be constructed at approximate El. + 10 ft. (NGVD).
Below the upper mixed fill materials, the test borings encountered stiff to hard and
variably cemented clays which overlay a relatively shallow limestone formation encountered in
the depth range of 18.5 to 23.5 feet, which roughly corresponds to approximate El. —13.5 ft. to
El. —16.5 ft. (NGVD). The limestone formation exhibited relatively high penetration resistance
values in general, with localized exceptions which suggested a lesser degree of lithification. The
depth at which groundwater was encountered is recorded on each respective boring log.
The test wells were specifically selected by Leggette, Brashears and Graham in order to
encounter the fine sand backfill that was utilized adjacent to the tank walls in the initial
construction of the clarifiers. Indeed, a small diameter pilot auger boring conducted at each well
location did identify the presence of fine sands throughout a depth of 13 feet. At the time of the
well installation, the groundwater table was approximately 4.6 feet below existing grade. It
should be noted that these monitor wells were installed on June 15, which followed two days of
extensive rainfall in the Pinellas County area.
GEOTECHNICAL COMMENTS
It is our understanding that structural repairs are warranted that may include the
installation of micro -piles or helical piles to stabilize the central pier of the clarifier. We would
anticipate that the base of the central pier is probably near El. -10.2 ft. or about 20 feet below the
top rim of the clarifier. Thus, it would be anticipated that the base of the pier would probably
occur within variably cemented sandy clays or possibly the limestone formation which can vary
significantly in elevation over short lateral distances.
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
3
We understand that helical piles were initially being considered by the project structural
engineer in order to stabilize and anchor the central pier. However, considering the variable
cementation likely to occur within the underlying clay soils and /or the presence of relatively hard
limestone, it may not be feasible to get sufficient penetration with helical anchors for needed
axial or tension capacity. Accordingly, it may be more appropriate to consider utilization of
drilled micro -piles for remediation. There are certainly various types and diameters of micro -
piles that can be designed and installed utilizing differing techniques, depending on the
capabilities of the proprietary design -build contractor. It may thus be most appropriate to specify
the required compression and tension capacity and then have the various design -build specialty
contractors propose their methodology that they would use to achieve the desired results.
It is important to note that the piezometric or potentiometric level within the underlying
limestone formation is probably within a few feet of the existing ground surface surrounding the
clarifiers. The presence of this piezometric elevation, together with the potential for seepage
concentrations associated with crevices or pervious zones within the limestone formation must
be considered in the development of the ways and means of construction by the proprietary
micro -pile contractor. Please note that the presence of pervious zones was detected in both
Standard Penetration Test borings as evidenced by losses of circulation of drilling fluid above or
within the limestone formation.
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES appreciates the opportunity to be of
assistance, and we trust that if you have any questions concerning our report, you will not
hesitate to contact this office at your convenience.
Respectfully Submitted,
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
FL Registration No. 16989
FJD /ff
FJD- REP\2016 \167870
Copies : (1) Email: Addressee
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
• • #1,
•
•
*%
No.
%f'6'
'173 • STATE oF :
1
t
1
t
1
APPENDIX
PLATE I - BORING LOCATION PLAN
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS
TEST WELL PLATE 1- 2" DIAMETER WELL DETAIL
2" TEST WELL AUGER BORING LOG
TEST WELL PLATE II - 4" DIAMETER WELL DETAIL
4" TEST WELL AUGER BORING LOG
METHOD OF TESTING
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
PLATE I - BORING LOCATION PLAN
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
113
it it a1
i iti N . S
1 It
Ai
11
j'j
eli
'
I
I
VP
1
I
1I
;
I
F"9 6
II
t"
III
1.-
di
4
if
.11
„.._
...,
•
; ‘.
AV
„
\ \a� co;
:
��
0
4%23 It
L
N, 1 a II
`� 1•
� I, ,
,
11 I
.
0 Q5
I— p z
0
•
cr
le
0 \
l,t ,
P
1
I
.aa
F PIT
Z vM 3
o cZio
o 0 M
Z O�
Z ti
0
8 u
i 1
;�
$
�;II
e :�l
`u1
DAZE 8/23/16
CAD / ENGINEER
SHEET TITLE
PROJECT NO.
R.D.B. / F.J.D.
BORING LOCATION PLAN
DES 167870
■••• PREPARED
BY
PROJECT NAME
SHEET NO.
■
mi.•.I•� CLEARWATER
PLATE
EAST WRF CLARIFIER
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING
SERVICES. INCORPORATED
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
1
1
t
1
1
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
1
i
i
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 167870 BORING NO. B -1
Project Clearwater East WRF Clarifier, Clearwater, Florida
Location See Plate I Foreman B.D.
Completion Depth To
Depth 40.5' Date 5/20/16 Water 4.7' Time Date
5/20/16
L
2
a
w
—1
m
C
N
cn
ILI
-'
Q
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL: +7+/-' (NGVD)
z w I-
Z
w w
O a ILL
m Q O
t°
STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D.
SAMPLER -140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
�,
Gra ish -brown Fine SAND with roots (SP) (A -3)
Brown Fine SAND with trace of clayey Fine SAND
sockets (SP) (A-3)
Brown and light brown Fine SAND
with clayey Fine SAND and gravel
(SP /SC) (A- 3/A -2 -6)
3/5/5
8/17/18
10/8/7
8/9/12
14/20/34
23/44/50*
50*
10/12/13
11111111
11111
11111
ps,
4
.);:i:
__���11111
�•iiu1111
_•iu1111
21111
III
iTi't,
t
Brownish -gray slightly silty Fine SAND
with trace of gravel (SP -SM) (A -3)
'a
_mil
Dark grayish -green silty, clayey Fine SAND
with gravel (SM -SC) (A -2-6)
Stiff green sandy CLAY (CH) (A -7-6)
Hard green variably cemented CLAY (CL) (A -7-6)
pa
All
Fr_
Very stiff to hard green variably cemented,
sandy CLAY (CH) to (CL) (A -7 -6)
.
— 100% loss of circulation at depth 23.0'
In
_,..,1111
,�
11111
■�►111IIII
ell
��_RuI1111
__�i'�1111
��mu■iilll
15
re'
illi
20 01,4
* 0.3' Penetration
■11111
um
4
■:;;;ii
11.211111
PAT
ii!uIuuI
11111
''I�
■11111
•:'s's_�
25 -
Cream colored LIMESTONE
- 60% loss of circulation at depth 28.0'
p
__���11111
0.4' Penetration
�■„''
__PRI11111
"'
-�
30 - -
...•-.
_
_
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 167870 BORING NO. B -1
Project Clearwater East WRF Clarifier, Clearwater, Florida
Location See Plate I Foreman B.D.
Completion Depth To
Depth 40.5' Date 5/20/16 Water 4.7' Time Date 5/20/16
DEPTH, FT
SYMBOL
SAMPLES
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL: +7 +1 - -' (NGVD)
BLOWS ON
SAMPLER PER
6" OR PEN. STR.
STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D.
SAMPLER -140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
35
�•..-
r- =-� '
..
�
Cream colored LIMESTONE
A
50*
50*
* 0.4' Penetration
■.,1111
I.
11111
■I1111I
111111
40
* 0.5' Penetration
45
1
50
55
60
_1
65
MINI
"111I
1111n
Remarks
Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 167870 BORING NO. B -2
Project Clearwater East WRF Clarifier, Clearwater, Florida
Location See Plate I Foreman B.D.
Completion Depth To
Depth 40.1' Date 5/20/16 Water 2.9' Time Date 5/20/16
DEPTH, FT
SYMBOL
cn
w
Q
co
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL: +5 + / -' (NGVD)
BLOWS ON
SAMPLER PER
6" OR PEN. STR.
STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D.
SAMPLER -140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
0
MIME
Brown Fine SAND with roots (SP) (A -3)
7/8/5
5/8/16
13/20/36
14/22/28
18/24/24
30/44/50*
50•
50*
r rA '
,
Brown Fine SAND with light brown clayey
Fine SAND pockets (SP /SC) (A- 3/A -2 -6)
f
Green sandy CLAY with gravel and Fine SAND
(CH /SP) (A- 7- 6/A -3)
Green sandy CLAY with gravel
and trace of Fine SAND (CH) (A -7 -6)
�.
Medium dense gray silty Fine SAND
with gravel (SM) (A -2-4)
- trace of green sandy CLAY pockets
at depth 8.0'
10
Hard green variably cemented, sandy CLAY
(CL) (A -7 -6)
- 100% loss of circulation at depth 17.0'
+
- 15
`
`\
`" =
?:s
Cream colored LIMESTONE
- 20
\
*0.4' Penetration
- 25
_
-* 0.1' Penetration
i
- 30
=
-* 0.1' Penetration
•
Remarks
Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 167870 BORING NO. B -2
Project Clearwater East WRF Clarifier, Clearwater, Florida
Location See Plate I Foreman B.D.
Completion Depth To
Depth 40.1' Date 5/20/16 Water 2.9' Time Date 5/20/16
DEPTH, FT
SYMBOL
N
a.
Q
U)
/
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL: +5 + / -' (NGVD)
BLOWS ON
SAMPLER PER
6" OR PEN. STR.
STANDARD
PENw ETRATION TEST
BLOWS /FT. ON 2" O.D.
SAMPLER -140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10 20 40 60 80
- 35
"'
:=
S35--
ti
Cream colored LIMESTONE
50*
50*
*
on
0.2' Penetrat
nth
��
■■■u1111
•:M
--•'-
- 40
*
■
■11111
0.1 Penetration
��
11111
■
■
■In
_��
��
��
��
_��_
����■11111
��
��
�_�
■■
■11111
45 -
■■
■■
■■
■■
■■
■■
■■
■hill
■11111
■11111
■1111
- 50 -
■1111
■11111
■11111
55
��
��
_��_
1111
■■
■■
■■
■11111
■11111
■1111
- 60 -
11111
��
��
�_�
■■
■■
■■
■11111
■11111
■11111
11111
65
����■11111
■■
■■
■11111
■11111
��
��
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TEST WELL PLATE I - 2" DIAMETER WELL DETAIL
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
Expandable Locking Cap
Existing Grade 3.0'
=
=
=
=
-
=
=
2" Dia. PVC Solid Riser
(Schedule 40)
/ /.c�\
13.0'
1.0''
1.0'
1.0',
•''
'•'
/Grout
Neat Cement
r.
iu
Y ry Fine Sand Seal
� s-,
`
`y
•
10.0'
•
2" Dia. PVC
Slotted Screen
(Schedule
Schedule 40)
Size 0.010 ")
20/30 Silica Sand
Filter Pack
Well Point (Sump)
INCH - WELL- DETAILDWG DRAWN BY: R.D.B. DATE: 6/22/16
CAD FILE NAME: A: \DETAILS \167870
8"
-2-
SHEET TITLE
PREPARED BY
2" DIAMETER WELL DETAIL
I
DR- S ENGINEERING
SERVICES, INCORPORATED
PROJECT NAME
SHEET NO.
CLEARWATER EAST WRF
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
PLATE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2" TEST WELL AUGER BORING LOG
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
_.. _.• AUGER BORING LOG
PROJECT:
Clearwater East WRF
Clearwater, Florida
Project No.: DES 167870
CLIENT:
King Engineering Associate . Inc.
WATER TABLE:
4.6'
DATE:
6/15/16
TECHNICIAN:
J.R.
DATE:
6/15/16
COMPLETION DEPTH:
13.0'
LOCATION:
See Plate I
TEST NUMBER:
2" WELL (Lithologyl
�FDESCRIPTION
DEPTH TH
SYMBOL
REMARKS
• Brown Fine SAND (SP)
0
:{j: ;ou
.n0Q.
Brown Fine SAND with gravel (SP)
2
Q
r:
Brown Fine SAND (SP)
4
Brownish -gray Fine SAND (SP)
Brown Fine SAND (SP)
: •
... • ..
- 8 -
- 10 -
- 12 _
- 14 -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TEST WELL PLATE II - 4" DIAMETER WELL DETAIL
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
Expandable
Locking
4" Dia.
PVC Solid Riser
40)
Cap
3.0'
(Schedule
Existing Grade
.
13.0'
1.0'
•to'
..):
.:k
0
*:
g......
kie
,
Cement
/
/t
rout
Seal
PVC
Screen
40)
0.010")
Silica Sand
(Sump)
BY: R.D.B. DATE: 6/22/16
Neat
Fine Sand
1.0'
->:1-
1,4.:
4" Dia.
to'
,..,
- •
...
10.0'
:....•••
..--..
•-::
..i.,
r.-
.:. -
..1
•
'.
_ .
-..
'..-.:
,-,•„,.____...:.
--,
..„...
.
.
•
•...
,:•
: • .
.. •• •
. ..4
—
...
•.-
„e.
- :
Slotted
(Schedule
(Slot Size
20/30
Filter Pack
Well Point
DRAWN
CAD FILE NAME: A: \DETAILS
10"
\167870-4—INCH—WELL—DETAILDWG
SHEET TITLE
PREPARED BY
4" DIAMETER WELL DETAIL
mom
I
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING
SERVICES, INCORPORATED
PROJECT NAME
SHEET NO.
CLEARWATER EAST WRF
CLEARWATER FLORIDA
I
PLATE II
1
1
1
1
1
4" TEST WELL AUGER BORING LOG
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
1=1 11 Si
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
. " `' AUGER BORING LOG
PROJECT:
Clearwater East WRF
Clearwater, Florida
Project No.: DES 167870
CLIENT:
Kind Engineering Associates Inc.
WATER TABLE:
4.6'
DATE:
6/15/16
TECHNICIAN:
J.R.
DATE:
6/15/16
COMPLETION DEPTH:
13.0'
LOCATION:
See Plate I
TEST NUMBER:
4" WELL (Litholoay)
ELEV.
(FT)
DESCRIPTION
DEPTH
(FT)
(SYMBOL'
REMARKS
Brown Fine SAND (SP)
0
1Oq
•
•b�17b
r -a
Grayish -brown Fine SAND with gravel
(SP)
- 2
Brown Fine SAND (SP)
..
•
Grayish -brown Fine SAND (SP)
4
- 6 -\:.
- 8
- 10 •-':::
- 12 -
14 -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
METHOD OF TESTING
Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
AND
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D -1586)
In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a rotary drilling rig is used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth.
A viscous drilling fluid is circulated through the chill rods and bit to stabilize the borehole and•to assist in removal of
soil and rock cuttings up and out of the borehole.
Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split barrel sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes called,
is attached to an N -size dnil rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 140 pound hammer, attached to the
drill string at the ground surface, is then used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is successively
raised and dropped for a distance of30 inches usingarope and "cathead" assembly. Thenumber of blows is recorded
for each 6 inch interval ofpenetration or until virtual refusal is achieved. In the above manner, the samples are ideally
advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final ]2 inches of penetration is called the
blowcount, penetration resistance or "N" value-of the particular material at the sample depth.
- After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground surface where the core sample is removed, sealed
in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and storage. •
SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were visually classified as to texture, color and
consistency. The Unified Soil Classification was assigned to each soil stratum perASTMD 2487. Soil classifications
are presented descriptively and symbolically for ease of interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the
approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this transition may be gradual.
• Consistency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon
Standard Penetration resistance values of "N" values and industry- accepted standards. "N" values, or blowcounts,
are presented in both tabular and graphical form on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical
plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity in soil consistency
or linear variation between sample intervals.
The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective - boring locations and sample intervals only. Variations in
subsurface conditions may occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths shown represent water depths at the
dates and time shown only. The absence of water table information does not necessarily imply that groundwater was
not encountered.
Rev. 9/2011